"4r § '/- 4>r' % £/ i I §- ^> g £ S i g I ^\\E-UNIVER% I I i £ I £^jii§ ^^iig 5^-^/f g y 1 5 ^- -^* § I v^ ? t ^ I i £ 1 = =: ^ § <= tj \V\E UNIVER51//, i s ^OF-CAIIFO% ^4 ^-V^ g cxi ac i I S I i * svlOS-ANGElfjv, ^ S S4^ "•§ " %a3AINn3V\v < g g f SI ^> o ^ tt > vj ^ ^^ v"^ 1 I *_ g- ?= ZI I G c£ T O <—•> "- £' 3 1 I 1 1 s I I s rj, ^lOSANGEtfj^ o 5? x-v_^ ^ 5^*-.| 3> i 5 6 I s I 3 I s ^ i E < "" V ?3 '£> •YA s > ^OF-CAilF(%, ,^OFCAilFO% ^ ^^vl^- ^a ^^v^- «• S S •< 2 § i I I % i s 3 S \\\E -DNIVERS1///. I i J 3 O c^ ^ ^ S o ^C -x. Kt £ ^ ^lOSANGElfj:> o ^ — <£ ^ ^ ^ <-j § S I 1 ^ttOdllYHO^ ^WOJITVD-JO^ ^ I I 1 ^OF-CAllFOfi^ ^OFCAIIFO/?^ vvlOS-ANCElf,r THE ILLUSTRATED DICTIONARY OF GARDENING. VOL. II. /I >x*f T- 3&"*fy^ t', »>• 'A •+* * • Sv k -%^ THE ILLUSTRATED DICTIONARY OF GARDENING, A PRACTICAL AND SCIENTIFIC Encyclopaedia * of * Horticulture GARDENERS AND BOTANISTS. EDITED BY GEORGE NICHOLSON, A.L.S., Curator, Royal Botanic Gardens, Kew. ASSISTED BY PROFESSOR J. W. H. TEAIL, A.M., M.D., F.L.S., IN THE PARTS RELATING TO INSECTS, FUNGI, PLANT STRUCTURE, HORTICULTURAL CHEMISTRY, &c. ; AND J. GABRETT IN THE FRUIT, VEGETABLE, AND GENERAL GARDEN WORK PORTIONS. VOL. II.— F TO O. Xonfcon : L. UPCOTT GILL, 170, STRAND, W.C. LONDON : PRINTED B A. BRADLEY, 170 STRAND. SB PREFACE TO VOL. SHE SECOND VOLUME OF "THE ILLUSTRATED DICTIONARY OF GARDENING" has been compiled on the lines indicated in the Preface to Vol. I., and it is confidently expected that it will prove a welcome addition to the Garden Library. No pains have been spared to render the work a trust- worthy one; and, in many cases, plants popularly known under some "garden" name, are, for the first time in any horticultural publication, referred to their proper places botanically. This often proves anything but an easy task ; the uninitiated can scarcely form any idea of the time expended, and the labour involved, in tracing the origin, and determining the correct nomenclature, of a host of plants with which they may be perfectly familiar from a "garden" standpoint. For generic limitation, the "Genera Plantarum," of Bentham and Hooker, has been followed in the great majority of cases ; but several of the different sections of such huge genera as Prunua, $ewecio, &c., havo, for garden purposes and convenience of reference, been kept up. To most of my colleagues at Kew, and also to outside friends who have taken a kindly interest in this work, I am indebted for generous assistance. Special mention may be made of Messrs. JAMES VEITCH AND SONS, whose unpublished Monograph of the genus Odontoglossum was placed in my hands, the article Odontoglossum being, to a considerable extent, re-modelled in accordance with the views of Messrs. VEITCH ; the cultural directions for the genus just mentioned, as well as for Oncidium, &c., were written by Mr. W. WATSON. To Messrs. PETER BARE AND SON this work owes much of the information respecting Narcissus, a genus to the study of which Mr. BAKE has devoted many years. Mr. J. GARRETT is responsible, as in the First Volume, for the preparation of the articles relating to Fruit and Vegetable Culture, for most of what appertains to Florists' Flowers, and for General Gardening "Work. Professor J. W. H. TKAIL, M.D., F.L.S., &c., has supplied the articles in this volume on Fungi, Insects, Diseases of Plants, the Nectary, Orchid Fertilisation, Ovary, Ovule, &c. As Dr. TRAIL has made Plant Diseases a special study, and as the information he gives is more full and complete than any available in other gardening works, this feature of the DICTIONARY OP GARDENING will doubtless prove of both con- siderable interest and value. The Rev. P. W. MYLES, B.A., has taken much trouble in working out the correct derivations of the generic names, and a large number which are inaccurately given in most books, are, in this, corrected. GEORGE NICHOLSON. ROYAL GARDENS, KEW. REFERENCE TO ILLUSTRATIONS OF PLANTS OTHER THAN THOSE FIGURED IN THIS WORK. T has been suggested, by an eminent Authority, that many readers would be glad to be informed where reliable Illustrations could be found of those Plants which are not figured in this Work. To meet this want, references to the figures in Standard Authorities have been given, the titles of the Works referred to being, for economy of space, abbreviated as follows : Andrews (H. C.). Botanist's Repository. London, 1799-1811. 10 vols. 4to. Andrews (H. C.). Coloured Engravings of Heaths. London, 1802-30. 4 vols. 4to. Loudon (J. C.). Arboretum et fruticetum britan- nicum. . . . London, 1838. 8 vols. 8vo. Allioni (C.) Flora pedemontana. Aug. Taur., 1785. 3 vols. Fol. Aublet (J. B. C. F.). Histoire des plantes de la Guiane francaise. Londres, 1775. 4 vols. 4to. Andrews (H. C.). The Heathery. London, 1804-12. 4 vols. 4to. J Maund (B.). The Botanist. . . . London, 1839. 8 vols. 4to. J. F. F. . . Brandis (D.). Forest Flora of ... India. London, 1876, 8vo. Atlas, 4to. J. F. S. Beddome (R. H.). Flora sylvatica. Madras [1869-73]. 2 vols. 4to. J. H La Belgique Horticole. . . . Ghent, 1850, The best time for dividing Ferns, or for propagating by means of the creeping rhizomes, is just before growth commences, in February or early spring. It is best not to divide too severely, as small plants are much better obtained from spores if that plan be prac- ticable. Rhizomes should be pegged to a piece of peat, or on small pots of soil, and allowed to form roots before being detached. The insertion of the little bulbils in pots of soil, in a close frame, will soon increase the stock of those species which produce them. STOVE FERNS. An idea is often formed that tropical Ferns require a great heat at all times, with constant heavy shading in summer, and but little air at that season as well. This is altogether a mistake, as the result is invariably weak, elongated fronds, that are at once subject to all insect pests, and are rarely strong enough to stand any change to which it may be necessary THE DICTIONARY OF GARDENING. Ferns — continued. to subject them. Blinds on rollers, that admit of being let down and removed as desired, should be used. Although Ferns delight essentially in shade and moisture, both may be carried to an excess, especially in winter time, when all should be at rest. The growing and resting periods are as necessary with many Ferns as with flowering plants, although the ripening in autumn, as ordinarily understood, is not of so much importance. The general arrangement of stove Ferns greatly depends on the structure and space at command. Adiantums, Davallias, Gymnogrammes, and Platyceriums, may be cited as examples for situations where most light is obtainable, and only a thin shading applied in sunny weather ; while Acrostichums, and the stove species of Aspidium, Asplenium, Nephrodium, and Pteris, succeed in darker or more shady positions. The introduction of Tree Ferns produces a fine effect where there is sufficient height, but, if planted out, these soon require much more room than it is possible to obtain in the majority of stoves. By growing them in tubs, and plunging, a more suitable appearance is presented, the restriction of the roots having a corresponding effect on the rate of growth in the fronds. Any repotting should be performed before growth commences, as, if it is deferred till afterwards, many of the young fronds will become crippled. For stove Ferns, a growing season of eight months should be allowed, namely, from February till Sep- tember inclusive. The other four months should be the resting period, when a night temperature of SOdeg. to 55deg. will be sufficient, with a minimum rise by day of 5deg. more. A drier atmosphere must also be maintained, and less water applied to the roots, at the same time avoiding an extreme in the latter case. When growth commences, the minimum night and day temperatures may be gradually raised, until, in summer, the former will seldom go below GOdeg. or 65deg. Air should be carefully admitted, and plenty of water applied to the roots and amongst the pots, with a view to the production of fronds of moderate growth and good substance — conditions not to be insured by a close atmosphere and very high temperature. Light syringings may be occasionally applied to most stove Ferns in summer, but too much has a tendency to weaken many of the fronds. Adiantums, Gymnogrammes, and, generally speaking, species with powdery or very hairy fronds, should not be syringed at any time. The whole beauty of Ferns consists in the full development of the fronds ; and if these are to be kept in good condition afterwards, until the new ones of the following year appear, it is important that the plants be kept properly watered and subjected to treatment, in summer, calculated to produce a moderate amount of solidified growth, that, in the autumn, should be thoroughly ripened by the admission of sun and air to the structure in which the Ferns are grown. If, as before recommended, blinds on rollers are in use for summer shading, they will, of necessity, have to pass over the roof ventilators. This has an advantage both of breaking the force of the wind and preventing an undue evaporation of moisture from the inside. If found to fit too closely, blocks may easily be fixed to the rafters at the top, to keep the shading a little open. GREENHOUSE FERNS. A large number of Ferns, usually grown and treated as stove subjects, succeed equally well, but do not grow quite so fast, in a greenhouse temperature, and, wherever employed, either alone or in combination with flowering plants, are much appreciated. A more interesting structure than a cool Fernery attached to a conservatory, when well stocked and carefully arranged, can scarcely be imagined. The majority of Ferns succeed in comparatively small pots, and are consequently well suited for mixing with other occupants of the side stages. The stronger-growing ones are also well adapted for planting in permanent beds or amongst other plants, such as Camellias, &c., where not too much crowded, the partial shade and moisture suiting the Ferns admirably. Ferns — continued. Nearly all Adiantums do well under greenhouse treatment in summer, but must be removed to warmer quarters for the winter. Many Nephrodiums and species of Pteris, particularly P. longifolia, P. serrulata and its varieties, and P. tremula, do better planted out in a cool structure than anywhere else. Lomaria gibba, and other species, are among the most beautiful of cool decorative Ferns, and the same may be said of Asplenium bulbiferum, and others from Australia and New Zealand : Davallia canariensis, Nephrolepis exaltata, Onychium japonicum, Woodwardia radicans, Sfc. Todea barbara is well adapted for planting out in a position where considerable space can be allowed for its large fronds to develop ; it may also be grown in pots, any cool house, or even a sheltered position outside, with protection in frosty weather, suiting it. The genus Gleichenia contains many beautiful species that do not require much heat, excepting two or three from tropical countries. If grown in large pans, and tied out with neat stakes, beautiful specimens may be obtained under green- house treatment. These are propagated by layering the slender rhizomes, or by separating rather large pieces from established plants, and potting separately. The shade necessary for ordinary greenhouse flowering plants in summer will also be suitable for Ferns, plenty of moisture being at that season supplied at the roots and, with few exceptions, such as Adiantums, overhead. FERNS SUITABLE FOR BASKETS. Hanging baskets, either in the stove or greenhouse, are, at all times, an additional attraction, and the elegant and graceful habit of many Ferns constitutes them excellent subjects for use in that way. Baskets, made in different sizes, of stout galvanised wire, may be suspended from the roof, and, if carefully watered, the plants will succeed ex- tremely well in most cases. Many are seen to much better advantage, especially those with long and drooping fronds, than when grown in pots for stage decoration. Some of the fast-growing Selaginellas are most useful to plant with basket Ferns, for covering the soil or hanging down. Adiantums will, again, be found very attractive, par- ticularly A. caudatum, A. cuneatum, A. gracillimum, and A. Moorei, with Asplenium Belangeri, A. longissimum, and A. viviparum; Davallia dissecta and D. pallida ; Gymnogramme schizophylla ; Nephrolepis davallioides and N. exaltata, and many others that are of somewhat similar habit. Nearly all of these are amenable to cool-house treatment in summer. FILMY FERNS. These constitute a distinct class, re- quiring different treatment from any other members of the family. Very few do well in an open house, as suffi- cient atmospheric moisture cannot be obtained. On the whole, they do not require much heat, being often found to grow stronger and keep in better health when cultivated in close cases, in a cool Fernery, than when placed in similar cases in the stove. Filmy Ferns should never be watered overhead, but the stones and moss amongst which they are generally grown must be kept continually moist by having water poured on from the small spout of a can. This, when evaporating inside the inclosed case, becomes condensed on the extremely numerous divisions of the fronds as represented in the majority of species, and its continued presence there invariably indicates good health and the frequency with which it will be necessary to give water. Pieces of rough fibry peat and loam, with char- coal and sphagnum, are most suitable for Filmy Ferns. Nearly all that grow in soil succeed better when planted amongst stones, while those that form rhizomes should be placed on blocks of peat, dead pieces of Tree Fern, &c. They must always be shaded from sunshine; and not much light is required at any time. The difficulty generally experienced is in establishing the plants ; when once they begin to grow and increase, the treatment is, in most cases, simple enough. Hymenophyllum, Todea, and Trichomanee, arc three of the principal genera AN ENCYCLOPAEDIA OF HORTICULTURE. Perns— continued. among Filmy Ferns. Todea superba is a vigorous species, having large fronds of a filmy texture; and T. hymeno- phylloides is smaller-growing, but very desirable ; both being beautiful and more easily grown than the majority of the plants in this section. WARDIAN CASES. Ferns used for decorating Wardian cases must only include those of small or moderate growth, the space inside being very limited. The system admits of more moisture being kept round the plants than would be possible in an open room where the air is frequently dried either by burning gas or a fire. It is always important, in changing plants in these cases that become unhealthy, to substitute others from a cool house, as, if insufficiently hardened, the young fronds soon wither and die. Ample drainage must be provided, and, if plants in pots are used, the latter should be covered with growing sphagnum. Ferns in Wardian cases keep fresh and attractive for a long time if they receive proper attention. Cases somewhat similar in construction, may be used in cool houses for small col- lections of Filmy Ferns. FIG. 6. DEAD TREE FERN, DECORATED WITH FERNS. TREE FERNS. Considerable space and lofty houses are essential for growing and exhibiting Tree Ferns in their true characters. In Ferneries of limited size, where a few are cultivated, it is best to restrict their root growth in large pots or tubs, which also allows of their being re-arranged occasionally when overgrowing other smaller plants. In very large conservatories, a few permanent specimens planted out in well-drained borders, succeed, perhaps, better than in any other position, and always present a majestic appearance unexcelled by any other plants similarly employed. Alsophila australis and A. excelsa, Cyathea dealbata and C. medullaris (the latter is probably the tallest-growing of all our cultivated Ferns), with Dicksonia antarctica, are the best for culture in the greenhouse. All these may also be used in sub-tropical gardening outside in summer, in sheltered, Ferns — continued. shady places. There are many stove species of Tree Ferns, all of which are beautiful, and worthy of culti- vation in large heated structures. They all, especially Alsophilas, delight in plenty of atmospheric moisture and shade. The stems of imported Tree Ferns should, on their arrival, be covered with damp moss or canvas, and be kept moist by syringing until the new fronds appear. The time this takes varies according to the condition in which they arrive, and the season. When the head of fronds is established, the covering may be removed from the stem ; but frequent syringing in summer time is of the highest importance, as by far the greater portion of the stems of many is literally a mass of roots requiring a quantity of water. Tree Ferns, in bad health, may often be greatly improved by covering the stem from the base to the fronds with lin. of sphagnum, and tying it on with string. If kept moist, the roots soon fill the moss, and the stem is thus considerably enlarged. Tree Ferns that are dead on arrival may be utilised by covering with epiphytal or other small Ferns for stove or greenhouse decoration (see Fig. 6), the top being scooped out, and a free-growing variety with a pendent habit inserted and planted in soil ; others being fastened on the side with blocks of peat and some small wire. HARDY FERNS. These are all attractive, and the ma- jority succeed best when planted on rockwork in a shady situation, sheltered from high winds. A great diversity, both in size and habit, is represented by the British species and their innumerable varieties, apart from those intro- duced from North America, Japan, &c. Many suitable positions for hardy Ferns may be found in most gardens where their culture is not now attempted. They should have a good depth of soil, and plenty of water in summer. In the case of a collection, a pile of rockwork, built with rough stones, allows of a place being selected for all, according to their size and habit. A good clump of those which are plentiful should be planted together, and suffi- cient space allowed them to grow and develop, as in this way the different characters are much better shown than when only single plants are used. Attention in their arrangement should also be directed in placing the ever- green and deciduous species irregularly throughout the space covered, so that the whole may be, more or less, furnished at all seasons. In building a rockwork for hardy Ferns, the requirements of the plants must be the main object, large, well-drained pockets being insured in preference to the appearance of the stones, that are, in great part, hidden by the fronds. Loam and peat, with a quantity of crushed stone or brick, intermixed and used round the roots when planting, materially assist them to become established. The Eoyal Fern (Osmunda regalis) is one of the most handsome, and succeeds best when planted in a partial bog, or by the side of water. UNDERGROUND FERNERY. This is an interesting struc- ture, to be seen only in a few places, where the owners bestow special attention on Fern culture in its various aspects. It consists of a large cavity, dug in the middle of a hill, and covered with sheet glass, the hill itself being surrounded on the summit with trees. A flight of steps communicates with the interior, where Ferns are grown on the inside of the cavity in prepared soil, narrow paths or stepping stones being provided on which to walk amongst them. A fountain, or other arrangement for water, supplies the necessary moisture. The plants do not require artificial heat, as they are not much affected by fluctuations of temperature outside, and a subdued light is constantly admitted by the glass overhead. A view of an underground Fernery is shown in Fig. 7. SOIL, POTS, &c., FOR FERN CULTURE. Nearly all Ferns require a quantity of water in summer, and rarely need to be dry at the roots at any season, consequently a very important matter is that of efficient drainage. 8 THE DICTIONARY OF GARDENING, Ferns — continued. Anything like a sour or waterlogged soil is either detri- mental or fatal, even to those which are not quickly injured in other respects. Success in the cultivation of esta- blished plants depends more on this, with careful water- ing, temperature, atmospheric moisture, proper shade, &c., than on any soil in which they may be grown. Fio. 7. VIEW OF UNDERGROUND FERNERY. Adiantums, for instance, succeed well either in peat or loam alone, the texture of the fronds being firmer in the latter instance, and presenting apparently the only difference. A large proportion of peat was at one time considered necessary for all Ferns, but the superior qualities of leaf soil in their culture, where it can be obtained, have been more fully recognised of late, with considerable advantage to the plants. Soft sand- stone, mixed with the soil, tends to keep it porous, and suits some varieties better than others ; and charcoal may be used freely with all. The different habits will often suggest the mode of treatment required. It will not be far wrong to say that a compost of half loam, to which is added an equal quantity of leaf soil and peat combined, and sufficient charcoal, small pieces of crocks, or sharp sand, to keep the whole open, may be used successfully for all Tree Ferns and any established plants of Adiantum, Aspidium, Asplenium, many species of Davallia, Gymnogramme, Lomaria, Nephrodium, Pteris, and any others of similar habit. The species of Acro- stichum, Davallia, &c., that form slender rhizomes, must be attached to something on which they can grow. A good plan is to cultivate in pans, placing an inverted pot or a piece of Tree Fern stem in the middle, and then building a small mound on the top with lumps of peat, loam, and sphagnum, afterwards fixing the rhizomes to the surface with small pegs. Epiphytal Ferns, of which Platycerium is a well-known and distinct genus, often succeed admirably if fastened with a little moss and peat to a block of wood, and suspended in the stove. They Perns— continued . should be kept rather dry in winter. Similar composts, as advised above, if passed through a sieve, may be used for young plants. Ferns succeed in pots com- paratively small for the size of plants, if due attention is given to watering. Small pots have also an advantage in appearance ; and any deficiency in the quantity of food contained in the soil may be supplied with appli- cations of manure water during the growing season. Insects. Ferns, especially those under stove treatment, are liable to be attacked by several destructive insect pests. Thrips are their greatest enemies, causing irre- parable damage to the fronds. Frequent fumigating becomes a necessity; this must be done lightly and with the greatest care, on account of the tender growth. Any Aphides will also be destroyed by the smoke at the same time. Brown and White Scale are sometimes plentiful, and these must be removed by sponge or brush. The first-named is the one most common on Ferns, the other, fortunately, being more rarely found, as, when once established, it is very difficult to eradicate. Mealy Bug must be destroyed in a similar way to Scale, as an insecticide strong enough to kill either, will, to say the least, be dangerous to use, in consequence of causing injury to the fronds of delicate texture. In winter, when the plants are at rest, the whole should be examined and cleaned, as stronger measures may then be adopted, by fumigation or the use of an insecti- cide, than would be safe after growth commences. At all times, a watch must be kept for the first appearance of insects, as proper means for destruction then applied are always more effective in their results. FERONIA (mythological, after Feronia, a nymph who presided over the woods and groves, and was worshipped by the Romans as a goddess). OBD. Rutacece. A stove evergreen fruit-tree, allied to the Orange (Citrus). It thrives well in a mixture of rich loam and peat, with a little sand added. Increased, in spring or summer, by placing cuttings of ripe young shoots in sandy soil, under srlass, in bottom heat. FIG. 8. FLOWERING AN ENCYCLOPEDIA OF HORTICULTURE. Feronia — continued. F. elephantum. Elephant's Apple, ft. white, with reddish anthers ; panicle small, axillary, or terminal, ft. large, about the size of an apple, with a greyish rind; pulpy part edible. 1. impari-pinnate ; leaflets five to seven, obovate, sessile, crenu- lated, shining, h. 30ft. Coromandel, 1804. (B. F. S. 121.) FERRARIA (named after J. B. Ferrari, 1584-1653, an Italian botanist). OBD. Irideae. A genus of half-a- dozen species of interesting dwarf bulbous plants, with juriously spotted evanescent blossoms, from the Cape of Good Hope. This genus belongs to the section Morceece ; it has many-flowered spathes, the filaments united in a tube, and the petaloid stigmas fringed. In a warm, sunny situation, and if planted about 6in. deep, Ferrarias prove hardy. Increased by seeds and offsets. They rarely grow more than Gin. in height. F. antherosa (large-anthered). A synonym of F. Ferrariola. F. atrata (blackish), fl. dark reddish-purple, fringed with brownish-green. (L. B. C. 1356.) F. divaricata (divaricate), ft. brown. May to July. I. linear, acute, glaucescent. Stem branched at top. 1825. (S. B. F. G. 192.) F. Ferrariola (Ferrariola).* fl. greenish-brown. March to July. I. equitant, ensiform ; lower narrow. Stem simple. 1800. SYN. F. antherosa. (B. M. 751.) F. obtusifolia (obtuse-leaved), fl. brown. May to July. I. distichous, ensiform, obtuse, keeled on both sides. Stem erect, branched, many-flowered. 1825. (S. B. F. G. 148.) F. uncinata (hooked), fl. brown ; spathe two-flowered ; seg- ments of perianth involuted at apex. May to July. I. linear, striated, hooked at top. Stem branched, shorter than the leaves. 1825. (S. B. F. G. 161.) F. undulata (waved).* fl. greenish-brown. March and April. I. equitant, ensiform, wavy ; inner twice as narrow as the outer. Stem branched. 1755. See Fig. 8. (B. M. 144.) FERRUGINOUS. Iron-coloured, rusty. FERTILISATION BY INSECTS. It is only within comparatively recent years that the important part played by Insects in the Fertilisation of flowers, has been thoroughly realised. A goodly number of plants nil be found, upon examination, to bear flowers mani- festly adapted for Insect visitations; and observations will prove that in the cases where precautions are taken to prevent these, Fertilisation does not occur, although the flowers in question may be hermaphrodite. As a rule, flowers of gay colours, those possessing much scent or secreting nectar, are more or less dependent upon In- sect agency. Most dioecious plants, or even hermaphro. dito ones, in the Fertilisation of which the wind is a necessary auxiliary, present peculiarities of structure which do not obtain in those which are now called " entomo- philous ; " they do not secrete nectar, the pollen is too dry to adhere to Insects, and the corolla is either absent, or possesses neither the colour, scent, nor nectar which attract them. Amongst hermaphrodite flowers which are homogamous — that is to say, those in which the stamens and stigma ripen together — there are some which, experiment has proved, are sterile with their own pollen, but fertile enough if furnished with pollen from the flowers of other plants of the same species. The scarlet- flowered Linum grandiflorum is, according to the obser- vations of Darwin, a case in point. The same authority has shown conclusively enough, by a series of carefully conducted experiments, that, in the case of the common Primrose, more capsules and larger seeds are developed as the result of Cross-fertilisation than when Self-ferti- lisation obtains. Therefore, unless the aid of the cul- tivator be called into requisition, in some cases Insect visits are absolutely essential, and in others of consider- able value, to the species. FERULA (the old Latin name, perhaps from ferio, to strike ; stems used as rods). Giant Fennel. Including the genera Ferulago and Narthex, which are sunk under Ferula by the authors of the " Genera Plantarum." OKD. Unibelliferce. A genus of about forty species of splendid hardy herbaceous plants, natives of Southern Europe, Northern Africa, and Central and Western Asia. Umbels of many rays ; lateral ones usually opposite or verti- Vol. II. Ferula — continued. cillate. Leaves supra-decompound ; leaflets usually cleft into linear segments. Stems tall. Roots thick. They are of very simple cultivation in almost any ordinary garden soil; and form admirable plants for growing near water, on banks and herbaceous borders, where their deep green, elegant foliage is produced almost in midwinter. It is important to plant them in permanent situations. The two best species are, perhaps, communis and tingitana, but all the others below named are well worth growing. F. Assafcotida (Asafoetida). fl. greenish-yellow ; umbels stalked. July. I., radical ones lift, long, stalked ; cauline ones broadly sheathing ; both cut into oblong-lanceolate, obtuse segments, lin. to 2in. long. h. 7ft. Persia, 1855. F. asparaglfolia (Asparagus-leaved).* fl. yellow. I., radical ones (including the petiole) 1ft. to 2ft. long, broadly ovate in outline, quadripinnate, the divisions very narrow, linear, hairy; upper cauline leaves sheath-like ; involucral ones numerous, oblong- lanceolate, acute, rettexed. h. 4ft. to 5ft Asia Minor. FIG. 9. FERULA COMMUNIS. F. commnnls (common).* fl. yellow ; central umbel nearly sessile ; lateral ones male, pedunculate ; involucre wanting. June. I. green ; leaflets linear-setaceous, flaccid ; sheaths of upper leaves very large. A. 8ft. to 12ft. Mediterranean region, 1597. A very noble herbaceous plant. See Fig. 9. (S. F. G. 279, under name of F. nodiflora.) F. Ferulago (Ferulago). fl. yellow, in a large terminal umbel ; leaves of involucre numerous, oblong-lanceolate, reflexed. June. I., leaflets pinnatitid, divaricate ; segments linear, cuspidate. Stem terete, striated, h. 6ft. to 8ft. Spain. (J. F. A. 5, under name of F. nodiflora.) F. glauca (glaucous).* fl. yellow ; central umbel pedunculate ; lateral ones male, on longer peduncles ; involucre wanting. June. I. glaucous beneath ; leaflets linear, elongated, flat. Stem terete, branched, h. 6ft. to 8ft. South Europe, 1596. F. persica (Persian), fl. yellow; involucre and involucels wanting. L, leaflets rather remote or decurrently pinnate ; seg- ments linear-lanceolate, dilated and cut at the apex. Stem terete, glaucous, h. 3ft. to 6ft. Persia, 1782. (B. M. 2096.) F. Sumbul (Sumbul). A newly imported species, with graceful habit, elegant fern-like foliage, and stately pyramidal panicu- late inflorescences, h. 9ft. Turkestan, 1872. This species— re- markable for the fujtid, musky, and milky juice of its root— was introduced into Russia in 1835, as a substitute for musk, and a remedy for cholera ; thence the drug reached Germany and England, where it was admitted into the Pharmacopoeia in 1867. (B. M. 6196.) F. tingitana (Tangiers).* fl. yellow ; terminal umbels on short peduncles ; lateral umbels few, male, on longer peduncles; C 10 THE DICTIONARY OF GARDENING, Ferula — continued. FIG. 10. FERULA TINGITANA. involucre wanting. June. I. shining; leaflets or segments oblong-lanceolate, deeply toothed ; upper petiole large, sheath- ing. Stem terete, branched, h. 6ft. to 8ft. Northern Africa, 1680. See Fig. 10. FER/ULAOrO. Included under Ferula (which see). FESCUE GRASS. See Festuca. FESTUCA (the old Latin name, meaning originally a stem or straw). Fescue Grass. ORD. Graminece. A large genus, containing about eighty species, principally natives of Arctic, cold and temperate regions. Nine species are natives of Britain. They are chiefly agri- cultural grasses. Several are, however, very graceful, and deserving of cultivation. Panicles loose; spikelets oblong, more or less compressed. F • glauca and F . ni- grescens are particularly neat and compact in growth, and are well adapted for borders. They are of the easiest culture in common garden soil. Propagated by seeds, or by divisions. FEVERFEW. See Pyrethrum Fartlienium. FEVILLEA (named after Louis Feuillee, 1660-1732, a traveller and botanist). STN. Nhandiroba. ORD. Cucurbitacece. A genus containing five or six species of climbing shrubs, natives of tropical America. F. Moorei, perhaps the only one in cultivation, is a rampant evergreen stove climber, thriving in a sandy loam. Propagated by cuttings, made of the young wood, in summer, and inserted in sandy loam, under a bell glass, in heat. P. Moorei (Moore's), fl. (males only known) pale brick red; pedicel slender, jointed in the middle ; corolla lobes orbicular, or Fevillea— continued. d apex ; mar , in. long, shi acuminate rounded at the base. Guiana (V). A slender, quite glabrous climber. (B. M. 6366.) FIBB.ILI.OSE. Covered with little strings or broader towards the rounded apex ; margins undulate. 1. alter- nate, membranous, Sin. to Bin. long, shining broadly ovate, long FIBROUS. Composed of fibres. FICARIA. This genus is now included under Ranunculus (which see). FICOIDEJE. A large natural order, containing about 450 species, principally distributed throughout tropical and sub-tropical regions. They are small shrubs, under- shrubs, or herbs. Flowers terminal or axillary, solitary, or in cymes, often very beautiful, sometimes minute and inconspicuous. Leaves opposite or alternate, undivided, usually fleshy or thickened, flat, terete, or triangular. None of the genera are of much importance from an economic point of view ; some of the species of Tetra- gonia are used as pot-herbs. The genus just named, and Mesembryanthemum, are the best known; indeed, the natural order is called Mesembryanthemece in some works. FIG. 11. Ficrs Cooi'KRi (page 12). AN ENCYCLOPEDIA OF HORTICULTURE. 11 FICUS (the old Latin name, akin to the Greek sfukon or sukon, a fig ; the Fig-tree has nearly the same name in all the European languages). Fig-tree. ORD. Urticacea. An extensive genus of usually stove or greenhouse trees or shrubs. Flowers monoecious, inserted upon the interior surface of a hollow, globular or pear-shaped fleshy recep- tacle, in whose tip is an orifice closed with small scales ; those in the upper part male, the rest female. Very ornamental plants, of easy culture. They are readily propagated by cuttings or eyes, having a leaf attached in the case of the evergreen species, inserted in a close frame inside a propagating house, in early spring. Ficus — continued. small pot. It succeeds well in a greenhouse, and also outside in summer. Any of the species of Ficus do well in sandy loam, with the addition of a little leaf soil, and only small pots, in comparison to the size of plant, need be used. Plenty of syringing, or occasional sponging, will keep the leaves clean, and almost any amount of water may be applied to the roots. The species , which grow on walls are the best of inside plants that could be used for the purpose, as, once started, they soon cover a con- siderable space and always present a lively green appear- ance. For culture of F . Carica, see Tig. Fio. 12. TERMINAL SHOOT OF Ficus EXSCULPTA. F . elastica is one of the most ornamental and extensively- grown species, and a plant that withstands confinement in rooms better, perhaps, than any other. It is also well adapted for stove or greenhouse decoration, and for sub-tropical gardening in summer outside. Shoots 1ft. long, if furnished with leaves, soon root, and form useful plants much quicker than eyes, which, however, have the advantage of increasing a much larger quantity. Small specimens are most attractive when restricted to a single stem. These may be afterwards grown into tall branched plants if desired, by keeping them several years and pinch- ing out the points. F. Chauvieri is a fine species that forms a large bush, even when grown in a comparatively F. acuminata (sharp-pointed). A, perianth three-cleft or three- partite, with the segments lanceolate and acuminated. Recep- tacle solitary, axillary, globose, pendent, of a deep bright orange colour, somewhat mealy and tuberculated on the surface, and terminating a stalk longer than itself. I. 4m or 5 n. ^long, somewhat coriaceous, elliptical, petiolated, veiny, glabrous above, and full green, downy beneath, with the veins , prominent Stem (under cultivation in this country) 5ft. to 6ft. high. Silhet, 1855. (B. M. 5282.) F barbata (bearded).* I. dark green, cordate, about 3in. long; ape^ Sated ; edges clothed with long brown hairs. East Indies 1832. A handsome plant for covering the walls of stoves ; it has a creeping and rooting habit, similar to Ivy. F benlamina. Benjamin-tree. Receptacles solitary, or in pairs, globular, about Ain. in diameter when ripe. l._ ovate, or ovate- oblong, acuminate, shortly stalked, 2in. to 4m. long, entire, 12 THE DICTIONARY OF GARDENING, Ficus — continued. thinly coriaceous, with numerous rather fine, parallel, primary veins. Tropical Asia, Australia. A large elegant greenhouse tree, with slender pendulous branches, quite glabrous. F. Brassii (Brass's).* I. somewhat fiddle-shaped, rich deep green. Stems and petioles ferruginously tomentose. Sierra Leone. A free, erect-growing species, equally suited for stove, greenhouse, or sub-tropical purposes. F. Carica (Carian).* Common Fig-tree. I. simple, alternate, stipulate, palmate and sub-trilobate, rough above, pubescent beneath, h. 15ft. to 30ft. Mediterranean region, &c., 1548. For culture, &c., see Fig. F. Chauvieri (Chauvier's).* I. oval-obtuse, very dark shining green, with pale yellow veins, having one or more large marginal undulations. This is described as being a noble species, with a faultless habit, and, next to F. elastica, is the best for outside culture in summer. F. comosa (tufted). Female florets pedicellate, growing amongst long, narrow, acuminate, chaffy, white scales ; male florets tritid, the divisions more acute than in the female. Receptacles obovate-globose, small, the size of large peas, produced singly or more often in pairs, from the axils of the petioles on the terminal branchlets. I. very smooth and shining, dark green above, pale beneath, coriaceous and thickish, entire, with a sharp, thin, pellucid edge. Trunk rather slender, about 1ft. in diameter, soon dividing into numerous spreading, or even declining branches. Branches slender, bearing conglomerate masses of leaves towards their ends. h. 40ft. India. A very handsome greenhouse tree. (B. M. 3305.) F. Cooperi (Cooper's).* I. dark green, ovate, 1ft. or more long, Sin. to 4in. wide. Probably Australia. A good ornamental- leaved plant for either stove or greenhouse decoration. See Fig. 11, page 10. F. dealbata (whitened).* 1. elliptic, about 1ft. long by 6in. broad, coriaceous, deep green above, and, from the presence ilky hairs beneath, the under side is of of a thick coat of sno cuous in the you mvy whiteness, which is particularly conspi folding leaves. Peru, 1867. A very disl enhouse species. (I. H. 1870, 4.) iversifolia (opposite-leaved).* I. leathery, rounded above, rowed into the snort stalk below, upper surface bright green, . . . - 9in. broad, bright shining green, and principal veins. India, 1869. ng . , . istinct and beautiful greenhouse species. (I. H. 1870, 4.) F. dii narrow dotted with light brown specks; lower" pale green. A compact grower, well adapted for general decorative purposes. Green- house. (G. C. 1881, xvi. 247.) F. cburnea (ivory).* /. oblong-ovate, petiolate, about 15in. long, , with stout ivory-white midribs A tine free-growing greenhouse species. F. elastica (elastic).* Indiarubber Plant. I. coriaceous, 6in. to 18in. long, and 3in. to 6in. broad ; upper surface dark bright shining green, yellowish-green below. East Indies, 1815. This splendid plant is very largely grown, both for indoor decoration and for sub-tropical gardening. (G. C. 1874, ii. 358.) F. e. foliis aureo-marginatis (gold-margined-leaved). A very effective variety with golden-edgea leaves, especially in autumn, when it has become full-coloured. The yellow band is about lin. broad, contrasting beautifully with the dark shining green of the centre. Greenhouse. There are also other variegated forms of less value. F. cxsculpta (cut-out).* I. shortly stalked, lanceolate in outline, sinuatelylobed ; lobes again sinuate so as to produce a prettily cut margin. South Sea Islands, 1879. A very handsome stove evergreen, the curious crenations giving the leaf the appear- ance of having been stamped or punched out. See Fig. 12, for which we are indebted to Mr. Wm. Bull. F. glomerata (glomerate). I. thin, elliptic, acuminate, 6in. to Sin. long, 2in. broad, on long petioles. Stems terete, finely pubescent. Australia, 1869. A free-growing greenhouse species, of slender habit. SYN. F. vesca. F. macrophylla (large-leaved).* Australian Banyan ; Moreton Bay Fig. I. thin, coriaceous, glossy, ovate-oblong, entire, cordate at theT>ase, 4in. to lOin. long, Sin. to 4in. broad ; veins slightly elevated on both surfaces ; petioles smooth, lin. to 2in. long. Queensland and New South Wales, 1869. Greenhouse. F. minima (smaller). See F. stipulate. F. Parcelli (Parcell's).* I. oblong-acuminate, serrated, bright green, irregularly blotched with dark green and ivory-white. Polynesia, 1874. A very ornamental variegated stove plant. (F. d. S. 2273-4.) F. religiosa (religious). Peepul. I. bright green, nearly cor- date; apex elongated into a tail-like process, h. 25ft. East Indies, 1731. A handsome stove plant for decorative purposes forming itself into a compact bush. (B. F. S. 314.) F. repens (creeping). A synonym of F. stipulata. F. Roxburgh!! (Roxburgh's), /.green, fr. collected in bundles of eight to twelve near root, turnip-shaped, ribbed, villous, having umbilicus closed by numerous cordate imbricate scale*. I. large, smooth, roundish-cordate, three-nerved, downy on the nerves beneath, sometimes repandly toothed, h. 20ft. Silhet, 1840. Greenhouse. See Fig. 13. (R. H. 1872, 385.) F. rubiginosa (rusty -leaved). 3., perianth three-parted ; seg- Ficus — continued. FIG. 13. FRUIT AND LEAF OF Ficus ROXBURGHII. ments roundish-oval, concave. Receptacle greenish-brown, globose, with an obtuse umbo at the point, the surface granulated with small tubercles. I. numerous, handsome, Sin. to 4in. long, , coriaceous, elliptical, quite entire, on petioles about lin. long, obtuse at the point and at the base ; when young, especially on the under side, with a ferruginous down ; the older covered, base ; when , ferruginous ones are glabrous except on the nerves beneath. Branches spread- ing, numerous. New South Wales, 1827. A small stove tree. (B. M. 2939.) F. scandens (climbing). A synonym of F. stipulata. F. Stipulata (stipulate).* I. small, roundish, dark green. A very handsome little climber, attaching itself to walls, &c., like Ivy. It is half-hardy, and is frequently seen in greenhouses. China and Japan, 1721. SVNS. F. repens and F. scandens. (B. M. 6657.) F. minima, and other small-leaved forms, are only slender- twigged, extensively creeping states of barren young plants of /•'. stipulata. F. Suringarii (Suringar's). I. large, cordate, serrate ; upper sur- face rich dark green ; main ribs deep red. Amboyna, 1866. An ornamental erect-growing stove species. F. vesca (weak). A synonym of F. glomerata. FIDDLE-SHAPED. Obovate, with one or two deep recesses on each side. FIDDLE WOOD. See Citharexylum. FIELDIA (named in honour of Baron Field, F.L.S., once Judge of the Supreme Court of New South Wales). ORD. Gesneraceoe. An ornamental climbing1, radicant, green- house evergreen shrub, thriving well in a compost of peat and loam, to which a little sand and small pieces of char- coal have been added. Increased by cuttings of firm side shoots, left intact, and planted in sandy soil, under a glass. F. australis (Southern), fl. white, pendulous ; corolla tubular, ventricose; peduncles axillary, solitary, one-flowered. July. I. simple, opposite, remote, elliptic, coarsely serrated, acute at both ends. New South Wales, 1826. (B.M. 5089.) AN ENCYCLOPEDIA OF HORTICULTURE. 13 PIG (Ficus Carica). The Fig, as a fruit-producing tree, has been cultivated from remote antiquity. To say nothing of America and the countries of the Southern hemisphere, the cultivation of the Fig must be very ancient, and is now general from the islands of the North Atlantic eastward, through the warm temperate and sub-tropical regions eastward to China, where, on the authority of Dr. Bretschneider, it was carried on, at all events, as early as the latter part of the four- teenth century. According to various authorities, it is a native of the Mediterranean region, Syria, Eastern Persia, to Afghanistan. It has become naturalised in South-west France, &c. The exact date of its introduc- tion into Britain remains in obscurity ; and, like the Vine, in all probability, it disappeared from Britain for a time. According to Pliny, it was largely cultivated by the Eomans, who were possessed of a number of different sorts prior to the Christian era. The re-introduction of the Fig is said to have taken place in 1525, when Car- dinal Pole brought several trees from Italy, and planted them in the gardens of the Archbishop's Palace at Lam- beth. Another celebrated tree was introduced from Aleppo, in 1648, by Dr. Pocock, the eminent traveller, FIG. 14. FRUITING BRANCH OF FIG. and placed in the garden of the Regius Professor of Hebrew, at Christ Church, Oxford. In 1809, it was con- siderably damaged by a fire, and the large trunk decayed and was removed. A number of fresh branches, however, sprang from the root, and, in 1819, those in the centre of the tree were 21ft. high. It is remarkable that a tree with wood of such a soft nature should live to the age of even several centuries in climates suitable to its growth. In Britain, when unprotected, the Fig is sometimes killed to the ground by very severe frosts, but becomes re-esta- blished by the production of suckers from the roots; at other times, the points of the shoots are destroyed by frost less severe. The fresh fruit does not find general favour in this country, partly because successful culture involves the necessity of heated glass structures in most districts, and the very limited time it remains in good condition when ripe. The skin is also extremely tender, and thus the fruits are among the worst for packing to travel any distance. In Sussex and other mild districts along the South Coast, the tree will grow as a standard, but it will not succeed as such further inland. The gene- rally necessary situation is a wall with a south or south- west aspect ; but in places where the summers are hot, and very sharp frosts of rare occurrence, Fig-trees may be grown as espaliers, being easily protected in winter Tig — continued. as much as would be required. The Fig possesses the extraordinary property of producing two, and, in some climates, under most favourable conditions, three crops in a year. The fruit supply being thus extended over such a lengthened period, becomes to the people of the East, where the trees are much grown, an important source of food, both in a fresh and in a dried state. The annual importation to this country alone of some hundreds of tons of dried Figs, is an indication of the quantity cultivated, and the crops secured. The same article also forms one of considerable commerce in Italy, Spain, Provence, and in some parts of France. As it is not generally understood, it may be interest- ing to state here that the flowers of the Fig are unisexual, and produced in large quantities inside a fleshy receptacle that is closely united and almost closed at the summit. The female flowers are most numerous, and situated on the bottom and greater part of the inside of the receptacle. On these becoming fertilised — a condition not absolutely essential with all for the ripening of the fruit — each becomes a seed, which is surrounded with pulp, and these, with the receptacle, form the fruit as shown in Fig. 14. An idea of the enormous quantity of seeds contained in a fruit may be obtained by examining an imported dried specimen. PROPAGATION. This is easily effected in various ways — by seed, cuttings, layers, and suckers, also by grafting. Seed. Propagation by this method is not much practised, but is sometimes adopted with a view to raising, from the sorts which succeed best in this country, other new and, perhaps, hardier varieties than those introduced from warmer climates. The seed, if required, should be carefully cleaned from the pulp of some of the finest and ripest fruits, and kept till Jan- uary, when it should be sown in heat, and the young plants afterwards grown on as rapidly as possible, as on this mainly depends the time taken in obtaining the first fruit. Cuttings, fyc. The best cuttings are short- jointed growths of the previous year, from Gin. to 9in. in length ; if with a heel, so much the better. They may be inserted in pots, and placed in bottom heat, in early spring Some prefer selecting them in autumn, and laying the enda in the ground all winter, providing protection for the part exposed. Whether treated in this way or taken directly from the plants and inserted, they generally root freely, and, if grown on in heat, soon form good plants. Propagation by layers is a quick method of obtaining fruiting plants in a limited time, as good-sized branches with fruiting wood may be successfully rooted in one season, and may then be de- tached from the parent. Suckers are freely produced where allowed, and may also be grown into plants ; but, on account of the wood in these being invariably very soft, they are inferior to those grown either from cuttings or layers. Grafting is practicable if desired, the scions being cut in autumn, laid in the ground all winter, and inserted, soon after the stock commences its growth, in spring. Figs being so easily increased by the other means above named, this method is but little adopted. CULTIVATION. The Fig will grow in almost any soil; but if too rich, the chances are that a great pro- duction of wood and not much fruit will be the result. The best crops outside are usually secured from trees planted in a border composed of loam and brick rubbish, by the side of a hard walk, into which the roots can scarcely penetrate. If this is not practicable, they must be occasionally restricted by root-pruning, or by some other means, such as a narrow wall division under- 14 THE DICTIONARY OF GARDENING, Tig — continued. ground. Good drainage is essential, and chalk is one of the best things to use where it can be procured. An open warm position should be selected, as this, and root restriction, are important points towards encouraging the production of short- jointed, fruit-bearing wood. The climate of this country will not admit of more than one crop being ripened each year outside, and this is by no means a certain one in the majority of instances. During severe weather, the stem and branches require pro- tection. This is afforded in various ways, some unnail- ing and collecting the latter in bundles, and covering with a thick coat of straw or mats. Spruce branches, fern, thatched hurdles, and canvas, may all be made to answer the same purpose. Neither is necessary, as a rule, along the South Coast, and should not be applied in other places, unless in severe weather, and then they should be removed gradually in spring. Mode of Bearing, Pruning, Sfc. The fruits are pro- duced, one or two together, in the axils of the leaves. They are formed along the branch, as growth proceeds, and, with but few exceptions, come to maturity, if at all, on new or recently ripened wood. It will thus be understood that the points of the shoots must, as much as possible, be protected from frost, and preserved when pruning. Growth seldom begins outside before May ; the embryo Figs on the wood of the previous year, and new shoots for the next year, starting almost simul- taneously. Fruits will also be formed along the latter, and these constitute the second crop, that ripens in some parts of the South of Europe, but in this country the summers are too short. Any fruits that are sufficiently advanced in early autumn to show the shape of the Fig, are of no use; and if these are carefully pinched off, other later ones may be formed by the side, that remain dormant with those produced nearer the points, as before explained, until the tree starts the following year. Pruning is not much required, except to keep the branches thinned ; and a good deal of this, also pinching of the strongest shoots, should be seen to in summer, so as to leave only those required for fruiting. Too much pruning frequently results in the increase of soft, unproductive wood, especially if the roots are in anything like rich soil. New shoots should be en- couraged from parts near the stem, where they are required to replace any that become bare or exceed their limits. Either the horizontal or the fan system of training is that usually adopted as being best suited for trees having to be grown on walls, or as espaliers. Suckers proceed in large quantities from the roots of permanent trees ; these are sometimes trained about 15in. apart, and in course of time allowed to fruit. This plan is not to be recommended, as better wood may be obtained from healthy branches. Forcing. The Fig will bear, and at all times requires, a higher temperature to start it into growth than any other fruit-trees usually forced. In gardens where a house is not specially devoted to their culture, some plants may be successfully fruited in pots, and frequently good crops are thus obtained. The supply may also be continued for a much longer period from these, by introducing a few at a time for forcing, and securing a crop from the wood of the previous year. A lean-to house admits of trees being grown both on a trellis in front, and on the back wall, the front trees being stopped so as to admit sun and light to those at the back. The roots of strong-growing varieties should be restricted by being pruned or inclosed with a narrow wall, as recommended for outside culture. The border is best made of loamy soil with a little crushed bone and mortar or charred rubbish added, this soil being also better suited for pot culture than one with more manure. When any repotting is required, it should be done when the plants are at rest ; and if already in large pots, the soil and roots may bo reduced, and the plants Fig — continued. returned to a similar size. A night temperature of SOdeg., and a rise by day, in mild weather, to 60deg. or 65deg., with plenty of moisture, will not be too high for starting ; and as soon as the leaves are growing, and the days get longer, these figures may gradually be raised lOdeg. higher. Large quantities of water are necessary in summer, and it should not be applied at a lower temperature than that of the soil in which the roots are growing. Plenty of syringing with warm water should also be practised until the fruit commences ripening, when a drier atmosphere tends to heighten the flavour. Under glass, the Fig ripens two crops if the trees are started early, the first being on the wood of the previous season, and the second on that of the current year. The new shoots should be pinched when about 9in. long, to arrest the progress of the sap, and encourage the formation and production of fruit from the axils of the young leaves. Disbudding may be practised with great advantage, as a large number of shoots are formed that cannot be allowed sufficient space to develop. Figs forced in pots should be plunged, if possible, in tan or in a bed of fermenting material, with a bottom-heat temperature of about 65deg. Liquid manure, when the fruits are swelling, may be applied to these twice or thrice a week, unless the plants are growing too strongly without. As the fruit and leaves ripen, more air should be given and water gradually withheld. When the leaves are all dropped from trees, either planted out or in pots, they must be kept quite cool, and the soil only a little moist by occasional waterings, until required to start for the next season. Sorts. Varieties cultivated in countries where Figs are grown in quantities outside, are very numerous, but com- paratively few of them have been introduced to onr gardens. The following selection includes most of the best, and is, practically, large enough for all purposes. NEGRO LARGO and OSBORN'S PROLIFIC are good varieties for culture in large pots. The former must be rather severely restricted in space, if planted out, on account of its vigorous growth. BROWN TURKEY is, perhaps, the best of all for forcing, as it seldom fails to fruit abundantly under proper cultivation, and does not grow too strongly, even when the roots are not in a limited space ; it is also one of the best for outside culture where Figs succeed. BRUNSWICK and WHITE MAR- SEILLES are two of the hardiest varieties in cultivation. Agen. Fruit of medium size, roundish, with flattened crown ; skin green, covered with blue bloom ; flesh dark red, thick and syrupy. Ripens late. FIG. 15. FIGS, BLACK BOURJASSOTTE. Black Bourjassotte. Fruit medium, with short stalk ; skin black, covered with a thick bloom ; flesh deep red, thick and delicious. See Fig. 15. Black Genoa. Fruit oblong, large ; skin dark purple, with thick bloom ; flesh yellow, sweet and juicy. A hardy sort, said to be much grown in Provence. Black Ischia, or Early Forcing. Fruit medium, roundish- obovate ; skin nearly black when ripe ; flesh deep red, richly flavoured. Early and prolific. Brown Turkey. Fruit large, short, pear-shaped, with a thick stalk ; skin brown, with sometimes a purplish tinge ; flesh tinged red in the middle, rich and sugary. One of the best sorts grown either for forcing or outside culture. It has numerous synonyms, including Blue Burgundy, Brown Naples, Common Purple, Italian, Large Blue, Lee's Perpetual, Purple, &c. Brunswick. Fruit pear-shaped, very large, with short thick stalk ; skin greenish-yellow, tinged with brown ; flesh reddish near the middle, yellowish outside, rich and sweet. A distinct variety, AN ENCYCLOPAEDIA OF HORTICULTURE. 15 Fig1 — continued. hardier than most others, and not suitable for forcing. It has large deeply-divided leaves. Castle Kennedy. Fruit very large ; skin greenish-yellow ; flesh whitish, stained with red near the eye. Early and very prolific, suitable for walls. Col dl Slgnora Bianca. Fruit medium, pear-shaped, with a long neck ; skin thick, yellowish-white when ripe ; flesh dark blood-red, syrupy and delicious. This is considered one of the finest Figs in cultivation. Early Violet. Fruit small, roundish ; skin brownish-red, with blue bloom ; flesh red, and of good flavour. A small-fruited but hardy and very prolific variety. Grizzly Bourjassottc. Fruit round, much flattened, with a short neck ; skin reddish-brown, with a thin bloom ; flesh blood- red, thick, and highly flavoured. Grosse Monstrcuse de Lipari. Fruit very large and broad, flattened at the apex ; skin chestnut-brown, covered with a thick bloom ; flesh red, thick and juicy. A large handsome Fig, that grows and bears freely. Negro Largo. Fruit pear-shaped, ribbed, very large and long ; skin black ; flesh pale red, tender, juicy, and richly flavoured. A variety of good habit when restricted at the root ; one of the best for pot culture. Osborn's Prolific. Fruit roundish, turbinate, with a very long neck ; skin dark mahogany, shading off to pale brown towards the neck, which is green ; surface of fruit thickly dotted with greyish spots ; flesh milky-white, of exquisite flavour. An ex- cellent Fig, introduced by Messrs. Osborn, of Fulham, in 1879. It is an abundant bearer, and well adapted for culture in pots. (Dr. Hogg's " Fruit Manual.") See Fig. 16. Panachee. Fruit roundish, with a short neck; skin yellow, beautifully striped witli bright green ; flesh pale red inside, thick and syrupy. A handsome distinct fruit. White Ischia. Fruit small; skin greenish-yellow, thin and delicate ; flesh dark red, juicy, sweet and rich. Small-growing and a great bearer, well adapted for pot culture. White Marseilles. Fruit large, almost round, and slightly ribbed, with a short thick neck ; skin thin, pale green, nearly white when ripe; flesh almost transparent, sweet, and rich. One of the hardiest varieties, and also suitable for forcing. It has several synonyms, including Figue Blanche, Ford's Seedling, White Genoa, White Naples, &c. FIG MARIGOLD. See Mesembryanthemum. FIG-TREE. See Picus. PIGWORT. See Scropliularia. PILAMENTOSE. Thready. FILBERT. Among cultivated nuts, Filberts are usually distinguished by the extension of the husk beyond the point of the nut inclosed (see Fig. 17). In Filbert — continued. early spring, the male or pollen-bearing catkins (see Fig. 18, a) appear considerably in advance of the female FIG. 17. FRUITING BRANCHLET OF FILBERT, the Husk being the much-enlarged Bract and Bracteole. FIG. 18. LEAFLESS TWIG OF FILBERT, showing (a) Pendulous Male Catkins and (6) the Sessile Female Flowers. flowers (see Fig. 18, 6). The preservation of the former, greater or less in quantity, is essential for securing fer- tilisation. For culture and list of varieties, see Corylus. FILICES. One of the most important orders of acotyledons or cryptogams. Perennial (very rarely annual) herbs, sometimes shrubby or arborescent, with fibrous roots or creeping rootstocks. Leaves (fronds) tufted or alternate on the rootstock, simple, pinnatind, 16 THE DICTIONARY OF GARDENING, Pilices— continued. or one to four-pinnate, usually circinate in vernation ; petiole (stipes) sometimes jointed at the base and rachis, grooved on the upper surface. Fructification of micro- scopic spores, contained in usually minute capsules that are collected in masses (sori) on the under surface or edge of the frond, or rarely on separate fronds or parts of the frond, and are naked, or covered with an invo- lucre formed of or upon the margin or back of the frond. Capsules membranous, sessile or stalked, often mixed with jointed club-shaped hairs (imperfect capsules). Spores usually obtusely tetrahedral. There are about seventy- five genera and about 2,500 species. The following genera contain the largest number of species: Acrostichum, Adiantum, Aspidium, Asplenium, Nephrodium, Poly po- dium, and Pteris. FILIFORM. Slender ; resembling a thread in form. FILMY FERNS. See Ferns. FIMBRIARIA. This genus is now included under Schwanuia (which see). FIMBRIATE. Fringed. FIR. A general name for the conifers belonging to the genera Abies, Larix, Picea, Pinus, &c. riSTULAR, FISTULOUS. Hollow, like a pipe. FITTONIA (named in honour of E. and S. M. Fitton, authors of "Conversations on Botany"). ORD. Acanthacece. A genus containing only a couple of species of stove evergreen trailing perennials, with very brilliantly marked leaves ; both natives of Peru. They are of easy culture, and thrive well in a compost of peat, loam, and silver sand ; liberal supplies of water and a shady situation are necessary elements to successful cultivation. Increased by cuttings of half-ripened shoots, planted in sandy loam, in bottom heat; also by divisions of the plant. As ornaments for a Wardian case, Fittonias are unequalled; and when grown as pyramids, they form beautiful objects in the stove. For planting upon the surface of the pots or tubs in which palms or other large specimens are grow- ing, they are very useful, and also for forming narrow borders as edges to the walks in heated structures. F. gigantea (gigantic).* fl. pale red, in a terminal four-sided spike, with large bracts. I. broadly ovate, sub-cordate, veined with carmine-red, h. lift. Habit branching, erect, sub-shrubby. 1869. See Fig. 19. (B. G. 629.) F. rubronervum (red-nerved). A synonym of F. Verscha/ettii. F. rubrovcnosum (red-veined). A synonym of F. Verschafeltii. F. Verschaffeltii (Verschaffelt's).* 1. larger than those of F. gigantea, dark green ; midrib and veins deep red. An elegant FIG. 19. FlTTOMA GIGANTEA. FISCHERIA (named after Dr. Fischer, of St. Petersburgh). ORD. Asclepiadeee. A genus comprising about twelve species of stove twining shrubs or sub- ehrubs, natives of tropical and sub-tropical America. Flowers white or dull red ; cymes umbelliform or shortly racemose. Leaves opposite. In all probability, the two species described below are the only ones yet in cultivation. They thrive in a peat and loam compost. Propagated by cuttings, inserted in light open soil, in heat. This genus is often confused with Gonolobus. F. hispida (hairy), fl. brown, umbellate ; corolla coriaceous, tubercled inside at base. July. I. cordate-ovate, acute. Stem, petioles, and nerves of leaves hispid, h. 4ft. Brazil, 1837. (B. M. 3786, under name of Gonolobus hispidus.) F. Martianus (Martius's). /. white, green ; umbels many- flowered, on long peduncles ; lobes of corona fleshy and rounded. May and June. I. oblong - cordate, h. 30ft. Brazil, 1845. (B. M. 4472, under name of Gonolobus Martianus.) FISH-BONE THISTLE. bOU(B. See Chamzepeuce Casa- species. SYNS. F. rubronervum, F. mbroyenosum. (I. H. 372, under name of Gymnostachium Verschafclti.) F. V. argyroneura (silvery-veined).* I. broad, flat, oval, about 4in. long, and nearly 3in. wide, vivid green, traversed by a net- work of pure white veins. Habit dwarf and compact. 1867. F. V. Pearcei (Pearce's).* I. about 3in. or 4in. long, 2in. or 3in. broad, light bright green; midrib and veins 1'ght bright carmine; under surface somewhat glaucous. FITZROYA (named after Capt. R. Fitzroy, B.N., commander of a surveying expedition ; died 1855). ORD. Coniferce. A genus containing a couple of species of dwarf evergreen trees, with imbricated scale-like leaves; one (from Patagonia) is sufficiently hardy to withstand our winters in exceptionally favoured spots. They do well in almost any garden soil, and are readily propa- gated by means of seeds, or by cuttings of half-ripened branchlets. F. Archeri makes an interesting and hand- some cool conservatory plant. F. Archeri (Archer's), fl. dioacious, the amenta terminal, male cones erect, one to two lines long, scarcely thicker than the branchlets with their leaves, young female coney purplish in the AN ENCYCLOPAEDIA OF HORTICULTURE. 17 Fitzroya — continued. dried state, about one line long and broad. I. closely imbricate, but strictly opposite and decussate, very obtuse, thick, and keeled. Tasmania. An erect, densely branched shrub. SYN. Diselma Archeri. F. patagonica (Patagonian). of nine scales in three whorls, the upper are barren. I. small, ovate-oblong, flat, obtuse, sessile, two to A. monoecious, small, consisting scales in three whorls, the upper and lower of which four-rowed. Branches slender, spreading, incurved at the ex- tremities. Tree. Patagonia. (B. M. 4616.) PLABELLIFORM. Plaited like a fan. FLACCID. Feeble, weak. FLACOURTIA (named after Etienne de Flacourt, 1607-1661, a Director of the French East India Company). OBD. Bixinece. A genus comprising about a dozen species of fruit-bearing, often thorny, stove trees or shrubs, from the warmer regions of Asia and Africa. Stamens densely crowded upon the hemispherical receptacle; the sepals whitish, and the stamens and anthers yellow. Fruit baccate, indehiscent. Leaves shortly stalked, dentate. The species are rarely seen in cultivation. FLACOURTIE2E. A tribe of Bixinece. FLAGELLIFORM. Long, tapering, and supple, like the thong of a whip. FLAGELLUM. A runner, like that of the Straw- berry; also a thin twig or small branch. FLAME FLOWER. See Kniphofia aloides. FLAT-BODY MOTH, COMMON (Depressaria cicutella). In this moth, like the rest of the genus, the body seems depressed, hence the common name. The fore wings are pale ochreous-reddish, irregularly freckled with brown and black specks ; a pale mark runs from the base along the front edge, and two or three white dots, in black rings, are seen towards the middle ; the whole having a glossy appearance. The hind wings are shining, but more grey, and without mark- ings. The common Flat-body Moth produces two, or perhaps more, broods in a year. The caterpillars are found in June, and again in September, and the moths in August and November ; the latter live in a dor- mant state through the winter, and re-appear in the spring. Two or three species of this genus, very similar in appearance and habit, infest the leaves, flowers, and seeds of Carrot crops, sometimes doing considerable damage. The other kinds are D. daucella and D. de- pressella. See Carrot Blossom Moth and Purple Carrot-seed Moth.. Remedies. The larvae draw the leaves or flower-heads together by means of silken threads, which make their domicile very conspicuous. These may be gathered and destroyed; but as the caterpillar is likely to wriggle out and drop, by means of a silken thread, at the moment the plant is touched, some receptacle should be placed under the curled part before attempting to pluck it off. Solitary wasps, and insectivorous birds, are very useful in clearing away these small grubs. FLAVERIA (from flavus, yellow ; in reference to the plants being used in Chili to dye that colour). OED. Com- positce. A genus comprising about seven species of her- baceous plants. Flower-heads yellow. Leaves opposite, narrow, entire or dentate. Probably the only species cul- tivated in England is the one described below. It is a greenhouse herbaceous biennial, thriving in sandy loam. Propagated by seeds, sown in heat. F. contrayerba (vermifuge), fl.-heads yellow, terminal. July to September. I. somewhat stalked, lanceolate, three-nerved, mucroDate-serrate. h. lift. Peru, 1794. (B. M. 2400.) FLAVESCENT. A pure pale yellow. FLAX. See Liiium. FLAX, NEW ZEALAND. See Pliormium tenax. FLAXWORTS. A name for the order Linacece. FLEABANE. See Conyza. FLEA BEETLE. See Turnip Fly. Vol. IL FLEXUOUS. Having a bent or undulating direction ; zigzag. FLINDERSIA (named after Capt. M. Flinders, E.N., 1780-1814, who explored the coast of Australia, accom- panied by the famous botanist, Eobert Brown). OBD. MeliacecB. A genus of about four species, natives of tropical and sub-tropical Australia and the Moluccas. They are stove or greenhouse evergreen trees or shrubs, succeeding in a compost of loam and peat. Cuttings, with leaves intact, will root in sand, under a glass. F. australis (Southern), fl. white, small, numerous, panicled. May. I. impari-pinnate ; leaflets one to three pairs, full of pellucid dots, as in the Orange, h. 60ft. Queensland, 1823. The wood is useful for various domestic purposes, and is said to be not much inferior to mahogany. Greenhouse. FLOCCOSE. Covered with close woolly hairs, which fall away in little tufts. FLORAL. Of or belonging to a flower ; near a flower. FLORAL ENVELOPES. The calyx and corolla, which envelop the inner or reproductive parts of a flower, are so called. FLORETS. Little flowers ; chiefly applied to com- posites and grasses. FLORIFEROUS. Bearing flowers. FLORISTS' FLOWERS. This term is applied to a very large section of mostly greenhouse and hardy plants, abounding in varieties and garden forms that have originally descended from a limited number of species of each of the numerous genera included. The Florist is one who specially devotes his attention to the improve- ment of such plants as admit of it, either by cultivation, careful selection, or systematic hybridisation. The su- periority, both in habit of plant, and form and variety in colour of flowers, is apparent in almost every subject that has been taken in hand. In many cases, where it is thought perfection has been well-nigh reached, a new break appears in some way, and thus fresh material is given the Florist on which to effect an improvement. The number of plants included amongst Florists' Flowers is continually extending, as, apart from increasing and perpetuating new varieties of a superior type, other genera, that have hitherto been neglected, are brought under the same influence, with a view of eventually ob- taining a similar result. Perfection in habit and in form of flower, with distinct colouring, are points always to be aimed at, and only those flowers which are best in these respects should be used for seeding purposes. It is in- variably necessary to perpetuate varieties of Florists' Flowers by cuttings or offsets, as the case may be, seeds having a tendency to produce plants of a mixed and inferior quality to those from which they were col- lected. The Florist's standard for quality and good cul- tureHs now of a high character with many plants, and is beyond the reach of the majority of cultivators. The advantages of the improvements effected are, however, available for all in the select varieties annually distri- buted, or those in general cultivation. The Auricula, Carnation, Chrysanthemum, Dahlia, Fuchsia, Gladiolus, Hyacinth, Pelargonium, Tulip, &c., may be cited as some of the most popular and best-known examples, each and all exhibiting evidence of the success attending the Florist's work. FLOWER. In phanerogamic plants, the Flower is a collection of several whorls (usually four) of modified leaves. The calyx is the outer whorl, the corolla the second, and the stamens and pistil the third and fourth. FLOWER BORDERS. See Borders, Flower. FLOWER BUDS. See Buds, Flower. FLOWER-DE-LUCE. An old English name for the common species of Iris (which see). FLOWER FENCE. See Foinciana. FLOWER GARDEN. See Garden. D 18 THE DICTIONARY OF GARDENING, FLOWERING ASH. See Frazinns Ormis. FLOWERING RUSH. See Butomus umbellatus. FLOWER OF JOVE. See Agfrostemma flos- Jovis. FLUEGGEA. See Ophiopog-oii. FLUES. The system of fixing Flues for heating purposes in glass structures is now become nearly obsolete, the better and more effective mode of heating by hot water being almost exclusively adopted. In the earlier days of gardening, the use of Flues was general, and even now many remain and continue to answer their purpose exceedingly well, both for fruit and flower cultivation. Flues may be constructed of bricks, and covered with thick flat tiles or elates, placing a cross piece of sheet iron under each joint ; or large pipes may be employed with good results, if properly connected. Fire bricks should be used near the furnace, and the Flue proceed from here round the front part of the house first, returning at the back, or terminating in a chimney at the end, according to the amount of heat required. Corners should be turned by a curve, to allow the heated air and gases to pass more freely, and con- sequently prevent cracking of the joints. The whole of the heat transmitted to the house must pass through the material used in the construction of the Flue ; and all holes or cracks should be kept stopped, to prevent the escape of smoke and injurious gases. It is very important that Flues be kept cleaned out, as a coat of soot prevents the absorption and free passage of heat, and is also an obstruction to the draught. The furnace is best near one end of the house. It should be placed about 2ft. below any part of the Flue, and a gradual ascent allowed the latter until the chimney is reached. FLUGGEA (named in honour of John Flugge, a German cryptogamic botanist). OBD. Euphorbiaceoe. A genus comprising several species of much-branched smooth shrubs, found in most tropical countries of the Eastern hemisphere. Flowers green, minute, and disposed in fascicles or cymes in the axils of the leaves. Berry about the size of a pea, or smaller. Leaves entire, obovate or ovate. In all probability, the species here described is the only one yet introduced. It succeeds in a rich mould and in a moist stove. Propagated by cuttings. F. leucopyrus (white-fruited), fl. apetalous. Berries white, edible. 1 alternate, orbicular, ovate, entire, smooth ; spines 2in. to 3in. long, very strong and numerous, whitish. East Indies, 1825. FLY HONEYSUCKLE. See Lonicera Xylos- teum. FLY ORCHIS. See Ophrys muscifera. FCENICULUM (the old Latin name). OBD. Umbelli- ferce. A genus containing three or four species of hardy biennial or perennial, often tall herbs. Flowers yellow, in compound umbels, without involucres; petals entire, inflected at the top, but not pointed. Fruit oval. Leaves pinnate, decompound, finely dissected. For culture, see Fennel. F. dulce (sweet).* This is considered by some authorities to be but a variety of F. vulgare. It differs, however, hi the plant being smaller ; in the stem being compresssd, not round, at the base; in the smaller number of rays to the umbel, Ac. It is cultivated in this country as a pot herb. Biennial. F. officlnale (officinal). A synonym of F. vulgare. F. vulgare (common).* Common Fennel, fl. yellow, in rather large umbels. Late summer and autumn. I. three or four times pinnate, with very narrow, linear or subulate segments. Stems erect, branched. South Europe ; occurring in many parts of Britain. Perennial. SYN. F. offieinale. (Sy. En. B. 601.) FCETIDIA (from foetidus, stinking ; in allusion to the smell of the wood). OBD. Myrtacece. A .genus con- taining three species (perhaps these are merely varieties of one) of glabrous trees, having a tough, bitter bark. Peduncles axillary, solitary, one-flowered. Leaves al- ternate, elliptic or oblong, entire, penninerved. F. mau- Foatidia— continued. ritiana is an ornamental greenhouse evergreen tree, allied to Gustavia (which see for culture). F. mauritiana (Mauritius). /. solitary; peduncles in the axils of the upper leaves ; petals wanting ; tube of calyx tetragonal and hemispherical ; lobes valvate in {estivation, permanent, at length reflexed. I. alternate, crowded on the branches, sessile, oval, entire, obtuse, h. 15ft. to 20ft. Mauritius, 1827. FOLIACEOUS. Having the form of leaves. FOLIOLATE. When a leaf is divided into leaflets, it is called One, Two, Three, Ten, or Twelve-foliolate, according to the number of leaflets. FOLIOLE. A leaflet; the secondary divisions of a compound leaf. FOLLICLE. A kind of fruit consist- ing of a single carpel, dehiscing by the ventral suture only. See Fig. 20. FONTANESIA (named in honour of M. Kene" Louiche Desfontaines, 1750-1833, FIG. 20- F°L- author of "Flora Atlantica," and several USl££5*Lp other works). OBD. Oleacece. An orna- mental, hardy sub-evergreen shrub, resembling the com- mon Privet, but with rough bark, and graceful, slender, drooping branches. It thrives in ordinary soil. In- creased by layers; by cuttings, planted under a hand glass, in autumn; or by grafting on the Privet. In all probability, the two plants here described are but forms of one species. FIG. 21. FLOWERING BRANCH OF FONTANESIA FORTUNEI. F. Fortune! (Fortune's), fl. creamy-yellow, in axillary and ter- minal panicles. I. lanceolate, entire, long-acuminated, glossy green above, paler beneath. China. See Fig. 21. (R. H. 1869, 43.) F. phlllyrseoides (Phillyrea-like). /. creamy-yellow, in axillary racemes. August. I. lanceolate, acute at both ends. h. 10ft. to 14ft. Syria, 1787. This species has the habit of Phillyrea media. (L, B. C. 1303.) AN ENCYCLOPEDIA OF HORTICULTURE. 19 FOOTSTALK. The stalk of a leaf. FORCING. This is one of the most important operations in the whole routine of gardening, and one that requires the greatest care in practice for obtaining successful results. It has to be mainly conducted throughout the winter and early spring, when outside temperatures are extremely variable, and when the amount of sunshine and consequent light obtained is, at best, but very limited. Forced flowers, fruits, and vegetables, are annually in demand, and aU have to be procured under conditions that are generally unnatural to the plants at the time, in consequence of an insuf- ficient season of rest being allowed them. Fruit-trees carefully forced in successive seasons, and properly ripened after the fruit is gathered, finish their growth, and begin a season of rest, earlier than those allowed to grow more in accordance with their natural habit. These start the more readily, in consequence, when artificial heat is applied. Many flowering plants are so far injured by early Forcing, as to be unavailable for the purpose the following year; but they may generally be recruited in health, in the course of two seasons, by planting out, and, in the meantime, using others that have been prepared in a similar way. The preparation of plants for Forcing, or selection of those only which are thoroughly ripened, is always one of the most important points. A fruit-tree, or flowering plant, thus treated will have its embryo flowers formed inside the bud-scales, and ready for expanding when the ne- cessary heat and moisture are given. In the early stages of Forcing operations, heat should be applied as gradually as possible, beginning with a little warmer, closer atmo- sphere than that allowed during the resting period. A temperature not exceeding 50deg. to 55deg. by artificial heat will suit a large number of plants to start with, but these figures must not be taken as applying to all alike— they would be too high. Most plants subjected to Forcing will bear more heat after the buds swell and commence growing, than they will previously. The value of sunshine and light cannot be over-estimated; conse- quently, both should be admitted to the fullest extent in winter, when the sun will seldom be strong enough to injure the tenderest foliage. It is not advisable to apply heat, when the weather is dull, to maintain a tempera- ture equal to that supplied naturally on brighter days, as the result would be an encouragement of weak, atten- uated growths, which, with a return of sun, or an admission of air, would immediately droop. Very early Forcing renders many plants and vegetables useless after- wards, and this necessitates an annual supply being raised for the purpose. Almost any positions in heated structures may be utilised for such, as, once the crop is secured, in the case of either flowers or vegetables, the roots may be destroyed, and their place taken by others. Vines, and fruit or other permanent trees, are of much more consequence ; hence, the greatest care is necessary, in Forcing, not only to conduct it so as to gain a crop the following season, but also to avoid doing anything that may prove injurious to the well-being of the trees afterwards. A ridge of fermenting material, composed of fresh stable litter and plenty of leaves, is frequently used, with good results, for starting early Vines or Peach-trees. It requires to be often turned and re- newed, in order to keep the requisite temperature, which, supplied in this way, contains much more moisture than would be procurable with the aid of fire heat. The hot-water pipes must, however, be available for use as well at any time required. FORCING HOUSE. The quantities of cut flowers and plants required in many gardens, render it a necessity to either build or set apart a special structure for forcing purposes, with provision for those subjects needing bottom heat, and a bed or staging for others that are better with- out. A Forcing House is also, sometimes, specially reserved Forcing House— continued. for such plants as Strawberries, where they are placed in a high temperature, after flowering is over, for the purpose of swelling and maturing the fruit. A span-roofed building* is most suitable for accommodating plants of various heights, and is, at the same time, one that admits most light. If provided with a glass partition, and sepa- rate valves in the heating arrangements, an advantage is gained of keeping one part a little cooler than the other, and introducing plants into this when first starting them. The Forcing House should be in a sheltered position in the garden, but not so as to be shaded in winter ; and it should have plenty of heat at command. A span-roofed structure admits of a centre stage with path round, and side beds under which pipes could be placed for bottom heat ; or, in the case of a small one, the path may be through the centre, and beds arranged on either side. All plants may be stood near the light, in a house of this description, by raising or lowering them according to height, but this condition could not be procured so readily in one of another shape. Stronger and more equable bottom heat is obtained when the pipes pass through a shallow water tank underneath the plunging material. A span-roofed house, about 30ft. long, 16ft. wide, and 9ft. high, would allow considerable space for plants of various sizes, and would be most desirable for other purposes, when not required for forcing. A minimum temperature of from 50deg. to 55deg. is preferable to a higher one for starting most flowering plants not requiring bottom heat. This may be raised lOdeg. after growth commences. Much must depend, in forcing, on the condition of the weather outside. Light syringings, with water as warm as the house, may be given on bright days, and all possible sun heat should be retained in the winter and early spring months, when forcing operations are of the greatest im- portance. The admission of air by the ventilators must be conducted with great care, when it becomes necessary to open them, on account of the tender foliage or flowers. A change of air takes place continually between the laps of the glass, particularly when the outside temperature is much lower than that inside. Fire heat should be stopped in the day-time, so soon as the sunshine is strong enough to give sufficient warmth without it. FORFICTJLA AURICULARIA. See Earwigs. FORGET-ME-NOT. See Myosotis palustris. FORE. This is one of the most useful of garden im- plements, made in various sizes and shapes to specially suit the work for which any particular one is intended. Those with two prongs are best for light litter, and for mixing manure, &c. The four, and sometimes five-pronged Forks are those mostly used, being frequently more ser- viceable for digging or levelling down soil than the spade. It is an indispensable tool for removing earth from the roots of trees or shrubs when transplanting, as, if care- fully worked from the stem outwards, the soil is loosened, FIG. 22. FLAT-TINED DIGGING FORK. and the roots uninjured in the process. The Fork is not in general use for digging, as it does not so thoroughly remove the earth at the bottom as the spade; but in many cases where the latter cannot, for various reasons, be properly worked, the former will be found a certain sub- stitute. A good form for ordinary kitchen garden work, and for lifting crops, such as Potatoes, &c., is that made with four flattened prongs (see Fig. 22). The quality of the steel, with the proper mode of manufacturing M 20 THE DICTIONARY OF GARDENING, Fork — continued. implement, is of much more importance when purchasing than the difference in price would suggest; consequently, those from the best makers should be obtained. Some are easily bent when under pressure : others just as easily snap. A good Fork should be made of steel, so combined in the manufacture as to wear evenly, and in such a way that the prongs will neither snap nor bend when in ordinary use. Forks for loading leaves are specially made with four or five long tines, and are very useful in winter where large quantities have to be col- lected and taken away. Hand Forks are useful for plunging, planting out, &c. ; they are made with three short flattened prongs, and a handle of the same size, like that of a trowel. FORMICIDJE. See Ants. FORNICATE. Arched. FORRESTIA (commemorative of Peter Forrest, a botanist of the seventeenth century). ORD. Comme- linacece. A genus of seven species of pretty and singular stove perennials, of which one is from tropical Africa, and the rest natives of India and the Malayan Archi- pelago. For culture, see Commelina. F. Hooker! (Hooker's), fl. purplish, capitate, sessile, bracteate, in dense clusters from the lower sheaths, and often from the naked stems after the leaves have fallen ; sepals boat-shaped ; petals much paler, almost white, ovate, acute. I. sub-succulent, obovate-lanceolate, finely cordate-acuminate, more or less hairy, deep purple beneath, at length glabrous above, and there uni- formly green, striately veined ; base tapering downwards, often very hairy, and terminating in a large, striated, often very villous, sheathing base. Stem herbaceous, 1ft. to 3ft. long, simple below, creeping and radicant, and leafless, h. 3ft. Malay Archi- pelago, 1864. (B. M. 5425, under name of F. hispida.) FORSYTHIA (named in honour of William Forsyth, 1737-1804, the King's Gardener at Kensington, author of " Observations on the Diseases of Trees," London, 1791). ORD. Oleaceae. Very ornamental hardy dwarf deciduous shrubs. Flowers yellow, drooping, solitary. Leaves simple or compound, glabrous. Branches slender. For culture, see Foiitanesia. FIG. 23. FLOWERING BRANCH OF FORSYTHIA SUSPENSA. F. suspensa (hanging-down).* fl. yellow, few, scattered, on very slender branches ; peduncles slender. 1. simple and trifoliolate on the same branch, toothed ; central leaflet largest. Japan and China. This is a very graceful shrub, which does thoroughly Forsythia — continued. well either as a climber against a wall, or treated as a bush in the open shrubbery border ; it also forces readily. In nurseries, it is frequently met with under the names of *". Fortunei and F. Siebotdi. See Fig. 23. (S. Z. F. J. 3.) F. viridissima (very green).* fl. yellow, numerous ; peduncles much shorter than the flowers, bracteolate. March. I. all simple, entire, linear-lanceolate or oblong, acute. h. 10ft. Japan, 1845. (B. M. 4587.) FORTUNEA. A synonym of Platycarya (which see). FOTHERGILLA (named in honour of John Fother- gill, 1712-1780, an eminent physician and patron of botany). ORD. Hamamelidece. The only species of this genus is a pretty hardy deciduous shrub. It thrives best in a moist sandy peat; and may be increased by seeds, which should be sown in spring, in a peaty soil. The varieties may be propagated by layers. F. alnifolia (Alder-leaved).* fl. white, sweet-scented, sessile, spicate, terminal, ovate, appearing before the leaves. April, May. I. alternate, obovate, stipulate, clothed with soft, starry down. h. 3ft. to 6ft. North-eastern America, 1765. The following are varieties : F. a. acuta (acute). I. narrow, ovate, acute. F. a. major (greater). I. ovate-oblong, somewhat cordate at the base. (B. M. 1342.) F. a. obtusa (blunt-leaved). I. obovate, crenate at the top, when young downy beneath. (B. M. 1341.) F. a. scrotina (late-flowering). I. oblong, acute, crenately toothed at top. FOUNTAINS. In connection with garden, con- servatory, and room decorations, Fountains are represented in various forms, and are constructed in sizes varying from specimens of the most minute description in a room, to an enormous display of waterworks, as shown in exten- sive public gardens and other establishments. An im- portant point in the introduction of a Fountain is the selection of a situation that is at once appropriate and in keeping with surrounding objects. The centre of an inclosed flower garden, of a formal description and geometrically laid out, could not, perhaps, be better occupied than with a Fountain and circular basin, having a walk round it in connection with other cross walks formed at right angles. Intersecting points are best in any case, on account of the means thereby supplied of utilising the water from the basin. Either a single jet or an indefinite number, if desired, must be in connec- tion with an elevated reservoir or other source of supply from which a force can be obtained, and they may be fixed so as to conduct the water in various direc- tions, and cause it to disperse and descend in minute particles. The jets are best arranged amongst a pile of rockwork or large stones, that help to conceal them from view when the water is stopped. A Fountain has a cooling effect in a conservatory, in summer; and when constructed in a prominent position, as in the centre, it is invariably a source of attraction. In some of the most extensive and beautiful summer floral decorations, a small Fountain is introduced, with flowers of various Nymphaeas, &c., dropped in the water beneath. This forms an interesting and novel addition, and one that is generally much admired. FOUQUIERA (named in honour of Peter Edward Fouquier, M.D., a French physician). ORD. Tama- riscinece. A genus containing three species of very glabrous, spinose trees or shrubs, natives of Mexico. F. formosa is described as being a very showy stove shrub. It thrives in a loamy and fibry peat ; and is increased by cuttings, planted in heat, under a bell glass. F. formosa (splendid).* fl. scarlet, lin. long, disposed in terminal erect spikes ; corolla tube cylindrical, a little arched ; limb spreadingly reflexed. I. oblong, scattered, rather fleshy, h. 6ft. to 10ft. FOUQUIEREJE. A tribe of Tamariscinece. FOURCROYA. See Furcraea. AN ENCYCLOPEDIA OF HORTICULTURE. 21 FOX-BANE. See Acouitum vulparia. FOXGLOVE. See Digitalis. FRAGARIA (from Fraga, the old Latin name, from the same root as fragrans, fragrant; referring to the perfume of the fruit). Strawberry. OED. Rosacece. A genus of three or four species of hardy (except where otherwise stated) perennial scapigerous herbs, with run- ners, natives of North temperate regions, the Andes, Sandwich Islands, and Bourbon. Flowers white or yellow, honeyed, often polygamous ; achenes many, minute, em- bedded on the surface of the large convex fleshy recep- tacle. Leaves three-foliolate (in the British species), pinnate or one-foliolate. Several of the so-called species have, without doubt, originated from two or three ; many of them, however, preserve a well-marked character. For cultivation, see Strawberry. FIG. 25. FRUIT OF FRAGARIA CHILENSIS. F. chilensls (Chilian).* fl. white ; sepals erect ; peduncles thick and silky. April and May. fr. rose-coloured, flesh white, pendulous. 1., leaflets obovate, obtuse, serrated, coriaceous, wrinkled, silky beneath, h. 1ft. South America, 1727. See Figs. 24 and 25. F. C. grandiflora (large-flowered).* Pine Strawberry, fl. white ; sepals reflexed ; peduncles thick. April and May. fr. red. L, leaflets glaucous, coriaceous, broadly crenated, pilose beneath. h. 1ft. 1759. See Figs. 26 and 27. F. collina (hill). Green Pine. fl. white ; sepals, after flowering, erect. April to June. fr. green. I., leaflets plicate, thin, silky above and pilose beneath, h. 9in. Europe, 1798. F. elatior (taller). Hautbois. fl. white ; sepals at length reflexed on the peduncles. April and May. Receptacle firm, adhering but little to the calyx. I., leaflets plicate, rather coriaceous, green, h. 1ft. Europe. This, which is much larger than F. vesca, is probably derived from that species ; it is frequently met with as a garden escape in a semi-naturalised condition in Britain. (Sy. En. B. 439.) F. indica (Indian).* fl. golden-yellow ; calyx ten-parted, outer five segments accessory, large, foliaceous, tridentate at the apex, and spreading; peduncles axillary, solitary, one-flowered. May to October, fr. red, insipid, numerous. I. trifoliolate ; leaflets cuneate-ovate, deep green, crenated. India, Japan, &c., 1805. A very pretty little greenhouse trailer. (A. B. K. 479.) Fragaria— continued. FIG. 26. FRAGARIA CHILENSIS GRANDIFLORA (PINE STRAWBERRY). FIG. 27. FRUIT OF FRAGARIA CHILENSIS GRANDIFLORA. F. vesca (edible). Common Wild Strawberry, fl. white ; sepals at length reflexed. April and May. fr. pendulous. I., leaflets plicate, thin, pilose beneath, h. 6in. to 12in. Britain. See plicate, thin, pilose beneath, h. Figs. 28 and 29. (Sy. En. B. 438.) FIG. 28. FRAGARIA VESCA (WILD STRAWBERRY). FIG. 29. FRUIT OF FRAGARIA VESCA. F. v. monophylla (one-leaved). Alpine Strawberry, fl. white. Mav. fr. round, small, pendulous ; receptacle elongated, red. 1. simple, crenately toothed, h. 6in. Europe, 1773. (B. M. 63.) F. virginiana (Virginian). Scarlet Strawberry, fl. white ; pe- duncles and pedicels length of leaves. April, fr. deep red when ripe ; receptacle very tumid, pendulous. A. 1ft. North America, THE DICTIONARY OF GARDENING, FRAMES, GARDEN. Frames are portable garden structures among the most useful for various purposes at all seasons, particularly in spring and early summer, when large quantities of different subjects have to be prepared for transplanting outside. They may also be effectively employed in forcing opera- tions, where pits are limited, by being placed on a hotbed of fermenting material, and covered with mats and dry litter, according to the state of the weather, or the amount of heat required inside. Cucumbers and Melons, and a large proportion of green- house winter-flowering plants in pots, as well as those for more immediate use, may be successfully cultivated in Frames during the summer. In winter, the latter may be utilised for storing plants that merely require protection from frost, by placing a quantity of dry litter round the woodwork, and cover- ing the glass with mats, &c. Frames are made of different sizes, none being so gene- rally useful as those having two sashes, each measuring about 6ft. long by 4ft. wide (see Fig. 30, for which, and for Fig. 31, we are indebted to Messrs. Boulton and Paul, of Norwich), or others large enough to take three sashes of similar dimensions. The frames of these sashes should be 2in. thick, and each fitted with an iron handle for opening, and a cross bar of iron for strengthening them. The Frame or box itself is usually made of deal timber, 1-Jin. or IJin. thick, a height of 18in. being allowed at the back, and 13iin. at the front, or other heights may be adopted in a similar proportion. The corners should be dovetailed, Frames, Garden— continued. sashes being made of wood, and glazed in the ordinary way, or without putty. One of the most popular and best- constructed of this description is that made by Messrs. FIG. 30. TWO-LIGHT FRAME. and further strengthened by pieces of wood fitted inside. Frames may be purchased ready for use, but they are expensive, and seldom so strong as those which can be made at home, somewhat like that above described. A new Three-quarter Span-roof Frame, made by Messrs. Boulton and Paul, of Norwich, is represented in Fig. 31. When made in this shape, it has the advantage of giving more height inside than with the ordinary sashes. The sashes here shown are hung to the ridge in such a way that FIG. 31. THREE-QUARTER SPAN-ROOF FRAME. the front ones may be turned right over on the others at the back, and the reverse. An iron prop accompanies each Frame, to hold the lights wide open for attending to the plants, and each light is provided with a fastening that serves the double purpose of securing it against wind, and raising it for ventilation. Like the ordinary Frames, these are made in various sizes. Other sorts may be procured with iron standards and framework, the FIG. 32. ^PAN-ROOF FRAME. Foster and Pearson, Nottingham (see Fig. 32). A some- what novel, but effective, mode of ventilation is adopted. The sashes are held open at any angle required, by dropping a stout hook, attached to each, into a contriv- ance cast in the iron rafters, something like part of a cog-wheel. This holds them safely in any position in which they are placed. The sashes may easily be re- moved and replaced if desired ; and the ridge is made to lift up and down its whole length by a lever, as a means of ventilation in wet weather. Where expense in pur- chasing is no object, Frames like this are very useful and durable. They are best suited to remain where placed permanently. For sectional representations of simple and chambered Frames, see Cucumber. FRANCISCEA. See Brunfelsia. FRANCOA (named in honour of F. Franco, M.D., of Valentia, a promoter of botany in the sixteenth century). OBD. Saxifragece. A Chilian genus, all the species of which are described below. They are very handsome hardy or half-hardy perennials, beset with simple hairs or glands. Flowers terminal, copious, in spicate racemes. Leaves lyrate, nearly like those of the Turnip, reticnlately veined. Seeds should be sown, about February or March, in a well-drained pan of sandy peat, covered over with a pane of glass, and in a heat of about 50deg. The glass covering may be removed when the seedlings have made a little growth. So soon as the plants are large enough to handle, they should be transferred to other pans, at a distance of about 2in. apart. About April or May, they may be potted off into 4in. pots, and placed in a cool greenhouse or frame. Increased also by divisions. F. appcndiculata (appendaged).* fl., petals pale red, marked each by a deeper spot near the base ; scape nearly simple ; racemes compact. July. I. petiolate, lyrate. h. 2ft. 1830. (B. M. 3178; misnamed F. sonchifolia in L. B. C. 1864.) F. ramosa (branched).* fl. white, loosely arranged ; rachis and sepals glabrous ; inflorescence much branched. July, August. I. shortly stalked, usually decurrent. h. 2ft. to 3ft. 1831. Plant caulescent. (B. M. 3824.) F. sonchifolia (Sowthistle-leaved).* fl. loosely arranged ; petals pink, often with a darker blotch near the base. July. I. with short petioles, usually decurrent below the auricles to the extreme base. h. 2ft. 1830. (B. M. 3309 ; S. B. F. G. vol. 5, 169.) FRANCOE2C. A tribe of Saxifragece, FRANGIPANI-PLANT. color. Sec Plumiera tri- FRANGULA. Included under Rhamnus. AN ENCYCLOPEDIA OF HORTICULTURE. 23 FRANKENIA (named after John Frankenius, 1590- 1661, Professor of Botany at Upsal, who first enumerated the plants of Sweden, in " Speculum Botanicon," 1638). Sea Heath. Including Beatsonia and Hypericopsis. OBD. Frankeniacece. SmaU, prostrate, Heath-like, hardy or half- hardy evergreen plants, with the flowers usually rising from the forks of the branches, or disposed in terminal cymes. Several of the species are pretty subjects for rockwork, or in borders of dry, light, sandy soil. In- creased by divisions. F. capitata Nothrla (headed Nothria). fl. pale red, terminal, aggregate ; petals toothed. June to August t. clustered, linear, glabrous, with involute margins, ciliated at the base. Stems prostrate, glabrous. Cape of Good Hope, 1816. Hardy. F. corymbosa (corymbose). A synonym of F. Webbii. F. laevis (smooth).* fl. flesh-coloured, rising from the forks of the stem, terminal or axillary, solitary. July. I. clustered, linear, glabrous, with revolute margins, ciliated at the base. Stems prostrate, rooting. This native species is one of the prettiest. (Sy. En. B. 190.) F. pauciflora (few-flowered). fl. pink, closely sessile in the last forks, forming a more or less dense terminal leafy cyme, and sometimes unilaterally arranged along its branches. July. I. opposite, or the upper ones in whorls of four, oblong-linear, obtuse, or rarely almost acute; margins usually revolute. Branches ascending, dichotomous, erect or divaricate, nearly glabrous, with short down. h. 1ft. Australia, 1824. Half-hardy; shrubby, procumbent. SYN. F. scabra. (B. M. 2896.) F. portulacifolia (Purslane-leaved), fl. red. I. roundish, fleshy, glabrous. Stem shrubby, bushy, h. 6in. St. Helena Half-hardy. SYN. Beatsonia portulacifolia. FIG. 33. FLOWERING BRANCH OF FRANKENIA PULVERULENTA. F. pulverulenta (powdery).* fl. red, solitary ; petals sub-repand. July. I. roundish - ovate, powdery beneath, h. 3in South Europe. Hardy. See Fig. 33. (S. F. G. 344.) F. scabra (rough). A synonym of F . pauciflora. F. Webbii (Webb's), fl. rose-coloured, in terminal corymbs. June and July. I. clustered, linear, with revolute margins, gla- brous, somewhat ciliated at the base. Stems velvety, erect. h. 6in. South-west Europe, &c., 1823. Hardy. SYN. F. corym- bosa. FRANXENIACE.2E. A small order of herbs or sub-shrubs, containing one genus, Frankenia. The species number about twelve, and are widely dispersed over the sea-coasts of nearly all the temperate and warmer regions of the globe. They possess no properties of importance. FRASERA (named after John Eraser, 1750-1811, a collector of North American plants). ORD. Gentianece. A genus of about seven species of North-west American hardy perennial herbs. Flowers axillary, stalked ; corolla wheel-shaped, four-cleft. Leaves opposite or verticillate. They thrive in a moist situation, and may be increased by seeds, or by divisions. F. carolinensis (Carolina). A synonym of F. Walteri. Frasera — continued. I. /. yellowish, verticillate, on short, one- ily. I. opposite and sub-verticillate, oblong, tetragonal, h. 3ft. to 6ft Carolina, 1795. F. Walteri (Walter's), fl. yellowish, flowered pedicels. July. - Stems and branches SYN. F. carolinensis. FRAXIXE.2E. A tribe of Oleacece. FRAXINELLA. See Dictamnus albus. FRAXINUS (the old Latin name of the tree). Ash. Including Ornus. OBD. Oleaceas. Large, ornamental, hardy deciduous trees, with lateral racemes of greenish- yellow or whitish flowers, and opposite, unequally pinnate, rarely simple leaves. They flourish in moderately good soil, in sheltered situations. Propagation is effected chiefly by seeds, the varieties being increased by grafting. The seeds of the common Ash ripen in October, and should be gathered and laid in an open pit, constructed in a place where the soil is light and porous. Two bushels of sand should be mixed with each bushel of seed, and the whole put into this pit till the February following, during which time it must be turned over several times, to prevent heating. The seeds should be sown in beds, in good friable soil, a sandy loam being the best for the purpose. After remaining two years in the seed bed, the plants may be removed, and placed, at a distance of 6in. from each other, in rows l^ft. apart. These should stand two years longer, when they will be fit for permanently planting out during any mild weather in autumn or early spring. Exclusive of the many varieties, the present genus is comprised of about thirty described species. About ten of these are natives of North America. F. acuminata (taper-pointed). A synonym of F. americana. F. alba (white). A synonym of F. americana. F. americana (American).* White Ash. fl. white, disposed in terminal panicles. April and May. Samaras narrow, obtuse, mucronate. I. with two to four pairs of ovate or ovate-acumi- nated, shining, serrated leaflets, 3m. to 5m. long, and 2in. broad. Branches brownish-grey, h. 30ft. to 40ft. East United States, 1723. SYNS. F. acuminata, F. alba, F. Curtisii, F. epiptera, and F. juglandifolia (of Lamark). The variety latifolia has broader leaves than the type. F. angustifolia (narrow-leaved). A synonym of F. excelsior australis. F. argentea (silvery). A synonym of F. Ornus. F. caroliniana (Carolina). A synonym of F. platycarpa. F. concolor (one-coloured). A synonym of F. viridis. F. Curtisii (Curtis's). A synonym of F. americana. F. epiptera (wing-topped). A synonym of F. americana. F. excelsior (taller).* Common Ash. fl. greenish-yellow, naked, produced in small crowded axillary panicles. March and April. Samaras linear-oblong, notched at the tip. l.t leaflets in five or six pairs, almost sessile, lanceolate-oblong, acuminate, ser- rated, cuneated at the base. h. 30ft to 80ft Europe (Britain). (B. M. PI. 171.) Of the numerous varieties of this tine tree, the following is a pretty extensive and comprehensive list As a rule, the name indicates the general distinctive character of each sort : aucubcefolia, aurea, aurea pendula, aurea pendula stricta, coarc- tata, erispa, heterophylla, heterophylla variegata, horizontalis, art/. acanthi/alia, pendula, pendula foliis variegatis, scolopendrtfolia, simplicijolia (=monophylla), simplicifolia laciniata, spectabilis, viridii, and Wentworthi pendula. F. e. australis (Southern), fl. greenish-white, naked. May. Samaras in three or four pairs, liin. to 2in. long, lanceolate. I., leaflets sessile, lanceolate, remotely denticulated ; peduncles below the leaves, solitary, 2in. long. Branchlets green, dotted with white, h. 30ft. to 50ft. South-west Europe and North Africa, 1815. SYN. F. angustifolia. F. floribunda (bundle-flowered), fl. white, in compound, thyrsoid, terminal panicles. April. Samaras linear or narrow-spathulate, obtuse, and entire. I., leaflets elliptic-oblong, acuminated, ser- rated, glabrous, stalked. A. 30ft. to 40ft. Nepaul, 1822. SYN. Ornus floribunda. (B. F. F. 37.) F. juglandifolia (Walnut-leaved). A synonym of F. viridit. F. juglandifolia (Walnut-leaved), of Lamark. A synonym of F. americana. F. lentiscifolia (Lentiscus-leaved). A synonym of F. oxyphylla parvtfolia. F. longicuspis (long-pointed). I. with two or three pairs of lanceolate, very acuminate leaflets. Japan, 1869. F. Mariesii (Maries'). /. white, in numerous erect strict panicles from the uppermost axils. /. 4iu. to 6in. long ; petiole and rachis 24 THE DICTIONARY OF GARDENING, Fraxinus — continued. slender; leaflets five. Northern China, 1880. (B. M. 6678.) F. nigra (black). A synonym of F. pubescent. A small tree. FIG. 34. FLOWERING BRANCH OF FRAXINUS ORNUS (MANNA ASH). F. Ornus (Ornus). Manna Ash. fl. greenish-white, complete or hermaphrodite; peduncles axillary, shorter than the leaves. May and June. Samaras brown. I., leaflets lanceolate or elliptic, attenuated, serrated, stalked, entire at the base, yillous or downy beneath. Young branches purplish or livid, with yellow dots. A. 20ft. to 30ft. South Europe, 1730. A very handsome and free-flowering tree. SYNS. F. argentea, F. rotundtfolia, and Ornus europcea. See Fig. 34. (W. D. B. 2, 107.) F. oxycarpa (sharp-fruited). A synonym of F. oxyphylla. F. oxyphylla (sharp-leaved), ft. greenish-yellow, naked. May. Samaras lanceolate, attenuated at both ends, mucronate. I. dark glossy green, produced in tufts at the ends of the branches; leaflets two to three pairs, almost sessile, lanceolate, acuminated, serrated. Branchlets green, with white dots. A. 30ft. to 40ft Caucasus, 1815. SYN. F. oxycarpa. F. o. parvifolia (small-leaved), ft. greenish-yellow, naked. May, June. Samaras narrow, gradually widening to the apex, and retuse there. I., leaflets four to five pairs, petiolate, oblong and lanceolate, sharply serrated ; serratures mucronate. Branches dark purple, h. 30ft. to 50ft. Aleppo, 1710. SYN. F. lenliscifolia. F. pallida (pale). A synonym of F. platycarpa. F. pauciflora (few-flowered). A synonym of F. platycarpa. F. pennsylvanlca (Pennsylvanian). A synonym of F. pubescens. F. platycarpa (broad-fruited). Carolina Water Ash. ft. greenish-yellow. May. Samaras broadly winged, 2in. long, acute at both ends. I., leaflets almost sessile, very distinctly serrated, elliptic-lanceolate, 2in. long, lin. broad, h. 30ft. to 50ft. Eastern United States, 1724. SYNS. F. caroliniana, F. pallida, F. pauciflora, and F. triptera. F. potamophila (swamp-loving), fl. greenish, in short dense racemes. Samaras stalked, oblong, with a wedge-shaped base. I. small. Young branches of a greyish-brown colour, with black buds. Turkestan. F. pubescens (downy). /. greenish-yellow, calyculate ; racemes rather compound. May. Samaras narrow-lanceolate, obtuse, with a short mucro at the apex, 2in. long. I., leaflets three to four pairs, petiolate, elliptic-ovate, serrated, downy or tomentose beneath, as well as the petioles and branches, h. 30ft. Eastern United States, 1811. SYNS. F. . nigra, F. pennsylvanica, F. tomen- toga. F. quadrangulata (four-angled). Blue Ash. /. greenish- vellow. May. Samaras blunt at both ends. I. 1ft. to lift, long ; leaflets two to four pairs, almost sessile, elliptic-lanceolate, ser- rated, downy beneath. Branches quadrangular, h. 60ft. to 70ft. Eastern United States, 1823. F. rotundifolia (round-leaved). A synonym of F. Ornus. F. sambucifolia (Elder-leaved). Black Ash. fl. like those of the common Ash. May. I., leaflets three pairs, 3in. to 4in. long, acute at both ends, sessile, ovate-lanceolate, serrated. Young branches green, beset with black dots. h. 30ft. Eastern United States, 1800. F. tomentosa (tomentose). A synonym of F. pubescent. F. triptera (three-winged). A synonym of F. platycarpa. F. viridis (green). - I, leaflets bright green both sides, or barely pale beneath, from oblong-lanceolate to ovate, mostly acuminate, and sparsely and sharply serrate or denticulate, h. 30ft. North America, 1824. SYNS. F. concolor, F. juglandijolia. There is a variety, F. v. Berlandieriana. FREE. Not adhering to anything else; not adnate to any other body. FREES! A (derivation unknown). ORD. Iridece. A genus of a couple of species (in all probability, these are simply forms of one) of very pretty conservatory plants, from the Cape of Good Hope. They may be readily increased from seed, which should be sown as soon as ripe, in pots of light sandy soil, and placed in a sunny position, in a cool frame. When the young plants appear, air should be admitted ; but draughts are very injurious, and must be specially avoided. As the seedlings do not succeed well transplanted, it is best to sow in Sin. pots, and thin out to six or eight of the strongest plants, this being about the space required for flowering bulbs. If sown in August, the young plants may flower the follow- ing spring, but this is by no means certain. They will, however, form good bulbs for the second year. Freesias intended for flowering should be shaken out of the old soil in August or September, and repotted in sandy loam, leaf mould, and decayed manure. The different sizes should be placed together in separate pots or shallow pans, in order to have plants uniform in strength when flowering. Water will not be required until growth com- mences, and a frame where frost is excluded will be warm enough. Plenty of air in mild weather, with a light position, is most conducive to a dwarf, sturdy growth. When the flowers appear, a little more heat may be applied to a portion for an earlier, supply, others being left to form a succession. Freesias are largely and very successfully grown in Guernsey. They are potted in suc- cessive batches throughout the autumn, the first being inserted in August. These begin flowering in December, and the supply is kept up until late in spring. The flowers are very fragrant, and last a long time when cut and placed in water. A number of slightly varying forms have received distinctive names in nurseries. F. Leichtlinii (Leichtlin's). fl. yellow or cream-colour ; funnel narrowing abruptly into the tube ; throat more open, with the segments spreading less horizontally than in F. refracta. h. 1ft. 1875. (R. G. 808.) F. oclorata (sweet-scented). A synonym of F. refracta. F. refracta (bent back), fl. pure white, sometimes marked with a few violet lines, and usually with orange patches on the lower segments of the perianth ; funnel long, gradually narrowing into the tube below ; throat of funnel somewhat narrow ; segments spreading horizontally, and with a peculiar fragrance. SYN. F. odorata. (B. R. 135.) F. r. alba (white). /. of the purest white, frequently without the orange-coloured blotches usually present in the type. See Fig. 35. FREMONTIA (named after Colonel Fremont, an American officer). ORD. Malvaceae. A beautiful hardy deciduous shrub, with coloured calyx, and without petals. It thrives in a sandy loam soil, and does well on a west or north wall, also as a bush in the Southern Counties of England. Increased by cuttings, in spring, placed under a hand glass ; or by seeds. F. californica (Californian).» fl. bright yellow, about 2in. across, solitary on short peduncles opposite the leaves. April. I. large, cordate, five to seven-lobed, hairy beneath ; young shoots covered with a rich brown tomentum. h. 6ft. to 10ft. California, 1851. (B. M. 5591.) FRENCH BEANS. See Beans. FRENCH MARIGOLD. See Tagetes patnla. FRENELA. See Callitris. FREYCINETIA (named after Admiral Freycinet, 1779-1842, the French circumnavigator). ORD. Pandanece. A genus of about thirty species, natives of Eastern tropical Asia, the Malayan Archipelago, tropical Australia, and the Pacific Islands. They are tall-growing evergreen stove climbers, suitable for clothing pillars, &c., which should, however, be bound round with sphagnum or fibrous peat, kept moist, so that the climbing stems may root into it. The soil in which the plants do best, either in pots or when planted out, is a well-drained sandy loam. Increased by offsets. AN ENCYCLOPEDIA OF HORTICULTURE, 25 /- FIG. 35. FREESIA REPRACTA ALBA. THE DICTIONARY OF GARDENING, Freycinetia — continued. F. Banksii (Banks'). /., spikes cylindrical, 3m. to 4in. long, surrounded by white, fleshy bracts, fr. 6in to Sin. long, and 6in. to Sin. in circumference, of a rich brown hue when ripe, edible. New Zealand. (B. M. 6028.) FIG. 36. FRETCINETIA CUMINGIANA. p. Cumlnglana (Cuming's). This has shorter, ascending or horizontally spreading leaves (not arching, as in F. Banksii). It is, moreover, a more slender grower. See Fig. 36. FREZIERA (named after A. F. Frezier, 1682-1773, a French engineer and traveller in Chili, who published an account of his travels in 1716). STN. Erotewm. OBD. TernstromiacecB. A genus containing a dozen or more species of evergreen shrubs, with small axillary flowers, natives of tropical America. None are worthy of special mention. F. theoides (Tea-like). A synonym of Clcyera theoides. FRIESIA (named after Elias Magnus Fries, M.D., 1794-1878, a celebrated cryptogamic botanist). OBD. TiliaceoB. This genus, now included under Aristotelia, contains but a single species, a very ornamental green- house evergreen shrub, and an excellent plant for grow- ing against the wall of a conservatory. It thrives freely in a mixture of turfy loam and peat. Increased by cut- tings, which root readily in sandy soil. F. peduncular!* (peduncled). fl. white ; pedicels axillary, spreading, one-flowered, somewhat nodding. September. I. op- posite, lanceolate, serrated, h. 3ft. to 6ft. Van Dieman's Land, FRINGE FLOWER. See Scb.izantb.us. FRINGE-TREE. See Chionantlius. FRITILLARIA (from fritillus, a chess-board ; refer- ring to the chequered flowers of some species). Fritillary. Including Rhinopetalum and Theresia. OBD. Liliacece. A genus comprising upwards of fifty species of hardy, bulbous plants. Flowers drooping, terminal or axil- lary, campanulate ; perianth of six divisions, each with a nectar-bearing hollow at the base on the inside; style three-groved or trifid. Stems leafy. The usual mode of propagation is by offsets that are naturally developed by the plants when left undisturbed. Some of the free- growing species produce many more of these than the small slender ones. Seeds are ripened freely by some species, but not by all of them in this country. If desired, these may be sown when ripe, in pans of sandy soil, and the seedlings allowed to remain for the first year, the young plants being impatient of root disturbance. It takes from four to six years to grow them from seed to a size sufficiently large for flowering. AH small offsets should be collected when the old bulbs are being lifted or replanted. If they are placed in lines, a short dis- tance apart, in a piece of prepared ground, flowering specimens may be more quickly obtained. Fritillarias are best suited for positions in the mixed flower border, arranged according to their several heights. They should have a rich, well-drained soil, as anything like stagnant water near the bulbs, especially with the small-growing species, proves destructive. It is not advisable to lift the bulbs oftener than every three or four years, if it can be avoided, and then they should be replanted with- out delay, and surrounded with some new soil. A dress- ing of manure, to established plants of Crown Imperials, just after growth commences, is beneficial, as a number of roots proceed from the flower-stem just above the bulb. The latter should be planted at least 4in. to 6in. below the surface, and from l£ft. to 2ft. apart. Fritil- FIG. 37. FLOWERING STEMS OF FRITILLARIA AUREA. AN ENCYCLOPEDIA OF HORTICULTURE. 27 Fritillaria — continued. larias may be grown in large pots, if desired, in a cold j frame, but must not be subjected to forcing in any way. They are perfectly hardy, and best suited for the open ground, but the young tender growths and flowers are liable to injury by late frosts in spring. F. acmopetala (sharp-petalled). fl. more or less drooping ; perianth campanulate ; segments more or less flushed with purple on the back and tip, the .rest greenish, obqvate-oblong, obtuse. Spring. I. rather glaucous, all alternate, linear. Stem slender, glaucous, one-flowered, ft. 1ft. Alps of Asia Minor, 1875. F. armcna (Armenian).* fl. soft yellow, nodding, solitary, bell- shaped. I. lanceolate, or linear-lanceolate, ft. 6in. Armenia, 1878. A very pretty species, resembling our native one in time of flowering, &c. (B. M. 6365.) F. aurca (golden), fl., perianth bright yellow, solitary, cernuous, bell-shaped, lin. deep, rounded equally from middle to base ; divisions with seven to nine rows of small black tesserae much broader than deep ; outer segments oblong, gin. broad ; inner ones obovate, Jin. broad. I. about ten to a stem ; lower ones in whorls of three, linear, glaucescent, fleshy, 2in. to Sin. long; bract leaf solitary. Stem glaucescent, 6in. high. Cilicia, 1876. See Fig. 37. (R. G. 840.) F. dasyphylla (thick-leaved), fl. more or less drooping; perianth broadly funnel-shaped ; segments purplish on the back, yellow, without any tessellations inside, with a small green oblong foveole above the base. April. 1. green, fleshy, all alternate, or the lowest (and sometimes the uppermost) opposite ; the lowest oblanceolate-oblong, sub-obtuse; the others lanceolate and linear. Stem one (rarely two) flowered. A. 6in. Asia Minor, 1875. (B. M. 6321.) F. delphinensis (Dauphine").* fl. drooping, inodorous ; perianth vinous-purple, spotted yellow, often obscurely tessellated ; seg- ments oblong, obtuse ; anthers yellow, three lines long. I. four to six, all above the middle of the stem, upper ones linear, lower ones oblanceolate. Stem very often one-flowered, ft. 6in. to 12in. South Europe. F. d. Burnati (Burnat's). fl. solitary, nodding, about 2in. long, bell-shaped ; segments of perianth carinate outside in the lower half, lurid brownish-red, close. I. linear-lanceolate, slightly glaucous, ft. 6in. to 8in. 1879. F. d. Moggridgei (Moggridge's). fl. yellow, tessellated inside with brown, solitary, large, cylindrical, bell-shaped. August. 1. broad, ft. 1ft. Maritime Alps, 1880. A very handsome variety. (Fl. Ment. 25. ) F. grseca (Greek).* fl. solitary, rarely two, smaller than those of F. Meleagris, and less campanulate ; sepals elliptical, slightly apart when fully open, tawny or ferruginous brown, spotted, but scarcely tessellated, with a dorsal green line continued to the projection which constitutes the nectary at the base. March. I., root ones from young bulbs 4in. to 6in. long, lanceolate, tapering into a petiole ; cauline ones elliptical or linear-lanceolate, nearly erect, striated. Stem slender, erect, terete, h. 6in. Greece. This plant is closely allied to F. tulipifolia. (B. M. 5052.) F. Hooker! (Hooker's).* fl. pale lilac, racemose, bell-shaped, about lin. long. Summer. I. about 8in. long. ft. 6in. Sikkim, 1878. (B. M. 6385.) FIG. 38. FRITILLARIA IMPERIALIS, showing Habit and detached Single Flower. F. impcrialis (Imperial).* Crown Imperial, fl. about the size of ordinary Tulips, varying in colour from yellow to crimson, drooping, disposed in a whorl at the top of the leafy stem, which is surmounted with a tuft of leaves. April. Stem 3ft. or more in height Persia, 1596. See Fig. 38. (B. M. 194.) The following varieties are enumerated by Mr. T. S. Ware : Aurora, very distinct, curious bronzy-crimson flowers ; aurea, marginata, Fritillaria — continued. extremely showy, having the leaves margined with a broad, golden-yellow band ; lutea, cluster of bright yellow flowers ; Minature, a pretty, dwarf -growing, red-flowered variety; rubra, dark red flowers ; rubra maxima, a fine form, with immense flowers ; Slagzwaard, a fasciated form, immense deep red flowers ; sulphurine, large, sulphur-coloured flowers. F. involncrata (involucrate). /. drooping; perianth vinous- purple, slightly tessellated ; divisions oblong. May. 1. linear- lanceolate, opposite below, forming a whorl of three above. Stems one-flowered, h. 1ft. Maritime Alps. (Fl. Ment. 36.) F. kamtschatccnsis (Kamtschatkan). fl., perianth livid vinous- purple, not tessellated, campanulate, lin. to IJin. long, the seg- ments oblong-oblanceolate, obtuse ; pedicels drooping, iin. to lin. long. Spring. I. ten to fifteen above the middle of the stem ; lower ones in whorls, lanceolate, 2in. to 4in. long. Stem 6in. to 18in. high. Eastern Siberia, &c. SYN. Lilium camtschatcense. (R. G. 173.) F. Karelin! (Karelin's), fl. pale purple, spotted, bell-shaped, racemose, h. bin. Central Siberia to Beloochistan, 1834. SYN. Rhinopetalum Karelini. (B. M. 6406.) F. lanccolata (lanceolate-leaved), fl. dull vinous-purple. I. lanceolate, whorled. h. 1ft. to lift. North-west America, 1872. (H. F. B. A. ii. 193.) F. lutea (yellow).* fl. drooping; perianth yellow, more or less suffused with purple ; segments oblong-lanceolate, five to eight lines broad. April and May. I. linear-lanceolate, alternate ; the upper approximated, shorter than the terminal solitary flower. Stem very often one-flowered, h. 6in. to 1ft. Caucasus, 1812. F. L latifolla (broad-leaved), fl. vinous-purple, greenish, or tessellated with yellow. April and May. I. lanceolate, approxi- mated ; the upper opposite, as long as the terminal solitary flower. Caucasus, 160*. (B. M. 853, 1207.) F. macrandra (large-anthered). fl., perianth purple, with a glaucous tinge on the outside, yellow with green lines quite un- tessellated on the face, funnel-shaped ; anthers two and a-half lines long, oblong, with a very distinct cusp. May. I. five or six, scattered, green, fleshy, ascending ; lower ones oblong-lanceolate, Sin. to 4in. long ; upper ones linear, under iin. long. Island of Syra, 1875. F. macrophylla (large-leaved).* fl. rose, racemose, horizontal, campanulate; perianth segments obovate-lanceolate, with a darker mass at base ; stamens declinate. April to June. I. alternate, linear, acuminate, soft. h. 3ft. Mussooree, 1843. (B. M. 4725, under name of Lilium roseum ; B. R. xxxi. 1, under name of Lilium Thomsianum.) \ FIG. 39. FRITILLARIA MELEAGRIS, showing Habit and detached Single Flower. F. Meleagris (Guinea-fowl-like).* Common Fritillary ; Snake's Head. fl. chequered with pale and dark purple, terminal, pendulous, solitary ; points of perianth turned inward. April. 1. alternate, narrow-lanceolate, ft. 1ft. Europe (Britain, especially in Oxfordshire) to Caucasus. See Fig. 39. (Sy. En. B. 1519.) There are white and double-flowered forms of this species. F. meleagroides (Guinea-fowl-like), fl. dark purple. April, ft. 6in. Altai Mountains, 1830. (B. M. 3280, under name of F. minor.) F. montana (mountain). A synonym of F. tenella. F. obliqua (oblique), fl. brown, purple ; corolla turbinate. April. 1. glaucous, numerous, oblique, ft. 1ft. Caucasus. (B. M. 857.) F. oxypetala (sharp-petalled). See Lilium oxypctalum. F. pallidiflora (pale-flowered).* fl. yellow, beautifully chequered in the interior. I. large, glaucous-blue, ft. 9in. Siberia, 1880. Very distinct. See Fig. 40. (R. G. 209.) F. persica (Persian).* fl. deep violet-blue, rather small, bell- shaped, slightly scented, ft. 3ft. Persia, 1596. Very distinct and curious. (B. M. 1537.) F. p. minor (smaller). A smaller-flowered form, with the stamens slightly longer than the perianth. (B. M. 962.) F. pudica (chaste).* fl. dark yellow, more than lin. across, bell- shaped, usually solitary, sometimes twin. May. I. alternate, linear, glaucous. Stem upright, leafy, west America. See Fig. 41. ft. 6in. to 9in. North- THE DICTIONARY OF GARDENING, Fritillaria — continued. F. p. lutescens (yellowish) has a yellowish-green stripe on the outer segments of the perianth. F. p. nigra (black) is a garden form, with leaves Jin. to fin. wide, and three or four dark-coloured flowers. F. pyrenaica (Pyrenese).* fl. deep purple, large. June. h. lift. Mountains of Southern France and Northern S 664.) ce and Northern Spain, 1605. (B. M Fritillaria— continued. oblong, obtuse, or obtusely apiculate, rusty brown-purple within, not tessellated ; the outer dark glaucous blue, streaked with the FIG. 40. FLOWERING STEM OF FRITILLARIA PALLIDIFLORA. F. recnrva (recurved).* fl. bright scarlet; perianth segments recurved. May. Stems one to nine-flowered. A. 2ft. California, 1870. A very distinct and beautiful species, with flowers nearly as large as those of F. Meleagris. See Fig. 42. (B. M. 6264.) F. ruthenica (Russian). fl. brown and yellow. May. I. linear- lanceolate, h. 1ft. Caucasus, 1826. (S. B. F. G. ser. ii. 243.) F. Sewerzowi (Sewerzow's). fl. drooping, forming a loose raceme ; perianth lurid purple, with a glaucous tint outside, greenish-yellow within, not at all tessellated, funnel-shaped ; seg- ments sub-equal, oblanceolate-oblong, sub-acute, with a raised keel outside down the lower half, which is more strongly marked in the outer three, and a yellow-green linear nectary at the top of the claw inside. I. five or six below the inflorescence, all except the lowest opposite or sub-opposite, sessile, oblong, obtuse, rather glaucous when young. Stem long, glaucous, terete. h. lift. Turkestan, 1873. A very curious plant. (B. M. 6371.) SYN. Korolkowia Sewerzowi (B. G. 760). FIG. 41. FRITILLARIA PUDICA. F. tenella (tender).* fl. yellowish, densely chequered with purple- brown ; perianth divisions oblong-elliptic, rounded at apex, the nectariferous division at base narrow-obl from one another, near two or three forming a whorl, rathe t base narrow-oblong. April. I. distant ly straight, linear-oblong ; the uppermost whorl, rather distant from the flower ; the lowest pair opposite or nearly so, the intermediate ones alternate. Stem stiff,' nearly straight. Maritime Alps, 1867. SYN. F. mm- tana (under which name it is figured in Fl. Ment. 66). There is a variety racemosa (figured in B. M. 952). . tuliplfolia (Tulip-leaved).* fl. glaucous blue, solitary, variable in size, nodding, tulip-shaped ; perianth segments sub-equal, FIG. 42. FRITILLARIA RECURVA. same purple outside ; the inner with a broad glaucous blue band down the back. March. I. elliptic, or elliptic-lanceolate, sub- acute, concave, sessile, straight; sheath very short, nerveless, c FIG. 43. FLOWERING STEM OF FRITILLARIA VERTICILLATA THUNBERGII. AN ENCYCLOPEDIA OF HORTICULTURE. 29 Fritillaria— continued. pale green ; upper linear-lanceolate. Stem slender, leafless below, but there clothed with appressed sheaths. Caucasus, &c., 1872. An elegant little plant, remarkable for the peculiar colour of its flowers. (B. M. 5969.) P. verticillata (verticillate). fl. white, at the base externally green, and within at the base sprinkled with small purplish spots ; solitary, axillary, or terminal, nodding ; segments tipped i, slightly pubescent apex. Ma y glaucous, somewhat crowded of the stem ; the lowest pair opposite, many-nerved, without a SJJULS , suiiuuy, axuiiuy, ur tei , __ 0 , ---„ - - with a green, callous, slightly pubescent apex. May. I. bright green, or slightly glaucous, somewhat crowded about the middle conspicuous middle rib, ovate, tapering towards the apex, which is rather blunt. Stem simple. Altaic Mountains, 1830. (B. M. 3083, under name of F. leucantfia.) F. v. Thunbergii (Thunberg's).* fl. greenish, mottled with pale purple, small, solitary, bell-shaped. I. long, narrow, linear, terminating in a tendril. China and Japan, 1880. See Fig. 43. F. Walujewl (Walujew's). fl. lead-coloured outside, within purple-brown, with whitish spots, large, solitary. I. linear, attenuated into a tendril ; those at the middle of the stem verti- cillate. h. 1ft. Central Asia, 1879. (B. G. 993.) FRITILLARY. See Pritillaria. FRCELICHIA (named in honour of Jos. Al. Froelich, a German physician and botanist, 1796-1841). OBD. Amarantacece. A genus containing about ten species of annual or perennial herbs, found in the warmer parts of the New World, from Texas to South Brazil. Flowers hermaphrodite, bracteate ; spikes sessile or stalked. Leaves opposite, sessile (radical stalked), ovate, linear- oblong or spathulate. They thrive in sandy loam and leaf mould. Propagated by seeds sown in heat, in spring. F. floridana (Florida), fl. white, tomentose or woolly, in ovate or oblong spikes. I. varying from linear to oblong; bracts mostly blackish, shorter than the woolly calyx. Stem, erect, simple or branched, h. 6in. to 3ft. Southern United States. (B. M. 2603, under name of Oplotheca floridana.) FROG HOPPER, FROG SPIT, or CUCKOO SPIT (Aphrophora spumaria). The insects secreting "Frog Spit," which often so disfigures plants, are com- monly known as Frog Hoppers. They belong to the same order as the Aphides, but to that section which has the whole of the upper wings leathery. There are two simple eyes or " ocelli," in addition to the two compound ones common to insects in general. It is the larvae of the FIG. 44. FROG HOPPER (APHROPHORA SPUMARIA), showing Larva, Frothy Secretion, and Perfect Insect. " hoppers " that produce Cuckoo Spit (see Fig. 44). The former are plentiful in spring, while the perfect insects abound most in the autumn. When the curious-looking larvae are deprived of the shelter afforded by this sugary secretion, they appear at first quite helpless, and, if the day be hot, are almost immediately killed. Hence an effectual mode of clearing plants of Cuckoo Spit, is to brush it off during sunshine, and the insects are at the same time destroyed. This pest attacks the young shoots of plants, choosing the axil of a leaf for its abode, and so damaging the shoot in some cases as to cause it to die or become malformed. Carnations, Pinks, and similar plants suffer greatly from its ravages. The following remedies, together with a frequent syringing with clear water, will be found effective : Tobacco Liquid. To a gallon of water add loz. of soft soap, and, when thoroughly dissolved, mix a tablespoonful of Corry and Soper's Nicotine, well syringing the plants. This is best applied lukewarm, and then well washed off with clean water in about an hour. Quassia. Steep ilb. quassia chips in a gallon of boil- ing water, and, when cold, add about the same quantity Frog Hopper, &c. — continued. of water. This should be applied with a syringe, and not washed off afterwards. It renders the stems of the plants nauseous, but does not injure them. Bitter aloes may also be used in a similar way. FRONDS. The leaves of palms and ferns are im- properly called Fronds. A true Frond is a combination of leaf and stem, as in many seaweeds and liverworts. FROST. The presence of Frost denotes a fall of temperature to a point at which still water becomes solidified; and its intensity is known by the contraction of another liquid used in the construction of the ther- mometer, which does not become frozen at any tempera- ture experienced in this country. Fahrenheit's scale is that in use for thermometers in Great Britain, and this places freezing point at 32deg., and boiling water at 212deg., the intervening space being divided equally into 180 parts, termed degrees. Similar divisions are made below freezing point, and the fall cf the liquid in use, which is either Mercury or Spirits of Wine, below this indicates, in so many degrees, the amount of Frost. On plants or other subjects unprotected, the action of Frost is from the top downwards towards the earth ; hence the value of, and safety frequently effected by, slight coverings that are non-conductors of heat, and consequently prevent its loss by radiation. The effect of Frost on plant life is not always in proportion to its intensity or the hardiness of the plant under what may be termed natural conditions. A spell of mild weather frequently places vegetation in a growing and tender state, especially in spring, when a sudden change to a few degrees of Frost may cause more destruction than a great deal at another time, when vegetation was more dormant. Frost acts most injuriously on anything wet, and is least destructive under the reverse condition. It is most successfully removed from plants too tender to withstand it, by adopting a method as gradual in effect as possible. Frost penetrates in a slow and natural way, and the greatest injury, if any, is caused when it is sud- denly displaced by heat, either from sunshine or artificially. Syringing is sometimes recommended with tender subjects that have become frozen, but it should be remembered that water which is itself much above the freezing point, will, when applied, cause a sudden change to anything that is considerably below. Frost has a most beneficial effect on all soils exposed to its influence, by penetrating and pulverizing them, so that what was before unwork- able and useless, is afterwards rendered fertile and amenable to the successful cultivation of various crops. FRUCTIFICATION. All those parts composing the fruit of plants. FRUIT. That portion of a plant which consists of the ripened carpels, and the parts adhering to them. FRUIT BORDERS. See Borders, Fruit. FRUIT GARDEN. See Garden. FRUIT-GATHERING. This cannot be too care- fully performed to avoid bruising, especially with those fruits having a tender skin. Dry weather should be selected at all times for the operation outside, and only such gathered as are at the proper stage. It sometimes becomes necessary, at the expense, however, of quality, to select Peaches and similar fruits several days before they are fully matured, to admit of packing and transmitting them to a distance. It is important, in gathering these, that the necessary pressure be equally applied by the whole of the fingers, and the fruits carefully placed bottom downwards on some soft material, in a shallow tray or basket. Nothing is more quickly bruised, or shows its consequent effect by decay, than thin-skinned ripe fruits. Those grown under glass are even more susceptible to injury in this way than hardier ones from outside. The keeping properties of Apples, Pears, and similar fruits, 30 THE DICTIONARY OF GARDENING, Fruit-gathering — continued. depend a great deal on careful gathering at the proper time, and subsequent storing ; an indication of the time is generally known by some of the fruit falling off, and by the condition of the pips. Fruit-gathering is always best performed by two persons, one to carry a proper basket, and the other to collect and place the fruit in it. FRUIT PROTECTORS. In the northern and other parts of the country, where Apricots, Peaches, &c., do not succeed in the open air, on account of the annual destruction of the flowers by frost, an erection of a FIG. 45. WALL-FRUIT PLANT PROTECTOR. glass Protector above them (see Fig. 45, a) may frequently be found of great value. The framework should be fixed on stout brackets, and glazed on a system that admits of the glass being removed in summer to allow rain and plenty of air to get to the trees. Netting, frigi- domo, or other coverings, may be suspended from the front of the glass Protector, in the direction shown by the dotted line. A portable Plant and Fruit Protector (see FIG. 46. P ANT AND FRUIT PROTECTOR. Fig. 46) is usually a very useful structure for growing any dwarf subjects in summer, and for storing plants, such as Strawberries, in winter. FRUIT-ROOM. A structure specially set apart in gardens for the storing and preservation of fruit. It should have a dry, airy position, and one affected as little as possible by fluctuations of temperature. Means to prevent the occurrence of these internally are introduced into the best-constructed Fruit-rooms by building with hollow walls, or by placing wood partitions round and above the shelves inside, and allowing a channel between them and the wall or roof for a free passage of air. The Fruit- room has usually a central walk and tiers of shelves on either side. The bottom of the latter should be of lattice- work, so as to allow plenty of air amongst the fruit. It is best to have heat at command, either by a small flue or stove, or, better still, by hot-water pipes, with means of applying or stopping it as desired. It is not advisable to give more heat than is sufficient to preserve a dry atmosphere and maintain a steady cool temperature. Fruit, when kept too warm, invariably shrivels, and, if Fruit-room. — continued. allowed to become very cold, any change to warmer air causes a condensation of moisture over the surface that is most injurious. It is considered to keep and retain a better flavour when in a dark place, and, to this end, movable shutters or blinds may be used for excluding light at the windows. All fruit should be stored in a dry state, and constantly examined during winter for the removal of any part showing signs of decay, as a single specimen allowed to become rotten will speedily affect all others with which it comes in contact. A small ven- tilator in the roof, provided with means for closing in severe frost or in very changeable weather, will be suffi- cient to cause a change of air and allow the exhalations from the fruit to escape. FRUTESCENT, FRUTICOSE. Shrubby. FRUTICULOSE. Of very dwarf shrubby habit. FUCHSIA (named after Leonard Fiichs, 1501-1566, a German botanist). OED. Onagracece. A genus comprising about fifty species of small shrubs or trees, natives, with comparatively few exceptions, of Central and Southern America, most of them having been introduced from Chili, Mexico, and Peru. Flowers usually drooping, on axillary one-flowered pedicels, which are sometimes dis- posed in racemes or panicles at the tops of the branches. Leaves generally opposite. The Fuchsia ranks as one of the most ornamental and popular of garden plants. The first plant is stated to have been brought to this country by a sailor, about the end of the last century. It was observed growing in his window by Mr. James Lee, a nurseryman, of the firm still existing under the name of Lee and Son, at Hammersmith, and, appearing to be a promising plant of an unknown kind, he succeeded, after some little trouble, in purchasing it. A stock was soon obtained, and the next year a large number of plants were distributed. The first representative of the genus had been discovered something like a century previous to this, but none had been introduced to this country. A few species arrived in succession up to about 1840, when the raising of varieties by seed seems to have commenced with that collected from species with long flowers, then recently received. From selection and care- ful fertilisation of the different flowers afterwards obtained, the numerous varieties now grown have descended, t Until about thirty years ago, these only included flowers with a red tube and sepals, and a blue or purple corolla, or those with creamy-white sepals and rose or pink corollas. Then a variety was raised having a white corolla, and subse- quently double flowers, in various colours, appeared. These all combined have produced the numerous varied selections of the present day. Several of the old species are still largely grown, the profusion in which the flowers are pro- duced fully compensating for their small size individually. Many are amongst the most beautiful of hardy or half- hardy plants for outside borders, while others of a more tender constitution are distinct and interesting sub- jects for culture inside. F. macrostema globosa, F. m. gradlis, and F. m. Riccartoni are representatives of the former class; and F. boliviano, F. corymbiflora, F. fulgens, F. microphylla, F. procumbens, and F. splendens, of the latter description. The use of the floriferous varieties for decorative purposes is well known, their graceful and usually compact habit rendering them general fa- vourites. Whether plants be required of a large size for exhibition, or others of smaller proportions for green- house or window decoration, centres of vases, and outside flower borders in summer, the Fuchsia is equally well adapted for one and all. Nothing is more attractive than these, in summer and autumn, in a greenhouse, if trained to the rafters or pillars, and their branches allowed to grow and droop naturally with the weight of the flowers. Propagation is effected by seeds for the raising of new varieties, and by cuttings for the perpetuation of those AN ENCYCLOPAEDIA OF HORTICULTURE. 31 Fuchsia — continued. already obtained, or for any of the species. Seeds ripen freely in summer on the majority of plants, if they are required. When ripe, they should be washed from the pulp surrounding them, and afterwards dried, being then either sown at once or kept until early the following spring. Cultivation. Cuttings of Fuchsias, obtained from the points of young growing shoots that are free from flowers, root readily at any season. The best are those pro- duced by old plants when started in early spring, and these may be grown very rapidly the following summer. If extra-sized specimens are desired, some cuttings should be inserted in autumn, and the young plants kept grow- ing all the winter. These will then be established in pots by the time the others are put in, and will, consequently, be considerably advanced. It is not impossible, under favourable conditions and proper treatment, to insert Fuchsia cuttings in October, and grow pyramidal plants some 6ft. high to flower the following July. This is not the plan usually adopted, old-established plants, under good cultivation, being available for use several years in succession, and are, as a rule, easier to manage and more certain to succeed. The general treatment in the early stages is similar at any season. The cuttings should be placed in light soil, about six in a Sin. pot, and plunged in a warm propagating frame. When rooted, they should be potted singly and kept in a light position, to induce a short-jointed sturdy growth. A temperature of about GOdeg., with a rise by sun heat, is one most suitable for the young plants in spring, and plenty of water should be applied, with a syringing in the morning and afternoon. Apart from inducing growth, this tends greatly to keep down insects. Many of the best-habited varieties will require but little stopping or training beyond placing a stick to the leading growth, and looping the others to it. Before the roots become much restricted for room, they should be placed in Sin. or Gin. pots3 in which any of the plants will flower if so desired, or they may then be transferred to pots of almost any ordinary size. Fuch- sias will succeed if proper attention be bestowed, in almost any soil; but where there is a choice, two parts loam to one of dried cow-dung, or any other good ma- nure, should be selected, well mixed, and used in a lumpy state. Plenty of air and a slight shade are necessary for those grown under glass in summer, par- ticularly when flowering. Liquid manure may be used with advantage so soon as the pots are filled with roots. Stock plants, or any required for growing another year, may be ripened outside, and stored at the approach of frost in any cool dry place. These should not be re- potted until new growth has commenced. Tender varie- ties grown in the open air should be at least one year old when planted, and they may be lifted and treated in a similar way.. The hardy ones are more safe if covered with a mound of ashes after being cut down for the winter. Those cultivated on rafters or pillars in a green- house should be planted out and allowed to grow at will, except a little thinning of the growths occasionally; they may be kept dry at the root in winter and pruned back to a couple of eyes at the base of each shoot. F. alpestris (mountain), fl. pale crimson; petals broadly cuneate, obtuse, deep purple. August. I. opposite, never ter- nate, oblong-lanceolate, acuminate, their margins slightly revo- lute and distantly sub-dentate, pubescent above and below. Branches round, densely pubescent, h. 20ft. Organ Mountains, 1842. In its native habitat, this plant has a rambling, sub-scan- dent habit, the branches being from 12ft. to 18ft. or 20ft. high. (B. M. 3999.) F. apetala (apetalous).* fl. drooping, liin. long; calyx red; lobes pale yellow ; pedicels sub-corymbose, shorter than the flowers. I. alternate, petiolate, ovate, acuminated, quite entire. h. 1ft. to 2ft. Peru. See Fig. 47. F. arborescens (tree-like), fl. rose-coloured, as are also the rachides and pedicels, numerous, in copiously branched terminal panicles. October to February. I. elliptic, attenuated at both ends. Mexico, &c. Small tree or tall shrub. (B. M.2620.) SYNS. F. paniculata and F. syringceflora (R. H. 1873, 311). Fuchsia — continued. F. bacillaris (rod-branched), fl. on slender drooping pedicels, springing from the copious upper and younger branchlets, and thus forming a rather large leafy thyrse, or compact panicle ; petals deep rose, sub-obcordate, spreading, nerved, bearing a blunt mucro at the retuse apex. Summer. I. opposite or ternate, lanceolate or ovate-lanceolate, entire or denticulo-serrate, small, nearly sessile, penninerved. Branches with reddish bark. Mexico A low-growing shrub. (B. M. 4506.) FIG. 47. FLOWERING BRANCH OF FUCHSIA APETALA. F. boliviana (Bolivian).* fl. rich crimson, 2in. to 3in. long, tube trumpet-shaped, h. 2ft. to 4ft. Bolivia, 1876. Of a compact branching habit, and free growth. (B. H. 1876, 150.) F. cocclnea (scarlet), fl., petals violet, obovate and convolute ; sepals scarlet, purple at the base, oblong, acute. Summer. I. small, ovate, obtuse, denticulated, on short hairy petioles, downy white underneath, nearly glabrous above, h. 3ft. Brazil (?). A very pretty bushy plant, with slender downy branches. (B. M. F. corallina (coral-red).» /. pendulous; corolla dark plum- colour ; sepals crimson. I. of greenish-crimson tint, the under side being of a dark crimson, opposite, in whorls of four or five. Young stems dark red ; old ones attaining a considerable height (20ft. in favourable spots in West of England) and thickness. (G. C. n. s., xx. 565, under name of F. exoniensis.) FIG. 48. FLOWERING BRANCH OF FUCHSIA CORYMBIFLORA. THE DICTIONARY OF GARDENING, Puchsia— continued. F. cordifolia (heart-leaved), fl. scarlet, green ; pedicels axillary, solitary, one-flowered ; calyx downy ; tube longer than ovate petals. August and September. I. opposite or ternate, cordate, acuminate, denticulate, nearly glabrous, h. 5ft. Mexico, 1840. (B. R. 1841, 70.) F. corymblflora (cluster-flowered).* fl. scarlet, nearly 2in. long, in long terminal clusters ; petals oblong-lanceolate, bifid ; sepals lanceolate, acute. Summer. I. large, opposite, oblong-lanceolate, almost entire, with a rosy midrib. Branches somewhat tetra- gonal, reddish and downy when young, h. 4ft. to 6ft. Peru, 1840. lee Fig. 48. (B. M. 4000.) FIG. 49. FLOWERING BRANCH OF FUCHSIA FULGENS. F. cylindracea (cylindrical-flowered), fl. scarlet. August, h. 2ft. Demerara, 1837. (B. B. 66.) F. decussate (decussate). A synonym of F. macrostema gracilis. F. dependens (drooping).* fl., tube soft scarlet ; corolla deeper in colour, in terminal leafy pendulous racemes. Summer. 1. whorled, ovate-acute, toothed, slightly pubescent above, paler and more decidedly hairy beneath. Chili, h. 2ft. to 4ft. FIG. 50. FLOWERING BRANCH OF FUCHSIA MACROSTEMA GLOBOSA. Fuchsia — continued. F. Dominiana (Dominy's). A garden hybrid, raised by Messrs. Veitch in 1852, between F. serratifolia and F. spectabilis. (F. d. S. 1004.) F. fulgens (glowing).* /. scarlet, 2in. long ; petals acutish, shorter than the ovate-lanceolate acute sepals ; racemes drooping at the apex. Summer. I. opposite, large, ovate-cordate, acute, denti- culated, glabrous, h. 4ft. to 6ft. Mexico, 1830. See Fig. 49. (B. M. 3801.') FIG. 51. FUCHSIA MACROSTEMA GRACILIS, showing Habit, and detached Single Flower and Leaf. F. macrantha (long - flowered), fl. rosy, green, apetalous; pedicels axillary, solitary ; tube of calyx long. April to June. 1. ovate-acute, entire, h. 3ft. Columbia, 1844. Plant do (B. M. 4233. wny. FIG. 52. FLOWERING BRANCH OF FUCHSIA MACROSTEMA PUMILA. AN ENCYCLOPAEDIA OF HORTICULTURE, 33 Fuchsia — continued. F. macrostema (large-stamened).* fl., calyx scarlet; lobes of calyx oblons, acute, exceeding the obovate spreading petals; pedicels axillary, nodding, longer than the flowers. July to October. 1. three in a whorl, ovate, acute, denticulated, on short petioles. JJrancb.es glabrous, h. 6ft. to 12ft. Chili, 1825. SYN. F. iiuKjellanica. F. m. conica (conical). /. pendulous, solitary ; petals purple, about equal in length to the scarlet sepals; tube of corolla conical. June to October. I. three or four in a whorl, ovate, flat, denticulated, glabrous ; petioles pubescent, h. 3ft. to 6ft. Chili, 1824. (B. K. 1062.) F. m. globosa (globose).* fl. globular ; petals purplish,riolet ; sepals purplish-red. Summer. I. ovate, acute, small, denticu- lated, h. 5ft. to 6ft. Chili. See Kg. 50. (B. M. 3364.) A seed- ling from this (F. riccartoni), one of the most handsome and the hardiest of all the outdoor Fuchsias, was raised at Riccarton, near Edinburgh, about 1830 ; it stands the winters, in many parts of Scotland, uninjured. F. m. gracilis (slender).* fl.., petals purple, convolute and retuse ; sepals scarlet, oblong, acute, exceeding the petals ; pedicels axillary, nodding, puberulous. Summer, autumn. I. opposite, glabrous, on long petioles, remotely denticulated. Branches finely pubescent, h. 6ft. to 10ft. Mexico, 1823. See Fig. 51. (B. R. 847 ; B. M. 2507, under name of F. deeussata.) There is a beautiful variegated form of this species. F. m. pumila (dwarf). A variety with flowers much like gracilis, but of dwarfer habit. See Fig. 52. F. magellanica (Magellan). A synonym of F. macrostema. FIG. 53. FLOWERING BRANCH AND SINGLE FLOWER OF FUCHSIA MICROPHYLLA. F. microphylla (small-leaved).* fl., petals deep red, retuse, toothed; calyx scarlet, funnel-shaped, with ovate - acuminate lobes ; pedicels axillary. Autumn. I. opposite, small, elliptic- oblong, acutish, toothed, glabrous. Branches pubescent, h. 2ft. Mexico. &c., 1828. See Fig. 53. (B. R. 1269.) F. paniculata (panicled). A synonym of F. arboretcens. F. penduliflora (pendent-flowered).* fl. in axillary and terminal clusters ; tube rich crimson, shaded with maroon, Sin. to 4in. long, trumpet-shaped. March. I. Sin. to 4in. long, ovate, acuminate, glabrous. Tropical America, 1879. (F. M. n. s. 412.) F. procumfoens (procumbent).* fl. small, erect ; tube yellowish, upper portion reflexed, blue. I. small, round. New Zealand, 1874. This exceedingly pretty little hardy creeper is principally grown on account of its large, oval, magenta-crimson berries, which remain on for months, and are very attractive during the winter. It is an admirable plant for a suspending basket. (B. M. 6139.) F. serratifolia (saw-edge-leaved), fl., petals scarlet, ovate- oblong ; sepals red, rather villous, l£in. long, exceeding the petals, somewhat tumid at the base ; pedicels axillary, drooping. Summer. I. in whorls of three or four, narrow, oblong, acute, glandularly toothed. Branches furrowed, reddish, h. 6ft. to 8ft. Peru, 1844. See Fig. 54. (B. M. 4174.) F. sessilifolia (sessile-leaved), fl. panicled ; petals red ; sepals pink and green. June. I. oblong-lanceolate, opposite or whorled, with terminal, pendulous, leafy racemes. Columbia, 1865. A pretty shrub. (B. M. 5907.) F. simplicicaulis (slightly-branched).* fl. rose-scarlet, one in the axil of each bract, pendent, numerous, handsome; petals ovate, acute, shorter than the sepals. October. I. ternate on the main stem and branches, 4in. to 5in. long, much smaller upon the pendulous, elongated, flowering branches ; ovate, ap- proaching to lanceolate, a little polished above, entire, on very short petioles ; those of the bracts sessile. Peru, 1858. A very beautiful plant. (B. M. 5096.) Vol. II. Fuchsia — continued. F. spectabilis (showy), fl., peduncles red, axillary, solitary, single-flowered, shorter than the leaves ; calyx bright red, tube swollen at the base ; petals deep red, large, nearly orbicular, waved, very patent, and pressed, as it were, upon the segments of the calyx. September. I. mostly ternate, 6in. to Sin. long, between ovate and elliptical, petiolate, not tapering at the base, acute or slightly acuminate at the points, obscurely ciliated, entire at the margin, or only having minute tooth-like processes, occasioned by the presence of small oblong glands ; petiole erect or spread- ing ; stipules triangular between the petioles, h. 2ft. to 4ft. Andes of Cuenca. 4375.) A moderate-sized handsome shrub. (B. M. FIG. 54. FLOWERING BRANCH OF FUCHSIA SERRATIFOLIA. F. splendens (splendid).* fl. scarlet and green, very showy. Early summer. I. ovate-cordate, pale green, h. 6ft. Mexico, 1841. This is one of the best and most distinct of the green- house species. (B. M. 4082.) F. syringseflora (Syringa-flowered). A synonym of F. arbores- cent. F. thymifolia (Thyme-leaved).* /. red; petals obovate-oblong, undulated ; calyx funnel-shaped, with oblong-acute lobes ; pedi- cels axillary. Summer. 1. about opposite, small, ovate or roundish-ovate, obtuse, nearly entire, downy above, nearly smooth beneath, h. 4ft. to 6ft. Mexico, 1827. (B. R. 1284.) F. triphylla (three-leaved).* fl. glowing cinnabar-red, about liin. long, in terminal, nodding racemes ; petals shorter than the sepals. I. small, liin. to Sin. long, purplish beneath, and tra- versed by numerous lateral veins that curve round and run into each other near the margin, h. 1ft. to 2ft. West Indies. A hand- some ornamental plant. (B. M. 6795.) F. venusta (charming). /., petals scarlet, oblong-lanceolate, acute, with undulated margins ; sepals purple, about the same shape and length as petals ; pedicels axillary ; upper ones race- mose. August. 1. opposite, and three in a whorl, elliptic, acute, entire, glabrous. Branches downy, h. 4ft. Central America. 1825. (F. d.S.538.) VARIETIES. These are very numerous, and are annually increased by others, representing a difference either in' form, size, or colour. Many of the old varieties can scarcely be excelled in their general floriferous habit ; but those more recently raised have a remarkable varia- tion in shape and length of flowers. The subjoined list includes a selection of the best for general cultivation. Varieties with Single Flowers. ALBA COCCINEA, tube cherry-coloured, sepals white, corolla rose, very distinct ; AURORA SUPERBA, rich salmon, corolla scarlet ; BEAUTY OF CLYFFE HALL, tube and sepals blush-white, corolla rich car- mine-pink, large and free ; BEAUTY OF SWANLEY, tube and se- pals white, corolla pink ; BEAUTY OF TROWBRIDGE, tube and sepals white, corolla light, good ; ELAND'S NEW STRIPED, tube and sepals scarlet, corolla plum-colour, striped rose ; CANNELL'S GEM, tube and sepals glowing red, corolla pure white, cupped, good ; CHARMING, tube and sepals red, corolla dark, showy and effective ; DELIGHT, tube and sepals crimson, corolla bell-shaped, pure white, free and good ; EARL OF BEACONSFIELD, rosy-car- mine, corolla deep carmine, one of the best (this is a very remarkable hybrid — the seed-bearing parent being F. fulgens —raised, several years ago, by Mr. lAing ; hitherto it has re- mained quite sterile) (see Fig. 55); ERECTA SUPERBA, a curious strong-growing garden hybrid, with flowers nearly erect (see Fig. 56) ; ETHEL, tube and sepals pure white, corolla violet ; GAZELLE, dark red, a floriferous variety, of good habit; GENERAL GARFIELD, rich crimson, sepals broad, reflexed, corolla bluish; GRAND DUCHESS MATUK, tube white, corolla THE DICTIONARY OF GARDENING, Fuchsia — continued. FIG. 55. FUCHSIA EARL OF BEACONSFIELD. rose, free and good ; INIMITABLE, sepals scarlet, broad, finely reflexed, corolla deep violet; JAMES LYE, tube and sepals red, corolla deep violet, good dark variety ; JEANNE D'Aiic, tube and sepals bright red, corolla pure white, extra good ; JULES FERRY, scarlet, corolla violet, mottled white; LADY Fio. 56. FLOWERING BRANCH OF FUCHSIA ERECTA SUPERBA. Fuchsia — continued. HEYTESBURY, white, corolla purple, free ; LORD BYRON, bright crimson, corolla very dark, bell-shaped ; LORD WOLSELEY, sepals broad, deep red, corolla rosy-crimson, margined purple, extra fine; LYE'S RIVAL, tube and sepals red, corolla violet- purple, very free; MARGINATA, white, corolla pink, margined with scarlet, of fine habit ; MIGNONNE, tube and sepals bright red, corolla pure white, one of the best of its class ; MR. J. HUNTLY, red, corolla plum-colour, showy dark variety; MRS. E. BENNETT, scarlet, corolla white, free ; MRS. J. LYE, tube and sepals white, corolla pink, habit branching; MRS. KING, white, FIG. 57. FLOWER OF FUCHSIA GIPSY QUEEN. corolla rich carmine, good ; MRS. MEIN, tube and sepals crimson-' scarlet, latter well reflexed, corolla white ; PINK PERFECTION, creamy-white, corolla violet ; ROSE OF CASTILE, sepals blush, corolla purplish, good old variety ; SEDAN, dark self-coloured variety, distinct and good ; STAR OF WILTS, cream, corolla violet, very fine ; BOMBAY, scarlet, corolla light purple, leaves crimson, bronze and white, very ornamental ; THOMAS KING, tube and sepals coral-red, corolla rich deep purple ; WAVE OF LIFE, sepals scarlet, corolla violet, a good old variety with yellow foliage FIG. 58. FLOWER OF FUCHSIA Miss LUCY FINNIS. Varieties with Double Flowers. ALFRED DUMESXIL, sepals clear crimson, corolla pale violet, long; AVALANCHE, carmine, corolla dark purple, one of the best doubles ; CHAMPION OF THE WORLD, coral-red, corolla dark purple, produces, when fully developed, the largest flowers of any variety known ; DE MON- TALIVET, rosy-carmine, corolla violet, flaked, small full flower ; GEM OF IPSWICH, tube and sepals coral-red, corolla purple, striped; GENERAL, sepals deep rose, much reflexed, corolla rich violet, striped; GIPSY QUEEN, sopals scarlet and much AN ENCYCLOPEDIA OF HORTICULTURE. 35 Fuchsia — continued. reflexed, corolla very full, violet (see Fig. 57) ; KING OP THE DOUBLES, scarlet, corolla purple, striped ; KINGSBURYANA, scarlet, corolla pure white, and remarkable for its size and shape ; LE CYGNE, tube and sepals crimson, corolla white, dwarf ; LIT ALICE, scarlet, corolla als crimson, corolla white, dwarf ; LITTLE la pure white, good ; MARKSMAN, sepals car- mine, corolla violet, habit good ; MARVELLOUS, tube and sepals rose, corolla blue, full ; MILNE EDWARDS, coral-red, corolla bluish- violet ; MINSTREL, rosy-crimson, corolla ivory-white, striped, full ; Miss LUCY FINNIS, tube and sepals coral-red, corolla pure white, large and very full (see Fig. 58) ; Miss L. VIDLER, sepals crimson, corolla violet, good ; MRS. H. CANNELL, sepals bright crimson, broad, corolla pure white, extra fine ; NELLY MORTON, scarlet, corolla white ; PIERRE JOIGNEAUX, sepals light red, corolla deep carmine, peculiarly formed. FUEL AND FURNACES. The necessary annual supply of Fuel for heating purposes forms a considerable and very important item in garden expenditure. The bulk of that used in old-fashioned flues was coal, either as supplied from the pit or mixed with cinders. Since the in- troduction and general adoption of heating by hot water, coke has become a substitute in most cases where it can be obtained. The use of coal in large boilers would soon choke the flues with soot, and this is one important objec- tion. Various gases are removed with the smoke in the manufacture of coal gas for burning, and the coke which remains contains about two-thirds of carbon, and forms the strongest heating combustible material available in quantity for horticultural purposes. The large pieces and those of medium size are of the best quality ; the small, generally termed " breeze," being much inferior, and sold at a lower price. Combustion is first caused by heat, and it increases as the heat becomes more intense. A certain quantity of Fuel consumed inside a Furnace, transmits the heat evolved by combustion to the boiler, &c., surrounding it, or, if allowed, a great part passes to the chimney, where it is completely wasted. A draught, caused by the opening of the damper and ash-pit door at the same time, is a means whereby much oxygen is admitted to the fire, and a passage opened for the escape of the ascending heat. This is one of the principal things to avoid by using the damper, so that the greatest possible amount of heat may be utilised, with, at the same time, an economical use of Fuel in proportion. FUGACIOUS. Lasting but a short time. FUGOSIA (named in honour of Bernard Cienfugos, a Spanish botanist of the sixteenth century). SYNS. Cien- fuegia, Cienfugosia, and Redoutea. OKD. Malvaceae. A genus comprising about a score species of greenhouse ever- green shrubs or sub-shrubs, natives of tropical America, Africa, and Australia. Flowers often yellow, surrounded by an outer calyx or involucel of six or more leaves, within which is a five-cleft calyx dotted over with black spots, and five oblique petals. Leaves entire or lobed, rarely partite. Fngosias succeed in a peat and loam soil, to which a little silver sand may be added. Propagated by cuttings, made in April or May, and inserted under a bell glass, in mild bottom heat. The species here de- scribed are those usually seen in cultivation. F. cuneiformis (wedge-shape-leaved). /. red ; petals about l£in. long, slightly tomentose ; involucre very small, minutely five or six-toothed, placed a little below the calyx ; peduncles short and thick. June to August. I. cuneate-oblong or broadly linear- obtuse, lin. to 2in. long, entire, thick and somewhat fleshy. h. 15ft. West Australia. Shrubby and glabrous. SYNS. Hilriscus cuneiformis and Lagunaria cuneiformis. F. hakeaefolia (Hakea-leavecl). fl. purple-lilac, large, on axillary peduncles, articulate, and often bearing a small bract about the middle ; petals to 2in. long. August. I. from deeply bi only, or the upper ones entire, often several pinnatifid to tri inches long, the whole leaf or lobes narrow-linear, somewhat fleshy, grooved above or almost terete, h. 8ft. to 10ft. South Australia, 1846. An erect shnib. (B. M. 4261.) SYNS. HHrisai* ultifidus (P. F. G. vii. 103). F. heterophylla (various-leaved), fl. yellow, with purple claws. June. I. ciliated, elliptical, entire, rarely trifld. h. 3ft, South America, 1822. SYN. Redoutea heterophylla. (B. M. 4218.) FULIGINOUS. Dirty brown, verging upon black. FULLER'S TEAZEL. See Dipsacua Fulloiinm. FULVOUS. Dull yellow, with a mixture of grey and brown. FUMANA. This genus is now included, by most authorities, under Helianthemum (which see). It forms a distinct section of that genus, and is characterised by its yellow flowers, narrow linear leaves, and erect habit. FUM ARIA (Spanish fumaria, from fumus, smoke ; in allusion to the disagreeable smell of the plant, or to its poetical name, Smoke of the Earth). Fumitory. Includ- ing Discocapnos and Platycapnos. OBD. Fumariaceae. A genus of perhaps a score species of annual (rarely peren- nial) herbs, usually branched, often climbing. Flowers small, in terminal or leaf-opposed racemes ; petals four, erect, conniving, the posterior gibbous or spurred at the base, the anterior flat, two inner narrow, cohering by their tips, winged or keeled at the back. Leaves much divided ; segments very narrow. No less than four species of this genus are found in Britain, but that described below is the only one worth growing. They are all of the easiest possible cultivation. Seeds may be sown in any ordinary soil, in spring. F. capreolata (tendrilled).* fl. whitish, tinged with dark purple ; spur compressed, blunt, short, mitre-formed ; racemes oblong. May to September. I. bipinnate ; petioles somewhat tendrilled. h. 4ft. Europe (Britain), Asia. F. formosa (beautiful). A synonym of Dicentra formosa. FUMARIACE2E. An order of herbs, now included, by Bentham and Hooker, as a tribe of Papaveracece. Flowers irregular ; sepals two, deciduous ; petals four, in two usually very dissimilar pairs, cruciate, irregular, one or both of the outer pairs often saccate or spurred, and the two inner frequently cohering at the apex so as to include the anthers and stigma. Leaves alternate, usually divided, exstipulate. Stems brittle. The species possess slight bitterness and acridity, and are natives of the temperate and warm regions of the Northern hemisphere and of Southern Africa. Five of the seven genera are: Adlumia, Corydalis, Dicentra, Fumaria, and Hypecoum. There are about 100 species. FUMIGATING. The process of destroying insects, principally Thrips and various Aphides, by means of tobacco smoke. Tobacco itself is seldom used for the operation, being too expensive. The various preparations supplied by nurserymen, or other firms of repute, as Fumigating mixtures, answer the same purpose most, effectually. They are manufactured by coaking brown paper, pieces of rag, &c., in a strong solution of tobacco juice, and afterwards drying them for use. Only that which is known to be of good quality should be used, as valuable plants may be either injured or destroyed by the effects of smoke from material prepared from a solution containing injurious ingredients. A dull, still evening is best for Fumigating in any house or frame, as the smoke does not then escape so quickly. The leaves of the plants should, if possible, be dry at the time. The amount of smoke that may be allowed with safety, must depend on the hardiness of the subjects to withstand it. As a rule, it is always safer to moderately fill the structure on one evening, and again on the follow- ing morning, or on two successive evenings, than to run the risk of applying too much at once, with the inten- tion of not repeating the operation. Fumigating may be practised with advantage, more as a preventative to the increase of insects, especially in spring. Care should be taken never to allow sunshine on a house with smoke inside, or tender plants are certain to be scorched. If still, rainy weather be selected, this is always avoided. Fumigators are manufactured of various descriptions, but are not much used in large establishments, an open iron vessel, having a cross handle and a grating at the bottom, or some other means of a similar kind, being employed with equally good results. Most of the pre- parations of tobacco paper now sold burn without the use of bellows; consequently, the operator neod not remain 36 THE DICTIONARY OF GARDENING, Fumigating— continued inside the house if the vessel containing the fire is placed near the door and carefully watched from the outside. The most important point is not to allow the material to name. Some Fumigators have a perforated lid to prevent this. A layer of damp moss may also be used for a similar purpose where there is danger of ignition. FUMITORY. See Fumaria. FUNERAL CYPRESS. A common name of Cu- pressus funebris (which see). FUNGI. A large class of cryptogams, distinguished from alga> more by habit than by any general character. FIG. 59. SPORES OP FUNGI (AGAIIICUS). " They are polymorphous, (often) ephemeral, annual or perennial, never green ; composed either of filaments, or of a loose or close tissue, pulpy or fleshy, rarely woody ; some- times furnished with peculiar vessels, containing a white, yellow, or orange milky juice. They grow above or under ground, on decomposing vegetable or animal matter, or are parasites on vast numbers of phaenoga- mous plants, and even on other Fungi. They are very rarely found on stones, or in water. In no particular can they be compared with phasnogams, having no organs comparable with leaves and flowers. Among acotyledons, they approach algae in their vegetation, and lichens in their fructification, but they have no fronds. Fungi have nearly the same geo- graphical distribution as lichens; they are met with in the tropics, and in the coldest regions of both hemispheres, at the top of the highest mountains, beyond phaenogamic 2 , FIG. 60. CAXDLESNUFF FUNGUS (XYLARIA HYPOXYLON). vegetation. The smell of Fungi is not gene- rally strong, and might be termed fungoid when it is mild and pleasant, like that of the Mousserori (Agaricus albellus). They are usually mild, and not very pleasant to the taste. Some are so extremely acrid that it would be dangerous to retain much of them in the mouth ; however, this acridity disap- pears when they are properly cooked. Many species, as Truffles, Morels, and certain Aga- rics, are edible, and much sought after. Many others, which strongly resemble the preceding, and which nearly all belong to the genera Ago Fungi — continued. ricus and Lactarius, are poisonous. To distinguish between edible and poisonous Fungi is a very difficult matter" (Leveille). With the exception of the Ergot of Eye or Wheat, Fungi are now seldom employed in medicine. Fig. 59 shows spores of a number of species of the huge genus Agaricus. Most of the species of this genus have colourless spores, but in some they are pink, brown, or black ; they are very variable in size ; some, also, are smooth, whilst a few are rough or nodulose — especially amongst those in which the colour is pink. Fig. 60 represents the Candlesnuff Fungus which is frequently seen on decaying wood. Some of the minute Fungi — such as the Peronospora infestans, which attacks the potato and other Solanaceous plants — are extremely de- structive, and amongst the worst pests against which the gardener has to contend. FUNXIA (named after H. Funck, 1771-1839, a German botanist). Plantain Lily. STNS. Hosta, Saus- surea (of Salisbury). ORD. Liliacece. All the species of this genus (according- to Mr. Baker) are described below. They are handsome, hardy, herbaceous plants. Flowers solitary in the axils of the bracts, forming a raceme. Leaves broadly ovate or cordate. Boots tuberous, fascicled. These fine plants are admirably adapted for the lawn, shrubbery border, beds, or rockwork ; and, when grown in pots, they form very effective subjects for the greenhouse or conservatory. They thrive best when the ground, in which they are to be grown, is deeply dug, and well enriched with rotten manure. Propagation may be effected by cutting the crowns through with a sharp spade during winter, or when they begin to start FIG. 61. FUNKIA SIEBOLDIANA. AN ENCYCLOPAEDIA OF HORTICULTURE. 37 I'unkia — continued. in spring. The latter season is, perhaps, the most suitable, as the mutilated parts then quickly heal. None but strong, healthy clumps should be divided, and each portion should comprise several crowns. The genus is in a state of much confusion, from the number of garden varieties and synonyms. F. Fortune! (Fortune's). fl., perianth pale lilac, funnel -shaped, IJin. long, the lanceolate ascending divisions half as long as the tube. July. I. six or eight to a stem ; blade cordate- ovate, cuspidate, pale green on both sides, conspicuously and persistently glaucous, furnished with ten or twelve arching veins on each side, between the midrib and the margin, h. lift. Japan, 1876. F. grandiflora (large-flowered).* jl. fragrant; perianth pure white, nearly 4in. long, dilated gradually from a tube }in. thick ; scape about 2ft. high, bearing a twelve to fifteen- flowered raceme. July to September. I. ovate, with a slightly cordate base, Sin. to 9in. long, 4iin. to 5in. broad ; petiole 1ft. long ; edges incurved until they meet. Japan. SVN. /'. japonica. (F. tl. S. 158 ; G. C. n. s., x. 629.) F. japonica (Japanese). A synonym of F. grandiflora, F. lancifolia (lance-leaved). fl., perianth white or with a lilac tinge, lin. to liin. long, dilated suddenly from a tube not more than a line in thickness ; scape Sin. or 9in. high, slender, with the • raceme hardly, if at all, overtopping the leaves ; raceme Sin. to 5in. long, six to ten-flowered. August. I. green, lanceolate, 4in. to 5in. long, l^in. to 2in. broad, narrowed gradually towards both ends ; petiole 6in. to 9in. long ; edges not incurved. Japan, 1829. (B. M. 3663.) F. albo-marc,inata only differs by its rather larger flowers and leaves, slightly variegated towards the edge with white. F. undulata is another garden form with irregu- larly frilled or crisped leaves, which are copiously variegated with streaks or large patches of white. F. ovata (ovate).* /., perianth bluish-lilac or white, liin. to 2in. long, dilated suddenly from a tube £in. in thickness ; scape 1ft. to lift, long, overtopping the leaves ; raceme ten to fifteen- flowered. May. I. ovate, 5in. to 9in. long, Sin. to 5in. broad ; petiole 4in. to 12in. long ; edges not incurved. Japan, Northern China and Eastern Siberia, 1790. The commonest and best-known species. SYN. Hemerocallis ccerulea. (B. M. 894.) F. o. marglnata (margined).* A variety in which the leaves are broadly margined with white. F. Sieboldiana (Siebold's).* Jl., perianth white, with a pale lilac tinge, 2in. to 2iin. long ; scape with the raceme not overtopping the leaves ; racemes 4in. to 6in. long, ten to fifteen-flowered. June. 1. glaucous, broadly cordate-ovate, lOin. to 12in. long, Tin. to Sin. broad ; petiole Sin. to 12in. long, edges not incurved. Japan, 1836. See Fig. 61. (B. R. 1839, 50.) FIG. 62. FUNKIA SUBCORDATA. F. subcordata (sub-cordate).* /., perianth pure white, 4in. to 4iin. long, gradually dilated from a tube iin. in thickness; scape lift, to 2ft. long ; raceme nine to fifteen-flowered. August. I. cordate-ovate, pale green, 6in. to 9in. long, 3in. to 5in. broad ; petiole 6in. to Sin. long. Japan, 1830. SV.NS. l/,;ncr<>caltis allm (A. B. R. 194), //. cordata, 11. japonica (13. M. ginea. See Fig. 62. FURCATE. Forked. . 1453), //. planta- (named in honour of A. F. Fourcroy, 1755-1809, a celebrated French chemist). SYN. Four- croija. OLID. Amaryllidece. A genus of about fifteen species of very noble greenhouse or stove plants, closely allied to Agave, but with horizontally spreading perianth segments. For culture, &c., see Agave. Fttrcraea — continued. F. Bedinghausii (Bedinghausen's).* fl. greenish ; scape 12ft. to 15ft. high ; branches drooping. I. thirty to fifty in a rosette, lanceolate, about 3ft. long ; margin minutely denticulate. Trunk Sft. high. Mexico, 1860. SYNS. Roezlia regia, Yucca aryyrophylla, Y. Parmentieri, Y. Toneliana. FIG. 63. FURCR^EA CUBE.NSIS, showing Inflorescence, with Bulbils developed instead of Flowers. F. cubensis (Cuban).* fl. greenish. Autumn. I. twenty-five to thirty in a rosette, bright green, rigid in texture, channelled and smooth down the face, generally scabrous on the back, the end a minute brown, scarcely pungent point ; edge armed with regular hooked brown prickles. Tropical America, 1879. One of the commonest and best known of all the species. See Fig. 63. F. c. inermis (unarmed). This plant differs from the ordinary F. cubensis by its less rigid leaves, and by the total or almost entire suppression of the marginal teeth, which in the type are very close and large, and armed with pungent horny brown spines. Tropical America. (B. M. 6543.) F. elegans (elegant).* fl. greenish-white; scape 20ft. to 25ft. high. I. forty to fifty in a rosette, lanceolate, 5ft. to 6ft. long ; prickles brown, hooked, horny. Mexico, 1868. Plant stemless. SYNS. F. Ghiesbreghtii, F. pugioniformis. F. flavo-viridis (yellow-green). /., perianth pale yellowish- green ; tube incorporated with the obtusely triangular ovary ; scape 12ft. to 14ft. high, naked below, but bracteated above, forming a long, loose, racemose panicle. I. radical, more or less spreading, and somewhat tortuose, lanceolate, pungently acumi- nate, spinulose at the margin, h. 14ft. Mexico, 1846. (B. M. 5163.) F. foetida (fiutid). A synonym of F. giyantea. F. Ghiesbreghtii (Ghiesbreght's). A synonym of F. elegans. F. gigantea (gigantic).* fl. milk-white inside, greenish on the back outside ; scape 20ft. to 30ft. high. I. forty to fifty in a dense 38 THE DICTIONARY OF GARDENING, Furcraea — continued. rosette, lanceolate, 4ft. to 6ft. long; margin usually entire. Trunk 2ft. to 4ft. high. South America, 1690. SYN. F. foelida. See Figs. 64 and 65. FIG. 64. FURCK^A GIGANTEA. longaeva (long-lived).* fl. whitish ; scape 30ft. to 40ft. long ; ranches spreading, compound. I. numerous, in a dense rosette, inceolate, 4ft. to 5ft. long. Tri ' ' . — . . - brand lanceolate, '4ft. to "5ft. long. Trunk wild state, said to reach 40ft. to 50ft., in height. Mexico,' 1833. Ihis is probably the handsomest species of the genus; it is per- fectly hardy in the open at the Scilly Isles, where it has W quently flowered. (B. M. 5519.) F. pugioniformis (dagger-shaped). A synonym of F. elegans. F\S?yoa> (Sell?'s)- /• wWte, tinged with green; scape 15ft. to 16ft. long ; panicle 3ft. broad. I. thirty to forty in a dense rosette, lanceolate, 3ft. to 4ft. long; margin with upcurved brown ntMi about Jin. long. Trunk none or scarcely any. (B. M. 6148.) F. undulata (waved).* /. all drooping, usually in pairs ; perianth pale green ; segments narrow-oblong, obtuse, obtusely keeled down the centre. November. I. forming a flat crown 3in. in diameter, not very numerous, strict, spreading, thick, ensifonn long acuminate, terminated by a pungent chestnut- brown spine obscurely keeled at the back, which is scabrid ; margin sub- umlulate, with incurved chestnut-coloured stout spines. Stem none, or very short, h. 10ft. Mexico, 1868. (B. M. 6160.) FURFURACEOUS. Scaly, mealy, scurfy. FURNACES. See Fuel and Furnaces. FURZE. See Ulex europseus. FUSIFORM. Spindle-shaped, like the root of a Carrot. GJERTNERA (named after Dr. Joseph Gaertner, a celebrated German botanist, 1732-1791). STNS. Frutesca, Sykesia. ORD. Loganiaceco. A genus containing about twenty-five species of handsome stove glabrous shrubs or trees, natives of West Africa, Mauritius, Madagascar, and the Malayan Islands and Peninsula. Flowers white, green, or rose-coloured ; in some species, not unlike those of the common Privet, and arranged in a similar manner ; in others, disposed in compact terminal heads ; and in others in corymbs ; calyx usually very minute. Leaves opposite, entire, coriaceous, penniveined. They thrive in a mixture of loam and peat. Cuttings of firm shoots, made in April, will root, if inserted in sand, under a hand glass, in heat. The species here described are those best known in cultivation. G. obtusifolia (obtuse-leaved), fl. composed of five petals, the lower two more expanded, the upper three completely reflexed, the uppermost one has a rosy tinge round a yellowish base, the other four are white ; fragrant. March. 1. oblong, obtuse. h. 20ft. China, 1810. A large shrub. G. racemosa (racemose).* fl. somewhat resembling 0. oUusifolia, but larger, more beautiful, and exceedingly fragrant ; exterior petals oblong. April. I. ovate-oblong, acute. Various parts of India, 1793. A very handsome species. (A. B. R. 600.) GAG-EA (named after Sir Thomas Gage, a British botanist, who died at Borne in 1820). ORD. Liliacece. A genus of about a score species of hardy bulbs, natives of Europe, temperate Asia, and Northern Africa; formerly FIG. 65. BRANCH OF INFLORESCENCE, AND SINGLE FLOWER, OF FURCR^A GIGANTKA. AN ENCYCLOPEDIA OF HORTICULTURE. 39 Gagea — continued. included under Ornithogalum. Flowers greenish-yellow, on a scape, in a terminal bracteated umbel. Leaves radical, linear. The species closely resemble each other; but few of them, however, are seen in gardens. For culture, see Ornitliogalum. O. lutea (yellow).* Yellow Star of Bethlehem, fl. three or four in a flat raceme, almost contracted into an umbel ; the leaf-like bracts as long as the pedicels or longer ; perianth segments yellow, with a green back, very spreading, narrow-oblong. Spring. I. one, or very rarely two, linear, pointed and curved like those of a Tulip. Stem slender, rarely 6in. high. Europe and Russian Asia, except the extreme North ; also occurring in several parts of England, and, but rarely, in the Lowlands of Scotland. (Sy. En. B. 1522.) G. stenopetala (narrow-petaled). fl. in umbels ; perianth pale yellow, deeply six-parted. March. I., root ones solitary, glau- cous, revolute, linear-lanceolate, acute, strongly three-nerved ; scape leaves opposite, lanceolate, acute, sharply keeled, glaucous, pubescent, and fringed with long hairs. Europe. (S. B. F. G. 177, under name of G. glauca.) GAGNEBINA (named in honour of P. Gagnebin, a botanical writer of the seventeenth century). OBD. Legu- minosce. An elegant, unarmed, stove evergreen shrub, closely allied to Mimosa (which see for cultivation). G. tamariscina (Tamarix-like). fl. yellow ; spikes crowded at the top of the branches, disposed in a kind of racemose corymb. I. with about twenty pairs of pinnae, each pinna bearing about thirty pairs of leaflets. A. 6ft. Mauritius, 1824. GAILLARDIA (named in honour of M. Gaillard, a French patron of botany). OBD. Composites. A genus of very ornamental hardy annual or perennial herbaceous plants, natives of North and extra-tropical South Ame- rica. Flower-heads yellow or purple, 2in. across, single, and supported on naked stalks; ray-florets three to five- toothed, often two-coloured ; receptacle furnished with filiform bristles between the florets. Leaves sometimes pinnatifid, but usually entire or obscurely toothed, lance- shaped and rough ; the cauline ones sessile. There are about eight species, all thriving in a good light friable soil, in masses. Propagation may be effected by cuttings, in autumn or spring ; also by division, in the latter season. In cold localities, the perennial species fre- quently die in winter: in this case, seeds should be sown on a mild hotbed, in February or March. The best FIG. 66. FLOWERING BRANCH OF GAILLAJIDIA ARISTATA GRANDIFLORA. Gaillardia— continued. method of propagating the annuals is by cuttings, which are readily obtainable, as these form far superior plants to those procured from seed. G. amblyodon (blunt-toothed).* fl.-heads terminal, peduncled; ray -florets deep blood-red, twelve to fourteen, spreading ; limb cuneate-oblong, obtusely three-lobed ; disk-florets short. October. I., radical ones sub-spathulate ; cauline ones semi-amplexicaul, oblong, sub-acute, coarsely toothed beyond the middle, usually contracted below it. h. 2ft. to 3ft. Texas, 1873. Annual. (B. M. 6081.) G. arlstata (awned).* fl.-heads yellow, with prominent exserted reddish styles in the disk, lin. to 3in. across. Autumn. I. lanceo- late, entire, or remotely toothed, h. IJft. United States, 1812. Perennial. (B. M. 2940.) There are several very handsome varieties of this species ; notably grandiflora (see Fig. 66) (On., Dec. 13, 1884), and grandiflora maxima. G. pulchella (neat).* fl.-heads larger than those of the first- named species ; ray-florets crimson, tipped with bright yellow. Autumn. 1. coarsely and sparsely toothed. &.2ft.to3ft. Perennial. (B. M. 1602, under name of G. bicolor.) A new form, named Lorenziana, is very handsome and unique in appearance : the ray and disk -florets develop themselves into tubular funnel- shaped three to five-lobed florets, and form handsome flower- heads, which are admirably adapted for cutting. Another variety, nana, is a fine free-flowering form of good compact habit, and with large flowers, which are reddish-crimson, oor- dered with citron-yellow. G. p. picta (painted).* A form with somewhat succulent leaves, and the more or less subulate fimbrillae of the receptacle shorter and stouter. (B. M. 3368, under name of G. bicolor Drum- mondii.) The following are me_re garden names for slightly-varying forms of the foregoing species : Bosselari, cnronata, hybrida, Loiselli, Richardsoni, and Telemachi. G. pinnatifida is a species not often seen in cultivation. GALACTIA FINNATA. A synonym of Barbieria polyphylla. GALACTITES (from gala, galaktos, milk; in allu- sion to the veins of the leaves being milk-white). OBD. Composites. A genus of hardy annual or biennial erect herbs, nearly allied to Cnicus, from which it differs chiefly in the outer florets of the flower-head being sterile and larger than the others, as in Centaurea. Leaves pinnatifid, with spiny - pointed segments, spotted with white above, and covered with cotton - down below. There are three species, all inhabiting the Mediterranean region. They thrive in any common garden soil, and may be propagated by seed, sown in the flower border, in March or April. The species here described is the one best known to cultivation. G. tomentosa (woolly), fl.-heads purple, pedunculate. July. h. lift. 1738. This species is remarkable among the thistles for having a milky juice, similar to that so frequently found in the Chicory group. GALACTODENDRON (from gala, milk, and den- dron, a tree; in reference to the copious milky juice). Cow-tree. OBD. Urticacece. This genus is now usually referred to Brosimum. It is only met with in botanic gardens. G. Utile (useful), the Palo de Vaca, first described by Humboldt, is a native of Venezuela, where it forms large forests, and attains a height of upwards of 100ft., with a smooth trunk, 6ft. or 8ft. in On incisions being made supply of milky sap, employed by them as a substitute for milk. (B. M. 3723, 3724.) diameter. On incisions being made in the trunk, the natives obtain an abundant supply of milky sap, which is extensively GALANTHUS (from gala, milk, and anthos, a flower, in reference to the milk-white flowers). Snowdrop. OBD. Amaryllidece. A well-known genus, containing three species of hardy bulbous plants. It is distinguished from Leucoium principally in having the three inner segments of the perianth shorter than the outer. Snowdrops are well-known and general favourites, on account of the modest beauty displayed by their flowers at the early season in which they appear ; hence, no word of recom- mendation is needed to insure their cultivation, which is of the simplest description, as the roots thrive in almost any soil or position outside. When once planted, it is best to let them take care of themselves, as lifting has a tendency to dry the bulbs, which is not desirable if it can be avoided. Snowdrops are cheap and attractive subjects for naturalising in grass, by woodland drives, &c., 40 THE DICTIONARY OF GARDENING, G-alanthns— continued. as, if planted where the soil is suitable, and left alone, they increase rapidly, and annually appear to flower almost suddenly, about the beginning of February. Pot Culture. If a number of roots are purchased with the ordinary Dutch bulbs in autumn, and about eight placed in a Sin. pot, an interesting addition may be ob- Galaiithus — continued. FIG. 67. FLOWERS OF GALANTHUS ELWESII. tained for greenhouse decoration in January. Snowdrops will not bear forcing, and, if it is attempted, failure in securing flowers is almost certain. After potting, they should be covered with ashes until growth commences. The pots should then be removed and kept in a light FIG. 69. FLOWERS OF GALANTHUS NIVALIS IMPERATI. position in a cold frame, giving plenty of air at all times when the weather is mild. Both the single and FIG. 68. GALANTHUS NIVALIS. FIG. 70. FLOWERS OF GALANTHUS NIVALIS REFLEXUS (CRIMEAN SNOWDROP). AN ENCYCLOPAEDIA OF HORTICULTURE. Oalanthus— continued. double forms seldom fail to flower when treated in this G. Elwesii (Elwes's).* /?., petcils (inner perianth segments) con- stricted above the middle, slightly notched at the apex, and marked with green spots at the base. I. twisted within the sheath, not folded, h, 6in. to 12in. Asia Minor, 1875. A very distinct large-flowered form, and said to be the finest of the genus. (B. M. 6166.) Q. nivalis (snowy).* Common Snowdrop, fl. with white perianth segments, the three inner streaked with green on the inside, and having a spot of the same colour on the outside, pendulous. I. keeled, linear, obtuse, usually in twos. Bulb ovate, h. 4in. to 6in. Europe. This well-known plant has a number of more or less distinct varieties. Jmperati is a very large form, with outer segments of the flower very abrupt and narrow at the base (see Fig. 69) (G. C. n. s., xi. 237) ; latifolius ( = Redoutei) differs only in its very broad strap-shaped leaves (G. C. n. s., xv. 404) ; major ; redexus, with outer perianth segments reflexed (see .Fig. 70) ; FIG. 71. FLOWERS OF GALANTHUS NIVALIS VIRESCENS. Shaylockii (G. C. n. s., xi. 343) ; and virescens, with inner segments all over green (see Fig. 71), are varieties. There is also a well- known double form. G. plicatus (folded).* fl. somewhat similar to those of G. nivalis, but sometimes smaller, and of a greenish hue. I. with a longi- tudinal fold on both sides near the edge, whence the specific name. h. 6in. Crimea, 1818. This rare species is, with the ex- ception of the flower, larger in all its parts than G. nivalis, but is not, however, so pretty. (B. M. 2162 ; G. C., n. s., xi. 236.) GALATELLA. This genus is now included, by Ben- tham and Hooker, under Aster. GALAX (from gala, milk ; referring to the milk- white flowers). SYNS. Erythrorhiza and Solenandra. ORD. Diapensiacece. An elegant little hardy herbaceous perennial, particularly suitable for growing on rockwork. It thrives best in a compost of nearly all leaf mould, rather damp, with the addition of a small quantity of loam and charcoal, but will succeed in almost any soil, in a cool, damp place. Propagated by divisions of well- grown clumps, in autumn. CK aphylla (naked-stemmed).* fl. white, small, numerous, pro- duced at the apex of the slender, elongated, naked scape, in a loose, spicate raceme. July. I. round-cordate, thickly crenate- dentate, veiny, thin, but persistent over winter, rather shining, long-petioled. h. Sin. to 6in. North America, 1756. See Fig. 72. (B. M. 754 ; A. B. B. 343, under name of Blandfordia cordata.) Vol. II. FIG. 72. GALAX APHYLLA, showing Habit and detached Inflorescence. GALAXIA (from gala, galaktos, milk ; referring to the juice). ORD. Iridece. A genus of two or three species of very pretty greenhouse bulbous plants, natives of the Cape of Good Hope. Flowers, perianth funnel- shaped, with a slender terete tube, and a six - parted, equal limb of oblong, wedge-shaped, spreading segments. Leaves linear or rather broad, sheathing at the base. The species will succeed out of doors, planted in a warm, sheltered spot, if afforded some slight protection in winter ; it is, however, safer to grow them in pots, in a cool greenhouse. They are of easy culture in sandy peat, with a little fibry loam added. Propagated by offsets. G. gramlnea (grass). /. light yellow ; spathe one-valved, one- flowered. July. I. linear, filiform, dilated at base. 1795. Plant almost stemless. (B. M. 1292.) G. ovata (ovate).* fl. dark yellow ; spathe one - valved, one- flowered. May to September. I. oblong. 1799. Plant almost stemless. (B. M. 1208.) GALBANUM. The name of an aromatic gum-resin issuing from the stems of several plants of the Carrot family, Ferula galbaniflua and F. rubricaulis, &c. GALEANDRA (from ;/"/''"• a helmet, and aner, andros, a stamen ; referring to the crested male organ on the top of the column). ORD. Orchidece. A genus of about half-a-score species of stove terrestrial orchids (included by some authors under JEulophia), natives of tropical America, from Brazil to Mexico ; having slender, erect, fleshy, jointed stems, from the tops of which the flower-spikes are produced, just after the growth is finished. Leaves narrow, lanceolate, two-ranked, sheath- ing. The species are somewhat difficult to cultivate, and require strict attention during the growing season, in order to keep the leaves free from the attacks of Red Spider and Thrips. This may be done by syringing them twice a day in warm weather. Galeandras should be cultivated in pots of peat, in the East-Indian house. When growing, a plentiful supply of water should be given ; but while at rest, they should be placed near the glass, in a Cattleya house, and kept moderately moist. G. Baueri lutea (Bauer's yellow).* /. yellow, beautiful, in drooping racemes ; lip with parallel purple lines near the apex, which has wavy margins. June to August. I. veined, lance- shaped. Stems cylindrical, h. 6in. Guiana, 1840. A very rare but desirable species. (B. M. 4701.) pink and June to August, h. lift. South America, 1844. G. cristata (crested), fl. pink and dark purple ; spike drooping. ift. 42 THE DICTIONARY OF GARDENING, Galeandra— continued. G. Devoniana (Duke of Devonshire's).* ft. white, elegantly pen- tilled with pink, about 4in. across, produced in pendent spikes from the top of the pseudo-bulbs. Blossoms at various times of the year, and remains a considerable period in full beauty. h. 2ft. South America. (B. M. 4610.) G. Harveyana (Harvey's), ft., sepals and petals sepia-brown ; lip light yellow, with a tuft of h disk. Tropical America. ., hair over the anterior part of the G. minax (projecting), fl. yellowish-copper, whitish, purple. June. Columbia, 1874. G. nivalis (snowy).* fl. in nodding racemes, each about 2in. long, with narrow reflexed rich olive-coloured segments, having a large funnel-shaped white lip, marked with a central violet blotch. Tropical America. A beautiful and rare species. (G. C. n. s., xvii. 537.) GALEATE. Helmeted. GALEGA (from gala, milk ; referring to its supposed property of increasing the milk of animals which feed upon the plants). Goat's Eue. ORD. Leguminosce. A genus comprising three species of ornamental, hardy, smooth, erect perennial herbs, natives of Southern Europe and Western Asia. Flowers white or blue, disposed in axil- lary and terminal racemes. Leaves impari- pinnate ; leaf- lets entire, veined ; stipules somewhat sagittate. The species succeed in almost any soil, but will well repay for liberal treatment. They succeed in rich loam, with a sunny situation, and can remain year after year in one position. It is, however, advisable to divide them every few years. Propagation is effected by dividing the roots into several strong pieces, and replanting them in a deeply dug soil, and in a position where they are in- tended to flower; or by seeds, sown in the open ground, in spring. G. officinal is (officinal).* fl. blue ; racemes longer than the leaves. Summer. I. lanceolate, mucronate, glabrous ; stipules broad-lanceolate, h. 3ft. to 4ft. South Europe, 1568. G. o. albiflora (white-flowered)* is a pretty white-flowered form. h. 2ft. to 3ft. Persia, 1823. SYN. G. pei-sica. FIG. 73. QALEOA ORIENTAI.TS, showing Flowering Stem and detached Single Flower. G. orientalis (Eastern).* ft. blue ; racemes longer than the leaves Summer and autumn. I. ovate, acuminated, smooth ; stipules Galega — continued. broad-ovate. h. 2ft. to 4ft. Caucasus, 1810. This species may be distinguished by its creeping roots and simple, flexuous stems. See Fig. 73. (B. M. 2192.) G. persioa (Persian). A synonym of 0. oficinalis albiflora,. GALEOBDOLON. Included under Lamium. GALEOGLOSSUM. A eynonym of Prescottia (which see). GALEOLA (a diminutive of galea, a helmet; in al- lusion to the form of the labellnm). Including Cyrtosia, Erythrorchis, &c. ORD. Ordiidece. A genus of about a dozen species of leafless epiphytes, sometimes climbing to a considerable extent. They are natives of India, Japan, the Malayan Archipelago, New Caledonia, and Australia. Flowers in terminal, usually pendulous, panicles. Some of the species are decidedly showy ; but, probably, none are successfully cultivated in this country. GALEOFSIS (the old Greek name used by Dios- corides, from gale, a weasel, and opsis, appearance; in allusion to the likeness of the flower to a weasel's snout). SYN. Tetrahit. ORD. Labiates. This genus, according to some authorities, contains twelve species of hardy, erect, or slightly decumbent, annual herbs; whilst others reduce the number of species to three. They are natives of Europe and West Asia. Flowers red, yellow, or variegated, sessile ; calyx nearly regular, with five pointed teeth; corolla with a tube larger than the calyx. The species thrive in any ordinary garden soil, and are propagated by seed. G. Ladanum (Ladanum). ft. purple, six to ten together, in dense whorls in the upper axils, the upper ones forming a ter- minal head. Summer and autumn. I. shortly stalked, narrow- ovate or lanceolate, coarsely toothed, h. Bin. to 9in. This species varies considerably in the breadth of leaf, in the degree of hairiness, and in the size of the flowers. (Sy. En. B. 1074, 1075.) G. versicolor (various-coloured). /. yellow, with a purple spot on the lower lip, large. Summer and autumn. I. stalked, ovate, very pointed, and coarsely toothed, sidered by some authors to be : common cornfield weed in Britain. Stem hispid. This is con- , variety of G. Tetrahit, a (Sy. En. B. 1077.) GALEOFSIS (of Mcench). A synonym of Stachys. GALEOTTIA. Included under Zygfopetalum. GALE, SWEET. See Myrica Gale. GALIACEJE. A tribe of Rubiaceai. GALINGALE. longfus (which see). GALIFEA (native name of one of the species). ORD. Rutacece. A genus comprising about twenty species of stove evergreen trees or shrubs, natives of South-eastern tropical America. Racemes axillary or terminal, simple or compound. Leaves alternate, petiolate, one to seven- foliolate ; leaflets entire, rarely serrated, full of pellucid dots. For culture, see Erythrochiton. A common name of Cyperus G. macrophylla stalked interrupte glabrous, obtuse, somewhat leathery, 6i B (large-leaved), ft. pale rose or white, in a d spike or raceme. I. unifoliolate, elliptic, to 12in. long. h. 2ft. razil. (B. M. 4948.) G. odoratissima (very sweet-scented), fl. white, very fragrant, in many-flowered, sub-sessile, short, axillary spikes. May. I. deep green, broad, obovate, obtuse, shortly petiolate. h. 2ft. Eio Janeiro. (B. R. 1420.) G. trifoliate (three-leaved), fl. greenish, small, corymbose. September. I. trifoliate, smooth, h. 6ft. Guiana. GALIUM (Gallon, the old Greek name used by Dios- corides, from gala, milk ; the flowers of one of the species having been used to curdle milk). Bedstraw. ORD. Rubiacece. An extensive genus of annual or perennial herbs, spread over the whole of the temperate regions of the New, as well as of the Old World, especially abundant in Europe and Northern Asia, penetrating also into the tropics, but there chiefly confined to mountainous districts. The species number 150, and are, for the" most part, uninteresting weeds ; the following, however, may be employed to cover rockwork : maritinum, purpureum, rubrum, and uliginosum. Flowers white, yellow, or (in AN ENCYCLOPAEDIA OF HORTICULTURE. Galium — continued. exotic species) red, in axillary or terminal trichotomous cymes or panicles, sometimes reduced to small clusters; calyx completely combined with the ovary ; corolla rotate, the tube scarcely perceptible, with four spreading lobes. The annuals require to be sown in any ordinary border, in March ; the perennials should be divided at the same time. The genus is represented in the British flora by eleven species, the flowers of one of which — the golden- yellow-flowered Lady's Bedstraw, G. verum — are used in some districts to curdle milk, hence one of its popular names, Cheese Rennet. GAIiIiS. Excrescences of various kinds, produced by the deposit of the eggs of insects in the bark or leaves of plants. What is commonly known as the Oak Apple is caused by a Gall Fly (Andricus terminalis). When cut longitudinally, the Gall is seen to inclose a great number of granules, each containing a minute larva. The Rose Bedeguar, frequently seen on the Wild Rose, is the work of another Gall Fly (Rhodites rosce). Cynips aptera, a hymenopterous wingless fly, causes large roundish Galls on the roots of the Oak, Eloi, Beech, and other trees. Illustrations of the insect and the Galls it makes are given in the " Gardeners' Chronicle," n. s., i. 19. GALPHIMIA (an anagram of Malpighia). ORD. Malpighiacece. This genus comprises about a dozen species of handsome stove evergreen shrubs, inhabitants of tropical and sub-tropical North America and Brazil. Flowers yellow or reddish, in terminal racemes. Leaves opposite, small. Galphimias thrive in a compost of peat and loam. Cuttings, made of the ripened wood, will root in sand, under a bell glass, in heat. G. glandulosa (glandular), fl. yellow ; petals oblong. April. I. oval-lanceolate, smooth ; petioles with two large glands at top. h. 3ft. to 4ft. Mexico, 1824. Q. glauca (glaucous).* fl. yellow. I. ovate, obtuse, smooth, glaucous beneath, and with one tooth on each side at the base ; petioles without glands. Mexico, 1830. (B. H. 8, 45.) G. hirsuta (hairy), fl. yellow. September. I. ovate, acute, on short footstalks, hairy on both surfaces, h. 6ft. Mexico, 1824. FIG. 74. GALTONIA CANDICANS, showing Habit and detached Single Flower. GALTONIA (name commemorative of Francis Galton, author of a "Narrative of an Explorer in South Africa"). ORD. Liliacece. A genus of a couple of species of very beautiful hardy bulbous plants, natives of South Africa. They are admirably adapted for growing in clumps in Galtonia — continued. borders, or for conservatory decoration. They prefer a rich leaf mould, with a little sandy peat added. Pro- pagated by offsets, or by seeds. G. candicans (white).* fl. pure white, large, fragrant, drooping, funnel-shaped ; raceme about 1ft long, fifteen to twenty-flowered ; scape (inclusive of raceme) erect, glaucous, about 4ft. long. Summer. I. lorate-lanceolate, sub-erect, 2Jft long. Bulb large round. SYN. Hyacinthus candicans. See Fig. 74. (R. H. 1882, 32.) G. prlnceps (prince). This is closely allied to the foregoing, but less ornamental,with broader and shorter racemes and smaller, greenish flowers, with spreading segments. (Eef. B. 175.) GAMOCHLAMYS. Included under Spathantlieum. GAMOSEFALOUS. When the sepals are joined together. GARCIANA. A synonym of Philydrum. GARCINIA (named in honour of Laurence Garcin, M.D., a French botanist and traveller in India, author of numerous botanical memoirs). STNS. Cambogia, Man- gostana, and Oxycarpus. OKD. Guttiferce. A genus comprising about forty species of stove evergreen fruit-bearing trees. Flowers usually solitary at the tops of the branches. The fruit is very delicious and re- freshing. Leaves coriaceous or rarely sub-membrana- ceous. Garcinias thrive in a peat and loam compost. Cuttings of ripened shoots will root, if inserted in sand, under a glass, in strong bottom heat. The species here described are, perhaps, the best known to cultivation. G. Cambogia. Gamboge, fl. yellow, terminal, solitary. Novem- ber, fr. about 2in. in diameter, drooping, on peduncles lin. in length. I. elliptic, tapering to both ends, 5in. long. h. 40ft. Branches spreading, opposite. East Indies, 1822. (B. F. S. 85.) G. cornea (horny), fl. pale yellow, scentless, terminal. January and February. Berry nearly round, the size of a medlar, covered with a dark purple juiceless bark. I. opposite, oblong. h. 20ft. East Indies, 1823. G. Cowa (Cowa). fl. yellow, terminal. February, fr. edible, though not the most palatable. I. broad-lanceolate, h. 60ft. Chittagong, 1822. A middle-sized handsome tree, yielding a» inferior kind of gamboge. G. Mangostana.* Mangosteen. /. red, resembling a single rose, composed of four roundish petals, which are thick at the base, but thinner towards the margins, terminal, solitary, fr. round, about the size of a medium orange ; it is esteemed one of the most delicious fruits in the world. I. elliptic-oblong, acuminated, 7in. or Sin. long. h. 20ft. Molucca Islands, 1789. (B. M. 4847.) G. Morella (Morella). fl. yellowish ; panicles terminal and lateral, fr. small, edible, in shape and size resembling the Morello Cherry (whence the specific name). I. oblong-elliptic, tapering to both ends. h. 30ft. to 50ft. Ceylon, Siam, East Indies, •fee. This plant yields the Ceylon gamboge of commerce. (B. F. S. 87.) GARDEN. A Garden is usually understood to mean a piece of land of any description or size, attached to, or connected with, a residence, and set apart, either for the purpose of growing vegetables and fruits for the supply of the household, or for the cultivation of plants and flowers for the embellishment of any part of the house or the Garden itself. The results attending the culture of vegetables and fruits are of the greatest national importance, as representing a necessary source for sup- plying wholesome food, which it would be impossible to obtain unless care were bestowed in preparing the land and cultivating the crops annually, according as each may require. Flowers, and the plants specially grown for producing them, have a universal charm, presenting a means of endless study and enjoyment to all who properly appreciate their worth. The value of making a Garden of some description wherever practicable in conjunction with every dwelling house, cannot be over- estimated, as it invariably tends to promote health and enjoyment. There is an extremely wide range in its application, admitting unlimited arrangements according to the amount of available space to be inclosed or the requirements and taste of those persons who have to incur the expense of preparing or keeping it up. In large towns, the value of land precludes the possibility of obtaining any more than a limited portion as Garden ground, yet this should be utilised to the fullest extent THE DICTIONARY OF GARDENING, Garden — cont in ued. for the purposes to which it is best adapted. The amount of interest and pleasure, apart from profit, to be derived from a Garden, depends greatly on the capacity of the individual who may frequently or occa- sionally visit it, to notice and appreciate the beauties of nature that may be found in every conceivable form around. These advantages of pleasure, combined with utility in obtaining the crops annually, represent the practical outcome of capital expended on Gardens, and an adequate return should be obtained in an indirect, if not in a pecuniary, manner. Very much depends on the gardener using every available means to render his charge attractive and satisfactory to all concerned, as, without this attention, a Garden becomes the reverse of what it really should be. Much more may be accomplished in a small space, if proper and continued attention is bestowed, than would, at first sight, appear credible. This is frequently exemplified in the case of amateurs, who only have window space or that allowed with a small villa or cottage. The love of a Garden and its products, in every way, is one of the prevailing characteristics of English fashion, from the highest to the lowest class of individuals, and it . should receive encouragement on every hand. The more a student of nature learns of the various forms and means adopted therein for reaching certain ends, every one of which has some definite purpose, the more is he induced to pursue his investigations, although the gain- ing of further knowledge only reveals the marvellous extent of the system open for study to those who choose to proceed with it. The form and extent of Gardens de- pending so entirely on that of the house or mansion with which they are associated, renders it impossible to give more than general advice regarding their position or method of laying out to the best advantage. Some of the principal points to be adopted, and others which it is well to avoid, will be duly noticed, both in the case of Gardens of considerable extent, and also in those of smaller dimensions. FRUIT AND KITCHEN GARDEN. In planning and laying out this department, on an extensive scale, the exercise of considerable judgment and forethought will be required. It is work that only falls to the lot of comparatively few gardeners in the first instance, yet a knowledge of its performance is frequently requisite to enable alterations to be made with part at a time, that in due course may, in some respects, convert the whole. The most important points to be observed are situa- tion, soil, form, size, and shelter. Situation and Soil. A. situation has sometimes to be accepted irrespective of the condition or quality of the soil, but each requires an equal notice wherever there is a choice. In selecting a site, it should be, if possible, slightly undulated and face the south, or a little south- east. In dry districts, or where the sub-soil is of a gravelly nature, it would be better if the ground were nearly flat, provided efficient drainage could be secured without having to go very deep at any point. If in connection with a mansion, the best position near to it should be selected for the Kitchen Garden, on account of transferring the produce ; yet it should be sufficiently far away to allow work of any description to proceed at the proper time. Many proprietors take a great interest in this department, which generally includes nearly the whole of the forcing operations, grape and other fruit culture under glass, &c. It is advisable that the ap- proach from the mansion should be towards the front or ends of the houses, in preference to the back, which is invariably utilised for tool and other sheds. A southern aspect, or nearly so, being that usually selected for garden structures, and also for the front or principal part of a mansion, it follows that the best position for the Garden is on some point towards the east or west, far enough Garden— continued. away to admit of the boundary walls being concealed from view by trees and shrubs, and to allow of the approach being in the direction above indicated. The condition of the soil should be considered in several respects — as to its depth in general, the quality of the top spit, and also the sub-soil. A depth of less than 18in. will be unsuitable, the best being from 2ft. to 3ft. A rather heavy loam in some parts, with that of a lighter or more sandy nature in others, will admit of positions being selected for different crops that require such soils ; and, for this reason, both are preferable if to be obtained. The quality of the sub-soil, especially when it is of an irony or close, retentive nature, and so prevents the free passage of air and water, has a great effect on all fruit- trees and on garden crops generally. Fruit-trees seldom succeed on such sub-soils, as, once their roots enter it, canker and other diseases immediately attack the branches and cause them to decay. Much may be accomplished in improving and deepening shallow soils by adding more on the top from an adjoining field or other place ; but this causes a great deal of work, and, moreover, does not remove the evils attending a bad sub-soil; conse- quently, the latter should be avoided, if possible. The amount of drainage to be applied artificially depends a great deal on the porosity of the earth beneath the surface. In many cases, it is only necessary to drain the walks; and if the situation of the garden is un- dulated, this may be easily effected. Land of a reten- tive, clayey nature may require draining throughout in districts where the rainfall is heavy, in order to re- move the superabundant moisture that would otherwise collect. In other soils, resting mostly on gravel, suffi- cient is generally conducted naturally by the latter from the majority of growing crops. In selecting a situation for the Kitchen Garden, the available means for supplying water must also be considered, as a large quantity is always required in summer. If it can be procured from a stream or large open reservoir exposed to sun and air, it will be found warmer, softer, and better suited in every way for plants, than if obtained direct from a well or spring. A stream passes through some Gardens, and although the water is very useful at times, its presence in spring attracts the least frost, which often proves destructive to fruit blossom and other early crops. If a natural source, higher than the garden itself, is not available, another method may be employed, such as a hydraulic ram, for forcing water into a reservoir at a point suffi- ciently high to insure its return through pipes to any part of the Garden desired. The above conditions are not always to be obtained, but they should be fully considered wherever there is a choice of site. Form and Size. Where, as in this case, the cultivation of fruit and vegetables is of first importance, the shape of the ground does not matter materially. This and the size are points depending a good deal on each other, and on the requirements of each place individually. An extensive Kitchen Garden, of some five or six acres of land, has often to be managed for cultivating sufficient fruit and vegetables to supply the demands of a large household. As the expense of laying out a Garden of this size, and the subsequent annual expenditure to keep it stocked, and in good order, are necessarily heavy, the greatest care should be taken, in the first instance, to utilise every means for rendering the whole a per- manent success. The size, number of walls, glass structures, &c.. must, therefore, entirely depend on re- quirements and the amount of expense to be incurred. The Kitchen Garden, or a large portion of it, is usually surrounded with walls. These are essential for the culti- vation of fruit-trees that would not succeed and ripen crops in the open ground,' and they are best placed so as to form either a square or an oblong, with its ends running towards east and west. Such shapes AN ENCYCLOPEDIA OF HORTICULTURE. 45 Garden — continued. admit of the division and arrangement of the inclosure being carried out in a uniform manner, the latter allowing a much larger surface of wall exposed to a southern aspect than the former — an important consideration in many localities, as the borders share the same advantage. Whether the walls should be direct north and south, or facing a little to one side, is a matter on which opinions differ. If set on an angle from the south, they should certainly face a little in an easterly direction, to obtain the full benefit of the sun's rays before midday. Fruit-trees, suitable for all aspects, may be selected so as to cover both sides if desired. Thus, the walls having a southern aspect, should accommodate Peaches, Nec- tarines, Apricots, and some of the best Pears ; the eastern would do for Plums and good hardier Pears that are too tender for succeeding in the open ; the western for more Plums and Cherries, also for Apricots in some localities ; and the northern for Morello Cherries, late Gooseberries and Currants. In northerly or extreme cold districts, some of the first-named of these trees require a glass cover- ing as well. The proper levels for every main point will be one of the first conditions to be fixed in laying out, and this, on a large scale, will necessitate the use of instruments that are seldom kept by gardeners. Such main points should be decided so as to insure a means of drainage and other necessaries before any of the positions for the walls are fixed, and they should be disposed so that the intermediate spaces may be regulated from them, and the whole work proceed on a definite system thus arranged at the outset. Generally, three or four main walks, intersected with others at right angles, are sufficient for any walled-in Kitchen Garden, the quarters thus formed being sub-divided, for convenience, with paths cut in the ground. The fruit-tree borders should be at least 10ft. or 12ft. wide, and the outer main walk should follow their limit at that distance from the wall. Trained fruit- trees are usually placed parallel with the main walks, suffi- ciently far back to form the boundary for other borders that should preferably be utilised for growing Roses and hardy flowers for cutting, or for some crop such as a salad. In many Gardens, a range of forcing houses through- out a good portion of the length is thought desirable, and they usually present a fine appearance if built on a plan and of a size proportionate with the surroundings. In most instances, it is, however, advisable to place the glass structures by themselves, just sufficiently far apart to admit of all equally sharing a full amount of sunshine and light. This allows of all being more conveniently connected with a heating apparatus without having re- course to an unnecessary number of boilers. Additional space will usually be required for fruit culture beyond that inside the Garden walls, and an adjoining site should be selected, if suitable, and included within the boundary fence. The soil, subsoil, draining, &c., will need similar attention to be bestowed as in the interior or any other part of the Garden where such trees are planted. Where a good orchard is at command for the supply of Apples, &c., a material advantage is gained in the Garden, by an extra amount of land being available for vegetable culture. It is always best to allow crops plenty of room to develop themselves, as the soil in the intermediate spaces may be more easily cleaned, and the produce will invariably be of a superior quality. Shelter. An important requisite in connection with, the site selected for a Kitchen or Fruit Garden, is shelter. The most destructive winds are those from the East and North-east to North-west. If natural shelter from these quarters'can be procured at the outset, so much the better; but otherwise, a screen must be prepared in some way. to neutralise the force of the wind, and to render its effect on tender vegetation less dangerous. This is most effectually provided by planting a double avenue of trees, or forming a wide plantation, so as to include Garden — continued. trees or shrubs that are of a quick-growing nature, and are known to succeed in the locality. Scotch Firs, Pinus austriaca, P. Laricio, and several others of this family, Poplars, Larches, Elms, &c., may be freely used where they are known to succeed. Garden walls, 10ft. or 12ft. high, afford some shelter to the part inclosed ; but the evil effects of cold, cutting winds have always to be guarded against, not only for the sake of outside plants, but also for those in forcing or other warm structures. South- west winds are frequently very rough and destructive. It is also advisable to provide a shelter from these, but it should be further away, so as to avoid excluding sun and light. High trees of any description are not desir- able near the southern exposure. Those recommended for planting on the northern and eastern sides may com- mence at a distance of about thirty yards from the Garden boundary. FLOWER GARDEN AND PLEASURE GROUND. By these terms reference is made to departments entirely devoted to the cultivation of flowers, shrubs, and trees of an ornamental character, selected and arranged with the natural scenery, &c., around, to form a place of resort for interest and pleasure at all times. A Flower Garden is considered an indispensable adjunct to every residence; combined with Pleasure Grounds, it has a more extensive significance as applying to that adjoin- ing or surrounding a mansion. It must, of necessity, be within easy access, so that the most attractive parts may be seen from the windows, or reached in a short time from the outside. The embellishment of Flower Garden beds, and the continued attention required to keep all in good order throughout the year, most seriously affect the other departments where the num- berless plants have to be prepared, especially if carpet- bedding is introduced. Where the means at command for storing and growing these plants are totally inade- quate for supplying enough to properly fill the space, it would be better to reduce the number of beds, or to devote some of them to select hardy perennials, than to attempt too much with an insufficiency of material, and so destroy the effect of the whole. This is a matter requiring attention when first planning and laying out a Flower Garden. The extent of Pleasure Grounds may be as much as desired, or according as the woods surrounding the mansion will admit. They are frequently made to form a connection between this latter and some other building or permanent place of interest, such as the Kitchen Garden. Apart from the natural scenery and the free use of ornamental trees and shrubs, the introduction of many hardy flowering plants may be recommended, as suitable positions for their development may, perhaps, be better found here than in the Flower Garden proper. The various tastes pos- sessed by proprietors or their friends, with the size of the establishment and the extent to which gardening may be carried, will each have an effect on individual cases, and prevent the following remarks from being more than those of a general character. It is well, if possible, to avoid extremes in the matter of taste, as there is plenty of room for all styles, if restricted to places in which they are appropriate. Site and Extent. Most of the mansions built some two or three centuries ago are situated in a valley or the lower part of an extensive park. A somewhat ele- vated position is now invariably chosen, as the great importance of fresh air has become more fully recog- nised. Extended views of landscape are usually selected for the front or principal outlook; and as these already exist, and, perhaps, form part of the design in fixing the site for the building, neither of them should be selected for the Flower Garden, if another place in the vicinity can be obtained without interfering with that which exhibits natural beauty in itself. An open expanse 46 THE DICTIONARY OF GARDENING, Garden — continued. of lawn, with a few clumps of shrubs and trees of limited growth, judiciously placed, would be more ap- propriate in close proximity to the building from which the view is desired, and would not be likely to detract attention, as would a mass of flowers, from the main object of view beyond. Where such land- scape effects do not exist, one of the best positions may be chosen for the Flower Garden — supposing there is sufficient shelter, as the advantage of being able to view it from the windows in any weather, must not be overlooked. Some of the best-arranged and most com- pact Flower Gardens are those laid out on grass, in an inclosure of which a large conservatory forms part of the boundary, the other part being composed of trees of an ornamental character that afford good shelter, and do not exclude too much light. Shelter is most important in the selec- tion of a site, as the tender exotics used in summer, especially in carpet and sub-tropical beds, will not succeed if too much exposed. Bedding plants present but a poor appearance when allowed to suffer from drought in sum- mer; hence the necessity of an abundance of water. This may, in many instances, be ob- tained from that supplying the mansion, by means of pipes laid underground, and furnished with screw sockets, wherever desired, for con- necting a standpipe and hose. Carrying water by hand is an almost hopeless task in a large establishment in summer. Preparation of Ground, Flower Beds, $c. Soil which is heavy and retentive is nnsuited for a Flower Garden ; but at times there is no choice, and the best modes of ameliorating and warming it must be adopted. The first ne- cessary means for attaining this end is thorough drainage, not only for the good of the shrubs and flowers, but also for the whole of the land and walks. The state of the latter has much to do with the general appearance of the Garden, and, if undrained, it is impossible to pass over them with pleasure during or im- mediately after rain. A gravelly sub-soil will usually drain the lawn and open land suffi- ciently without pipes, especially if the position is a little elevated ; but where the whole is of a clayey nature, and of a good depth, it may be necessary to lay them at distances not ex- ceeding 12ft. apart. The work of laying main drains, and the branches connected therewith, should be a preliminary operation, performed as soon as the various points and levels are fixed, and before the plan of the beds is finally laid out. All tender bedding plants require a rather light, moderately rich soil, to encourage them to root and grow freely so soon as they are planted. If that secured naturally to form new beds be heavy or retentive, it should be dug out about lift, deep, and either par- tially or entirely replaced with some of a lighter de- scription. Leaf soil is the best of all manures to use, as it tends to encourage rapid root action, without, as a rule, causing an undue growth at the top. In soils already light, an addition of something heavier in the way of loam would be advisable, otherwise leaf mould may be used in quantity. It should be thoroughly in- corporated by digging, or part of the plants will out- grow the others. A flower bed prepared for planting should be firm and raked rather fine, and should present a uniform nearly flat surface, about lin. higher than the edge of the bed, from which it should be clearly separated. Style and Mode of Laying Out. Various styles of Garden — continued. laying out are employed : they may be practically included under two headings — the geometrical, and the free or symmetrical. The former is essentially formal and is largely employed, as being most . suitable, for inclosed Gardens surrounded with everything more or less of a formal character. It admits of colours being arranged so that the proportion is evenly balanced when viewed as a whole ; one-half of any correct geometrical design being intended as an exact counterpart of the other. The free, or symmetrical, style allows, according as indi- vidual taste may suggest, a much wider scope in the shape and arrangement of the beds and their mode of embellishment. This plan, properly executed, is preferred VIQ. 75. GROUND-PLAN OF THE TUILERIES GARDEN (TIME OF LOUIS XIII.). by many, as it dispenses, in great part, with the formality of the other; yet, to be attractive, symmetry must, to a certain extent, be assured both with the beds and their occupants. The surrounding scenery must also be appro- priate, and should form the main guide in disposing of the space at command. Although it is scarcely possible to have an excess of flowers, when placed in their proper positions throughout an extended area, yet too much is frequently attempted in Gardens of limited proportions, . with the disadvantage that the plants employed are unable to exhibit their true characters. Simple figures, as beds cut out in the turf, in a size proportionate to the surroundings, are invariably most satisfactory, in Gardens of either large or small pretensions, where the AN ENCYCLOPEDIA OF HORTICULTURE. 47 Garden — continued. symmetrical style is adopted. Geometrical designs may also be cut in grass, although some prefer Box or other edgings. Figure gardening was for a long time greatly in vogue; the various scrolls were represented by different shrubs and coloured gravels, the numerous narrow walks between being also gravelled. The ground- plan of the Garden of the Tuileries in the time of Louis XIII. (see Fig. 75) may be interesting as indicating the extent to which the system was carried out in France. Its existence in this country is now almost entirely limited to Gardens of historic interest, the general use of turf having become more prevalent, with the result that a great improvement has been effected in the majority of instances, as the plants and flowers were previously subordinate to the edgings and walks surrounding them. The method of laying out will be the next proceeding, after the points already noticed are decided, and the preliminary work of draining, levelling, &c., is accom- plished. The design on paper, if to be accurately repre- sented on the ground, should be prepared to a scale that may be easily divided, and the enlargement calculated. A Garden, in the shape of a square or parallelogram, of any size, may be more readily laid out than one with an irregular outline. The necessary tools will be a tape measure and measuring rod, a strong line, and some pegs. A right-angled triangle, a pair of wooden com- passes, and a large T-square, are also useful instruments. A system of exactly gauging and marking everything, must be adopted where there are many figures to be shown in relation to each other. The outside boundary should be measured out into equal distances of one or more feet, according as it may be practicable to divide the plan ; and if these points are marked with pegs, and the positions of all the walks similarly fixed, a foundation will be formed that will facilitate the means of obtaining the other references required. Where there are several walks, it would be advisable to mark all the corners, and insert a few pegs to define their bound- aries on both sides. If it is necessary that a main walk should proceed at considerable length, quite straight, an ordinary line is not a certain guide. Upright stakes, about 6ft. high, specially prepared and painted white, with a broad band of black or red near the top, are most useful. When the two ends are fixed by having a stick driven in at each, the intervening space may be accu- rately marked by others from the sight obtained from either end. If a long curve or sweep is to be laid out, the ends must first be known, and, if possible, a few points between. This may also be marked by similar stakes ; but one side is usually obtained by laying a rather heavy line with the hand, and afterwards measuring the width from it for the other. Gardens vary so much in size, shape, and other respects, that it would be impos- sible to give advice applicable to all alike. The fore- going remarks refer to some of the principles adopted in laying out the Flower Garden or walks in the Pleasure Ground, but other methods may be necessary in instances where these cannot be applied. The Pleasure Ground, as a rule, has only one main walk, sometimes formed of gravel, and at others of a broad expanse of turf. The principal recommendation for gravel is that, if properly laid, it may be walked on in weather and seasons when turf would not be dry enough. In forming Pleasure Grounds, much may be done with trees and shrubs that not unfrequently exist beforehand, by arranging and grouping others, so as to more fully exhibit the true character of those growing in a natural state. Avenues, glades, and vistas, with an irregular outline running into the surrounding woods, terminating with some speci- men tree or other object in the distance, and clumps of massive Ehododendrons, placed far enough from the walk to show their beauty when in flower: these should be some of the leading characteristics. The planting of conifers and other ornamental trees should be restricted Garden — continued. to such as are known to succeed in the locality, as climate and soil greatly affect them everywhere. The permanent positions for these should be selected, so that plenty of room is allowed them to develop, and nothing of interest eventually hidden in consequence. A group of conifers, planted wide enough apart to avoid over- crowding, and surrounded by an open lawn, always has a more striking appearance than when the same number are placed about singly over an extended area. American Garden. This title signifies an open space in the Pleasure Ground, or some other part of the Flower Garden, wherein a collection of chiefly American plants, or those whose progenitors came from that country, are grown. Many of the most beautiful of hardy flowering shrubs are included amongst these, and others, of a hard- wooded nature, that are usually cultivated and thrive under similar conditions. The Ehododendron and hardy Azalea are shrubs largely grown, and both are now re- presented in endless and beautiful varieties. Heaths in variety, Ledums, Kalmias, Gaultherias, and many others of a like character, all help to constitute a collection of interesting shrubby plants that cannot fail to be admired. They require a light peaty soil, and will not succeed if chalk is present, or if the drainage be defective. For plants of this description, the usual and necessary plan, where the natural soil is heavy, is to specially prepare beds with peat and leaf soil, which, on the other hand, need not be of a great depth where the sub-soil is light and porous, as none of them are of a deep-rooting nature. Sub-tropical Garden. Where means are at command, sub-tropical gardening should be adopted in summer so far as the number of plants and suitable situations admit. It is imperative that the latter should be well sheltered from rough winds, as these soon destroy the fine foliage of the plants used. If a suitable site can be obtained in the Flower Garden, it is preferable, as forming a con- trast to the ordinary flowering subjects used in the other beds. Large plants, such as some of the hardier palms, tree ferns, Musas, &c., in pots or tubs, present a fine appearance when plunged outside ; but these require considerably more room to keep them in winter than can be allowed in any except very extensive places. Many other plants are, however, available that may be raised from seed or cuttings each spring, and these form, in suitable situations, a commendable addition. They require a deep rich soil and more light than palms, &c., which make but little growth outside. Sub - tropical plants, such as Acacia lophantha, Cannas, Eucalyptus globvlus, Grevillea robusta, Melianthus major, Ricinus in variety, Solanums and Wigandias, with many others, are all of easy culture, and are very effective on account of their varied and attractive foliage. Hardy Perennial Garden. After a long season of comparative neglect, the large and very important class of herbaceous and other hardy perennial plants once cultivated are again assuming their proper position in many Gardens, by having an extensive border or other space specially devoted to their accommodation. An open situation and a rich soil are preferred by the majority. Shelter, afforded by trees or by other means, is advisable, supposing the former are not near enough to overhang and cause shade, or for their roots to im- poverish the ground. Many of the choicest alpine plants require partial shade and thorough drainage. These succeed best in positions such as the nooks and corners of rockwork ; consequently, the latter is a useful and oftentimes requisite addition. Herbaceous plants are not unfrequently disliked on account of the appearance nearly always presented by some of the tops dying away. There are, however, always others to form a succession and prolong the ' flowering season ; and it must be remem- bered that the decaying tops should only be partially removed, as they form the natural protection for the roots in winter. Sufficient interest should be developed 48 THE DICTIONARY OF GARDENING, Garden— continued. in hardy plants for the general beauty and floral dis- play presented by such a large proportion of their num- ber, to completely ignore an objection like this. The Perennial Garden or mixed border should be of con- siderable width, to admit of tall-growing subjects being included; and if a background can be obtained of high Bhododendrons. or other evergreens that shelter without causing too much shade, the cultivated plants will be benefited, and, when in flower, will be seen to the best advantage. In Fig. 76 is represented a summer view of an existing garden, a little less than an acre in extent, devoted chiefly to the cultivation of hardy pe- rennial and alpine plants. Sufficient space is here found FIG. 76. HARDY PERENNIAL AND ALPINE GARDEN. for upwards of 2000 species and varieties, and all suc- ceed more or less under unfavourable atmospheric con- ditions. Rock Garden. Where numerous hardy alpine and herbaceous plants are cultivated, a Bock Garden, greater or less in extent, is the most suitable place for their ac- commodation. Many of the best and rarest species will not succeed so well elsewhere as they do amongst the crevices on an elevated piece of rockwork, which, in addition, affords a situation for an endless variety of hardy and half-hardy plants. There are few Gardens in which something of the sort might not be con- structed and rendered attractive, especially in localities where stones are plentiful. After being once planted, the requisite care in after treatment is but nominal. Garden — continued. compared with the additional interest thereby secured, particularly when only a select class of plants is allowed, and these are appropriately placed, according to their height or special cultural requirements. At- tempts are sometimes made, in a Bock Garden of an extensive description, to imitate, so far as practicable, the work of Nature in the arrangement of the stones employed. This has often to be conducted partially al the expense of providing adequate means for the well- being of the plants, which should be the main considera- tion. Where space and material are unlimited, excel- lent results may be attained ; but in a confined area, the effect produced in many cases only shows the insig- nificance of the work in comparison with that of Nature. Rockwork may be introduced for various reasons, apart from the culture of alpines, such as hiding an unsightly wall or other objects of limited height, or for giving a diversity to an otherwise flat and uninteresting scene. A Eock Garden may be successfully formed where the surface is generally flat, by digging a deep cutting of an irregular outline through a piece of ground, and utilising the soil thus obtained as mounds of uneven heights along the upper part on either side, whereon trees and evergreen shrubs may be planted as a back- ground and for affording shelter. The stones should be arranged to form cavities of an irregular size and shape, for the accommodation of various plants, from the sides of a walk made in the centre of the cutting, up the gradual slope formed by the soil, until the shrubs in the background are reached. It does not so much matter what the quality of the soil is underneath, providing it is porous enough to insure drainage, as additional new soil should be given each plant when inserting it. Formality must be avoided as much as possible in the arrange- ment, and the stones should be deeply embedded, in order to hold them firmly. Various aspects are desirable to suit different plants, and these should be readily secured in a Eock Garden by the irregular shape the latter should assume in construction. Artificial masses of rockwork, for ornamental effect, are sometimes introduced into the slopes of hills adjoining a mansion ; and, if properly executed, they present quite a natural and fine appear- ance. The extent of, and position for, a Eock Garden must depend on the surroundings, and on the amount of space and number of plants at command. If arranged on a mound in the open, the slope should be very gradual : and a good proportion of shrubs should be introduced near the top. Dwarf-growing shrubs, Yuccas, and other subjects of an evergreen character, are always accept- able for their attractiveness in winter when the primary alpine and herbaceous occupants are resting. Care should be taken not to over-fill the cavities with soil, so as to bury the stones ; and the surface of each, when planting, should be left somewhat flat, in order that rain and other water may enter the ground instead of running off. Considerable experience is necessary for the proper con- struction of a Eock Garden on a large scale, and a know- ledge of the various habits of hardy plants is requisite before their positions for planting can be appropriately fixed. A quantity of loam and leaf soil, with some small pieces of granite or other stone, should be mixed before- hand, and a portion placed round each plant, the addi- tion of peat being made in the case of those requiring it. Eockeries usually improve in appearance with age. and when the plants have had time to develop and fill their allotted space. Other plants may be continually introduced, and improvements effected, where the ar- rangement of those first selected proves in any degree unsatisfactory. Annual top-dressings of new soil should be given to such as do not appear to succeed; and a plentiful supply of water in summer is requisite, almost without exception, for all. Wild Garden. Of recent years, the naturalisation AN ENCYCLOPEDIA OF HORTICULTURE. 49 Garden — continued. of hardy plants has received more than usual attention by the formation of Wild Gardens, wherein they may grow and produce an effect by an artificial arrange- ment something like the appearance presented by them FIG. 77. PLAN OF DETACHED VILLA GARDEN (FRONT CARRIAGE ENTRANCE). in a natural state. The spot selected for a Wild Garden should be possessed of some natural attraction adapted to artificial improvement ; otherwise, the attempt to imitate Nature will be but a poor one. Various strong- growing perennials that cannot be afforded space to Garden — continued. with woods. Many of the beautiful bulbous plants that may be secured in quantity, succeed admirably under trees ; and, when flowering above the grass, in spring, in large groups, they present a charming appearance. Nar- cissi in great variety, common Hyacinths, Primroses, hardy Cyclamens, various Liliums, Snowdrops, and numerous other subjects of a similar nature, are well suited for natural- ising in masses. Tall-growing plants, such as Asters, Foxgloves, Polygonnms, strong- growing Eoses, and others, in endless variety, may be similarly treated where there is sufficient room for their full development. The Wild Garden, as its name indicates, should be specially set apart as a place for the cultivation of hardy plants that grow freely, and where they may be allowed to do so at will with only very limited restric- tion. Rose Garden. The popularity of Eoses, and their general beauty in summer, demand special attention in the matter of cultiva- tion, which cannot be better secured than by specially selecting a position for the pur- pose, and arranging the different sections, as dwarf, standard, climbing, or pillar plants, to form a garden exclusively for Eoses. A piece of ground should be set apart in every large establishment for this purpose, and if the habits of the various sorts are studied and due notice given in the re- spective positions selected for them, a floral effect may be obtained, and a greater or less quantity of flowers gathered for four or five months in the year. For further information and culture, see Hoses. VILLA GARDENS. Villas most largely preponderate in the suburbs of cities and extensive commercial centres or towns, and are built either as detached or semi- FIG. 78. PLAN OF SEMI-DETACHED VILLA GARDENS (FRONT ENTRANCES). develop in the mixed border or rockery, form the best of subjects to arrange in the Wild Garden, which, in country districts, cannot be better situated than in a part of the Pleasure Ground more or less surrounded Vol. IL detached residences, with an adjoining Garden, that must necessarily be of a limited character. . Detached villas are usually situated at or near one end of their own grounds, a Email space at the front being devoted 50 THE DICTIONARY OF GARDENING, Garden— continued. to lawn and shrubs, with or without a carriage drive to the door, and the back part also laid out in lawn, with the addition of as many shrubberies and flower beds as may be thought desirable ; the space beyond this being utilised for a Kitchen Garden, if there is sufficient inclosed. Semi-detached residences are fre- quently limited to a piece of land not much exceeding half the size of that allotted to those entirely isolated, and are at a further disadvantage of each being over- looked from the neighbouring side. It frequently happens that these Gardens are laid out by the builder when his operations are finished, and the incoming tenant has, perhaps, only a short lease, which naturally pre- vents him going to the expense of extensive altera- tions to suit personal requirements for a very limited time. It cannot be expected that anything elaborate can be obtained in such a limited space as that connected with a villa; yet it is surprising what an amount of interest and pleasure may be derived from such, if care and judgment are exercised — first, in laying out, and afterwards in the selection of suitable subjects for filling the space at command. Flower beds are re- commended, so far as circumstances admit, particularly those of a mixed character, where the permanent oc- cupants may be select hardy perennial and alpine plants, various spring flowering bulbs, &c. ; and the inter- vening spaces filled, in summer, with annuals and various tender bedding subjects. A position should always be found for Eoses, as they are indispensable in every Garden. The selection of shrubs should be restricted to such as are known to be limited in growth, and suitable for their positions, when required for the lawn or for a border below the front windows. When it is necessary to plant trees near flower beds, for a screen, considerable injury must, of necessity, be caused by the roots perme- ating the soil, and by the tops frequently overhanging and so causing too much shade. One of the greatest faults in any Garden is overcrowding. This should be a point especially avoided with those adjoining villas, where the owners, in their laudable endeavour to grow as many things as possible, are often advised to try what is quite beyond their means to successfully accomplish. Laying out, replanting, the care of plants, &c., grown in the greenhouse or frames, with the ordinary general attention requisite for all, should always be entrusted to someone competent to advise and undertake it, in pre- ference to employing another whose services may be procured at a cheaper rate. Just sufficient trees, of limited growth, should be planted to insure privacy at all times; a certain portion of the inclosure, according as circumstances admit, being devoted to the cultivation of a few good shrubs and flowers, and the rest laid in turf, i.e., supposing the whole is arranged for pleasure only. This is generally the intention with villa Gardens, in which a space is allowed, perhaps not exceeding 6yds., from the house to the front boundary, and another, about 25yds. long, at the back, the width being that of the building and its side entrance. A greenhouse is always interesting when adjoining a villa, if the plants therein are such as do well, and are properly tended — a condition, perhaps, not practicable with all, but one that is insuffi- ciently studied where means are at command. Far more pleasure is derived from a few floriferous plants well grown, than from a quantity that merely exist, and are unduly ' crowded. Villa Gardens depend so much on the plan adopted with the building and with others adjoining it, also on the taste and resources of the proprietor or tena/it, that definite advice cannot be given so as to be applicable to all. With a view to assist amateurs in the arrange- ment or laying out of their gardens permanently, both in the front and back parts of their residences, some illus- trations are given with a view to suggestions being i taken therefrom. In Fig. 77 is represented the front ! Garden — continued. entrance to a detached villa by a semi-circular carriage drive. The object is to screen the door from view out- side by a thick shrubbery, and to have circular flower beds cut in the turf on each side of the steps ; a larger one of another shape, also for flowers, such as dwarf Roses, being situated in the front, on the opposite side of the drive. Front gardens connected with two semi-detached villas are shown in Fig. 78. That on the left (a) is laid out in a formal style, a large flower bed surrounded with a gravel walk. The bed might be planted geometrically, FIG. 79. PLAN OF DETACHKD VILLA AND GARDEN. as shown, or in any way desired. The other (b) has a narrow border of shrubs under the window, which is continued round as far as the entrance gate. The space between is intended for turf, with a few small beds cut in it for flowers or some dwarf shrubs. This style is much to be preferred to the preceding one. A plan of a detached residence situated inside its grounds is represented in Fig. 79. This shows a greenhouse and pits attached to the building, the lawn having flower beds in it, and nearly surrounded with a dwarf shrubbery. The object here AN ENCYCLOPEDIA OF HORTICULTURE. 51 Garden — continued. is to get the best view from a summer house in the corner (6), and from the windows of the principal rooms. The plan shown at Fig. 80 is one that might be adopted on a rather large and expensive scale for a Garden connected with a good-sized villa. The outside boundary is usually a wall, and in this case it is intended to be hidden by a row of dwarf Robinias and an irregular belt of shrubs. These FIG. 80. PLAN FOR VILLA GARDEN. are followed by turf and a walk of an irregular outline, which ends in a rustic summer house at one corner (a) and has a garden seat at another. A greenhouse joins the residence, which is not shown in the figure ; and the lawn, situated in the middle, has a few clumps of ever- green flowering shrubs arranged in the corners and curves formed by the walks. Considerable expense would Garden— continued. be incurred in stocking and properly keeping up a Garden of this description ; but it would not require to be frequently renewed, like a quantity of summer flower beds. GARDEN CHESS. See Cress, Garden. GARDENER'S GARTER. See Phalaris arnn- dinacea variegata. GARDEN FRAMES. See Frames, Garden. GARDENIA (named in honour of Alexander Garden, M.D., of Charlestown, Carolina, one of the correspondents of Ellis and Linnseus). In- cluding Rothmannia. OBD. Rubiaceoe. A genus comprising about sixty species of elegant stove or greenhouse evergreen trees or shrubs, indi- genous to tropical Asia, as well as the Capo of Good Hope. Flowers white, axillary or ter- minal, usually solitary, and generally sweet- scented ; corolla funnel-shaped or salver-shaped, having the tube much longer than the calyx, and the limb twisted in aestivation, but after- wards spreading. Leaves opposite, rarely whorled. The double forms of O. florida and O. radicans produce white flowers that are amongst the most beautiful and highly per- fumed of any in cultivation. Gardenias are principally grown for the use of the flowers in a cut state, as these are in great demand, and appear so much in a succession as not to render the plants sufficiently attractive by their presence for ordinary decoration, excepting that of the stove. Propagation is readily effected by cuttings. Strong, healthy ones should be se- lected, preferably with a heel attached, such as those obtained from the points of side shoots, half or fully ripened. Early in January is the best time to propagate for allowing the plants a long season to grow before flowering the next winter ; but almost any time in the year will do when suitable cuttings can be secured. They should be inserted singly in small pots of sandy peat, unless required in large quantities, when this plan would demand too much space, and the alternative of placing several in a larger size would have to be adopted. The pots should be plunged in a bottom heat of about 75deg., in an inclosed frame of the propagating house, and allowed to remain there until the cuttings are rooted. Cultivation. Gardenias are not difficult to cultivate, provided they have plenty of heat and moisture during the growing season, and are kept free from insects. These conditions en- courage the production of strong healthy shoots, which, after being ripened, and the plants rested, supply a large quantity of flowers from the points. The young plants, when rooted, should be hardened from the frame to the open house, and potted on by liberal shifts as becomes requisite, in a lumpy compost of two-thirds peat to one of fibry loam, with an addition of some charcoal. Where bottom heat is not at command, a hotbed of fermenting material is frequently made up in a house, for plunging the pots in, the house itself being heated by pipes in the ordinary way. If carefully managed, and not allowed to over-heat, this plan is generally attended with good results. Very large plants may be obtained, under proper treatment, in one season ; and if a succession is propagated occasionally to follow others, and thus some are in different stages of growth, the supply of flowers may be considerably prolonged. After the season's growth is completed, a lower temperature and more air should 52 THE DICTIONARY OF GARDENING, Gardenia — continued. be given. Some persons prefer planting out Gardenias in a heated structure over hot- water pipes; but culti- vating in large pots allows the advantage of being able to shift them for destroying insects and for subjecting them to lower temperatures in other houses. It is not advisable to keep old plants; much better flowers, and a greater quantity, may be obtained from young ones grown rapidly by liberal treatment each, or, at least, every second, year. Almost any amount of water may be applied to the roots in summer, and syringing morning and evening may be freely practised. Insects. Gardenias, if not well looked after, become more infested with insects than is usual with even the ordinary occupants of warm houses. Mealy Bug is most destructive, collecting in quantities about the points, and crippling the young flowers and leaves. Careful watching for these, from the time cuttings are inserted, must be constantly kept up, and measures taken to insure their eradication if found. A wineglassfnl of petroleum to a three-gallon can or open pail of tepid water, thoroughly mixed, by having a syringe filled two or three times, and its contents returned into the can, previous to being applied, is one of the best insecticides. The plants should be laid on their sides, if in pots, the operation performed in dull weather, and the petroleum thoroughly removed by clean water half an hour Liter. This may be practised occasionally as a preventative. Green Fly is readily destroyed by fumigation ; Red Spider may be kept down considerably by syringing; and if Scale should be troublesome, they must be removed by sponging. All these infest Gardenias at some time, if the least chance is given; consequently, a watch must be kept, and measures applied, as preventatives to their becoming established. G. amcena (pleasing), fl. white, having the lobes purple on the outside in that part which is exposed to the air, while the corolla is in aestivation, almost terminal, solitary, sessile ; tube greenish, long, terete. June. I. oval, acute, glabrous, on short petioles ; spines axillary, short, straight h. 3ft. to 5ft. China. Stove. (B. M.1904.) G. florida (flowery).* Cape Jessamine. /. white, sweet-scented, solitary, almost terminal, sessile, salver - shaped, nine -parted. August. I. elliptic, acute at both ends. h. 2ft. to 6ft. China, 1754. Plant shrubby, unarmed, erect. Stove. (B. M. 3349.) Of this species, there are several varieties, and that usually grown as florida is but a double-flowered variety (B. M. 2627). G. f. Fortune! (Fortune's).* fl. white, large, pure, fragrant. July. I. opposite, or in whorls, bright shining green. China. Apparently a very large form of the typical species. (B. R. 32, 43.) G. f. variegata (variegated). This is much the same as the type, but has leaves beautifully margined with yellowish-white. A handsome form. Gardenia — continued. G. nltida (shining).* fl. white, terminal, solitary ; calyx six-parted ; corolla with a narrow tube and a seven-parted, reflexed limb. October and November. I. opposite or tern, oblong-lanceolate, undulated, h. 3ft Sierra Leone, 1844. Stove. (B. M. 4343.) G. radicans (rooting), fl. white, solitary, almost terminal, and nearly sessile, salver-shaped, very fragrant. June. I. lanceolate. Stems radicant. h. 1ft. to 2ft. Japan, 1804. Plant shrubby, un- armed. Greenhouse. (B. M. 1842.) G. r. major (larger).* This is one of the most profuse flowering forms ; it is larger in all its parts than the type, but smaller than G. florida. G. r. variegata (variegated). I. margined with white. Japan. An interesting and elegant form. See Fig. 81. G. Rotnmannla (Rothmann's). fl. yellow, purple; sepals sub- ulate, rounded ; tube smooth, dilated, short. July. J. oblong ; stipules subulate, h. 10ft Cape of Good Hope, 1774. Green- house. (B. M. 690.) G. Stanleyana. See Randia maculata. FIG. 81. SHOOT OF GARDENIA RADICANS VARIEGATA, FIG. 82. GARDENIA THUXBERGIA, showing Habit and detached Single Flower. G. Tnunbergia (Thunbergia).* fl, white, large, fragrant, terminal, solitary, sessile, eight-parted. January to March. I elliptic, acute, glabrous, opposite, or three or four in a whorl, h. 4ft to 5ft Central and Southern Africa, 1774. Plant shrubby, unarmed. Greenhouse. See Fig. 82. (B. M. 1004.) GARDEN FINE. See Dianthus plumarius. GARDOQUIA (named in honour of Don Diego Gar- doqui, a Spanish financier of the eighteenth century, who promoted the publication of a Flora of Peru). STN. Rizoa. ORD. Labiatce. A genus comprising about twenty-six species of greenhouse or half-hardy sub- shrubby evergreens, natives, for the most part, of Chili and Peru. Calyx tubular, thir- teen-nerved ; corolla with a long, almost straight tube, its upper lip notched, the lower in three lobes, the middle one of which is broadest. Leaves small, nu- merous, entire, rarely largely dentate. Gardoqnias thrive in a compost of loam, peat, and sand. Propagation is effected by cut- tings, made of half - ripened shoots, and inserted in sand, under a bell glass. When rooted, the young plants should be potted off in small pots, and grown near the glass, in a greenhouse, and, as they ad- vance in size, shifted into larger- sized pots. G. betonicoides (Betony-like) is Ccdronella mcxicana (which see). See Fig. 83. (B. M. 3860.) G. breviflora (short-flowered), fl. secund, in whorls; calyx a little coloured, with lanceolate - acute AN ENCYCLOPEDIA OF HORTICULTURE. 53 Gardoquia — continued. teeth, and with the throat naked inside. I. on short petioles, roundish-ovate, obtuse, with scarcely revolute margins ; floral leaves similar to the rest. Peru. This species is scarcely distinct from the genus Micromeria, in consequence of the corolla hardly exceeding the calyx. FIG. 83. CEDRONELLA MEXICANA (GARDOQUIA BETONICOIDES), showing Habit and Single Whorl of Flowers. G. GllUesii (Gillies'). /., corolla scarlet, pubescent; calyx elongated erect with lanceolate, subulate, nearly equal teeth ; throat naked inside. June. I. oblong-linear, or cnneated, obtuse quite entire, narrowed at the base, green on both surfaces flat' purple, mo crenated than . long. April. , , little, rounded at the base, green, pale beneth Stems , ovate, bluntisn , , beneath Stems hard at the base, but scarcely woody, h. 1ft. Chili. (B. M. 3772.) GARIDELLA. Now included under Niffella (which see). GARLAND FLOWER. A common name for He- dychium. It is also applied to Daphne Cneorum and Pleurandra Cneorum. GARLIC (Allium sativum). This perennial has been extensively cultivated in Europe, Asia, and North Africa, from remote antiquity. It has become naturalised in Sicily, the South of France, and most of the South of GARLIC. Europe, being found growing in meadows, pastures, and waste places. According to De Candolle, the only country in which it is known to be undoubtedly wild is the Kirghis Desert. Garlic has been cultivated in this country Garlic — continued. since 1548. At one time, it held a place in most of the early pharmacopoeias ; but, like many other of our vegetable medicines, has fallen into disuse. In Britain, it is employed as a culinary ingredient ; but, on account of its extremely penetrating and diffusive odour, it is seldom served up in a solid state. Garlic is easily propagated by seeds, which should be sown in the open ground, in March ; or by dividing the cloves of the bulbs (see Fig. 84) into as many parts as they admit, to form separate plants. A light soil, and rather dry posi- tion in the kitchen garden, suit them best, planting the cloves early in March, about 9in. asunder, in drills 1ft. apart, and covering with 2in. of soil. An occa- sional hoeing, to destroy weeds, will be all that is necessary for the after treatment, until the tops die, when the roots should be lifted and dried in the sun. A few may be planted in autumn for an early supply, only a small quantity being usually required at one time in private gardens. GARLIC FEAR. See Cratava. GARRYA (named in honour of Michael Garry, of the Hudson's Bay Company). Including Fadyenia. TRIBE Garryacece of ORD. Cornacece. A genus con- sisting of about eight species of ornamental hardy ever- FIG. 85. FtowjiaiNG TWIG OF MALE PLANT OF GARRYA ELLIPTICA. green shrubs, of which seven are found in California and Mexico, and one in Cuba and Jamaica. Flowers, male and female on different plants, arranged in elegant pendulous catkins, proceeding from near the apex of 54 THE DICTIONARY OF GARDENING, Garrya — continued. the shoots, and often from 4in. to 9in. long. Leaves opposite, petiolate, entire or denticulate, penninerved. O. elliptica is the only species in general cultivation. It forms an elegant bush plant for the shrubbery border in the South of England, but is, perhaps, seen to the greatest advantage when grown against a wall or trellis. Pro- pagated by seeds; or by cuttings of half -ripened wood, inserted in sandy loam, in August, and shaded from strong light until rooted. G. elliptica (elliptical).* /. greenish-white or yellowish. Spring. Berries black. I. elliptical, dark green and shining above, hoary beneath. h. 8ft. to 10ft. California, 1818. See Fig. 85. G. Fadyenii (M'Fadyen's). male flowers, spikes branched, pen- dulous ; sepals cohering at apex, female flowers, spikes simple, erect ; style short, thick. Spring. I. elliptic, shortly apiculate. Jamaica. G. Fremonti (Fremont's), fl. resembling those of O. elliptica, but catkins shorter and less decidedly pendulous. I. oblong or obovate, acute, slightly wavy at the margins. North-west America. (O. C. 1881, xv. 431.) G. macrophylla (large-leaved). /. green ; racemes short, dis- posed in terminal, dense, few-flowered panicles. Spring. L ovate- elliptic, 4in. long, 2*in. broad, h. 6ft. Mexico, 1846. Fio. 86. BRANCH OF GARRYA TIXTJRETI. G. Thureti (Thuret's). A garden hybrid, intermediate in general characters between its two parents, G. Fadyenii and 0. elliptica the first being the seed-bearer. It was raised in the Paris Botanic Garden about 1862. See Fig. 86. (B. H. 1879, 154.) OARBYACE2B. A tribe of Cornacece. GARUGA (native name). ORD. Burseracea. A genus of about eight or ten species of ornamental stove ever- green trees, natives of tropical Asia and America, with one from Australia. Flowers yellowish. Leaves impari- pinnate ; leaflets almost sessile, crenate. The species here described is the one most generally met with in cultiva- tion. For culture, see Boswellia. G. pinnate (pinnate). I. somewhat villous ; leaflets oblong, lanceo- late, bluntly crenate. Drupe globose, fleshy, with a rough austere taste, h. 60ft. East Indies, 1808. A deciduous tree, with soft, spongy wood. GASTERIA (from gaster, a belly; referring to the swollen base of the flowers). OKD. Isiliacece. A genus of about fifty species of greenhouse evergreen succulents, closely allied to Aloe, natives of the Cape of Good Hope. Flowers racemose or panicled ; pedicels red ; bracts small, persistent; peduncles naked. Leaves usually rosulate, thick, fleshy, generally tongue-shaped or ensiform. Under cultivation in this country, the flowering season of all the Gasterias is during the winter months. For culture, see Aloe. G. acinacifolia (scimitar-leaved), fl, orange. March to Septem ber. I. distichous, scimitar-shaped, with cartilagi edges. ions prickly 1819. (B. M. 2369, under "name of Aloe acinacifolia.) G. brevifolia (short-leaved).* fl. red, nearly lin. long ; raceme 1ft. long ; peduncles 1ft. long, simple or forked. July. I. ten to twelve, close together, Ungulate, Sin. to 4in. long ; apex bluntly cuspidate ; dirty green, with numerous small white spots. Stems leafy. Previous to 1809. G. carinata (keeled).* ng. I. fi . _ . lin. long; raceme 1ft. long; peduncles simple, lift. long. I. fifteen to twenty, dense, outer ones spread- ing, inner ones ascending ; all lanceolate, 5in. to 6in. long ; face concave ; back distinctly keeled ; apex deltoid-cuspidate. Stem leafy. 1731. G. Croucheri (Croucher's).* fl. numerous, pendulous, 2in. long ; perianth tubular, cylindric, contracted in the middle, upper part white, with green veins, lower pale rose-colour ; racemes nume- rous, 8in. to lOin. long, curving upwards ; scape 2ft. to 2Jft. high. August. 1. numerous, spreading, recurved, 1ft. long, Sin. to Siin. broad at base, Jin. to lin. thick, dark green, spotted with white ; margins toothed, h. 2ft. Origin unknown. (B. M. 5812, under name of Aloe Croucheri.) G. disticha (two-ranked).* fl. scarlet, nearly lin. long ; racemes 1ft. or more in length ; peduncles the same, simple or branched. I. ten to twelve, distichous, dense, patent, 4in. to 6in. long, liin. broad ; face flat, with small obscure green spots on both surfaces. Stem leafy. 1820. There are several varieties of this species. G. glabra (glabrous), fl. lin. long ; racemes 1ft. or more long, forty to fifty-flowered ; peduncle simple, 6in. long. I. fifteen to eighteen, dense, outer ones recurved, inner ones erecto-patent, lanceolate, 6in. to 9in. long ; face concave, shining green, both surfaces with small white spots; apex deltoid- cuspidate. Stem leafy. 1796. (B. M. 1331, under name of Aloe carinata.) G. maculata (spotted).* /. scarlet, Jin. long ; raceme 1ft. long ; peduncles 1ft. or more long, simple or branched. I. sixteen to twenty, distichous, loosely disposed, erecto-patent, bright shining green or purple, 4in. to 6in. long, with large white bright spots in profusion ; base dilated, rose-colour. Stem leafy, 6in. to 9in. 1759. (B. M. 979, under name of Aloe Lingua.) G. nigricans (blackish), fl. nearly lin. long ; raceme 1ft. to lift. long ; peduncle stout, 1ft. or more long, always simple. I. twelve to twenty, distichous, dense, tongue-shaped, coriaceous, 4in. to 8in. long ; face swollen below, flat above, shining, dark or purple- green, with copious small white spots. Stem leafy, 2in. to 3in. 1790. (B. M. 838, under name of Aloe Lingua crassifolia.) G. nitida (shining), fl. lin. long ; raceme 1ft. to lift, long ; peduncle 1ft. or more long, simple. I. twelve to fifteen, dense, outer ones spreading, inner ones spreading, all lanceolate, Sin. to 9in. long, bright green ; face concave ; back oblique, keeled, with copious small white spots on both surfaces. Stem leafy, liin. to 2in. 1790. (B. M. 2304, under name of Aloe nitida.) The variety grandipunctata has larger spots. G. pulchra (fair).* fl. scarlet, |in. long ; raceme 1ft. long ; pe- duncles 1ft. or more long, branched. I. sixteen to twenty, distichous, loosely disposed, all ascending, sometimes 1ft. long ; face concave, with large bright green or purplish spots on each surface. Stem leafy, 6in. or more high. 1759. (B. M. 765, under name of Aloe maculata.) G. variolosa (variegated), fl. , inflorescence and perianth agreeing with G. maculata. I. fifteen to eighteen, in a congested, sessile, spirally distichous rosette, ligulate-lanceolate ; the edge white and horny in the upper half, slightly eroded ; the surfaces smooth, dull green, densely spotted with copious, immersed, small oblong whitish-green blotches, h. 1ft. 1860. (Bef. B. 347.) G. verrucosa (warty).* /. lin. long ; racemes four to eight, dis- posed in a deltoid panicle, terminal, 6in. long ; peduncles 6in. long. I. ten to twelve, distichous, close, ensiform, outer ones patent, inner ones alone ascending, 6in. to 9in. long ; face concave ; apex sub-pungent ; back swollen. Stem leafy, lin. to 2in. 1731. (B. M. 837, under name of Aloe verrucosa.) GASTONIA (named in honour of Gaston de Bourbon, 1608 to 16GO, natural son of Henri IV. of France). ORD. Araliacece. A stove evergreen shrub, allied to Aralia (which see for culture). G. cutispongia (spongy-barked). Bois d'fiponge. fl., panicles 1ft. long ; umbels at end of crowded erecto-patent branches ; petals, stamens, styles, and cells of ovary, each ten to twelve. AN ENCYCLOPEDIA OF HORTICULTURE. 55 Gastonia — continued. I. at the tops of the branches, impari -pinnate ; leaflets six to eight, coriaceous, ovate, obtuse, quite entire. Mauritius. A tall, smooth tree, covered with spongy bark. This plant is now referred to the genus Polyscias. GASTRODIA (from gaster, a belly; referring to the swelling of the column in front). ORD. Orchidece. A genus of about seven species of tall, slender, leafless, whitish or brown terrestrial orchids, found in Australia, New Zealand, and the Indian Islands. For culture, see Fogonia. G. Cunningham!! (Cunningham's), fl. dirty green, spotted with white ; bracts short, scarious ; claw of lip winged ; blade linear- oblong, membranous, waved, with two thick ridges down the middle ; column very short. Stem 1ft. to 2ft. high ; root some- times 18in. long, very stout. SYN. G. sesamoutes. G. sesamoides (Sesamum-like). A synonym of G. Cunninghamii. GASTROLOBIUM (from gaster, the belly, and lobos, a pod; in reference to the pods being inflated). ORD. Leguminosce. A genus, containing thirty-two species of greenhouse evergreens, limited to Western Australia. It is closely allied, on the one hand, to the strophiolate species of Oxylobium, only differing from them in the number of ovules, constantly two ; and, on the other, to Pultenaea, from which it is distinguished by the habit, the coriaceous leaves, the bracteoles either deciduous or inconspicuous, and the more coriaceous turgid pod. Flowers yellow, or the keel and base of the standard purple-red, in terminal or axillary racemes, either loose or contracted into corymbs or whorl-like clusters ; bracts and bre,cteoles usually very deciduous. Leaves on very short petioles, more or less distinctly verticillate or oppo- site, simple and entire, usually rigid ; stipules setaceous, rarely wanting. For culture, see Pultenaea. G. bilobum (two-lobed).* fl. numerous, in very short, almost umbel-like terminal racemes. March to May. I. mostly verticil- late, in threes or fours, from obovate to narrow-oblong, thinly coriaceous, glabrous and veined above, pale and often minutely silky pubescent underneath. 1839. A tall shrub. (B. M. 2212 ; B. R. 411 ; L. B. C. 70.) G. calyclnum (large-calyxed).* fl., racemes terminal or in the upper axils ; bracts larger and more membranous than in any other species. 1. opposite or in threes, oblong-elliptical, or more frequently from ovate-lanceolate to lanceolate, with a pungent point, coriaceous, rigid, reticulate, and often glaucous. An erect shrub. G. emarginatum (emarginate). A synonym of G. velutinum. G. trilobum (three-lobed). fl. few, in loose axillary racemes, not usually exceeding the leaves. I. rhomboidal or three-lobed, some- times lanceolate, sometimes very broad and short, very coriaceous, often glaucous, the fine reticulations scarcely prominent. A much- branched, quite glabrous species. G. velutinum (velvety), fl. orange-red, in terminal, rather dense racemes ; bracts ovate, very deciduous. April. L verticillate in threes or fours, from obovate or obcordate to linear-cuneate, very obtuse or truncate, emarginate; margins recurved, coriaceous, reticulate, glabrous above, usually pubescent underneath. Branches rather stout, angular, minutely silky pubescent. An elegant species. SYN. 0. emarginatum. GASTRONEMA. A synonym of Cyrtanthus (which see). GATHERING. See Fruit Gathering. GAUB, or GAB. Indian names for the astringent fruits of Diospyros Embryopteris. GAUDICHAUDIA (named in honour of Charles Gaudichaud, who accompanied Freycinet as naturalist in his voyage round the world, 1817-20). ORD. Malpi- ghiacece. A genus comprising twelve species of graceful, mostly twining stove shrubs, inhabitants of Mexico, New Grenada, and Venezuela. The species of this genus, like those of some other genera of the same family, are remarkable for constantly producing two kinds of flowers. Flowers yellow ; petals sometimes perigynous, roundish, spreading. In the more imper- fect flowers, the petals are either rudimentary or alto- gether absent. Leaves opposite, entire. The species given below is the one in general cultivation. For culture, see Galphimia. Gaudichaudia — continued. G. cynancholdes (Cynanchum-like). fl. yellow, in axillary or terminal crowded racemes. I. stalked, h. 10ft. Mexico, 1824. GATJLTHBRIA (named in honour of Gaulthier, a physician and botanist of Canada). Aromatic Winter- FIG. 87. FLOWERING BRANCH OK GAULTHERIA PROOUMBENS (CREEPING WlNTERGREEN). green. SYN. Gualtheria. ORD. Ericaceae. A genus comprising about ninety species of very ornamental hardy or greenhouse small trees or shrubs, inhabitants of the FIG. 88. GAULTHERIA SHALLO.N. 56 THE DICTIONARY OF GARDENING, Gaultheri*— continued. American continent. A few are found in Asia, five or six occur in Tasmania and New Zealand, and one is Japanese. Flowers white, pink, or red, axillary and terminal, racemose, rarely solitary ; corolla urceolate or campanulate; five-lobed ; lobes spreading or recurved, imbricated. Leaves coriaceous, persistent, alternate, rarely opposite, often serrate or serrulate, penninerved. The hardy species thrive in a peat soil, and are readily increased by division or by layers. The greenhouse kinds should be treated like other greenhouse shrubs. The species enumerated below are those best known to cultivation. O. procumbens does well in the ordinary peat border ; and O. Shallon is well adapted for growing on rockwork, or as edgings. G. antipoda (antipodal).* A. white or pink, small, axillary anil solitary, or crowded towards the ends of the branchlets. I. very coriaceous, veined, shortly petioled, orbicular, oblong-lanceolate or linear-lanceolate, acute, obtuse, or acuminate, h. 6ft New Zealand, 1820. Greenhouse. G. ferruglnea (rusty-coloured).* fl. pink ; racemes bracteate, erect, rising from the axils at the tops of the branches, the whole forming a panicle. June. I. ovate, acute, shining above, with serrulately scabrous margins, clothed with rusty tomentum beneath, as well as the racemes and flowers. A dwarf shrub, or small tree. Brazil, 1852. Greenhouse. (B. M. 4697.) G. fragrantisslma (very fragrant).* fl. secund, drooping, shortly pedicelled ; racemes axillary, strict, erect, or inclined, shorter than the leaves, many-flowered, pubescent ; corolla white or pale pink, mouth small ; lobes rounded. April. I. very variable in shape, elliptic, ovate, obovate, or lanceolate, acute or acu- minate. Branches stout, obtusely angled, shining. Himalayas, 1869. A handsome greenhouse plant (quite hardy in some parts of Ireland). (B. M.5984.) G. procumbens (procumbent).* Canada Tea ; Creeping Winter- green. fl. white, few, terminal, nutant, solitary. July. Berries red, edible. 1. obovate, acute at the base, finely and ciliately toothed. Stems procumbent ; branches erect, naked at bottom, but with crowded leaves at top. North America, 1762. Hardy. See Fig. 81 (B. M. 1966.) G. scabra (scabrous). /., racemes axillary, simple ; calyx and bracts clothed with glandular hairs. Summer. 1. ovate-cordate, acute, toothed, scabrous, reticulately veined beneath. Caraccas. Greenhouse. G. Shallon (Salal).* /., corolla white, tinged with red, downy, urceolate, with a closed limb ; racemes secund, brac May. , bracteate, downy. Berries purple, globose, acute, fleshy. I. ovate, sub- rpl cordate, serrate, glabrous on both surfaces. North-west America, 1826. Plant procumbent, hairy. The berries of this hardy species have a very agreeable flavour, and make excellent tarts. See Fig. 88. (B. ST. 2843 ; B. R. 1411.) GAURA (from gauros, superb ; in reference to the elegance of the flowers of some of the species). ORD. Onagrariece. A genus comprising about twenty species of hardy annual or perennial herbs, rarely shrubs, natives of the warmer parts of North America. Mowers in terminal, spiral racemes. Leaves alternate, simple. But few of the species are now to be found in cultiva- tion. A light soil suits Gauras best, and they can only be propagated by seed, which should be sown early in spring, in the open ground. As soon as the seedlings are large enough to handle, they should be transferred to their flowering quarters, and a slight covering afforded them during severe weather. G. blennis (biennial), fl. irregular ; petals at first white, then reddish, obovate, ascending, spreading, naked; sepals purple at the apex. August to October. 1. lanceolate-oblong, acute denticulated, h. 4?t. to 6ft. 1762. (B. M. 389.) G. Lindheimeri (Lindheimer*s).* fl. rose-white, produced in numerous elegant spikes throughout the summer, h. 4ft. Texas, 1850. Perennial. An elegant slender branching species for masses or mixtd borders. See Fig. 89. (L. & P. F. G. 3, 127.) G. parvlflora (small-flowered), fl. yellow, minute, crowded; spikes elongated. August. I. oblong, acuminated, remotely denticulated, and ciliated on the margins, rather velvety when young. h. 1ft. to IJft. 1835. Annual. (B. M. 3506.) GAUSSIA (a commemorative name). OBD. Palmece. A genus of two or three species of ornamental, medium- sized, unarmed palms, with pinnatisect leaves, from the West Indian Islands. They are nearly allied to Cb.a- mtedorea (which see for culture). O. Ohiesbreghtii (STN8. Chamcedorea Qhiesbreghtii and Oreodoxa ventri- co«a) and 0. princepa are in cultivation in this country. GAYLUSSACIA (named in honour of N. F. Gay- Lussac, a celebrated French chemist, 1778-1850). STN. Lussacia. ORD. Vacciniacece. A genus of about forty species of very ornamental, but little grown, green- house or half-hardy evergreen or deciduous shrubs, natives of tropical America. Flowers white or scarlet, small, disposed in few or many-flowered axillary racemes. Leaves alternate, persistent, rarely membranaceous, and deciduous, entire or serrate, terminated by a hard spine. For culture, see Vaccinium. G. (low), fl. white to rose-red ; corolla bell-shaped ; bracts leaf -like, as long as the pedicels; racemes elongated. June. fr. black. I. deciduous, entire, obovate-oblong, mucronate, green on both sides, rather thick and shining when old. h. 1ft. to 5ft. North America, 1774. (B. M. 1106, under name of Vac- ci niuin dumosum. G. shaped ; bracts (leafy).* fl. greenish-purple ; corolla globular, bell- cts deciduous, shorter than the slender drooping pedicels ; racemes slender, loose. May and June, fr. dark blue, with a white bloom, sweet and edible. /. deciduous, entire, obovate-oblong, blunt, pale, glaucous beneath. Branches slender and divergent, h. 3ft. to 6ft. North America, 1761. (A. B. R. 140, under name of Vaccinium frondosum.) G. pseudo-vaccinium (false Vaccinium). fl. crimson ; racemes axillary, erect, secund, bracteate. May. I. elliptic-lanceolate, obsoletely serrated towards the top. h. 1ft. to 2ft. Brazil, 1843. Greenhouse. SVN. Vaccinium brasiliensis. G. resinosa (resinous).* fl. reddish ; corolla ovoid-conical, or at length cylindrical, with an open mouth ; bracts and bractlets small and deciduous; racemes short, clustered, one-sided; pe- dicels as long as the flowers. May and June. fr. black, without bloom, pleasant (very rarely white). I. deciduous, entire, oval, oblong-ovate, or oblong, thickly clothed and (as well as the flowers) at first clammy with resinous globules, h. 1ft. to 3ft. North America (in woodlands and swamps), 1782. (B. M. 1288, under name of Vaccinium resitiogum.) FIG. 89. FLOWERING BRANCH OF GAURA LINDHEIMERI. AN ENCYCLOPEDIA OF HORTICULTURE. 57 OAZANIA (named in honour of Theodore Gaza, 1393-1478, a learned Greek translator of the botanical works of Theophrastns into Latin). STNS. Mcehnia and Mussinia. ORD. Composites. A genus comprising twenty- four species of very showy plants, natives of the Cape of Good Hope. Flower-heads large and handsome, with yellow strap-shaped ray-florets and tubular disk-florets, usually of a darker colour. Leaves alternate or radical, entire or pinnatisect. Gazanias are of easy culture, in a cool greenhouse, or in the open border, in «ummer. A compost of loam and peat is most suitable. Propagation is rapidly effected, in July or August, by cuttings, made from the side shoots near the base of the plant; these should be inserted in sandy soil, and in a close frame. G. Pavonia (peacock).* fl.-heads large, handsome ; ray-florets with brown spot at the base, or white central dot, and a green tinge. July. I. pinnatifld, hairy, h. lift. 1864. A very hand- some plant. (B. R. 35.) G. rigens (stiff). A.- heads brilliant golden colour, with an interior black velvet band. June. I. linear, spathulate, hairy, h. lit. 1755. (B. M. 90.) From this and G. uniflora, the several garden varieties have been raised. G. splendens (splendid).* fl. -heads large ; ray-florets bright orange, with a black and white spot at the base of each ; disk paler. I. linear -spathulate, silky, white beneath, h. lift. A very handsome and much-grown trailer, of supposed hybrid origin. G. uniflora (one-flowered).* fl.-heads yellow; ray-florets same colour as disk. July and August. I. spathulate-lanceolate, downy beneath. Stem shrubby, decumbent, h. 1ft 1816. (B. M. 2270.) GEAN. The wild Cherry, Cerasus Aviuin (which see). GEASTER. In the southern parts of England, Earth Stars— for so the species of Geaster are called— are now and then found in shrubberies. Some of them are extremely sensitive to moisture, and are driven IG. 90. GEASTER HYGROMETRICUS. about by the wind as shapeless masses (see Fig. 90, a), till the first shower expands them, as in Fig. 90, b. GEBLERA. Included under Securinega. GEERIA. A synonym of Eurya (which see). GEISSOIS (from geisson, house -tiling ; the seeds are imbricated like the tiles on a house). OED. Saxifragece. A genus comprising about four species of stove evergreen trees, natives of New Caledonia, the Fiji Islands, and Australia. G. racemosa, perhaps the only species yet introduced, is a handsome tree, requiring a very sandy loam, to which a small quantity of peat may be added. Cuttings root if inserted in sand, under a hand glass, in heat. G. racemosa (racemose), fl. crimson ; racemes axillary, many- flowered, solitary, or in threes, produced from the old wood. 1. opposite, petiolate, quinate ; leaflets elliptic, obtuse, quite entire ; stipules oblong, ribbed, undivided, h. 20ft. New Cale- donia, 1851. GEISSOMEHJA (from geisson, a tile, and metis, a part ; the imbricated bracts fall over each other like tiles on a roof). STN. Salpixantha. OBD. Acanthacece. A genus containing about ten species of stove evergreen, pubescent or glabrous shrubs, of which one is from Jamaica and the rest from Brazil or Guiana. Flowers red, often velvety, long, in simple terminal spikes or paniculate racemes ; calyx fire-parted ; corolla tubular, dilated upwards. Leaves oval or oblong, entire. Stems Vol. II. Geissomeria — continued. tetragonal. The plants thrive in a compost of loam and peat, with the addition of sand and a little rotten cow- dung. Cuttings, procured from rather firm shoots, root easily during summer, if inserted in sandy soil, covered with a bell glass, and placed in bottom heat. The species best known to cultivation are those described below. G. COOOlnea (scarlet).* fl. scarlet, sessile, decussate in loose spikes ; peduncles axillary, solitary, pendulous, or terminal by threes. August. I. ovate, coriaceous, entire, h. 3ft. Jamaica, 1842. (B. M. 4158, under name of Salpixantha eoccinea.) G. longlflora (long-flowered), fl., corolla scarlet, tubular, velvety, with an arcuate, clavate, somewhat ventricose tube, which is smooth inside ; spikes terminal and axillary. October. I. oppo- site, ovate-lanceolate, wavy, sessile, tapering to the base, smooth above, somewhat pubescent beneath, silky at the veins, h. 3ft. Brazil, 1826. A splendid free-flowering plant. (B. B. 1045.) (from geisson, a tile, and rhiza, a root; referring to the dry coats which cover the bulbs, like the tiles on a roof). Tile Boot. OED. Iridece. A genus of about twenty-four species of very pretty green- house or half-hardy bulbous plants, natives, for the most part, of the Cape of Good Hope. Flowers Ixia- like, variable in colour, very showy; perianth funnel- shaped, with a short tube, and an ample, six-parted, nearly equal limb. Leaves narrow, setaceous, or sword- shaped. Bulbs covered by the scarious remains of the bases of the leaves, which lie over each other like the tiles of a roof, and hence the common name. For cul- ture, see Galazia. The following are a selection of the species usually seen in cultivation : G. excisa (abrupt-leaved), /.white. April and May. I., radical ones ovate-oblong. A. 6in. 1789. (B. M. 584, under name of Ixia excisa.) G. grandis (large-flowered).* fl. inclined; perianth segments pale straw-coloured, with a blood-red midrib, elliptic-obovate, obtuse, patent; spike six to eight-flowered. May. I. radical, linear- ensiform, obtuse, green, strongly ribbed towards the base. Stem stout, leafy throughout. 1868. (B. M. 5877.) G. inflexa (bending).* fl. very large and handsome; perianth petal-like ; tube very short, slender at the base ; segments of a bright yellow, each marked at the base with an obcordate dark purple or velvet spot. May. I. ensiform, acute, falcate, or ob- liquely bent. h. IJft. 1824. One of the handsomest species of the genus; closely allied to G. obtusata. SYN. G. vaginata. (S. B. F. G. 138.) G. obtusata (blunt). /. yellow. May. I., radical ones en- sifonn-linear, obtuse, h. 1ft. 1801. (B. M. 672.) G. Rochensis (De la Roche's).* fl. blue, crimson-spotted centre May. I. radical, linear, acute. Stem smooth. A. 9in. 1790. (B. M. 598, under name of Ixia Rochensis.) G. secunda (side-flowering), fl. white. May. I., radical ones linear-acute. Stem villous. A. 1ft. 1795. (B. M. 1105, under name of Ixia secunda.) G. setacea (bristle-leaved), fl. sulphur-coloured. June and July. 1., radical ones bristly. Stem simple, few-flowered. A. 1ft. 1809. (B. M. 1255.) G. vaginata (sheathed). A synonym of G. inflexa. GELASINE (from gelasinos, a smiling dimple ; a poetic allusion to the delicacy of the flowers). OED. Iridece. G. azurea is a pretty hardy bulbous plant, native of South America. For culture, &c., see Komn- lea. G. aznrea (blue), fl. blue ; petals dotted with white and black at base ; spathe many-flowered, shorter than peduncles ; peduncles clasped closely by three or four bracts. May. I. plicate, lift, to 2ft. long. A. 1ft. 1838. (B. M. 3779.) GELONIUM. This genus is now included, by the authors of the "Genera Plantarum," under Ratonia (which see). CrELSEMIEJE. A tribe of Loganiacece. GELSEMIUM (from Gelsemino, an Italian name of the Jessamine). SYNS. Leptopteris and Medicia. OBD. Loganiaceoe. A genus comprising three species of twining glabrous shrubs, one from North America, another from Sumatra, and the third from China. Flowers yellow, showy ; corolla infundibulifonn ; tube sub-cylindrical ; throat dilated. Leaves opposite, membranaceous. G. sem- pervirens, the only species yet known to cultivation, is a I 58 THE DICTIONARY OF GARDENING, Gelsemium — continued. half-hardy shrub. It thrives in a rich loamy soil, and may be propagated by cuttings, placed under a hand glass. G. nitidum (shining). A synonym of G. sempervirens. G. sempervirens (evergreen), fl. fragrant ; corolla deep yellow, over lin. long ; peduncles very short, axillary ; stigmas of one form and anthers of the other protruding. Spring. I. evergreen, thin- coriaceous, shining, oblong or ovate-lanceolate, IJin. to 2in. long. Stem slender. Southern United States, 1840. SYN. G. nitidum. GEMINATE. United in pairs. GEMINIFLOROUS. Twin-flowered; when two flowers grow together. GENETYLLIS. A synonym of Darwinla (which see). GENICULATE. Bent abruptly, like a knee, e.g., the stems of many grasses. GENICULUM. The node of a stem. GENIFA (from Genipapo, the Guiana name of one of the species). Genip-tree. OBD. Rubiacece. A genus com- prising about eight species of stove evergreen shrubs or small trees, natives of tropical America and the West Indian Islands. Flowers white, at length yellow, axillary or terminal, solitary or few ; corolla narrow, campanulate ; tube short; throat glabrous or villous. Fruit succulent, with a rather thick rind, crowned by the calyx, and tapering at each end. Leaves sessile or shortly pedun- culate, opposite, coriaceous, obovate, or lanceolate, clear ; stipules interpetiolar, ovate, acuminated, deciduous. For culture, see Gardenia, to which the genus is closely allied. The species enumerated below flower in summer. G. amerioana (American). Genipap Fruit, fl. small; pe- duncles axillary, dichotomous, corymbose, jr. greenish-white, large, full of dark purple juice ; pulp edible, rather acrid. I. oblong-lanceolate, quite glabrous on both surfaces, h. 20ft. to 30ft. West Indian Islands, &c., 1779. G. Carnto (native name), fl., corolla white, having the tube silky both inside and outside ; peduncles terminal, two or three- flowered. J. obovate, obtuse, glabrous above, clothed with velvety tomentum beneath, h. 20ft. West Indian Islands, &c. G. Merianse (Merian's). fl. nearly sessile, crowded at the tops of branches. Berry hairy, umbilicate ; pulp edible. I. oblong- ovate, h. 20ft Guiana, 1800. G. oblongifolla (oblong-leaved), fl. crowded at the tops of the branches, on short pedicels, and disposed somewhat racemosely. fr. the size of a peach. I. oblong-ovate, obtuse, shining above, and downy on the nerves beneath, with rather revolute margins. h. 20ft. Peru, 1821. The seeds and pulp of the fruit of this species are used by the Indians as a dye. GENIFAF FRUIT. See Genipa amerioana. GENIF-TREE. See Genipa. GENISTA (the old Latin name used by Virgil). OBD. Leguminosce. A large genus (about seventy species have been described) of pretty dwarf -growing unarmed or prickly, greenhouse or hardy shrubs, natives of Europe, Northern Africa, and Western Asia. Flowers yellow, rarely white, produced either singly or in clusters from the angles of the leaves, or at the ends of the branches. Leaves simple or trifoliolate. The hardy species here described are very pretty plants for growing on rockwork, in almost any ordinary soil, where they will flower con- tinuously throughout the summer. For general culture, see Cytisus. G. setnensls (Etna), fl.. racemes terminal. June and July. 1. few, linear, silky, h. 6ft. to 15ft. Sicily and Sardinia, 1816. Plant erect, much branched. (B. M. 2674, under name of Spartium cetnensis.) G. anglica (English). Needle Furze ; Putty whin, fl., racemes few-flowered, terminal ; floriferous branches unarmed. Summer. J. ovate-lanceolate ; spines simple. Root woody, long, creeping A. 1ft. to 2ft. Europe (Britain). Plant smooth. (Sy. En. B. 326.) G. anxantica (Anxantic). fl. racemose. Summer. I. ovate- elliptic, rather coriaceous, veiny. Branches angular • stems dif- fuse. Naples, 1818. Plant quite diffuse. (S. F. G. ii. 266.) G. ephedroldes (Ephedra-like). fl. rather silky, alternate, spicate. Summer. 1. few, sessile, trifoliolate, and simple ; leaf- lets linear, smoothish. Branches spinescent, stiff, terete, at length striated, h. 2ft. to 3ft. Corsica and Sardinia. G. nlspanloa (Spanish), fl., racemes terminal, somewhat capi- tate ; floriferous branches unarmed. Summer. I. lanceolate, Genista — continued. villous ; spines branched, stiff, h. 6in. to 12in. South-western Europe, 1759. (L. B. C. 1738.) G. ovata (ovate), fl. in short racemes. Summer. I. ovate, or ovate-oblong, hairy. Stems numerous, hairy, erect, somewhat herbaceous, striated, terete, h. 2ft. to 4ft. Central and Southern Europe, 1816. (L. B. C. 482.) G. pilosa (hairy). Greenweed. fl. axillary, on short pedicels. Summer. I. obovate-lanceolate, obtuse, complicated, downy. Stem procumbent, striated, branched. Europe (Britain). (Sy. En. B. 327.) G. radiata (rayed), fl., heads two to four-flowered, terminal. Summer. I. trifoliolate, nearly sessile, opposite ; leaflets linear, rather silky. Branches angular, crowded, glabrous, h. 1ft to 3ft. South Europe, 1758. (B. M. 2260, under name of Spartium radiatum.) G. Retama (Betam). fl. white, silky; racemes lateral, few- L flowered. Summer. very few, linear-oblong, pubescent. Branches erect, slender, twiggy, flexible, h. 2ft. to 4ft. Spain, Portugal, &c., 1670. (B. M. 683, under name of Spartium mono- tpermum.) G. sagittalis (arrow-jointed), fl. disposed in an ovate, terminal, leafless spike. Spring. I. ovate-lanceolate. Stems prostrate ; branches herbaceous, ascending, two-edged, membranous, h. 6in. South Europe, 1750. G. tinctoria (dyers'). Dyers' Greenweed. fl. disposed in spicate racemes, smooth. Spring and autumn. I. lanceolate, smoothish. Stems erect; branches terete, striated, erect, h. 1ft. to 2ft. Europe (Britain), North and West Asia. This species, of which there is a very pretty double-flowered form, yields a yellow dye. G. trlangnlaris (triangular), fl., racemes terminal, short. Summer. I. trifoliolate, the upper ones simple ; leaflets ovate- lanceolate, villous. Branches triquetrous, decumbent, h. 2ft. to 4ft. South Europe. (B. M. 314, under name of G. triquetra.) G. virgata (twiggy), fl. silky, disposed in something like racemes. March. I. oblong-lanceolate, rather silky. Branches twiggy, terete, striated, h. 3ft. to 4ft. Madeira, 1777. (B. R. xxx. II.) GENTIAN. See Gentiana. GENTIANA (Gentiane, a name used by Dioscorides, BO called in honour of Gentius, a King of Illyricum, who imprisoned the Roman Ambassadors at the request of Perseus, King of Macedonia ; he is said to have been the first who experienced the virtues of Gentian). Gentian. SYN. Selatium. Including Pneumonanthe. OBD. Gentianeoe. A large genus (about 180 species) of hardy, annual or perennial herbs, dispersed throughout temperate and alpine (rare in Arctic) regions. Flowers blue, violet, purple, yellow, or white, axillary and terminal, sessile or rarely pedunculate, erect. Leaves opposite, often sessile. Gen- tians are among the most beautiful of hardy plants, and some have flowers of a deeper and more intense blue colour than can be found in almost any other genus. Un- fortunately, they are, in many localities, most difficult to establish ; and some species, G. verna for instance, can rarely be induced, under artificial conditions, to increase and blossom as it does in a natural state. All Gentians are extremely sensitive of root disturbance, caused by their being divided or transplanted; consequently, any that are established should be allowed to remain, unless their removal is an absolute necessity. Propagation is effected by seeds, which ripen in this country ; and, in one or two instances, by division of the plants, although this is not recommended, for the reasons already given. G. acaulis withstands division, perhaps, better than any of the others, and, being rather plentiful, it is frequently used as an edging plant, more especially in Scotland, and in some of the cooler parts of England. Early in spring, just as growth com- mences, is the best time for division, which should be carefully performed, without undue injury being caused to the roots. Species like G. cruciata, which have their flower-stems proceeding from one rootstock, will not admit of increase by this method. Seeds are slow in vegetating, especially if they are old, or have been stored in a very dry place. When gathered from home-grown plants, they should be sown as soon as ripe ; and, if this is done during the latter part of summer, germination may be expected (although it does not always take place) the following spring. If seeds are imported or purchased from nurserymen, the process may take one or two years, and AN ENCYCLOPAEDIA OF HORTICULTURE. 59 Oeutiana— continued. then be uncertain. Well-drained pots or pans should be prepared, and filled with a compost consisting chiefly of loam and sand, made rather fine. The seeds must only be lightly covered and watered, the pans being after- wards wintered in a frame from which frost is merely excluded. Raising Gentians from seed is a slow process, requiring considerable care in watering, and in potting or pricking off the young plants, so as to avoid injury to the tender roots. But little growth will be made by the majority of perennial species during the first year, and they should not be fully exposed outside, at least Gentiana — continued. species ; and those which are very dwarf alpines, from high elevations, should be provided with a place on rock- work, specially prepared to insure sufficient moisture at the season when it is required. A cool place should be selected for the treatment of the species from the Himalayas. Any that are difficult to manage, and are not found to succeed, should be provided with a top- dressing of new soil, or other extra attention, in pre- ference to lifting them, unless the proper and requisite cultural requirements have been neglected when planting in the first place. In Scotland, G. verna is successfully FIG. 91. GENTIANA ACAULIS. before the second season. It usually takes three or four years to obtain sizes large enough for flowering. Cultivation. Nearly the whole of the Gentians require plenty of moisture when making their growth, although thorough drainage is also essential. To insure this, extra attention should be given in the first place, and_ perma- nent positions selected. Some species succeed fairly well in various situations, either with or without shade. A good depth of loamy soil, having stones intermixed, and some of the latter placed round the plants, is the best pre- paration for them, this mixture requiring the addition of some peat for such as have thick stocks or long tap roots. An open position at the base of rockwork, or in the open border, should be chosen for the taller-growing cultivated in pans, being planted and left undisturbed, with the exception of an annual top-dressing. The pans with their contents, are wintered in cold frames, an plunged, in spring, in the open ground, where the plants flower and remain for the summer. Stones are most useful round the roots of those planted out, on account of the moisture which they retain in dry weather. All 1 species described below are perennials. ments obtuse muronate March to May. I. opposite, decussate; Sal ones crowded, imbricated. Stems tetragonal, one^owered h 2in to «n. Alps and Pyrenees. See Fig. 91. (B. M. 52.) fhere'are several forms of this handsome species. G. adscendens (ascendent). /. blue ; corolla campanulate, THE DICTIONARY OF GARDENING, Gentiana — continued. five-cleft, toothed between the segments ; calyx three-toothed, opening on one side. June and July. I. lanceolate, h. 9in. Siberia, 1799. (B. M. 705.) There is a form of this species, minor (B. M. 723). Fio. 92. FLOWERING BRANCHES OF GENTIANA AFFINIS. G. offlnls (related).* ^.blue ; corolla narrowly funnel-shaped, lin or less lone ; calyx lobes linear or subulate, unequal. Summer 12inT h 3* or lanceolate to linear. Stems clustered, 4in. to l*fln. high. North America. See Fig. 92. G. alglda (cold).* /.milk-coloured, marked with bluish dots and G. Andrews!! (Andrews's).* A. blue, crowded, in axillary and terminal fascicles, sessile ; corolla campanulately ventricose, with five obtuse entire segments, and five smaller accessory fringed ones. August. I. oblong-lanceolate. Stems terete, h. lit. to 2ft. North America, 1776. (B. M. 6421.) G. asclepiadea (Swallow-wort-like).* fl., terminal ones crowded, axillary ones solitary, all nearly sessile ; corolla large, campanu! late three times longer than the calyx, five-cleft ; segments ovate, acute. July. 1. ovate-lanceolate, stern-clasping? with Q-entiana — continued. repand edges. Stems obsoletely tetragonal, h. 6in. to 18in. Southern and Eastern Europe, 1629. (B. M. 1078.) G. bavarica (Bavarian).* fl. deep blue ; corolla funnel-shaped, ten-cleft; segments entire, or slightly serrated, the accessory ones small, horn-formed. July. I. ovate, obtuse ; radical ones crowded, imbricated, longer than the cauline ones. Stems one- flowered. h. Sin. Central Europe, 1775. G. Burseri (Burser's). fl. yellow, verticillate ; corolla usually five-cleft, campanulate, dotted ; segments lanceolate, with a small accessory tooth between each. July. I. opposite, ovate, apicu- lated, sheathing at the base. h. 2ft. Pyrenees, 1820. G. Catesbzei (Catesby's). fl. pale blue, terminal, fasciculate; corolla ten-cleft, campanulate, somewhat ventricose or barrel- shaped ; the five regular segments acutish, the five accessory ones jagged. August. I. short, elliptic-ovate, acute, with scabrous edges. Stem terete, minutely downy, h. 6in. to 12in. Carolina, 1803. G. ciliata (fringed), fl. light blue ; corolla four-cleft ; segments serrated, finely cut in the middle. August and September. I. lanceolate and linear. Stem flexuose, angular, h. 9in. Germany, 1759. (B. M. 639.) G. crinita (hairy), fl. light blue ; corolla four-cleft ; segments finely cut. June and July. I. lanceolate, acute. Stem erect, rounded, h. 6in. North America, 1804. (B. M. 2031.) G. cruclata (crossed).* /. terminal and axillary, crowded, nearly sessile ; corolla tubularly campanul ' n^ate, eight-cleft (regula ments acute, four accessory ones small, acutely bifid or ja; jagged), , dotted with a pale tube, widened upwards, and a pale blue limb, with green in the throat. June and July. I. broad-lanceolate, connate at the base. Stems ascending, terete, h. 6in. Europe, 1596. G. Fortune! (Fortune's).* fl. axillary, solitary, sessile ; corolla funnel-shaped, slightly ventricose ; limb of five spreading cordate- ovate lobes, deep blue, and equally spotted with white. Decem- ber. I. opposite, the lowest small and ovate, the rest lanceolate, glabrous, three-nerved. North China, 1853. A very handsome greenhouse species. (B. M. 4776.) G. gelida (ice-cold), fl. axillary and terminal, aggregate ; corolla campanulate, with bluntish segments, the five accessory ones short and jagged. June and July. I. lanceolate. Stems ascend- big, tetragonal, h. 6in. Caucasus, 1807. G. intermedia (intermediate). A synonym of G. ochroleuca. G. Kurroo (native name).* /. erect or inclined, pedicellate ; corolla tube narrowly campanulate ; lobes five, broadly ovate, acute or acuminate, azure-blue, sprinkled towards the throat with white. October. I. elongate-linear or oblong-lanceolate, obtuse or acute, concave, very coriaceous, bright green. Himalaya Mountains, 1879. A very handsome plant for the rock garden. SYN. Pneumonanthe Kurroo. (B. M. 6470.) G. linearis (linear-leaved). ft. blue, one to five, in a terminal Fro. 93. GEMIA.NA ALGIDA, showi of Inflorescence ng Habit, and detached Portion s (enlarged). AN ENCYCLOPEDIA OF HORTICULTURE. 61 Gentiana — continued. inyolucrate cluster ; corolla lin. or more long ; calyx lobes shorter than the tube. Summer. I. linear or narrowly lanceolate. Stem slender, 1ft. to 2ft. high. North America. SYN. G. Pseudo- pneumonanthe. G. lutca (yellow).* fl. verticillate, sub-cymose ; corolla yellow, veiny, and spotted, rotate, five or six-cleft. July. I. broad, ovate ; radical leaves ovate-oblong ; cauline ones sessile, ovate, acute, h. 4ft. to 6ft. Europe, 1596. This species furnishes the Gentian root of commerce. G. macrophylla (large-leaved). JL terminal, verticillately ag- gregate, involucrated by usually four floral leaves ; corolla pale blue, small, tubularly campanulate, four or five-cleft, with short acutish segments. July. L radical ones lanceolate, length of stem. Stems nearly terete, almost naked in the middle, h. 6in. to 12in. Siberia, 1796. (B. M. 1414.) G. ochroleuca (yellowish-white), fl. blue, terminal, aggregate ; olla ventricose, five-fid. I. obovate- United States, 1820. SYN. G. inter- , . , calyx foliaceous, unequal ; corolla ventricose, five- oblong, three-nerved, h. 6i media. (B. M. 2303.) G. ornata (adorned).* fl. solitary and sessile at the ends of the branches ; corolla tube whitish, striped with blue, sub-cylindric, a little inflated; lobes intensely blue, five, small, triangular- ovate, acute. May. I. ovate-lanceolate or linear-lanceolate, acute, acuminate or obtuse, deep green, with a pale midrib. Himalayas. (B. M. 6514.) . pannonica (Pannonian). /. verticillate, axillary, and ter- minal ; corolla purple, beset with dots, campanulate, six or seven- cleft, rather membranous ; tube yellowish. July. I., radical ones ovate, apiculate ; cauline ones ovate, lanceolate ; floral ones acuminated. Stem obsoletely tetragonal, of Europe. h. 1ft. to 2ft. Alps FIG. 94. GENTIANA PNEUMONANTHE, showing Habit and detached Single Flower. G. Pneumonanthe.* Wind Flower, ft. terminal and axillary, pedunculate ; corolla deep blue, having the accessory segments small and green, funnel-shaped, five-cleft. August. I. Imear- spathulate, obtuse. Stems simple, tetragonal, h. 6in. to 12m. Northern hemisphere (Britain). See Fig. 94. There are white and other varieties of this species. G. Pseudo-pneumonanthe (bastard Wind Flower). A synonym of G. linearis. Q. punctata (dotted).* fl. verticillate ; corolla yellow, dotted with numerous irregular purple spots, campanulate, six to .eignt- cleft, large. June. 1. ovate, acutish ; lower ones petiolate, superior ones acuminated. Stem sub-tetragonal, h. 1ft. to llg lanceolate, 1ft. long. Bulb large. 1868. (B. M. G. hyacinthina (hyacinthine-blue).* fl., upper segments blue at the top, white towards the base, about Sin. across ; umbel nine to ten-flowered ; scape rather longer than the leaves. I. stalked, ovate-oblong, 6in. to Sin. long, with a remarkable lattice-like venation. Bulbs ovate, moderate sized. 1815. See Fig. 153. (G. C. 1874, ii. 14.) G. h. ma-rlma (largest), fl. white, tipped with rich blue, nearly 5m. across ; umbel close, ten to twelve-flowered. I. broadly ovate- oblong. G. ornata (adorned).* fl. delicate bluish-lilac, fading off to nearly white, long-stalked ; umbel twenty to twenty-four- flowered, and forming a spreading head of some Sin. or Sin. >lft. to lift (B. M.6367.)' across ; scape 1ft. to I2n,. u each side. I. elliptic-ob FIG. 153. GRIFFINIA HYACINTHINA. t. high, compressed, with an acute ridge c-oblong ; margins much recurved. 1876. GHJNDELIA (named in honour of David H. Grindel, a German botanist, 1766-1836). SYN. Donia. OBD. Composite. A genus containing about twenty species of hardy or nearly hardy, biennial or perennial, shrubby or herbaceous plants, natives of North America and extra- tropical South America. Flower-heads yellow, solitary at the ends of the branches, and from lin. to 2in. across. Leaves alternate, sessile or semi-amplexicaul, often rigid, dentate, or ciliato-serrate. Grindelias are of easy culture in peat and loam. Propagated by seeds, sown in spring or autumn, in a cool greenhouse or frame ; by cuttings ; and by divisions. G. argnta (sharp). JL-hfads yellow. July and September. I., lower ones spathulate ; upper ones linear-oblong, serrated, one- nerved. Stem simple, h. 1ft. Mexico, 1822. Herbaceous, hardy. (B. R. 781, under name of G. angustifolia.) G. glutinosa (glutinous).* fl.-heads yellow ; involucres viscid. January to December. I. ovate-oblong, serrated, evergreen. h. 2ft. Peru, 1803. Shrubby, nearly hardy. (B. R. 187.) G. grandiflora (large-flowered).* fl.-heads deep yellow or orange, which, prior to expansion, is covered with the glutinous balsamic secretion occurring in some other species of this genus, large, about 14in. across. Summer. 1., radical ones spathulate ; cauline ones sessile, clasping, dentate. Stem branching near the top. A. 2ift. to 3ft. Texas, 1851. Hardy biennial. (B. M. 4628.) G. Innloides (Inula-like).* fl-heads yellow. June to Sep- tember. I. sessile, oblong-lanceolate, acute, serrated at end, not viscid, h. lift. Mexico, 1815. Shrubby. (B. M. 3737; B. B, 248.) G. speciosa (showy), fl.-heads yellow, nearly Sin. across, covered, to a considerable thickness, with a transparent glutinous varnish. h. 2ft. Patagonia, 1852. Shrubby, nearly hardy. (L. & P. F. G. iii. 290.) G. squarrosa (squarrose). fl.-heads yellow ; scales of involucre filiform at end, revolute, squarrose. July to September. I. oblong, amplexicaul, serrated, h. 2ft. North America, 1811. Herbaceous, hardy perennial. (B. M. 1706, under name of Donia squarrosa.) GBJSELINIA (named in honour of Franc. Griselini, an Italian botanist, who flourished in the middle of the eighteenth century). OBD. Cornacece. A genus com- prising eight species of trees or shrubs, natives of New Zealand, Chili, and Brazil. Flowers dioecious, in terminal panicles. Leaves alternate, often nnequilateral, oblong, sub-quadrate or lanceolate, thick, coriaceous, entire, spinose- dentate or angulate; ribs inconspicuous; veins reticulated. Griselinias thrive in light rich loam, and are propagated by cuttings, or by layers. The species de- scribed below are probably the only ones yet in cultiva- tion. G. littoralis (shore-loving).* fl. as in 0. lucida. I. ovate or oblong, less oblique at the base, wedge-shaped or narrowed into the slender rather long petiole ; veins very obscure below, h. 30ft. New Zealand, 1872. G. lucida (shining), fl. minute ; pedicels jointed, very short ; panicles axillary, often as long as the leaves, much branched, minutel dry) hairs. ly pubescent, with spreading golden (when I. very obliquely ovate, obovate or oblong, quite entire, obtuse or rounded at the tip, very unequal towards the base, one side much narrower than the other ; veins very distinct on the under surface. h. 10ft. to 12ft New Zealand. G. macrophylla does not appear to be more than a large-leaved form of this. 100 THE DICTIONARY OF GARDENING, GRISLEA (named in honour of Gabriel Grisley, author of a work on the Botany of Portugal, who lived in the seventeenth century). OBD. Lythrarieas. A genus now limited to the one species described below, which is a very pretty stove evergreen shrub. It thrives in a com- post of fibry and sandy peat and loam. Propagated by cuttings, obtained in spring from firm young shoots, and inserted in sandy soil, under a bell glass, in heat. G. secunda (side-flowering), fl. pale pink ; stamens long, purple. I. on short petioles, puberulous on both surfaces. Branchlets glabrous, h. 4ft. to 6ft. Venezuela and New Grenada, 1820. G. tomentosa. See Woodfordla tomentosa. GROBYA (named after Lord Grey, of Groby, a munificent patron of horticulture; he died in 1836). OED. Orchidece. A genus containing two species of greenhouse epiphytal Orchids, natives of Brazil. Flowers yellow or greenish, tinged and spotted with purple, in short racemes; petals broader than the sepals, forming a sort of helmet overhanging the lip; lip small, five- lobed at the apex. Leaves Grass-like, ribbed at the apex. Pseudo-bulbs ovate. For culture, see Stanliopea. G. Amnerstlae (Lady Amherst's).* /. ochre-spotted, in pendulous racemes. September. I. linear, acute, striated. Pseudo-bulbs ovate, green, terete, h. 6in. 1829. (B. B. 1740.) G. galeata (helmeted). fl. green, purple; petals oblong, obliquely-rhomboid, rounded at top, disposed into a helmet along with the dorsal sepal ; lateral sepals deflexed, connate at base ; lip tripartite ; lateral segments linear, middle one cuneate- truncate, with a toothed disk, warted from shining tubercles. Summer. I like those of G. Amherstias. h. 6in. 1836. GRONOVIA (named in honour of Dr. John Frederick Gronovius, a learned botanist at Leyden ; he was a friend of Linnaeus, and died in 1763). ORD. Loasece. A scandent stove or greenhouse annual herb, somewhat resembling the common Bryony. It succeeds in a rich sandy loam. Pro- pagated by seeds, sown on a hotbed ; the seedlings, when large enough, being potted off singly, and trained upon sticks. G. scandens (climbing). /. yellow, small; calyx with a five- toothed border, funnel-shaped ; petals five, inserted in the calyx tube. June and July. I. alternate, petiolate, broad-cordate, five- lobed, stringy. Texas to Venezuela, 1731. GROSSULARIACE.2E. A tribe of Saxifrages. GROUND CHERRY. See Cerasns Chamse- GROUND IVY. See Nepeta Gleclioma. GROUND LAUREL. See Epigaea repens. GROUND OR EARTH NUT. See Aracliis. GROUNDSEL. See Senecio. GROUNDSEL- TREE. A common name of Bac- charis halimifolia (which see). GRUBBER, or GRUBBING AXE. A useful gar- den implement for uprooting trees, &c., somewhat similar Fio. 154. GRUBBER, OR GRUBBING AXE. in shape to the ordinary pick, but having both points flattened and made wedge-shaped. One point, for cutting Grubber, or Grabbing1 Axe — continued. roots or splitting wood, is in a line with the handle ; and the other is placed in a transverse direction for clearing roots of soil (see Fig. 154). What is known as a Daisy FIG. 155. DAISY GRUBBER. Grubber (see Fig. 155) is a short implement, made with a claw, for removing the roots of Daisies from lawns. It is furnished with a handle, and the flat portion (a) is bent to form a leverage when pressed on the ground. GRUBS. Apple Grubs may be the larvae either of a beetle, Anthonomus pomorum, or of a small moth, Carpocapsa pomonana. The beetle belongs to the group of Weevils, or long-snouted beetles. It is about sin. long, and of a dark colour. In June, the females lay their eggs in the flower buds (one egg in each), and the larvae soon emerge and live in the interior of the bud, which remains unopened. The grub is footless, of a pale colour, with a dark head. The only remedies are to remove and destroy the buds containing the larvae and pupae, and to shake from the branches and destroy the females before they have laid their eggs. See also Apple or Codliii Grub. GRYLLOTALFA. See Mole Cricket. GRYLLUS. See Crickets. GUAIACUM (from Guaiac, its South American name). ORD. Zygopkylleae. A genus containing about eight species of lofty stove evergreen trees or shrubs, inhabiting the West Indies and sub-tropical North America. Flowers blue or purple ; peduncles axillary, one-flowered. Leaves opposite, abruptly pinnate ; leaflets entire. Guaiacums require a compost of rich, sandy, fibry loam. Propagated from ripened cuttings, obtained in April, and inserted in sandy soil, under a hand glass, in heat. G. arborea (tree-like). /. blue, disposed in loose racemes. July. I. with seven to fourteen pairs of oval-oblong, blunt leaflets, which are unequal at the base, and are usually alternate. A. 40ft. Car- thagena, 1816. G. offlcinale (officinal).* Lignum Vifce. /. blue ; peduncles twin. July. I. with two pairs of obovate or oval blunt leaflets. Bark smooth, variegated with green and white ; wood with a peculiar acid aromatic scent, h. 30ft. Jamaica, 1694. (B. M. PI. 41 ; B. R. 1839, 9.) This species yields the Lignum Vita;, a greenish- brown, hard, heavy wood, extensively used by turners ; and also the fragrant resin commonly called gum suaiacum, which, as well as the bark and wood, is used medicinally. GUALTHERIA. See Gaultheria. GUANO. See Manures. GUAREA (from Guam, the native name in Cuba). OBD. Meliacece. A genus comprising thirty species of tall stove evergreen trees or shrubs, natives of tropical America, but rarely seen in cultivation. Flowers white or reddish, in axillary panicles, racemes, or spikes. Leaves pinnate; leaflets opposite or alternate. For culture, see Guaiacum. G. grandlflora (large-flowered), fl., petals silky on the outside, hardly Jin. long; racemes elongated. February. I., leaflets many pairs, oval-oblong, Sin. or 9in. long. A. 30ft. French Guiana, 1752. All parts of this tree, but especially the bark, have a musk-like perfume. G. ramlflora (branch-flowered). /. whitish ; racemes lateral, very short, rising from the sides of the branches. /., leaflets ovate- lanceolate, h. 20ft. Porto Eico, 1822. Tree. G. Swartzii (Swartz's). fl. white ; racemes elongated. June and July. 1., leaflets lanceolate-ovate, acuminated, feather-nerved, with six or seven prominent lateral nerves beneath, h. 20ft. West Indian Islands, 1822. Tree. GUATTERIA (named in honour of John B. Guatteri, I an Italian botanist, once Professor at Parma). ORD. I Anonacece. A genus containing about fifty species of very AN ENCYCLOPEDIA OF HORTICULTURE. 101 Guatteria — continued. ornamental stove evergreen trees or shrubs, all natives of the warmer parts of the New World. Flowers yellowish- white, greenish, or dusky ; peduncles one-flowered, axillary or lateral, solitary or fasciculated. Leaves feather-nerved, alternate, entire, exstipulate. Guatterias thrive in a com- post of loam, peat, and sand. Propagation is readily effected by cuttings, inserted in sand, under a glass, in heat. Probably G. Ouregou is the only species in cultivation. G. Ouregou (Ouregou). ped lar, uncles axillary, short, two to four ; calyx segments triangular, pointed ; petals rusty-velvety, obovate, interior longer ; carpids ovoid. I. obovate-oblong, cuspidate, cuneate at the base, shining above, glabrescent be- neath ; veins prominent. Caribbean Islands. A tall tree. SYN. Anona chrysopetala. GUAVA. See Fsidium pyrifenun. GUAZUMA (name of Mexican origin, employed by Plumier). Bastard Cedar. SYNS. Bubroma and Diuro- glossum. ORD. Sterculiacece. A genus containing about five species of ornamental stove evergreen trees, natives of the tropical regions of both hemispheres. Flowers small; cymes axillary, shortly pedunculate. Leaves un- equally dentate, often oblique. The species thrive in a compost of peat and loam. Cuttings of ripened shoots root freely in sand, under a glass, in heat. G. ulmifolia (Elm-leaved), fl., petals yellow, with two purple awns at the apex. August. A. 40ft. to 60ft. A wide-spreading tree, not unlike the Elm, with leaves that sleep hanging quite down, whilst the petioles remain entirely stiff and straight. West Indies, 1739. SYN. Bubroma Guazuma. GUELDER ROSE. See Viburnum Opulus. GUERNSEY LILY. See Neriue samiensis. GUETTARDA (named in honour of John Etienne Guettard, 1 71 5-1 78G, member of the Academy of Sciences at Paris, who published, in 1747, a catalogue of the plants growing in the vicinity of Estampes). Including Cadamba and Laugeria. ORD. Rubiacece. A genus containing about fifty species of ornamental stove ever- green shrubs or small trees, natives chiefly of tropical America. Flowers sessile and unilateral along the branches of the peduncles, and solitary in the forks ; corolla salver- shaped, with a cylindrical tube, and from four to nine oval-oblong lobes ; peduncles axillary, bifid. Leaves ovate or lanceolate. Guettardas succeed best in peat and loam mixed. Propagated by cuttings, inserted in sand, in heat. G. odorata (sweet-scented).* fl. reddish, nearly lin. long, villous on the outside, very sweet-scented at night; cymes bifid. Sum- mer. I. oval, acute at both ends. A. 6ft. to 10ft. Tropical America. 1818. Shrub. G. rugosa (wrinkled). A synonym of G. scabra. G. scabra (scabrous), fl. white ; peduncles compressed, villous, almost four times longer than the petioles. I. obovate, mucronate, coriaceous, scabrous above, reticulated and pubescent beneath ; stipules lanceolate, acuminated, caducous. West Indies, 1818. Tree. SYN. G. rugosa. G. speciosa (showy), fl. white, exquisitely fragrant, partaking much of the scent of cloves, large ; cymes pedunculate, velvety, much shorter than the leaves. June and July. I. broad, ovate or obovate, downy beneath. Branches horizontal, forming a large shady head. h. 30ft. Tropical Asia, 1771. Tree. (B. B. 1393.) GUEVINA (the native name). SYN. Quadria. ORD. Proteacece. A monotypic genus. The species is a greenhouse evergreen tree, succeeding in a peat and loam soil. Propagated by cuttings, inserted in sand, under a glass. G. Avellana (nut). /. white, hermaphrodite, geminate, pedi- cellate, disposed in rather long axillary racemes ; perianth tube cylindrical ; limb ovoid, recurved. June. fr. coral-red when ripe, about the size of a cherry. Seed edible, largely used by the Chilians. I. alternate, impari-pinnate ; leaflets dentate. A. 40ft. hili, 1826. This tree is hardy in the South-west of England. . . , (in its native country). Chili, GUICHENOTIA (named in honour of Antoine Guichenot, a French gardener and traveller). Including Sarotes. ORD. Sterculiacece. A genus containing about half-a-dozen species of greenhouse shrubs, confined to extra-tropical Australia. Flowers nodding, solitary, or Guichenotia — continued. shortly racemose; calyx five-lobed; petals five, small and scale-like. Leaves narrow, entire, with revolute margins. Guichenotias succeed in a loamy-peat soil. •> Propagated by cuttings. The two species here described are probably the only ones yet introduced. G. ledifolia (Ledum-leaved). fl. white ; racemes several-flowered ; calyx scarcely membranous, tomentose, the three prominent ribs on each sepal giving it a rigid, striate appearance. Spring. /. on very short petioles, oblong-linear, obtuse, mostly lin. to IJin. long ; margins much revolute, wrinkled, thick, and soft ; stipules similar, but usually rather shorter and more sessile. 1868. SYN. Lasiopetalum Baueri, of gardens. G. macrantha (large-flowered), fl. purple, large, pendulous, in racemes of two or three. March. 1. resembling those of G. ledifolia. 1847. (B. M. 4651.) GUILANDINA. Included under Ccesalpinia. GUILIELMA (named in honour of Queen Frederica Guilielma [Wilhelmine] Carolina of Bavaria). ORD. Palmce. A genus (included, by Bentham and Hooker, under Bactris) containing three species of elegant stove palms, confined to the tropical regions of South America. Flower - spike branched. Fruit ovate, about the size of a peach, produced in large pendulous bunches. Leaves pinnate, hairy; leaflets and footstalks spiny. Trunk slender, marked with circular scars, and armed with exceedingly sharp spines. For culture, see Bactris. G. speciosa (showy).* I. 2ft. to 4ft. long, pinnate ; pinnae about 1ft. long, lin. wide, apex broader, bifid, deep green nerves on the upper sides clothed with slender black bristles ; petioles broadly sheathing at the base, thickly armed with slender long black sharp spines. Stem tall, densely spiny, slender. Amazon. SYN. Bactris Gasipate. G. utilis (useful), fl. monoecious. Seeds edible, having the flavour of chestnuts. I., young ones broad and bifid, bristling with short spines, which spring from the ribs or veins, the ridges of the upper surface and the costa beneath being the parts furnished with them ; mature ones forming a handsome pinnate head ; petioles densely spiny. Trunk slender, spiny. Costa Rica, 1873. (G. C. 1873, 1271.) GUINEA PEACH. See Sarcocephalus. GUM AMMONIAC. See Dorema Ammoniacum. GUM CISTUS. See Cistus ladaniferus. GUM ELEMI. The gum-resin of Amyris Flu- mieri (which see), &c. GUMMING. See Gummosis. GUMMOSIS, or GUMMING. Recent observations on this highly contagious disease have shown that it is caused by a fungus, which has been named by Professor Oudemans Corynevm Beijerinckii. The mycelium of this fungus appears to develop a ferment which penetrates the adjacent cells and transforms the cell -walls, the starch granules, and other cell contents into gum, whether these cells belong to the host plant or to the fungus. The ferment of the Coryneum can penetrate into living cells — e.g., those of cambium — and can modify their protoplasm so that the cells that they afterwards produce by division form a tissue with new properties. This tissue is the pathological wood parenchyma. Sooner or later, this tissue begins, in turn, to secrete the ferment, and to change into gum. The quantity of ferment so formed is greater than the amount originally present in the diseased cells. Gum- ming can be propagated from diseased to healthy places without mycelium extending from one to the other. The action resembles the propagation that albi- notic parts exercise on healthy ones. It is conjectured that the channel of propagation is the phloem, and that the contagion is the ferment. In other cases, the mycelium of the Coryneum is the exciting cause of Gumming. A similar disease produces gum arabic, gum tragacanth, and, probably, many resins and gum resins, "One point concerning the spread of this disease seems clear — the fungus itself cannot penetrate the bark : there must be some abrasion or laceration of the latter before thn gorm tubes can enter. These injuries may clearly 102 THE DICTIONARY OF GARDENING, Gummosis, or Gumming— continued, arise from many causes ; but how do the sporea which are undeveloped in the viscid gum gain access to them ? That they cannot be blown there by the wind, is obvious. If the Gumming occurs upon the upper branches, of course they may be washed down by the rain ; but how do they spread from tree to tree ? Obviously, they must be carried — most probably by insects" (Plowright). The best remedy against this disease would, therefore, appear to be the destruction, by burning, of the infested parts, and carefully coating the cut surfaces with some preservative solution. A resum,6 of Dr. Beije- rinck's observations and experiments is given in the " Gardeners' Chronicle," n. s., xxii., pp. 239, 410. Fruit-trees affected by Gumming are : Cherries, Peaches, and Plums. Its effects on Peach-trees are most to be dreaded, neither of the others being so much injured as these. In slight cases, the bark should be frequently well washed in damp weather, with a brush and water; but, where the disease pervades the tree to a considerable extent, it is diffi- cult to effect a cure. Gumming occurs most frequently, and is greatly encouraged, where the soil has been too richly manured, and growth is consequently over-luxuriant. The necessity of removing large branches at pruning time should also be specially avoided by judi- cious summer stopping of the young shoots, in order to divide the sap, and insure an equal medium growth throughout. Lifting and root-pruning, or planting in a poorer soil, might be adopted to check Gumming, where an undue growth is encouraging it. GUM SENEGAL. See Acacia Senegal. GUM-TREE. See Eucalyptus. GUNDELIA (named after Andrew Gundelsheimer, a German botanist, who accompanied Tournefort in his journey into the Levant, in 1709). SYN. Gundelsheimera. Gundelia— continued. OKD. Composites. A monotypic genus, the species being a hardy, lactescent, thistle-like perennial. It thrives in a sandy-peat soil, and is propagated by division. G. Tournefortii (Tournefort's). Jl.-heads purplish, large, in terminal clusters. June to August. I. alternate, sessile, pin- natifld ; lobes and teeth very spiny, h. IJft. Eastern Asia, 1739. See Fig. 156. GUNNERA (named in honour of J. E. Gunner, 1718- 1773, a Swedish bishop and botanist). OED. Haloragecs. FIG. 156. GUNDELIA TOURNEFOHTII. FIG. 157. GUNNERA SCABRA. A genus containing about eleven species of hardy herba- ceous perennials, scattered over the Australian, Malayan, New Zealand, Pacific, and South American Islands ; also found in South Africa, and in the Andes as far north as the Gulf of Mexico. Flowers greenish, minute, in dense spikes or branched panicles. Leaves all radical, large, petiolate, ovate or cordate-rotundate, simple or lobed, crenate, coriaceous-carnose, often wrinkled. Some of the species form noble plants for sub-tropical gardening, and grow vigorously in a damp, sunny situation, if sheltered from winds. A slight protection, such as a cover- ing of dry leaves, is advisable in severe weather. Propagated by division. G. manlcata (sheathed). » I. 12ft. to 20ft. in circum- ference, borne upon stout footstalks from 4ft. to 6ft. high. 1867. A majestic plant, from the cold and freezing regions, known in Southern Brazil under the name of Campos des Lages. (I. H. 1824, 128.) G. perpensa (well-considered), fl. green. August. I. renifonn, toothed, shorter than the scape in fruit. h. IJft. Cape of Good Hope, 1688. (B. M. 2376.) G. scabra (rough).* fl. reddish, small, very numerous, disposed on a large club-shaped spike. I. broad, 4ft. to 5ft. in diameter, borne upon stout prickly petioles 3ft. to 6ft. in length, h. 4ft. Chili, 1849. A fine plant for large lawns or parks. See Fig. 157. (F. d. S. 1879.) GUNNERACE.2E. A synonym of Ha- loragece. GUNNIA. Included under Sarcochihis (which see). GUSTAVIA (named after Gustavus III., King of Sweden, and a patron of Linnaeus). SYN. Pirigara. ORD. Myrtacecs. A genus con- sisting of about eleven species of stove ever- green trees or shrubs, natives of tropical America. Flowers showy ; peduncles one- AN ENCYCLOPEDIA OF HORTICULTURE. 103 Gustavia — continued. flowered, sub-umbellate. Leaves large, alternate, ovate or spathulate, glossy. Gustavias thrive in a rich loamy soil. Cuttings, made from ripened shoots, root freely if inserted in sand, under a glass, in heat. G. gracillima (very slender).* fl. rose-red, 4in. in diameter, pro- duced from the leaf axils in the young plants, from the wood in old ones, solitary or in pairs ; peduncle stout, clavate, lin. to 2in. long. September. I. close-set, spreading and recurved, acuminate, serrate, narrowed into a slender petiole, lin. to 2in. long ; margin somewhat waved ; midrib prominent beneath. Trunk slender, quite glabrous. New Grenada, 1845. (B. M. 6151.) G. insignia (remarkable).* fl., corolla very large, 5in. to 6in. in diameter ; petals cream- white, concave, spreading, externally tinged with rose-colour ; filaments rose ; anthers orange. June. I. glossy, dark green, obovate-lanceolate, acuminated at the point, much attenuated at the base, and sessile, or nearly so. h. 3ft. to 4ft. Tropical America, 1858. (B. M. 5069.) G. pterocarpa (wing-fruited).* This is closely allied to G. insiynis, but differs from it by the ovary being winged, the smaller and white flowers, the comparatively large calycine lobes, and the more coriaceous, nearly entire foliage. (B. M. 5239.) GUTIERREZIA (meaning probably commemora- tive). SYNS. Brachyris and Brachyachiris. OED. Com- positce. A genus comprising about twenty species of erect herbs or sub-shrubs, peculiar to America, extending from the Red Kiver to Mexico ; a few also occur in Chili and the extreme South of the continent. Flower- heads yellow, small, very numerous, arranged in corymbs at the ends of the twigs. Leaves linear, entire, gummy. The species are of botanical interest only. The plant grown in gardens under the name of G. gymnosper- moides is now referred to the genus Xanth.ocepn.alum (which see). GUTTA-PERCHA-TREE. See Isonandra. GTJTTIPER.ZE. A natural order of trees or shrubs, with a resinous juice, natives of humid and hot places in tropical regions, chiefly in South America or Asia, while a few are found in Africa. Flowers white, yellow, or pink, often incomplete ; sepals and petals two to six, rarely eight. Leaves opposite, leathery, entire. The plants are generally acrid, and yield a yellow gum-resin. There are about twenty-four genera and 230 species. Illustrative genera are : Calophy Hum, Clusia, Garcinia, and Mammea. GUZ MANIA (named in honour of A. Guzman, a Spanish naturalist). OED. Bromeliacece. A genus of four or five species of very handsome stove herbaceous perennials, allied to Tillandsia (which see for culture). They are all natives of tropical America. G. Devansayana (Devansay's). fl. white, tightly packed within broad, acuminate, scarlet bracts. I. dilated at the base, purple- striped. Ecuador. (B. H. 1883, 8, 9.) G. erythrolepis (red-scaled).* fl. white ; the uniform purplish- red colour of the bracts distinguishes this at once from G. tricolor. I. deep green, like those of G. tricolor. (F. d. S. 1089.) G. fragrans (fragrant). A synonym of Canistrum eburneum G. tricolor (three-coloured).* fl. pure white ; scape erect, 1ft. to 2ft. long, clothed with numerous bracts of a bright pale yellow green, beautifully streaked with blackish-purple towards the top, tipped with red, and at the extreme apex rich scarlet. Summer. I. rosulate, broad-linear, sword-shaped, involute, concave, sheath- ing at the base, lift, long, rich green. 1820. (B. M. 5220.) G-YMNADENIA (from gymnos, naked, and aden, a gland ; the glands of the pollen masses are naked). OED. Orchidece. Pretty terrestrial orchids, now referred to Habenaria (which see). GYMNEMA (from gymnos, naked, and nema, a fila- ment ; the stamineous corona being absent, the filaments are left naked). OED. Asclepiadeoe. A genus com- prising about twenty-five species of stove evergreen climbing shrubs or sub-shrubs, natives of Africa, tropical and sub-tropical Asia, and Australia. Flowers yellow, small. Leaves opposite. The plants thrive in a well- drained compost of fibry loam and sandy peat. Cuttings of firm side shoots, made in spring, will root if inserted in sand, in heat. Gymnema— continued. G. lactiferum (milk-bearing), fl. in umbels, shorter than the petioles ; throat of small corolla crowned by five fleshy tubercles. July. I. on short petioles, ovate, bluntly acuminated, usually unequal-sided. Tropical Asia. The milk of this plant is sub- stituted by the Cingalese for cows' milk. G. tingens (staining). fl. pale yellow, numerous ; umbels or corymbs often twin. July. I. cordate, acuminated, to oval. Tropical Himalaya, 1823. GYMNEMA (of Rafinesque). A synonym of Pluchea (which see). GYMNOCLADUS (from gymnos, naked, and Tclados, a branch; in reference to the naked appearance of the branches during winter). Kentucky Coffee - tree. OED. Leguminosce. A monotypic genus. The species is a very ornamental hardy deciduous tree. It thrives in a shaded situation, and in a rich, deep, free soil. Propagated by cuttings, made of the roots; or by imported seeds. The name Coffee-tree comes from the fact of its seeds having been used as a substitute for coffee by the early settlers. G. canadensis (Canadian).* fl. white, disposed in terminal simple or thyrsoid racemes. May to July. I. bipinnate, with to seven pairs of pinnae, the lowest pair bearing single leaflets, the rest bearing six to eight pairs of leaflets, h. 30ft. to four leafl 60ft. Northern United States, 1748. GYMNOGRAMME (from gymnos, naked, and gramma, writing; referring to the spore cases). In- cluding Ceterach (in part), Dictyogramme, Grammitis (in part), Pterozonium, Selliguea, and Trismeria. OED. Filices. A genus consisting of about a hundred species of (except where otherwise stated) beautiful stove Ferns. Sori arising from the veins over the under surface of the frond, linear or linear-oblong, simple or forked. Those species which have the under surface FIG. 158. FROND OF GYMMOUKAMME CALOMELANOS CHRYSOPHYLLA. 104 THE DICTIONARY OF GARDENING, Gymnogramme— continued. of the fronds covered with a yellow powder are popularly known as Gold Ferns, and those with silver powder as Silver Ferns. For culture, &c., see Ferns. calomelanos (beautiful black), sti. tufted, 6in. to 12in. ng, fronds 1ft. to 3ft long, 6in. to 12in. broad, tripinnatifld ; pinnae close, lanceolate, lowest largest, about 2in. broad ; lower pinnules distinct, often cut down nearly to the rachis ; powder white. Tropics, 1790. A variable species. (H. G. F. 30.) G. c. chrysophylla (golden-leaved).* Very like G. e. peruviana, but with darker rachis and bright yellow powder. See Fig. 158. Others included in this species by Mr. Baker are : Srackenridaei, intermedia, L'Herminien, Martensii, and Massoni. G. C. peruviana (Peruvian).* sti. and rachis castaneous. fronds smaller ; lower pinnae deltoid ; lower pinnules often cut quite down to the rachis. See Fig. 159. Gymnogramme — continued FIG. 159. GYMNOQRAMME CALOMELANOS PERUVIANA. G. candiformls (tail-like), rhiz. woody, creeping, scaly, sti. 6in. to 9in. long, frond* 6in. to 9in. long, ovate-oblong, acuminate ; sterile ones Sin. to 4in. broad ; others lin. to 2in. broad. Malay Archipelago, &c., 1862. G. ohaaropnylla (Chervil-leaved), sti. tufted, slender, Sin. to 6m. long, fronds Sin. to 6in. long, 2in. to 4in. broad, quadri- pinnatifld ; lower pinnae and pinnules deltoid ; the segments flabellately cut. Cuba to Paraguay, 1825. An elegant annual, producing an abundance of spores. G. decomposite (decompound).* sti. 1ft. long, fronds lanceolate- deltoid, lift, long, 1ft. broad, four or flve-pinnatifld ; pinna close, lanceolate, the lowest largest ; pinnules close, stalked, deltoid • powder yellow. South America, 1873. See Fig. 160. G. ferrnginea (rusty) sti. tufted, 6in. to 12in. long, tomentose. fronds about 1ft. long, Sin. to 4in. broad ; pinnze 2in. to 3in. long Jin. to lin. broad, cut to the rachis into oblong or linear-oblon-* entire or slightly toothed lobes ; lower surface and rachis densely tomentose. Tropical America. 6. lanata is a variety with fronds less woolly beneath, and larger pinnules ; the lower ones bluntly lobed half way down. G. . flexnpsa (wavy), sti. 6in. to 18in. long, flexnose, slender. fronds 3ft. to 4ft. long, scandent, three to four-pinnate • pinnte reflexed, outline sub-deltoid ; segments flabellately-branched • rachis zigzag, branched. Central America to Peru, 1865. G. Hamiltoniana (Hamilton's), rhiz. wide-creeping, woody fronds dimorphous; barren ones 1ft long, Sin. to 4in. broad snathulate ; fertile ones 4in. to 6in. long, IJin. broad; stems more than 1ft. long, slender, son in broad continuous rows. Sub- G. hlspida (hairy), rhiz. creeping, sti. 3in. to 6in. long, pilose fronds deltoid, tripinnatifld, 2in. to 3in. each way ; lower pinnae much the largest, cut down to the rachis ; upper pinnules close ligulate, blunt ; under surface with pale brown tomentum ; rachis scaly. New Mexico. FIG. 161. GYMNOGKAMMK JAVANICA. AN ENCYCLOPEDIA OF HORTICULTURE, 105 GymnogTamme — continued. G. Japonica (Japanese), rhiz. creeping, sti. 6in. to 12in. long. fronds lift, to 2ft. long, 1ft. broad, pinnate or bipinnate at the base ; pinnae 6in. to 12in. long, lin. to 2in. broad, linear-oblong, acuminate, entire, lower ones stalked. Japan, &c., 1863. Mr. Baker considers this as "probably not really distinct from G. javanica."^ There is a variegated form. G. javanica (Javanese).* rhiz. creeping, sti. 1ft. to 4ft. long. fronds 1ft. to 4ft. long, one to two-pinnate ; pinnules sessile or nearly so, 3in. to 12in. long, iin. to Sin. broad, the apex acuminate ; rachis stramineous ; both surfaces glossy. Tropics of Old World. See Fig. 161. G. lanceolata (lanceolate), rhiz. wide-creeping; scales small. fronds simple, 6in. to 12in. long, less than lin. broad, point acute, edge entire, lower third narrowed gradually to the base. Tropics of Old World. G. Lathamise (Mrs. Latham's).* can. erect, sti. chestnut-red, tufted, fronds 2ft. to 2Jft. long, quadripinnate ; pinnae ascending, triangular, very shortly stalked, upper surface pale green, lower whitish. Supposed to be a hybrid between G. decomposita and G. schizophylla. It is a plant of garden origin, recently raised by Mr. W. B. Latham, Curator of the Botanic Gardens, Edgbaston. G. leptophylla (slender-leaved).* sti. lin. to 4in. long, fronds 2in. to 4in. long, lin. to liin. broad, ovate or deltoid, two or three-pinnate ; segments cuneate-flabellate, cut into linear or oblong lobes. Temperate regions throughout the world (Jersey). Hardy. One of the very few annual ferns. G. macrophylla (large-leaved), rhiz. creeping, scaly, sti. 2in. to 6in. long, fronds 1ft. to lift, long, Sin. to 4in. broad, narrowed gradually to both ends, sori in single continuous or slightly interrupted rows between the main veins. Malaya. G. Pearcei (Pearce's).* sti. 6in. to 9in. long, fronds about 1ft. each way, deltoid, quadripinnatifid ; lower pinnae largest, 4in. to 6in. long ; pinnules imbricated ; one vein and sorus to each ultimate division ; powder white. Peru, 1864. G. pulchella (neat), sti. tufted, 6in. to 9in. long, powdery. fronds 6in. to 12in. long, 4in. to 6in. broad, tripinnatifld ; lower pinnae largest ; pinnules imbricated ; segments flabellate-cuneate ; powder pure white. Venezuela. The variety Wettenhalliana has pale sulphur-coloured powder. G. rnfa (red), sti. tufted, 4in. to 12in. long, hairy, fronds 12in. to 18in. long, Sin. to 5in. broad, pinnate ; pinnae distant, stalked, rounded, lin. to 2Jin. long; rachis pilose. Tropical America, FIG. 162. GYMNOGRAMME SCHIZOPHYLLA. G. schizophylla (cut-leaved).* sti. tufted, slender, fronds lift, to 2ft. long, gracefully arching, very finely cut ; ultimate pinnules minute. Jamaica, 1880. See Fig. 162. G. s. glorlosa (glorious). A garden variety, of more vigorous habit than the type. (I. H. 522.) G. sulphurea (sulphur-coloured).* sti. densely tufted, lin. to 6in. long, often powdery, fronds 6in. to 12in. long, Sin. to 4in. bvo.T1 tripinnatitid ; lower pinnae gradually reduced ; pinnules *' lately cut ; powder bright yellow. West Indies, 1808. G. tartarea (infernal).* sti. tufted, 6in. to 12in. Ions', frond* 1ft. to 2ft. long, 6in. to 12in. broad, oblong-deltoid, bipi pinn» lanceolate, lowest largest ; pinnules oblong, obi nearly so ; powder dense, pure white. Tropical . Vol. IL Gymnograimne — continued. FIG. 163. GYMNOGRAMME TARTAREA. See Fig. 163. There are three or four varieties, including ochracea (pinnules very regular, and only the lowest toothed ; powder bright yellow), ornithopteris, and Steltzneri. G. tomentosa (tomentose). sti. tufted, 6in. to 12in. long, villose. fronds bin. to 12in. long, deltoid, bipinnate ; upper pinnae simple, stalked, lin. to 2in. long, iin. to lin. broad ; lower ones lin. to 4in. long. South Brazil, &c., 1831. G. triangnlarls (triangular).* sti. densely tufted, 6in. to 12in. long, fronds Sin. to 4in. each way, deltoid ; lower pinnae much the largest, deltoid ; others lanceolate, deeply pinnatifid ; powder varying from deep orange to white. Vancouver's Island, &c., 1874. G. trifoliata (trifoliate), sti. tufted, Sin. to 12in. long, fronds 2ft. to 3ft. long, 6in. to Sin. broad, pinnate ; lower pinnae ternate, upper ones simple, petiolate, 2in. to 4in. long ; under surface of fertile fronds clothed with white or yellowish powder. Tropical America, 1810. A variable species. GYMNOGYNOUS. Having a na.ked ovary. GYMNOIiOMIA (from gymnos, naked, and loma, a fringe ; in reference to the pappus being much reduced or altogether absent). SYNS. Qymnopsis and Heliomeris. OKD. Composites. An interesting genus, containing six- teen species of erect greenhouse or half-hardy herbs, na- tives, for the most part, of Mexico and Central America. Flower-heads pedunculate, solitary or loosely corymbose. Inferior leaves rarely almost all opposite, superior ones rarely almost all alternate, entire, dentate or lobed. The species described below is the one usually seen in cul- tivation. For culture, see Helianthus. G. multiflora (many-flowered), fl.-heads yellow. Autumn. L narrowly linear to lanceolate. A. 1ft. to 3ft. New Mexico. Annual. Six Heliomeris multiflora. GYMNOPSIS. A sjnonym of Gymnolomia (which GYMNOPTERIS. See Acrostichum. GYMNOSTACHYS (from gymnos, naked, and . in reference to the leafless scapes). ORD. An Iracece). A monotypic genus. The species greenhouse perennial herb. It thrives in a P 106 THE DICTIONARY OF GARDENING, Gymnostachys — continued. compost of peat and loam. Propagated by suckers and by divisions. G. anceps (two-edged). JL white, small, sessile, but not closely packed ; perianth segments or scales obovate, truncate, not exceeding the ovary ; scapes nearly as tall as the leaves, much flattened, with acute, smooth, or serrulate-scabrous edges. June. 1., radical ones erect, rather rigid, strongly nerved, 1ft. to 3ft. long. Roots tuberous, fusiform. Australia, 1820. GYMNOSTACHYUM (from gymnos, naked, and stocky s, a spike; probably on account of the absence of bracteoles). SYN. Cryptophragmia. OBD. Acanthaceoe. A genus of about fourteen species of ornamental stove ever- green erect herbs, natives of the East Indies and the Malayan Archipelago. Flowers tubular, in erect spike- like racemes. Leaves cauline or sub-radical, entire or obscurely sinuate. The species here described are those usually seen in cultivation. For culture, see Eran- thenmm. G. ceylanicnm (CeylonX* JL small, pretty, in pseudo-verticils ; corolla white, tipped with green and yellow. Winter. Z. oppo- site, spreading horizontally, oval or obovate, obtuse, obscurely serrated, having milk-white stains upon a dark green ground. Stem very short, downy. Ceylon. (B. M. 4706.) G. vennsta (charming).* fl. purple, remotely fasciculated, sub- sessile, disposed in slender elongated racemes ; panicles large, terminal. September. I. ovate-acuminate, crenate. h. 5in. Bengal (B. B. 1380, under name of Justicia veuuxta.) GYMNOTHRIX. Now referred to Fennisetnm (which see). GYNANDROPSIS (from gyne, a female, andros, a male, and opsis, appearance; stamens appear as if in- serted on the top of the ovary). OBD. Capparideae. A genus containing about ten species of half-hardy or green- house annual herbs, natives of tropical regions of both hemispheres. Flowers white or purple, often showy ; racemes leafy. Leaves three to seven-foliolate. For cul- ture, see Cleome. G. coccinea (scarlet). /. scarlet, in a many-flowered corymbose terminal raceme. Summer. 1. long-stalked, palmipartite. h. 6ft. to 9ft Columbia, 1878. A beautiful cool-house plant. G. pentaphylla (five-leaved), fl. white ; petals obovate, four times the length of the calyx ; stamens inserted upon the middle of the gynophore. June and July. L quinate ; segments ob- ovate-lanceolate or elliptical-lanceolate. Stem unarmed, h. 2ft. East and West Indies, 1640. Greenhouse. (B. M. 1681, under name of Cleome pentaphylla.) GYNERIUM (from gyne, female, and erion, wool; in reference to the stigmas being woolly). Pampas Grass. OBD. GraminecB. A genus of three species of very orna- mental hardy, or nearly hardy, herbaceous grasses, natives of tropical and sub-tropical America. They have two- flowered spikelets and dioecious flowers. 6. argenteum thrives best in a light sandy soil, well enriched with stable manure. The best positions for it are well- prepared shrubbery borders, or sheltered places in the flower garden or pleasure ground, where it will be pro- tected from high winds. It requires plenty of water when making growth. Propagated by seeds, sown under glass, the young plants being grown on in pots until suffi- ciently large to plant outside. If it is desired to utilise the plumes for indoor decoration, they should be cut from the plants during the latter part of summer. G. argenteum (silvery).* fl. disposed in a very large, dense, ter- minal, silky panicle, which, including the stalk, attains a height of from 6ft. to 10ft. Autumn. I. linear, glaucous-green, about 6ft. long, in large dense tufts, 4ft. to 6ft. high, and as much across ; edges very rough. Temperate South America, 1848. See Fig. 164. Varieties have been raised with purplish or yellowish-tinted panicles. GYNOPHORE. The stalk of the ovary, within the origin of the calyx. GYNURA (from gyne, female, and oura, a tail ; in reference to the rough, elongated stigma). OBD. Com- posite. A genus comprising about twenty species of stove perennial herbs, inhabiting the tropics of the Eastern hemisphere. Flower-heads corymbose or soli- tary, at the tops of the branches. Leaves alternate, en- tire, dentate or pinnate, lobed or dissected. Gynuras Gynura — continued. thrive in a compost of sandy loam and peat, and are propagated by cuttings. The three species described below are those usually seen in cultivation. G. anrantiaca (orange-coloured).* fl.-heads brilliant orange- colour, aboutJiin. across ; florets all tubular. February. I. (and stem) furnished over their entire surface with small hairs of a beautiful violet colour ; young leaves surrounding the flower- heads especially hairy. A. 2ft. to 3ft. Java, 1880. This may be planted in warm places out of doors during the summer. (I. H. G. bicolor (two-coloured), fl.-heads solitary, terminal; invo- lucres cylindrical ; florets rich orange, slightly spreading, uniform, tubular. 1. on the under side purple, sub-membranaceous, broad- lanceolate or ovate-lanceolate, slightly downy, penninerved, petio- late; petiole short. Stem herbaceous, erect. h. 2ft. to 3ft. Moluccas, 1799. (B. M. 5123.) G. ovalis (oval-leaved). JL -heads yellow. May to September. 1. thickish, villous ; lower ones oval, repand-toothed, stalked ; upper sub-lyrate, amplexicaul. h. 3ft. East Indies. (B. R. 101, under name of Cacalia ocalis.) FIG. 164. GVNERIUM ARGENTEUM. GYPSOPHILA (from gypsos, lime, and philein, or love ; in reference to the species preferring a limestone to a chalky soil). OBD. Caryophyllece. A genus containing about fifty species of hardy annual or perennial herbs, inhabiting various parts of Europe and Asia. Flowers white or pink, small, usually disposed in diffuse panicles. Leaves flat or rarely acerose. Some of the species form excellent subjects for growing as border plants or on rockeries. They thrive in a dryish soil, especially if intermixed with calcareous matter or old lime or brick rubbish. Propagated by seeds, by cuttings, or by division. The species described below are perennials. G. cerastioides (Cerastium-like).* fl. white, red-veined, corymbose ; petals emarginate. May. I. pilose on both sur- faces ; margins ciliated ; radical ones spathulate, on long foot- stalks, mucronulate ; cauKne ones obovate. Stems erect, four- sided, h. Sift. Himalaya. (B. M. 6699.) G. fastigiata (fastigiate). fl. pale red, corymbosely fastigiate ; petals very rarely emarginated. July. I. linear, rather fleshy, glabrous, flat. h. 1ft. Europe, 1801. (F. d. S. 135.) G. glanca (glaucous), fl. white, panicled ; panicle divaricating. July. I. linear-lanceolate, somewhat fleshy, obtuse. Branches few-flowered, pubescent, clammy, h. lift. Caucasus, 1322. AN ENCYCLOPAEDIA OF HORTICULTURE. 107 Crypsophila — continued. G. paniculata (panicled).* fl. whitish, small, very numerous, panicled ; peduncles smooth, filiform, divaricating. June to August. I. few, linear-lanceolate, scabrous, acute, h. 2ft. to 3ft. Europe, 1759. A very elegant, light, and graceful perennial. (J. F. A. v. 1.) G. perfoliata (perfoliate). /. pink, panicled ; panicles dicho- tomous, clammy. July. 1. lanceolate, half stern-clasping, acute, smooth. A. lift, to 3ft. South-western Europe, 1817. G. prostrata (prostrate). A synonym of G. repens. G. repens (creeping), fl. white or pale rose-coloured. July to September. I. linear, glabrous. Stems somewhat panicled, few- flowered, h. 6in. Alps of Europe, 1774. SYN. G. prostrata. G. Stevenii (Steven's).* fl. white, panicled ; petals broad-linear, obtuse, entire. July. I. linear-lanceolate, keeled, grey. Stem diffuse, h. 1ft. to 2ft. Caucasus, 1818. GYRANDRA. See Erythrssa. GYROCARPE.2E. A sub-order of Combretacece. GYROSE. Bent backwards and forwards, like the anthers of cucurbits. H ABE N ARIA (from habena, a thong or strap ; spur long, strap-shaped). STN. Sieberia. ORD. Orchidece. A genus of about 400 species of terrestrial stove, greenhouse, or hardy plants with the habit of Orchis, many of which are highly ornamental, and well worthy of a place in any garden. They are found in almost all temperate and warm regions. Among the numerous genera which are now included under Habenaria are : Cceloglossum, Gymna* denia, Phyllostachya, and Platanthera. The species de- scribed below are hardy, except where stated otherwise, and form very pretty plants for boggy places, or other situations, in moist, peaty soil. For culture of stove species— of which few are now grown — see Bletia. FIG. 165. FLOWER OF HABENARIA BIFOLIA CIILORANTIIA. H. bifolia (two-leaved). Butterfly Orchis, fl. white, numerous ; lip lanceolate, entire, about half the length of the very long, filiform spur. June. Stem angular, 1ft. high. Britain. Accord- ing to Bentham, this species varies much in the breadth of the leaves as well as of the parts of the flower, and the extreme forms have been distinguished as species, the name of H. chlo- rantha (see Fig. 165) being given to those in which the flowers are large, and the anther cells much more broadly diverging at the base. Darwin, however, regarded H . chlorantha and H. bifolia as distinct species, and states that they require different species of moths to fertilise them. H. blephariglottis (fringed-tongued).* fl. white, beautifully fringed, in spikes. May and June. North America, 1820. (L. B. C. 925.) H. Candida (white). /. white ; spike few-flowered; sepals ovate- acute, nearly equal, dorsal one horizontal ; petals undivided, galeate, obtuse ; lip entire, ensiform ; spur pendulous, twice as long as ovary, two-lobed at apex. August, h. 1ft. Sierra Leoue, 184?. Stove. Habenaria — continued. H. ciliarls (ciliated), fl. orange-yellow, arranged in dense clusters ; lip beautifully fringed. Stems or spikes very showy, IJft. to 2ft. high. North America, 1796. An elegant, but rare, species. (B. M. H. cristata (crested).* fl. golden-yellow, crowded, individually much smaller than those of H. ciliaris ; lip deeply fringed. Late spring. Stem 1ft. high. North America, 1805. (L. B. C. 1661.) H. dilatata (widened), fl. white, densely arranged on slender spikes. Summer. Stem 1ft. to 2ft. high. North America, 1823. Very showy and rare. H. fimbiiata (fimbriated).* fl. lilac-purple, large, and prettily fringed, arranged on a long spike. Summer. Stem 1ft. to IJft. high. North America, 1789. (B. B. 405.) H. gigantea (gigantic), fl. greenish-white, large, about 4in. across, very fragrant ; racemes four to six-flowered. July. Stem about 4ft. high. India, 1834. Stove. (B. M. 3374.) H. Helleborina (Helleborine).* fl. green, flesh-colour, sessile, distant, horizontal ; lip much larger than the sepals or petals ; limb semicircular ; column short, broad, concealed under the dorsal sepals and petals. September. I. oblong-lanceolate, sub- acute, not plaited, five-nerved, deep green. Sierra Leone, 1870. Stove. SYN. Eulophia, Helleborina. (B. M. 5875.) EL Hookerii (Hooker's), fl. greenish-white. Spikes slender, twenty to thirty-flowered, 6in. to 12in. high. June. North America, 1822. H. orbicnlata (spherical), fl. greenish-white, in loose spikes. I. very large, silvery-white beneath, prostrate upon the ground. h. 1ft. to 2ft. North America. A distinct and very large species. (L. B. C. 1623.) H. psycodes (fragrant).* fl. varying from rose to crimson, very fragrant, fringed ; spikes 4in. to lOin. long. June. North America, 1826. A very showy species, allied to H. flmbriata, but with smaller flowers. H. rhodochila (red- lipped).* fl., scape 9in. long; raceme about twelve-flowered ; sepals green, united into a hood-like process ; lip large, bright cinnabar-red. August. North China, 1884. Greenhouse. H. rotundifolia (round-leaved.) fl. rosy-purple ; lip white, spotted with purple ; spikes large and compact. Summer, h. 1 Jft. to 3ft. North America: H. salacceusis (Salakian). Jl., raceme ovate, 5in. to 6in. long ; pedicels short, clothed with two or three narrow-lanceolate bracts ; sepals spreading, green ; petals reddish, very narrow ; lip elon- gated, tripartite ; spur reflexed, narrow, tipped with orange ; column short. April. I., lower ones 4in. to 5in. long, lanceolate, acuminate, striated ; superior ones becoming gradually smaller, bractiform. Stem 12in. to Win. high, partially clothed at the base with two or three sheathing scales, leafy upwards. Boot a tuber, and three or four thick fleshy fibres. Mount Salak, Java. Stove. (B. M. 5196.) HABERLEA (named after Karl Konstantin Haberle, Professor of Botany at Pesth, died 1831). ORD. Gesne- racecB. A monotypic genus. The species is an elegant little hardy herbaceous perennial, not unlike a miniature Gloxinia, and with a tufted habit. For culture, see Ramondia. H. rhodopensis (Mount Rhodope).* Jl. pale lilac, umbellate, drooping ; corolla lin. in diameter ; scapes several, stout, two to five-flowered. April. I. all radical, spreading and recurved, obovate-oblong, obtuse, h. 4in. to 6m. Roumelia, 1880. (B. M. 6651.) HABIT. The general appearance of a plant; its manner of growth. HABITAT. Habitation ; native country. HABLITZIA (named in honour of C. von Hablitz, a distinguished Prussian author and traveller). ORD. ChenopodiacecB. A monotypic genus, the species being a tall, hardy, climbing herb. It thrives in any ordinary garden soil. Increased by divisions, or by seeds. H. tamnoides (Tamnus-like).* JL green, small, in branching cymes, sessile or terminal, pedicellate. July to October. I. alternate, on long petioles, triangularly cordate, acuminate, entire, membranaceous, nerved. Caucasus, 1828. HAERANTHUS (from habros, delicate, and anthos, a flower). ORD. Amaryllidece. The plants formerly included in this genus are now referred, by Baker and the authors of the " Genera Plantarum," to Hippeas- trom and Zephyranthes (which see). H. Anderson!!, fi-e Zephyrantb.es Andcrsonii. H. bifidus. See Hippeastrum bifidum. H. gracilifolius. See Zephyranthes gracilifolia. H. mlnlatus. See Hippeastrum advenum. H. versicolor. See Zephyranthes versicolor. 108 THE DICTIONARY OF GARDENING, HABROTHAMNUS. Included under Oestrum (which see). HACKBERRY. A name given to Celtis occi- dentalis (which see). HACQUETIA (named after Balthasar Hacquct, 1740-1815, author of " Plante Alpinse Carniolicae "). STNS. Dondia, Dondisia. OBD. Umbelliferoe. A mono- typic genus. The species is a pretty little alpine her- baceous perennial, thriving in good stiff loam. It is a slow-growing subject, and should not be disturbed. Propagation must, therefore, only be undertaken in the case of strong healthy clumps, which are best divided before growth commences, in spring. H. Epipactis (Epipactis).* ft. yellow, on short pedicels ; scapes one to three, bearing at their tops simple umbels ; involucre of five or six obovate leaves, which are longer than the umbels. Spring. 1. radical, petiolate, palmate ; leaflets three, cuneated, two or three-cleft, h. Sin. to 6m. Europe, 1823. (L. B. C. 1832.) HADENA OLERACEA. See Pot-herb Moths. H2ECKERIA. See Huraea. H2EMADICTYON. A synonym of Frestouia (which see). H2EMANTHUS (from haima, blood, and anthos, a flower; referring to the colour of the spathe and fila- ments of some species). Blood Flower. OKD. Amaryllidece. A genus of about thirty species of fine stove or green- house bulbous plants, all — with the exception of about five species from tropical Africa — natives of South Africa. Scape, involucre, umbels, and stamens, all add their quota to the interest and beauty of these curious flowers, which, in some of the species, are gathered together into closely compact umbels, and present in the mass a sort of filamentous appearance, somewhat resembling that of the feathered Hyacinth. The culture of H. sanguineus, and its allies of similar habit, is of the simplest nature. The various species blossom at different seasons, and it is important that, after flowering, each should have a period of growth, to be followed by one of rest. A mixture of sandy loam and fibrous peat is most suitable, and the plants flower more freely when under-potted. For this reason, it is not necessary to shift them every year. As the bulbs grow, and the strong roots increase, both may be stimulated and supported with weak manure water. Although some of the species of Hcemanthus are frequently described as cool greenhouse bulbs, and some even recommend cultivating them in warm borders in the open air, yet they succeed best in a temperature of from SOdog. to 60deg. during the growing season. The sorts with well-developed bulbs should have these quite buried in the soil. When in flower, the blossoms will last longer in cooler quarters. Propagation is effected by offsets, which are produced more or less profusely. They should be removed and potted when the plants are commencing new growth, and be kept in a close pit or house till established. The offsets will reach flowering size all the sooner if kept in a temperature as recommended above for the growing season. H. abyssinicus (Abyssinian).* fl. numerous, in a depressed spherical head, appearing before the leaves; peduncles lin. to liin. long, pale ; perianth scarlet, tube iin. long ; lobes §in. long, slender, with upturned hooded points ; filaments scarlet; anthers small, yellow ; scape erect, green, 4in. long ; spathes lin. to Uin. April. I. thr , long, pale green and purplish. . ree to five, autumnal , Jin. to 5in. long, elliptic, green, with purple-spotted sheathing . Tropical Africa, 1868. Sm 6. tenuiflonu coceineus. bases H. albo-maculatus (white-! to Sin. in diameter; perian fl. in a dense head, 2in. ,— rbite, lin. to Hin. long • ascending linear segments twice as long as the tube; bracts tted). pure , . . cember. I. two, contemporary with the flowers, y, above 1ft. long, 2iin. to 3in. broad, deep green tted white. Bulb compressed, 2in. in diameter six to seven, white, veined with green ; scape 3in. to 4i'n. Ions] glabrous. December. ligulate, fleshy, copiously spotted h. bin. South Africa, 1878. I. cinnabarlnus (vermilion).* fl. red ; umbel twenty to forty- flowered ; scape slender, about 1ft. long. April. I. long, stalked 1855 '" k0*6"6' °blon 6in- to 8in' lon' W , West Africa' H33m.anth.us — continued. H. deformis (deformed). fl. pure white, numerous, shorter than the involucre ; head compressed, parallel to the bulb ; involucral spathes about six, equal, erect, obovate-oblong, obtuse, ciliate, pure white ; perianth tube shorter than the erect, linear, obtuse lobes ; stamens exserted ; anthers pale yellow ; scape very short, sessile amongst the leaves. March. I. about two pairs, 3iin. to 4in. long and broad, dark green, smooth, hairy above, pubescent beneath. Bulb 4in. to 5in. in diameter, slightly com- pressed, h. 3in. Natal, 1869. A singular and grotesque species. (B. M. 5903.) H. hirsutus (hairy). /. pure white, in dense heads, 4in. in diameter; scape compressed, stout, densely hairy. I. twin, round-oblong. Transvaal Republic, 187& H, incarnatus (flesn-coloured). This species is closely allied to H. tigrinui, but is a more elegant plant, with broader leaves ; the scape more slender ; the divisions of the spathe smaller, nar- rower, and less coloured; the flowers smaller, and of a different colour. South Africa, 1865. (B. M. 5532.) H. insignia (remarkable). /. bright orange-scarlet, in an umbel. July. I. large, oblong, wavy, and spotted with purple. Stems cylindrical, thickly spotted with purple. Natal. A handsome greenhouse species. (B. M. 4745.) H. Kalbreyeri (Kalbreyer's).* fl. bright crimson ; umbel thirty to forty-flowered, 5in. to 6in. in diameter ; scape lateral. L oblong. A.6in. Guinea, 1878. (L H. 354.) H. Katherinae (Mrs. Katherine Saunderson's).* fl. deep red ; umbels dense, 6in. to 7in. in diameter. I. oblong, with both veins and veinlets very much more distinct than in the closely allied species H. multiflorus. Natal. (B. M. 6778.) H. Mn.nti» (Mann's), fl. crimson-scarlet. Spring. A. 1ft. Guinea, 1877. This species closely resembles H. cinnabarinut in the flowers, but the leaves are produced from a special stem formed after the scape. (B. M. 6361) H. multiflorus (many-flowered), fl. deep red ; umbels sometimes one-hundred-flowered, dense, globose, about 6in. in diameter. April. 1. three to four, oblong, acute, nearly 1ft. long, on a short spotted stem. Sierra Leone, 1783. (B. M. 961 and 1995.) H. natalensis (Natal).* This species is closely allied to H. insignis, but may be distinguished from it by the large, beautifully coloured and dotted, sheathing scales at the base of the plant, by the much longer leaves, by the pale green flowers, the orange- coloured stamens and styles, and by the nearly uniform bracts of the involucre, of a rich ferruginous purple, shorter than the flowers. February. Natal, 1862. A handsome greenhouse plant. (B. M. 5378.) H. puniceus (scarlet).* fl. orange-scarlet, with yellow or orange stamens. June. 1. oblong, elliptical, acute, retuse, wavy. A. lit Cape of Good Hope, 1722. (B. M. 1315.) H. sanguineus (blood-flower), fl. scarlet, in dense heads. I. two, oblong-elliptic, leathery, glabrous, not spotted. South Africa. This species has decidedly ornamental foliage, and is the one most easily grown. It is a good cool-house plant. H. tenuiflorus coceineus (scarlet slender-flowered). A synonym of H. abyssinicus. •-spotted), fl. deep crimson, disposed in large linguiform, flat, smooth, fringed at edge, de- pressed. A. 1ft Cape of Good Hope, 1790. (B. M. 1705.) H. virescens (greenish), fl. whitish. July. I. curious, oblong, lanceolate, hairy all over. A. 1ft Cape 'of Good Hope, 1774. (L. B. C. 702.) H. V. albiflos (white-flowered), fl. white. June. I. oblong, strap-shaped, with ciliated margins. A. 1ft. Cape of Good Hope, 1791. (B. M. 1239, under name of H. albiflos.) H2EMARIA (from haima, blood; in reference to the blood-red colour of the leaves on the under surface). STN. Ludisia. OBD. Orchidea. A genus comprising about four species of terrestrial orchids, natives of China, Cochin China, and the Malayan Archipelago. Flowers racemose, shortly pedicellate or sub-sessile. Leaves shortly petiolate, ovate or elliptic, thickish, mem- branaceons ; bracts membranaceous. H. discolor, the only species yet introduced, is an interesting stove plant. For culture, see Croodyera. H. discolor (two-coloured), fl. white, Jin. across ; spike erect, furnished with a number of crimson bracts. November. I. ovate, few, green above, crimson underneath. A. 1ft South China, 1815. (B. R. 271 ; B. M. 2055, under name of Goodyera discolor.) HJEMATOXYLON (from haima, haimatos, blood, and xylon, wood). Logwood. OBD. Leguminosce. A monotypic genus. The species is a stove evergreen tree, with unarmed branches, or with spines under the leaves. It succeeds in a mixture of sand and peat. Bather firm cuttings of young shoots will root in sandy soil, under glass, and in heat. H. tigrinus (tiger-spottei heads. April. I. linguif pressed. A. 1ft Cape of AN ENCYCLOPAEDIA OF HORTICULTURE. 109 Hsemat oxy loii — c ontinued. H. campechianum. Campeachy Wood. fl. yellow, produced in axillary racemes. I. abruptly pinnate, in fascicles ; leaflets small, obovate, obcordate. A. 20ft. to 40ft. Central America, Columbia, and the West Indies, 1724. This plant yields the well-known logwood of commerce, largely employed by calico-printers, dyers, and hat-makers. It consists of the heart-wood of the tree, from which the sapwood has been removed, and is of a deep, dull, brownish-red colour. (B. M. PI. 86.) HJEMODORACE2E. An order of epigynous mono- cotyledons, belonging to Lindley's Narcissal alliance of endogens. Perennial herbs, natives of the Cape, North and South America, Central and Eastern Asia, and South- west Australia. Perianth petaloid, tubular or sub-cam- panulate, usually hairy or woolly outside, glabrous within. Leaves alternate, usually distichous, sub-ensiform, sheath- ing at the base, equitant. Bitterness exists in some of the plants. The roots of some also yield a red colour: hence the name of the order. As understood in the " Genera Plantarum," there are twenty-six genera and about 120 species. Well-known genera are : Anigo- santhus, Hosinodorum, and Wachendorfia. H.2EMODORUM (from haima, blood, and doron, a gift; probably in reference to the roots serving as food for the natives of Australia. The name was given by Theophrastes to the Broom-rape). Bloodroot. OBD. Hcemodoraceoe. A genus of about seventeen species of pretty greenhouse perennials, all natives of Australia, with black, red, livid green, or orange -coloured flowers. They thrive in peat and loam. Increased by dividing the roots, in spring. The two species described below are those best known to cultivation. H. planifolium (flat-leaved), fl. livid-purple or greenish at the base, in short forked racemes or cymes, collected in a compact, more 07 less corymbose panicle ; perianth segments linear or linear-lanceolate. August. :., lower ones grass-like, flat ; upper ones few and short. Stems 2ft. to 3ft. high. 1810. (B. M. 1610.) H. teretifolium (terete-leaved). This closely resembles H. plani- folium, but the leaves are from a short sheathing base, very long, slender, and terete, or nearly so. August. 1822. HAGBERRY. See Cerasus Padus. HAIRBELL. See Harebell. HAIR GRASS. See Aira. HAEEA (named after Baron Hake, a German patron of botany). SYN. Conchium. OKD. Proteacece. A large genus (ninety-five species have been described) of green- house evergreen shrubs or rarely small trees, limited to Australia. Flowers hermaphrodite, in pairs ; perianth irregular or rarely regular, the tube revolute or curved under the limb, or rarely straight. Leaves alternate, very diversified in shape, flat or terete ; margins rarely re- curved, and the two surfaces usually similar and equally veined. Hakeas thrive in a compost of two parts peat and one of loam, with sufficient sand to secure perfect drainage. Well-ripened cuttings will root in sandy peat, under a bell glass, if first placed in a cool house, and transferred to a mild bottom heat so soon as a callus is formed. During summer, when the plants are grow- ing, water may be freely given in early morning or evening ; at other times, it should be carefully adminis- tered. H. couchifolia (shell-leaved). A synonym of H. cucuUata. H. cristata (crested), fl. white, small, in short axillary racemes. June. I. cuneute-obovate, spinosely toothed, glabrous. A. 6ft. to 8ft. 1837. H. cucuUata (hooded).* fl. red, small, showy, in dense axillary clusters. June. I. leathery, cordate, alternate, sessile, minutely toothed, milky-green. Branches round, very hairy. A. 4ft. 1824. SYXS. H. conchifolia and H. Victorias. (B. M. 4528.) H. Cunningham! (Cunningham's), fl., racemes lateral on the old wood, loosely cylindrical, 3in. to oin. long. May. I. terete, rigid, mostly above 1ft. long. A. 12ft. to 16ft. A small tree. SYN. H. longifolia. H. dactyloides (finger-like).* fl. white, very small, numerous, in axillary clusters or short racemes ; perianth glabrous. July. I. from linear-lanceolate to oblong-lanceolate, acute or scarcely obtuse, tapering into a short petiole, rigid, prominently three- nerved. Branches erect. A. 7ft. 1790. Shrub. SYN. Conchium dactylohie*. (B. M. 4528.) Hakea — continued. H. ferruginea (rusty). /. small, in axillary clusters ; perianth glabrous, much revolute ; limb ovoid. May. I. glabrous or villous, sessile, from cordate-ovate to ovate-lanceolate, shortly acuminate, with a callous point, entire, or with slightly sinuate or undulate margins. Branches tomentose-pubescent. A. 3ft. to 4ft. SYN. H. repanda. (B. M. 3424 ; L. B. C. 1750 ; S. F. A. 45.) H. florida (flowery), fl. white, very small, in axillary clusters. July. {. sessile or nearly so, lanceolate or linear-lanceolate, very acute and pungent-pointed, bordered by a few prickly teeth or small lobes. Branches pubescent or villous. A. 5ft. to 6ft. 1803. (B. M. 2579.) H. linearis (linear), fl. white, small, in axillary clusters or short racemes ; perianth glabrous ; tube slender. May. I. ses- sile, linear-lanceolate, pungent-pointed, entire or bordered by a few small prickly teeth. A. 4ft. 1824. An erect, bushy, bright green, glabrous shrub. (B. B. 1489 : S. F. A. 43.) H. longifolia (long-leaved). A synonym of H. Cunninghatni. H. myrtoides (Myrtle-like), fl. red, in axillary clusters. Fe- bruary. Z. sessile, ovate or sub-orbicular, pungent, marginate, smooth. Branches rather loosely villous, at length glabrous. A. 2ft. to 3ft. 1849. (B. M. 4643.) H. nitida (shining).* fl. white, small, numerous, in axillary racemes. June. 1. obovate-oblong, or rarely lanceolate, some- times quite entire and obtuse, with a small pungent point, some- times acute, pungent-pointed, and irregularly bordered by a few prickly teeth or lobes. Branches glabrous. A. 6ft. to 8ft. 1803. A dense shrub. (B. M. 2246.) H. pectinata (comb-like). A synonym of //. suaveolens. H. propinqna (related), fl. very small, in little axillary clusters. June. I. crowded, terete, smooth, mucronate, rather thick, shortly attenuated at the base. Branches scarcely pubescent. A bushy shrub. H. pugioniformis (dagger-formed), fl. few, in axillary sessile clusters ; perianth tube slender. May. I. terete, smooth, rigid, with a short pungent point. Branches glabrous or very minutely silky-pubescent. A. 2ft. to 4ft. 1796. (L. B. C. 353.) H. repanda (repand). A synonym of H. ferruginea. H. saligna (Willow-like), fl. small, in dense axillary clusters ; perianth glabrous. April. I. usually lanceolate, obtuse, or with a short, callous point, veinless, or obscurely and obliquely penni- veined. A. 7ft. 1791. A tall bushy shrub. (S. F. A. 27.) H. suaveolens (sweet-smelling).* fl. white, racemose, smooth. Summer. I. furrowed above, pinnatifid, occasionally undivided. A. 4ft. 1803. SYN. H. pectinata. H. sulcata (furrowed-leaved). fl. small, in dense axillary clusters, the small rachis densely villous. May. I. linear-terete, angular, and furrowed, rigid, mucronate, sometimes pungent-pointed. A. 5ft. to 6ft. 1820. An erect shrub. H. s. scoparia (broom-like), fl. yellow. May. I mostly longer, sometimes 8in., less pointed than in the type, but occasionally short in some branches. 1849. (B. M. 4644.) H. Victories (Queen Victoria's). A synonym of H. cucuUata. HALESIA (named after Stephen Hales, 1677-1761, author of a famous work on " Vegetable Statics "). Silver- Bell or Snowdrop Tree. SYN. Pterostyrax. OBD. Styra- caceoe. A genus containing about half-a-dozen species of ornamental hardy deciduous small trees, of which three are North American, one Chinese, and two or three from Japan. Flowers white, showy, drooping, on slender pedicels, in fascicles (or rarely very short racemes) from the axils of the fallen leaves of the preceding year. Leaves rather large, ovate-oblong, acuminate, more or less den- ticulate, slender-petioled. The species are well suited for shrubberies and lawns, in almost any position ; but one somewhat sheltered is most suitable, and a deep, sandy, moist soil is best. Increased by layers, or by cuttings of the roots, in spring and autumn. H. corymbosa (corymbose), fl. white, tinted with rose or yellow, in corymbose panicles. June. I. rounded at the base, ovate-cuspidate, sharply-serrated, hairy. A. 10ft. to 12ft. Japan. SYN. Pterostyrax corymbosum. (S. 'L. F. J. 47.) H. diptera (two-winged), fl. white. Spring, fr. with two large opposite wings and two obsolete ones. J. large, ovate, acute, serrated. A. 10ft. North America, 1758. SYN. II. reticulata. (L. B. C. 1172.) H. hispida (hairy).* /. white, in corymbose racemes, fr. covered with stiff and dense hairs. I. large, cordate, on stout petioles. Japan, 1875. SYN. Pterostyrax hispidum. See Figs. 166 and 167. H. parviflora (small-flowered), fl. white, drooping ; racemes panicled. May. fr. clavate, slightly four-winged. I. ovate- oblong, acute, nearly entire, downy, glaucous beneath. A. 10ft. Georgia and Florida, 1802. H. reticulata (reticulated). A synonym of //. diptera. 110 THE DICTIONARY OF GARDENING, Halesia — continued. I. tetraptera (four- winged).' fl. pure white, nine or ten in a fascicle, drooping, somewhat resembling those of the Snowdrop. Spring. Jr. four-winged, lin. to 2in. long. I. ovate-lanceolate, acuminated, sharply serrated, h. 15ft. to 20ft North America, 1756. (B. M. 910 ; L. B. C. 1173.) Fio. 166. FLOWERING BRANCH AND DETACHJUJ FLOWERS OF HALESIA HISPIDA. FIG. 167. PORTION OF FRUITING BRANCH OF HALESIA HISTIDA. HALIMIUM. Included under Cistus. HALIMODENDRON (from lialimos, maritime, and dendron, a tree ; the plant grows in dry, naked, salt- fields, in Siberia). Salt-tree. OBD. Lfyuminosce. A Halimodendron continued. monotypic genus. The species is a very pretty, silky, hardy deciduous shrub, forming a handsome plant when grafted upon the Laburnum as a standard. It thrives in a sandy soil, and may be increased freely by seeds, by cuttings, or by layers. H. argenteum (silvery).* fl. purplish, rather large, umbellate, axillary, or fascicled on the old nodes. May to July. I. hoary, abruptly pinnate, with two pairs of leaflets, h. 4ft. to 6ft. Asiatic Russia, 1779. (B. M. 1016, under name of Robinia, Halimodendron. ) HALLERIA (named after Albert Haller, 1708-1777, author of " Stirpes Helveticte," and other botanical works). OED. Scrophularinece. A genus containing about five species of ornamental greenhouse evergreen glabrous shrubs, of which one is from Abyssinia, another from Madagascar, and the rest from the Cape of Good Hope. Flowers scarlet ; cymes terminal, few-flowered ; calyx cup- like, bell-shaped, with three to five broad, short lobes ; corolla tubular, widening upwards, with an oblique, shortly five-lobed limb. Leaves ovate or oblong. Hallerias thrive in light, rich soil. Propagated by cuttings, which will root freely under a glass. Plenty of water is needed during summer, and a well-ventilated spot is at all times necessary. The species described below is the one usually seen in cultivation. H. lucida (shining). African Honeysuckle. /. reddish, large, drooping ; corolla bilabiate. June. I. ovate, acuminate, ser- rated. h. 4ft to 6ft. Cape of Good Hope, 1752. (B. M. 1744.) HALLIA (named in honour of Bergen Martin Hall, a pupil of Linnaeus). OED. Leguminosce. A genus contain- ing six species of erect or decumbent greenhouse peren- nial herbs or sub-shrubs, all natives of South Africa. Flowers purple, small, axillary, solitary. Leaves alter- nate, simple, very entire, often black-dotted, two-stipuled. The best-known species is H. imbricata. For culture, see Alliag-i. . purple, axillary, sessile. August. H. imbricata (imbricated), 1. cordate-ovate, convolute, 1850, 2596.) ft. pu imbricated, h. lift 1B12. (B. M. HAIiORAGE.35. An order of herbs or under-shrubs, rarely annual, aquatic, or terrestrial. Flowers often axil- lary, solitary, or aggregate, sometimes whorled in a spike, rarely pedicelled, sometimes panicled. Leaves usually opposite or whorled, simple, entire or toothed. the submerged ones usually pectinate, rarely entire; stipules none, or (in Gunnera) adnate to the petiole. The species are sparingly dispersed throughout the world, and may be found in damp places, ditches, and small streams, sometimes submerged. There are nine genera and eighty species. Well-known examples are: Gunnera and Hippuris. HALTICA CONCINNA and H. NEMORUM. See Turnip Ply. HAMAMELIDE2E. A small order of shrubs or small or large trees, inhabiting temperate and sub-tro- pical Asia, South Africa, and North America. Calyx four-partite, more or less adnate to the ovary ; limb trun- cate or five-lobed; lobes valvate or imbricate. Leaves alternate, petioled, simple, penninerved ; stipules deci- duous. There are about fifteen genera and thirty species. Examples : Bucklandia, Corylopsis, Hamamelis, and Liquidambar. HAMAMELIS (from hama, with, and melon, fruit; the fruit accompanies the flower). Witch-hazel. OED. Hamamelidece. A genus containing three species of hardy deciduous shrubs or small trees, one from the United States, the others from Japan. Flowers yellow, two to three bracteolate, glomerate. Leaves alternate, sub-ro- tundate, unequal at the base, crenate-dentate. H. vir- ginica, the species best known in gardens, thrives in a moist sandy soil, and may be propagated by layers. During autumn and winter, the plant is profusely covered with its fine rich yellow flowers, which begin to expand AN ENCYCLOPEDIA OF HORTICULTURE. ill Hamamelis — continued. before the leaves of the previous summer drop off, and continue on the bush throughout the winter ; after the petals drop off, in spring, the persistent calyces remain on till the leaves reappear in April or May. H. arborea (tree-like).* JL, petals clear rich primrose-yellow; calyces deep claret. Winter. Japan, 1862. This plant differs from the American species in forming a small tree, 15ft. to 20ft. high, and in its larger and finer flowers. (G. C. n. a., i., 187 ; B. M. 6659, under name of H. japoniea.) H. japoniea (Japanese), fl. lemon-yellow. A form with paler flowers, and of much dwarfer habit than H. arborea. H. Zuc- cariniana is an allied form, with pale petals and a greenish-brown calyx. H. virginica (Virginian).* /. yellow, disposed in axillary clusters. October to February. I. obovate, acutely toothed, alternate, on short petioles. North America, 1736. Shrub. The seeds of this plant contain a quantity of oil, and are edible ; the bark and leaves are astringent. (B. M. 6684.) HAMATO-SERRATE. Serratures having a some- what hooked form. HAMELIA (named after Henry Louis du Hamel du Monceau, 1700-1782, a celebrated French author). OED. Rubiacece. A genus containing six or eight species of handsome, ornamental, free-flowering evergreen stove shrubs, natives of tropical and sub-tropical America. Flowers yellow, reddish or scarlet, in di- or trichotomous cymes, sessile or shortly pedicellate ; bracts minute. Leaves opposite or three to four nate, verticillate, petio- late, membranaceous, ovate oblong, and acute at both ends. Hamelias succeed best in a compost of sandy peat and fibrous loam. Nearly ripened cuttings will root during the early part of summer, inserted in sand, under glass, with bottom heat. The two species here described are those usually sean in stoves. H. patens (spreading), fl. almost scarlet ; cymes di-trichotomous, disposed in a terminal pedunculate umbel. Summer. I. three -in a whorl, oval-oblong, pubescent, h. 5ft. to 10ft. South America, 1752. (B. M. 2553.) H. ventricosa (swollen), fl. yellow, almost lin. long, campanu- late, ventricose, on long pedicels ; racemes terminal. September. I. three in a whorl, glabrous, oval-oblong, h. 8ft. South America, 1778. (B. M. 1894 ; B. R. 1195.) HAMILTONIA (named after William Hamilton, an eminent American botanist). STN. Spermadictyon. OKD. Rubiacece. A genus comprising three or four species of ornamental stove evergreen shrubs, natives of tropical and sub-tropical India, China, and the Indian Archipelago. Flowers white or blue, fascicled or umbellate; corolla funnel-shaped. Leaves opposite, ovate -lanceolate, shortly petioled. A loam and peat compost is most suited to Hamiltonias. Half-ripened cutting* root freely in sand, under a glass, with a moist bottom heat. H. scabra (rough). /!. azure-blue, deliciously fragrant ; inflo- rescence densely villous. November to March, i. ovate-lanceolate, short-acuminated, scabrous on both surfaces, h. 4ft. to 6ft. Nepaul, 1823. SYN. Spermadictyon azureum. (B. R. 1235.) H. spectabilis (showy), fl. lilac-blue, in large, much-branched panicles, agreeably scented. Winter. I. ovate-lanceolate, green and smooth above, paler and rough beneath, h. 4ft. to 6ft. (R. H. 1872, 191.) H. suaveolens (sweet-smelling). /. pure white, sessile, in ter- minal corymb-formed heads, very fragrant. October. I. broad- lanceolate, Sin. to 6in. long. h. 4ft. to 6ft. India to China, 1818. (B. R. 348.) HAMMER, GARDEN. Hammers are principally used in gardening for nailing wall trees. The head should be rather short, and quite flat at the end used for FIG. 168. GARDEN HAMMER. driving nails. The other end should be shaped like a claw, and turned back sufficiently to serve as a fulcrum for drawing out nails that are useless or misplaced. See Fig. 168. HAMULOSE. Covered with little hooks. HANCORNIA (a commemorative name). ORD. Apocy- nacece. A monotypic genus. The species is a small, loosely or pendulously branched tree, from Brazil. For culture, see Tabernsemontana. H. speciosa (showy), fl. sweet-scented, resembling those of Jasmine ; cymes terminal, few-flowered, shortly pedunculate. J'r. yellow, marked with red spots, about the size of a plum, edible. I. opposite, small, oblong, sharp at the base, and rounded, but shortly pointed at the apex, penniveined. h. 20ft. The tree yields a milky juice, which, when exposed to the air, hardens into a kind of caoutchouc. HAND BARROW. Barrow. HAND GLASSES. These are very useful as tem- porary coverings for plants that are too tender for being fully exposed. They are also utilised in propagating various subjects, as the top part may be readily removed and easy access thus secured for attending to whatever is inside. Various shapes are made, the bases being generally square, hexagonal, or octagonal. The first-named is the most con- FIG. 169. HAND GLASS. venient shape (see Fig. 169), and if the framework is con- structed with copper or cast iron and kept painted, it lasts a long time, and answers well. Air may be admitted by tilting up the movable top, or the latter may be taken off and replaced at will. Hand Glasses, when employed for propagating purposes, should be glazed airtight, by having the glass fitted into the framework without laps. HAND-PLANT. See Clieirostemon. HAND- WEEDING. The necessity of Hand-weeding is now obviated, in a considerable degree, by the general insertion of seeds in lines, and the occasional passing of the hoe between them. This only misses a few weeds by the sides of plants that may readily be removed when thinning takes place ; whereas, tinder the old system of sowing broadcast, whole seed beds of any description had to be Hand-weeded, to prevent the proper plants from becoming smothered. Hand-weeding gravel walks should be practised after a storm, if there are any weeds about, as they may then be easily pulled up and destroyed. HANGING. A term applied to plants or cuttings when only partially inserted in holes, previously made by a dibber, the ends not being placed in contact with the earth at the base. It is very important that Hanging should be avoided, especially with cuttings ; failure to emit roots, under such conditions, being almost a certainty. HAPLOPAPPUS (from haploos, simple, and pappos, down ; in reference to the absence of the outer pappus). STN. Aplopappus. OKD. Composite. A genus contain- ing sixty species of perennial herbs or sub-shrubs, natives of North America, from California to Texas and Mexico, Chili and Patagonia. Flower-heads yellow, large or medium ; pappus often reddish, rarely white ; achenes glabrous or silky-villous. Leaves alternate, entire, or rigidly ciliate-dentate, rarely pinnatifid. H. spinulosus, perhaps the only species yet in cultivation, is a very ornamental sub-shrub, of easy culture in ordinary garden soil. It may be increased by divisions, or by seeds. 112 THE DICTIONARY OF GARDENING, , .- e across. August. I. hoary, deeply pinnately cut into ar segments. A. 6in. to 18in. Rocky Mountains, 1874. Haplopappns — continued, H. spinulosus (spiny), fl.-heads bright golden yellow, lin. or more linea (B. M. HAPLOPHYLLUM. Now included tinder Ruta (which see). HARDENBERGIA (named in honour of the Countess of Hardenberg, sister to Baron Huegel, the celebrated traveller). OBD. Leguminosce. A small genus (three species have been described) of greenhouse, glabrous, twining herbs or under-shrubs, limited to Australia. Flowers violet, white, or pinkish, with a yellowish or greenish spot on the standard; in axillary racemes. Leaves of one, three, or five entire stipelate leaflets. The species succeed in a compost of two parts peat and one loam, with the addition of a little sand and charcoal, to keep the soil open. Propagated by seeds, or by cuttings, made of firm young side shoots in April, inserted under a bell glass, and placed in a warm frame or pit, without bottom heat. Hardenbergias are well adapted for planting out, and training up rafters in a greenhouse, where there is a little shade in summer, and a temperature of 40deg. to 45deg. in winter. H. Comptoniana (Compton's).» fl. closely resembling those of H. monophylla in size, colour, and structure ; in pairs or clusters of three or four along the racemes. March. /., leaflets three or five, varying from ovate to linear-lanceolate, rather obtuse. rounded or truncate at the base. 1803. SYNS. H. dinitata (B. R. 1840, t. 60), H. Huegelii, H. Lindleyi, H. Makoyana, Glyeine Comptoniana (A. B. R. 602; B. R. 298), Kennedya macrophylla (B. R. 1862). H. cordata (heart-shaped). A synonym of 77. monophylla. H. digltata (digitate). A synonym of 77. Comptoniana. H. Hnegelii (Huegel's). A synonym of H. Comptoniana. H. Lindleyi (Lindley's). A synonym of H. Comptoniana. H. Makoyana (Makoy's). A synonym of H. Comptoniana. H. monophylla (one-leaved).* ft. purple, usually numerous, in pairs or rarely three together, the upper racemes often forming a terminal panicle. April. I., leaflets always solitary, usually ovate or lanceolate, more or less cordate or rounded at the base, often coriaceous and strongly reticulate, but varying from broadly rrow-lanceolate. 1790. SYNS. H. cordata, cordate-ovate to narrc H. ovata, Glyeine bimaeulata (B. M. 263), Kennedya cordata (B. R. 944), K. loncjiracemosa (L. B. C. 1940), K. monophylla (B. R. 1336 ; L. B. C. 758), K. ovata (B. M. 2169). H. ovata (ovate). A synonym of H. monophylla. HARDENINCt-OFF. This refers to the process of gradually inuring plants to a cooler temperature, after they have been subjected to heat, either for the encouragement of growth, for propagating purposes, or for forcing. It is most largely practised in spring, with bedding and other plants, that are to be cultivated throughout the summer in the open air. To avoid sudden checks to tender foliage or flowers, it is important that Hardening-off should be conducted by gradual steps. HARD FERN. See Lomaria Spicant. HARDWICKIA (named after General Hardwicke, once of the East Indian Company). ORD. Leguminosce. A genus containing three species of stove evergreen trees. Flowers small, racemose; racemes slender, pani- culate. Leaves abruptly pinnate, one to three-jugate, coriaceous. Hardwickias thrive in a rich sandy loam. Eipened cuttings will root in sand, in a brisk heat. H. blnata (twin-leaved), fl. yellow, in axillary and terminal panicles. I. with one pair of leaflets ; leaflets opposite, obliquely ovate, semi-cordate, h. 100ft. India, 1818. This species yields an excellent timber. (B. F. S. 26.) H. pinnata (pinnate), fl. dirty yellow. L, leaflets alternate, ovate-lanceolate, acuminate, one-nerved in the middle, the ulti- mate one almost terminal, h. 40ft. to 50ft. India 1818. (B. F. S 255.) HARDY PLANTS. Although this title may refer to all plants sufficiently hardy to withstand the winters of our variable climate unprotected, it more particularly applies to those which are herbaceous and of various heights, and to others of dwarf dimensions introduced Hardy Plants — continued. from alpine regions. They may, in either case, be of annual, biennial, or perennial duration. A collection of Hardy Plants should form part of the occupants of every garden. The treatment of many of the most popular and useful is of the easiest description, provided due preparation be made in the first place, and ordinary atten- tion bestowed afterwards in keeping the borders cleaned and the cultivated plants properly tied up, to protect them from rough winds. A large number of species of this class of plants are of botanical interest only ; but, apart from these, a numerous selection, unsurpassed in beauty and usefulness when in flower, may be obtained for garden embellishment. Some are well adapted for massing in large or small beds, according to the several habits of plants so employed; the majority, however, most suitable for cultivation in private gardens may be better arranged in mixed borders, reserving the dwarf and more delicate kinds for special culture, if possible, on rockwork. A general display at any particular season is not usually the rule with Hardy Plants of a varied description, if we except that made by Narcissi and numerous other bulbs in spring. The flowering period of a mixed collection extends, with one or another genus, nearly throughout the year ; spring and autumn being the seasons when most are represented — their requirements being more fully met by a somewhat cooler temperature and moister atmosphere than those experienced in summer. Various select perennials, grown in quantity, afford an invaluable supply of cut blossoms, especially in early autumn, when there is a scarcity, under glass, of flowers adapted for cutting. Their culture is a matter of great importance for this purpose alone. A large number of Hardy Plants, particularly the bulbous section, flower very early in spring, and these are additionally at- tractive on that account. We are indebted to the latter, and to a selection of hardy annuals and perennials, for fur- nishing flower beds in spring, and making them interesting, long before it is possible to plant the summer occupants. Spring gardening deserves considerably more attention than it at present receives ; at least, in localities where the climate is favourable, and where there is room in the reserve ground for the preparation of plants. Some few gardens have a space specially set apart for hardy spring flowers, in which the latter are kept all the summer, and invariably succeed much better for not being much dis- turbed. Hardy bulbs, planted permanently, may be left alone with advantage, in such positions; and annual or perennial plants can be renewed as becomes necessary. A number of plants for spring gardening may be pro- pagated annually from seed, or by division of old plants, in autumn, according to the different habits, or period of duration, belonging to each. Hardy spring-flowering subjects, such as Myosotis, Primroses, Polyanthus, Silenes, and Wallflowers, in variety, should be sown during the middle or latter part of summer, and be prepared, in the open ground, for placing out permanently in autumn. Dwarf perennials secured in quantity for associating with these, are : Alyssum saxatile, Arabis albida and its variegated variety, Aubrietias, Daisies, and dwarf species of Phlox. All these latter may be divided, and the stock largely increased, if desired, after flowering is over, or, better still, in August, on account of dry, hot weather. In geometrical summer flower gardening, perennials can scarcely be appropriately introduced ; but, where bedding is of a mixed description, suitable positions may fre- quently be found for whole beds or masses of such plants as Anemone japonica alba, some of the dwarf species of Aster, Border Carnations, tall-growing Lobelias, Pent- stemons, Phloxes, Pyrethrums, &c. These are all attractive in their flowering seasons, and materially reduce the supply of more tender subjects, by filling the space in their stead. The majority of Hardy Plants may be readily raised from seeds, which may be sown in pots, and placed in a frame with a very slight heat, from the month of February throughout the summer ; or they may be sown outside, AN ENCYCLOPEDIA OF HORTICULTURE. 113 Hardy Plants— continued. after the middle of March, when germination is tolerably certain. Forwarding in frames sometimes has advantages ; but it is important that the young plants thus treated be fully exposed to light, and not allowed to become drawn for want of air. A large proportion of perennials may be more readily propagated by division, and this is best per- formed early in autumn, or at the commencement of new growth in spring. Preparation and Planting of Mixed Borders. In the preparation of a border for Hardy Plants, it is important that the soil be deeply trenched, so far as it will allow, the autumn previous to planting. If it is moderately rich and heavy, rather than light and sandy, it will be all the better, as many of the vigorous-growing species require a strong soil. Manure should be added at trenching time, to insure its proper incorporation amongst the soil ; and, if the surface is laid rough for the winter, the border will be in good condition for planting early the following spring. Herbaceous subjects, in general, arc not well suited for planting alone in a border. Mixed borders should not be less than 10ft. or 12ft. wide, and a greater width allows of a better arrangement being provided for the taller-growing sorts. Evergreen shrubs, planted irregularly according to their height, are advisable for permanently furnishing the border in winter, when the primary plants have died down, and they also afford protection from wind and strong sunshine in summer. The object in planting should be to dispose of the different colours, varieties, heights, &c., of the material at command, so that the whole shall prove equally interesting at all seasons, without a frequent repetition of similar effects in different parts. A knowledge of the habit, height, time of flowering, and other points in connection with the various plants employed, will be requisite on the part of the cultivator, to enable him to fix proper positions for each, so that a gradual rise in the heights is secured, at flowering time, from the front line to the back. This cannot always be secured during the first season, on account of the nature of the soil, and its effect on the growth of different plants ; but any that are misplaced may bo marked, and the error remedied the following season. Tall Asters, Delphiniums, Helianthus, &c., should be planted near the back; other plants, reaching a height of 2ft. to 3ft., placed about the middle ; and dwarf ones, such as Aubrietias, Iberis, Pinks, Saxifrages, &c., near the front margin. Mixed borders may be utilised for the cultivation of an endless variety of plants in summer. Spring bulbs may be inserted at intervals, and allowed to take care of themselves ; their positions should be marked by sticks or labels, to avoid injury being caused when the tops cannot be seen. Vacant spaces may be utilised 'for seeds of annuals, either hardy or tender, and these may be sown where the several heights will correspond, at the latter end of March. The general keeping of the mixed border consists in frequently tying- up any tall-growing plants that require it ; but only those of an erect-growing habit should be thus treated, the stakes not being allowed to exceed the height of the plants, and inserted so as to be hidden by the foliage ae much as possible. In moderately heavy soils, watering will not be much required; but, where the ground is light, almost any quantity may be applied in summer. The usual method of annually digging mixed borders, is not to be recommended, as many plants are surface-rooting, and are, consequently, much injured by the process : a slight forking over, to break the surface, and an addition of some leaf soil or light manure, about March, are bene- ficial. Sufficient space should be allowed each plant with- out overcrowding, and any subjects which spread beyond their limits— some of the Asters, for instance — should be considerably reduced each year. If alpines are intro- duced, they should be kept to the front line, and have stones placed round them, to keep the crowns above the ground line, and special soil added round their roots. Vol. IL Hardy Plants — continued. A large number of these interesting dwarf plants may be successfully grown in mixed borders, if a little extra attention is bestowed on their cultivation, especially in raising the crowns somewhat, to prevent their damp- ing off. Hardy Aquatic and Bog Plants. Numerous beautiful Hardy Plants succeed best in a very moist situation, and many require entire submersion in water. Where a pond or lake exists, advantage should be taken for providing some accommodation for them, and planting accordingly; or artificial preparation may be made for a limited quantity. Bog plants should, in most cases, have their crowns kept a little above the surface. They may either be planted out, or grown in pans, and plunged. Hardy aquatics, such as Aponogeton distachyon, Nuphar advena and N. lutea, Nymphcea alba and N. odorata, with several others, may be planted where there is a considerable space and depth of water. Calla palustris, Iris pseudacorus, Ly- thrum Salicaria, and Sagittaria sagittifolia, are examples of such as succeed near the edge, or in shallow water. Amongst others worthy of culture, and which succeed in moist, boggy situations, are : Anagallis tenella, Caltha palustris and its double form, Droseras, Parnassia palus- tris and other species, Primula rosea, Sarracenia pur- purea, and Spiraea palmata. HAREBELL. A name given to Campanula rotundiflora and Scilla nutans (which see) ; also spelt Hairbell. HARE'S EAR. See Bupleurum. HARE'S FOOT. See Ochroma Lagopus. HARE'S-FOOT FERN. See Davallia cana- riensis. HARE'S TAIL. See Lag-urns ovatus. HARICOT. The ripe seeds of Phaseolus vulgaris and other species of Phaseolus. HARINA. See Wallichia. HARONGA (the native name in Madagascar). OBD. Hypericinece. A monotypio genus. The species is an evergreen stove shrub. It thrives in a compost of sandy loam and peat. Propagated by cuttings, made of young shoots, and inserted in sand, under a glass, in heat. EL madagascariensis (Madagascar), fl. yellow; corymbs terminal, very large and branchy. I. elliptic-lanceolate, entire. Stem round, branching, h. 10ft. Tropical Africa and Mada- gascar, 1822. HARFAGOPHYTUU (the English name — Grapple Plant — translated into Greek). SYN. Uncaria. OBD. Pedalinece. This genus comprises about four species of procumbent canescent perennial herbs, natives of South Africa and Madagascar. Flowers axillary, solitary, shortly pedicellate; pedicels glandular at base. Leaves opposite or alternate, incised. H. procumbens (procumbent). /., corolla tube pale; limb purple. I. stalked, five-nerved, palmatifid, with coarsely-incised sinuate lobes. Stems many, prostrate. Cape of Good Hope. A very handsome herb, with large fruit, beset with long branches armed with powerful hooked spines ; but probably not in cultiva- tion in this country. SYN. Uncaria procumbens. HARPALIUM. Now included under Helianthus (which see). HARRACHIA. See Crossandra. HARRISONIA (of Hooker). See Marsdeiiia. HARRISONIA (of Neckor). See Xerantliemum. HARTOGTA (named in honour of J. Hartog, an early Dutch traveller in South Africa and Ceylon). SYN. Sclirebera. OED. Celastrineai. A monotypic genus. The species is an ornamental greenhouse evergreen shrub, allied to Cassine. It proves hardy in sheltered spots. For culture, see Cassine. j.. v.u.ji/^n.oi.o (Cape). fl. yellow ; pedicels few-flowered, axillary, drooping. June. I. opposite, oblong, crenated, smooth, hardy, stalked. Cape of Good Hope, 1800. A small tree. THE DICTIONARY OF GARDENING, HARTSTONGUE. See Scolopendrium. HARTWEGTA (named after Theodor. Hartweg, once a botanical collector for the Horticultural Society). OBD. Orchideoe. A genus containing about a couple of species of curious little stove epiphytal orchids, closely allied to Epidendrum. For culture, see Odontoglosstun. EL gemma (twin). /. brilliant amethystine-purple. I. thick, semi-terete, channelled, acute, blotched with blackish violet Central America (?), 1878. H. purpurea (purple), fl. purple ; perianth spreading ; lateral sepals drawn out at the base, adnate to the lip ; lip connate with the column, ovate. August, h. 1ft. Mexico and Guatemala, 1837. (Ref. B. 94.) HARTWORT. See Tordylium. HASSAQAY OB ASSAGAY TREE. See Cur- tisia faginea. FIG. 170. HASTATE LEAF. HASTATE. Formed like the head of a halbert. A Hastate Leaf is shown at Fig. 170. HASTINGTA. A synonym of Holmskioldia (which see). HATCHET CACTUS. See Felecyphora. HATCHET VETCH. See Securidaca Coronilla. HAULM. A term often applied to the stems of such plants as Beans, Peas, Potatoes, &c. HAUTBOIS, or HAUTBOY. See Pragaria elatior. HAW. The fruit of the Hawthorn, Cratcegus Oxy- acantha. HAWKBIT. See Leontodon. HAWK MOTHS. See Sphingidse. HAWKSBEARD. See Crepis. HAWKWEED. See Hieracinm. HAWORTHIA (named after A. H. Haworth, a dis- tinguished authority on succulent plants, died 1833). OBD. Liliace barren segments palmato-pinnate, often in three principal divisions, which are stalked and again forked or pinnate, the ultimate divisions linear-oblong. Sin. to 4in. long, nearly lin. broad; fertile spike solitary, arising from the base of the barren segments, Sin. to 4in. long, Jin. broad. Himalaya to ' 'cis (H G " nd, 1861. SYN. H. dulcis. (H. G. F. HELONIAS (from helos, a marsh; habitat of species). OBD. Liliacece. A monotypic genus, the species being a pretty hardy herbaceous perennial, from North America. It thrives in a sandy fibry loam and peat compost, and in a moist, shaded situation. Increased slowly by di- visions of the roots, or by seed. H. bullata (bullate). fl. purplish-rose, small; lower ones with linear-lanceolate bracts ; spike oval. Summer. I. radical, oblong- lanceolate, acute, veined, shorter than the flower stems, h 1ft to lift. 1758. SYN. H. tatifolia. (B. M. 747.) H. latifolia (broad-leaved). A synonym of H. bullata. HELWINOrlA (named in honour of Georg. A. Hel- wing, a writer on the botany of Prussia). OBD. Araliacece. A genus consisting of but two species, one Himalayan and the other Japanese. They are glabrous trees, more curious than beautiful, and scarcely worth culti- vating, except in botanical collections. H. ruscifolia (Ruscus-leaved). fl. small, clustered on the midrib of the leaves ; perianth three to four-parted, with ovate spreading segments, fr. drupaceous. I. alternate, petiolate, acuminate, stipulate. Japan. A low tree. The young leaves are used in Japan as a vegetable (S. Z. F. J. 86.) HELWINGIACEJE. A tribe of Araliaceos. HEMEROCALLEJE. A tribe of Liliacece. HEMEROCALLIS (old Greek name used by Theo- phrastus, from hemero, a day, and kallos, beauty ; in reference to its short-lived splendour). Day Lily. OBD. Liliacece. Very ornamental hardy herbaceous perennials. Flowers corymbose ; segments of the perianth united at the base into a narrow tube, inclosing the free ovary. Leaves long, narrow, radical. All the species are of easy culture in ordinary garden soil, and are admirably adapted for shrubberies, or for clumps. The flowers are some- what ephemeral, but they are produced successively and in abundance. Increased by divisions. H. alba (white). A synonym of Funkia subcordata. H. caerolea (blue). A synonym of Funkia ovata. H. cordata (heart-shaped). A synonym of Funkia subcordata. H. disticha (two-ranked). A synonym of H. fulva. H. Dumortieri (Dumortier's).* fl. orange-yellow, tinged with brown on the outside, large, about 2in. long ; scape erect, two to four-flowered. Summer. 1. long, narrow, tapering, 1ft. to lift long. A. 1ft. to lift. Japan and Eastern Siberia. Very dosclv allied to H. minor. SYNS. H. rutilans and H. Sieboldii. (Ref. B. H. flava (yellow).* fl. orange-yellow, very fragrant, erect ; perianth segments flat, veinless. Summer. I. numerous, narrow, 2ft. to 2«t. long, keeled, h. 2ft. to 3ft. South Europe to Western Siberia and Japan, 1596. (B M. 19.) B. fulva (tawny).* fl. large, about 4in. wide, inodorous, few in a cluster ; perianth segments venous and wavy. Summer. I. broad long, keeled. h. 2ft. to 4ft. South Europe to Japan, 1596. SYN. H. disticha. See Fig. 216. (B. M. 64.) H. Kiua^o is a Hemerocallis — contin ued. FIG. 216. HEMEKOCALLIS FULVA. variety with large double bronzy orange-coloured flowers (R. O. 500) ; of this form, there is also a sub-variety, with handsome variegated foliage. H. graminea (grass-like). A synonym of II. minor. H. japonlca (Japanese). A synonym of Funkia subcordata. FIG. 217. HEMEROCALLIS MIDDENDORFII, showing Habit and detached Head of Flowers. H. Middendorfii (Middendorf's)* fl. deep golden-yellow, three or four in a terminal head ; perianth segments flat, with branched veins. Summer. I. long, rather broad, h. 2ft. to 3ft. Eastern Siberia to Japan. See Fig. 217. (R. G. 522.) H. minor (leaser).* fl. yellow, slightly tinged with green, rather small, and slightly fragrant; three inner perianth segments wavy. Summer. I. very narrow, keeled, pointed, h. 4in. to Bin. Siberia, Northern China, and Japan, 1759. SYN. H. graminea. (A. B. R. 244.) H. plantaginea (Plantain-like). A synonym of Funkia subcor- data. H. rutilans (ruddy). A synonym of H. Dumortieri. H. Sieboldii (Siebold's). A synonym of H. Dumortieri. AN ENCYCLOPEDIA OF HORTICULTURE. 135 HEMIANDRA (from hemi, a half, and andros, a male ; alluding to the dimidiate anthers). OBD. Labiatce. A genus comprising three species of greenhouse shrubs or sub-shrubs, inhabiting South-west Australia. Flowers white or pink, axillary, solitary, with a pair of bracts under the calyx. Leaves opposite, entire, narrow, rigid, pungent-pointed. The species thrive in a sandy loam and peat compost. Propagated by cuttings, made of half- ripened wood, and inserted in sand, under a bell glass, during April. H. pungcns (stinging), fl. white or pink, with darker spots ; calyx two-lipped ; corolla tube exserted and dilated into a broad throat. May. I. sessile, linear or linear-lanceolate, rigid, acute, with pungent points, h. lit. to 2ft. A diffuse or spreading rigid shrub. The following, according to Bentham, are but forms of above : H. brevifolia, H. emarginata, H. glabra, H. hirguta, and H. rupestris. (L. J. F. 126.) HEMICH2ENA (from hemi, half, and chaino, to gape; in allusion to the two-lipped corolla). OBD. Scro- phularinece. A monotypic genus. The species is a hand- some half-hardy shrub. It thrives in a loam and peat compost. Ripened cuttings will root, under a hand glass, in bottom heat. H. fruticosa (shrubby), fl., cymes usually three-flowered, much shorter than the leaves ; calyx iin. long, tubular ; corolla golden- yellow. July. I. opposite, 4in. to Sin. long, 2in. to 2iin. broad, oblong-lanceolate, acuminate, irregularly or doubly toothed, dark green, pubescent on both surfaces, h. 3ft. to 5ft. Guatemala and Costa Rica, 1873. (B. M. 6164.) HEMICLIDIA BAXTERI. A synonym of Dry- andra falcata (which see). HEMIDICTYUM. See Asplenium. HEMIMERIS (from hemi, half, and men's, a part; the upper lip of the corolla is nearly obsolete). OBD. Scrophularineae. A genus comprising about four species of annual herbs, natives of Southern Africa. Corolla yellow, expanded, sub-bilabiate, four-cleft, the upper segment very shortly emarginate, the lower segment very large, the lateral short and wide; calyx five- parted ; peduncles axillary, one-flowered, deflexed after flowering. Leaves opposite. H. montana, perhaps the only species yet introduced, is a greenhouse plant, of easy culture in loam and peat. It may be increased by seeds. H. montana (mountain), fl. scarlet, terminal and axillary ; corolla rotate, ringent. July. I. opposite, ovate, serrated, h. 6in. Cape of Good Hope, 1816. FIG. 218. HEMIONITIS PALMATA. HEMIONITIS (old Greek name used by Dioscorides, from hemionos, a mule ; supposed to be barren). OBD. Filices. A genus comprising eight species of stove ferns, fonad in both hemispheres. Sori continues along the veins, and copiously reticulated. The species are admir- ably suited for growing in Wardian cases. For culture, see Ferns. H. cor data (heart-shaped), can. erect, sti., of the barren fronds, 2in. to 4in. long ; of the fertile ones, about 1ft. long, densely fibril- lose at base, fronds 6in. to 9in. long, Iin. to 2£in. broad, ovate or oblong-lanceolate, apex acuminate, edge sub-entire, base nar- rowed, sori confined to the veins. India, &c. H. palmata (palmate)., can. erect, sti., of barren fronds, 4in. ; of the fertile one, 6in. to 12in. long, hairy, fronds 2in. to 6in. each way, palmate, with five nearly equal lanceolate divisions ; both surfaces villose. West Indies, &c., 1793. See Fig. 218. (H. E. F. 53.) H. plnnata (pinnate), sti. 6in. to 9in. long" glossy, dark chestnut- brown, clothed with soft yellowish hairs, fronds 5in. to 6in. long, Sin. to 4in. broad, the apex deeply pinnatifid, below this two or three pairs of distinct pinnae, the upper ones oblong-lanceolate, the lowest larger and forked at the base, all repand. Jamaica. HEMIPHRAGMA (from hemi, half, and phragma, a partition ; referring to the division of the capsule). OBD. Scrophularineas. A monotypic genus, the species being a nearly hardy prostrate herb, often spreading to a great extent. It thrives in a well-drained loam, and, provided it is sheltered in a cold frame, during winter, succeeds without much care. H. heterophyllum (variable-leaved), fl. pink, small, usually sessile and solitary ; corolla campanulate, five-lobed. Summer. Jr. fleshy, black. I., principal ones along the branches, small, rounded, cordate, with dense clusters of short, subulate, second- ary leaves in their axils. Himalayas. HEMISTEMMA. Included under Hibbertia (which see). HEMITELIA (from hemi, half, and telia, a lid; in reference to the shape of the indusinm). OBD. Filices. A genus of about thirty species of very beautiful stove and greenhouse tree ferns. Fronds ample, pinnate or decompound. Sori globose, dorsal, upon a vein or veinlet ; receptacle elevated ; involucre a scale situated on the under side of the sorus, of variable size, shape, and texture. For culture, see Ferns. H. capensis (Cape), cau. 12ft. to 14ft. high, scaly at base, often hearing multifid pinna;, fronds ample, sub-membranaceous, bi- tripinnate; primary pinna; petiolate, ovate-oblong; pinnules sub-sessile, 2in. to 3in. long, iin. wide, oblong-acuminate, deeply pinnatifid or again pinnate ; lobes linear-oblong, acute, strong " serrated, sori frequently solitary at base of lobe or pinnu rarely three or four ; receptacle large, prominent. South Africa, Brazil, Java. Greenhouse. H. grandifolla (large-fromled).* sti. aculeated. fronds ample, pinnated ; pinna; sessile, 1ft. to lift, long, elongate-oblong, acuminated, Iin. to 2in. broad ; lobes broad-oblong, obtuse, serrated at the apex, sori on the free veins, in a continual line, intermediate between the costule and the margin. West Indies, &c., 1852. Stove. H. horrida (horrid), sti. strongly aculeated. fronds 7ft. to 10ft. long, pinnate ; pinna; sessile, 1ft. to 2ft. long, broad, oblong- lanceolate, deeply pinnatifid ; lobes Sin. long, oblong-lanceolate, acuminate, sori on the free veinlets, forming a continued line just within the margin. West Indies, &c., 1843. Stove. H. Karsteniana (Karsten's). sti. muricated and scaly at the base, fronds ample, pinnated ; pinna; sessile, 6in. to 12in. long, 2in. broad. • sori in two oblique lines, meeting towards the rachis. Venezuela. Stove. H. multiflora (many-flowered), sti. muricated, scaly, fronds ample, tripinnatitid ; pinnae oblong-lanceolate, 1ft. to lift long ; pinnules Sin. to 4in. long, ligulate, nine to ten lines broad, cut down to a narrow wing, sori small, medial. South America, 1824. Stove. H. setosa (bristly), sti. short, grey, muricated ; basal scales dark brown ; rachises grey-stramineous, naked, smooth, fronds ample, tripinnate ; pinna; oblong - lanceolate, 1ft. to lift, long, lower diminished, lowest dimorphous, with pinnated subulate seg- ments ; pinnules ligulate, Sin. to 4in. long, Jin. broad, cut down to rachis below ; segments iin. broad, bluntish, falcate, barren, broad, fertile, narrower ; both sides green, glabrous. sori cos- tular ; involucre small, depressed, glabrous. Brazil. Stove. H. Smithii (Smith's).* sti. below densely crinite, with rigid, elongated, serrulated scales ; rachis and costa below sparsely pilose, with lax, rufous, deciduous scales above, strigoso-villous. fronds bipinnate ; primary pinnae linear-elongate, acute, sub-fal- cate, serrated or crenate, very glabrous, thecostules beneath pale- aceous or pilose or glabrous, sori on the forking of the veins ; involucre hemispherical. New Zealand. Arboreous, unarmed. Greenhouse. SYN. Cyathea Smithii. THE DICTIONARY OF GARDENING, Heptapleurum— continued. stellate pubescence. a peppercorn. 1. alte slender, swollen at th Winter, fr. ternate, digit e base and a . globose, five-celled, the size of tate ; petiole 5in. to Sin. lon g, n apex, warted in the lower half; leaflets five to seven, 6in. to Sin. long, oblong-ovate to obovate- oblong, caudate-acuminate, quite entire ; base rounded or cuneate. Stem covered with hemispheric warts. Java, 1860. A slender, sparingly-branched, large stove shrub. (B. M. 6238.) H. venulosum (veined). /.greenish. I., leaflets entire, acuminate. India. A small glabrous tree or climbing shrub. Stove. HERACLEUM (Heracleon, the old Greek name of the plant ; so called in honour of Heracles, or Her- cules). Cow Parsley; Cow Parsnip. ORD. Umbelliferce. H. speclosa (si late-submuricate. fronds ample, pinnate, at the extremity ; pinna; firm, satiny, Sin. to lin. to 1 Jin. broad, elongato-ensifonn, acuminate. arranged in a sinuous continued chain or line just within the margin. Tropical America. Stove. See Fig. 219. HEMLOCK. See Coniom. HEMLOCK SPRUCE. See Tsuga cana- densis. HEMP. The name of various valuable fibres employed for manufacturing purposes. The com- mon name for Cannabis sativa. HEMP AGRIMONY. See Eupatorium canuabinum. HEN AND CHICKENS. A name given to a proliferous form of the Daisy, Bellis perenuis (which see). HENBANE. See Hyoscyamus niger. HENFREYA SCANDENS. A synonym of Asystasia scandeus (which see). HENNA PLANT. See Lawsonia alba. HEP, or HIP. The fruit of the Dog Rose, Rosa canina, and other species of Rosa. HEFATICA. See Anemone Hepatica. HEFIALUS HUMULI. See Otter Moth. ^3 HEFTAFLEURUM (from hepta, seven, and pleuron, a rib; in allusion to the ribbed fruit). ^^^ STNS. Paratropia and Sciadophyllum. ORD. Ara- u^9 liaceoe. A large genus (about sixty species have been described) of tall shrubs or trees, widely distributed from Australia to Africa. Flowers pentamerous or hexamerous, collected into large panicles of racemes or umbels. Leaves alternate, digitate, compound or decompound. For culture, see Aralia. H. polybotrynm (many-clustered), fl. green, small racemes 1ft and upwards long, covered with minute, very deciduous, FIG. 220. LEAF OF HERACLEUM SETOSUM. A genus comprising about seventy species of strong, coarse-growing, hardy biennial or perennial herbs, from FIG. 221. HERACLEUM SIBIRICUM. the mountains of Central and Southern Europe, and espe- cially Asia, with a single North American one. Flowers white ; the petals of the outer ones of each umbel larger. Leaves dissected, with large segments. Although long AN ENCYCLOPEDIA OF HORTICULTURE. 137 Heracleum — continued. known to cultivation, Heraclenms are not possessed of any very special recommendations. They are best adapted for growing in shrubberies, rongh parts of pleasure grounds, or on the margins of water, being too coarse for the flower garden. They succeed in almost any kind of soil. Increased readily by seeds, or by divisions. The species are much confused. H. gigantenm (gigantic). A synonym of H. villosum. H. setosum (bristly). I. ternate ; leaflets petiolate, distantly five- lobed ; lobes dentate. Stem, petioles, and leaves hispid. South Europe See Fig. 220. FIG. 222. UMBEL OF HERACLEUM SIBIRICUM. H. sibirlcum (Siberian), fl. yellowish, not radiating; umbels large. Summer. I. pinnate, rough from hairs ; leaflets ovate or oblong, h. 5ft. to 6ft. Europe, Asia, 1789. See Figs. 221 and 222. H. villosum (villose). fl. white ; umbels many-rayed. I. pinnatifld, deeply toothed. Stem 10ft. to 12ft. high. Caucasus, 1820. This speci ;s has, of late years, been extensively cultivated, on account of its large size and commanding appearance. SYN. H. giganteum. HERBACEOUS. Thin, green, and cellular, as the tissue of membranous leaves. Also, producing an annual stem from a perennial root. HERBACEOUS PLANTS. A term generally ap- plied to any border perennials which are not shrubby in habit. HERBARIUM. A collection of dried plants, sys- tematically arranged. HERBERTIA (named after Dr. Wm. Herbert, 1778- 1847, once Dean of Manchester, and a distinguished botanist, famous for his knowledge of bulbous plants). OKD. Iridece. A genus (now referred by Bentham and Hooker to Alophia) of some half-dozen species of pretty half-hardy bulbous plants, allied to Tigridia ; natives of Texas, Chili, and South Brazil. The species are rarely seen in gardens, and, in all probability, those described below are the only ones yet introduced. Flowers blue or yellow, pretty, produced at the top of a short scape ; perianth short-tubed, six-parted, the outer segments tri- angular, acute, and reflexed, and the shorter inner ones rounded and erect. The species thrive in sandy loam and peat. Propagated by seeds, or by offsets. B. ceerulea (blue).* ft., peduncles shorter than the bracts ; claws of sepals white, blue-dotted; segments blue, spotted; petals blue, acute ; anthers and stigmas short. 1. grass-like, ribbed, narrowed to both ends. A. 6in. Texas. (B. M. 3862, Fig. 3.) H. Drummondlana (Drummond's). /. violet ; sepals spotted with white on claws ; petals small, recurved. June to August. I. broad, plicate, 6in. long. Texas, 1839. H. pulchella (neat), fl. blue, purple ; perianth segments bearded at base. July. 1. linear-ensiform, acute at both ends, plicate. A. 9m. Chili and South Brazil, 1827. (B. M. 3862, Figs. 1 and 2.) HERB OF GRACE. See Ruta graveolens. HERB-PARIS. See Paris quadrifolia. HERB-PATIENCE. See Patience. VOL n. HERB- ROBERT. See Geranium Roberti- In many gardens, the cultivation of Herbs does not receive the attention their usefulness deserves. Some sorts are rarely required, beyond a small portion of their leaves for flavouring; still, in many cases, the flavour cannot be obtained from any other material. Those which are herbaceous perennials — Horehound and Mint, for instance — should be cut on a dry day, in summer, when the flowers are just fully opened, and dried slowly in a cool shed for winter use. The annuals and evergreen perennials are best if procurable in a green state; but several of them answer their purpose when dried, and some should, consequently, be kept in reserve. Herbs should always be dried slowly, and not placed in the sun nor in fire heat. The flavour may be preserved much better by rubbing off the leaves when they are quite dry, and corking them close in wide-mouthed bottles. A piece of ground specially devoted to Herbs, is the best arrangement in any garden ; at least, for the cultivation of those of which only a few plants need be kept. Plenty of room should be allowed for getting amongst them to gather any particular sort, and to keep the soil hoed. Part of the space might be devoted to the annual sorts, in preference to placing them amongst other crops in different parts of the garden. Parsley requires special treatment and attention, as it is always of great im- portance for garnishing. The following list comprises most of the useful Herbs in cultivation for flavouring purposes, &c. : Angelica, Balm, Basil (Bush and Sweet), Borage, Burnet, Carraway, Chamomile, Chervil, Chives, Coriander, Dill, Fennel, Horehound, Hyssop, Lavender, Marigold, Marjoram (Sweet), Mint, Parsley, Pennyroyal, Purslane, Eosemary, Eue, Sage, Savory (Summer and Winter), Southernwood, Tansy, Tarragon, Thyme, and Wormwood. HERCULES' CLUB. See Zanthoxylum clava- Herculis. HERITIERA (named after Charles Louis L'Heritier, 1746-1800, a celebrated French botanist). Looking-glass Tree. SYN. Balanopteris. OKD. Sterculiacece. A genus comprising about three species of stove evergreen trees, found on the shores of tropical Asia and Australia. Flowers unisexual, small, disposed in axillary panicles. Leaves undivided, coriaceous, penninerved, silvery-white underneath (whence the common name). Heritieras thrive in sandy loam. Large ripened cuttings will root freely in sand, under a glass, in moist heat. fl. littoralis (shore). /. reddish. I. large, coriaceous, oval- oblong, rounded at the base, silvery beneath. Tropical coasts of Old World, 1780. H. macrophylla (large-leaved).* This resembles H. littoralis, but has larger leaves and sub-erect fruit. India, &c. HERMANNIA (named after Paul Hermann, 1646-95, once Professor of Botany at Leyden). OED. Sterculiacece. A large genus of ornamental greenhouse evergreen shrubs, generally clothed with starry tomentum. Flowers usually yellow, drooping ; peduncles axillary, and few - flowered. Leaves dentate or incised. About eighty species have been described, but very few are in cultivation. Three are natives of Mexico or Texas, four of tropical Africa or Arabia; all the rest are extra-tropical South African. For culture, see Mahernia. H. althseifolia (Mallow-leaved). fl. dark yellow or sulphur- coloured ; peduncles solitary or twin, two or three-flowered, longer than the leaves. March to July. I. tomentose, obovate, plaited, crenate. h. 3ft. Cape of Good Hope, 1728. (B. M. 307.) H. flammea (flame).* /. orange-coloured or red ; peduncles one or two-flowered ; racemes terminal. Summer. I. smooth, wedge- . shaped, lanceolate, truncated, and toothed at the apex. A. 1ft to 3ft. Cape of Good Hope, 1794. (B. M. 1349.) HERMANNIE2E. A tribe of Sterculiacece. HERMAPHRODITE. Containing both male and female organs. T 138 THE DICTIONARY OF GARDENING, HER.MINIERA (from hermine, a bedpost ; in allu- sion to the shape of the stems). STN. (Edemone. OBD. Leguminosoe. A monotypic genus, the species being a tall stove shrub. It thrives best if the pot be partially submerged in a warm-water tank. Propagated by seeds. H. Elaphroxylon (Elaphroxylon). fl. large; corolla yellow, papilionaceous ; calyx two-lipped ; stamens in two bundles of nve each, with uniform anthers. I. impari-pinnate ; leaflets exstipel- late. Tropical Africa. This plant grows in the beds of shallow stagnant rivers of the Upper Nile cou FIG. 273. LEAF OF ILEX AQUIFOLIUM BESSONI. I. A. Bessoni (Besson's). I. obovate-lanceolate, quite spineless, less rigid in texture and lighter green in colour than most other varieties. See Fig. 273. I. A. costata (ribbed). Grecian Holly. I. oblong-acute, 2Mn. long, IJin. broad, furnished with slightly divaricate somewhat distant spines. Distinct and free-growing. FIG. 277. LEAF OF ILEX AQUIFOLIUM HENDERSONI. X. A. hastata(halbert-shaped).* I. from fin. to IJin. long, about *in. broad ; spines large, very prominent, consisting usually of one or two pairs on each side at the base, but occasionally more, the 176 THE DICTIONARY OF GARDENING, Ilex— continued. upper half of the leaf forming a large, entire, oblong, bluntish lobe. A remarkable form, sometimes known as latispina minor, 1. nana, and I. pygmcea. (G. C. n. s., ii. 687.) I. A. Henderson! (Henderson's). 1. about 2|in. long by l|in. broad, oblong-elliptic, opaque, dark green with sunken veins, margin generally entire. Bark purplish. See Fig. 277. I. A. heterophylla (variable-leaved). I. ovate or elliptic-ovate, about 2Mn. long, lin. to l£in. wide, twisted near the point, entire or distinctly spinose. A strong-growing form. (G. C. n. 8., ii. I. A. Hodginsil (Hodgins1). I. very broadly ovate, Sin. to 4in. long, 2iin. broad, with distant and rather unequally-disposed but strong spines. A handsome form. I. A. maderensis (Madeira). I. ovate or ovate-oblong, with a short acuminate point, 3in. long, about l|in. wide ; margin with tolerably regular spines lying in the plane of the leaf. Less hardy than many others. I. A. monstrosa (monstrous). I. oblong, much acuminated, with numerous strongly-developed marginal spines, which are mostly directed upwards. (G. C. n. s., ii. 751.) I. A. myrtifolia (Myrtle-leaved).* I. ovate-lanceolate, lin. to IJin. long, iin. to |in. broad, usually moderately spiny at the margin, but sometimes quite entire. Known also as angustifolia. (G. C. n. s., ii. 687.) I. A. nobllls (noble). 1. roundish-ovate, 2jin. to 3Jin. long, with somewhat distant, bold, marginal spines. A vigorous-growing form. (G. C. n. s., ii. 432.) FIG. 278. LEAF OF ILEX AQUIFOLIUM OVATA. I. A. ovata (ovate-leaved). I. ovate, 2iin. long, with regular angular, scarcely spiny teeth. A slow-growing but distinct form. See Fig. 278. (G. C. n. s., ii. 751.) I. A. platyphylla (broad-leaved).» 1. broadly-ovate, 3iin. long, 2Jin. broad; spines variable in disposition, sometimes evenly disposed around the edge. FIG. 279. LEAF OF ILEX AQUIFOLIUM PYRAMIDALIS. I. A. pyramidalis (pyramidal). I. ovate, acuminate, dark green, with six or eight spines on the same plane as the leaf. A distinct variety, of more erect, pyramidal habit than most others. See Fig. 279. I. A. recnrva (recurved). 1. ovate-acuminate, about IJin. long, Jin. broad ; margin spiny throughout, usually terminating in an elongated spine. A dwarfish form, sometimes known as tortuosa. (G. C. n. s., ii. 687.) FIG. 280. LEAF OF ILEX AQUIFOLIUM TOKTUOSA. Hex — continued. I. A. serratifolia (saw-edge-leayed). I. lanceolate, about liin. long and £in. broad, stiff ; midrib convexly curved ; spines numerous, regular, stoutish. Resembling myrtifolia. (G. C. n. s., ii. 687.) I. A. tortnosa (twisted). I. nearly 2in. long, about lin. broad, the blade being once spirally twisted, the edge being, in addition, more or less revolute or marginate, rarely spiny. A vigorous grower, of dense habit. Commonly known as the Screw Hollv. See Fig. 280. I. A. Whittingtonensis (Whittington's).* /. lanceolate, or elliptic-ovate, about 2Ain. long, gin. wide, sometimes slightly recurved ; spines numerous, stiff. An elegant and distinct form. (G. C. n. s., ii. 687.) II. Silver and Gold-leaved Varieties. I. A. albo-picta (white-blotched). A synonym of I. A. argentea inedio-picta. I. A. argentea elegantissima (very elegant silver-striped). I. elliptic or elliptic-ovate, about 2Jin. long, with unequal spines, which are generally few and distant; central part dark green, with grey blotches ; margin creamy-white. itissima. Known also as I. A. argentea marginata (silver-margined).* I. broadly-ovate, 2in. to 2iin. long, usually spiny, dark green, with the disk slightly mottled, and with an irregular narrowish silvery margin. There are several garden names for this old variety, including albo mar- ginata, aryentea lato maryinata, and varieyata argentea. FIG. 281. LEAF OF ILEX AQUIFOLIUM ARGENTEA MEDIO-PICTA. I. A. argentea medio-picta (white blotched). I. ovate or cuneately-ovate, IJin. to Zin. long, about lin. broad, with strong and much divaricated spines. Colour dark green at edge, with large central blotch of creamy-white. Bark green. SY.NS. I. A. albo-picta, I. Silver Milkmaid. See Fig. 281. I. A. argentea stricta (upright silvery). I. oblong-elliptic, 2in. to 2iin. long, l^in. broad ; spines somewhat wavy ; disk con- spicuously mottled with flakes of green and greyish-green ; edge broadly and unequally margined with creamy -white. L A. aurea angustifolia (narrow-leaved golden).* I. elliptic- oblong, acuminate, liin. to 2iin. long, nearly lin. broad, with a spiny and rather wavy edge ; centre pale green ; margin deep golden. (G. C. n. s., v. us, arching, deep green. Transvaal, 1862. (B. M. 4895, under name of Clivia Gardenii.) I. Garden! (Garden's). long with an umbel of ten t 2in. to Sin. long, curved downwards ; scape as long as the leaves, of ten to fourteen flowers. .Winter. L narrow, 1ft to 2ft long, distichous, arching, deep green. Natal and I. miniatnm (brick-coloured).* JL fine deep orange, lower part deep buff, anthers and style bright yellow ; perianth about 2in. long, somewhat vase-shaped ; umbel large, ten to twenty -flowered. Spring and summer. L ligulate, acute, distichous, 1ft. to 2ft long, broadly sheathed at the base, deep green. A. 1ft. to 2ft. Natal, 1854. See Fig. 284. (B. M. 4783.) /. m. splendent is a fine form, with much brighter and deeper coloured flowers than the type. There are several hybrids, which are very attractive. Without hairs. IMBRICATE. Overlapping each other. IMHOFIA. Included under Hessea (which see). IMMARGINATE. Having no rim or edge. FIG. 283. IMANTOPHYLLUM CYRTANTHiFLORUM, showing Habit and detached Flower. mixed, with good results, as the plants seldom need re- potting when once established. They may be grown to flower in pots ranging from 5in. to lOin. in diameter, according to the strength of the different plants. Syringing and any amount of water may be applied in summer, when new growth is being made ; and a tem- perature of SOdeg. to 60deg., with air in spring and summer, will be sufficient. In winter, less water should be given, and a season of rest allowed, by keeping the plants quite cool. Good drainage must be insured when potting; and an annual top-dressing of rich soil, applied to old plants, in spring, will be preferable to dis- turbing their roots. Imantophyllnms keep in flower a long time in a cool greenhouse. Z. Alton! (Alton's). A synonym of Clivia nobUii. L oyrtanthlfloram (Cyrtanthus-flowered). /. clear rich salmon or light flame-coloured, large, with a light centre ; perianth cup- shaped, pendulous ; corymbs broad. Winter and spring. L dark green. A supposed hybrid between A. miniatum and Clivia nobilit. See Fig. 283. (F. d. S. 1877.) IMMORTAL FLOWER, or IMMORTELLE. A name applied to various species of Antennaria, Gna- phalium, Helichrysum, Xeranthemum, &c. FIG. 285. IMPARI-PINNATE LEAP. IMFARI-PINNATE. A term applied to a pinnate leaf having a terminal or odd leaflet. An Impari-pinnate leaf is shown at Fig. 285. IMFATIENS (from impatiens, impatient; referring to the elasticity of the valves of the seed-pod, which AN ENCYCLOPEDIA OF HORTICULTURE. 179 Impatiens — continued. discharge the seeds when ripe). Balsam. STN. Balsa- mina. OED. Geraniacece. A genus comprising about 135 species of stove, greenhouse, or hardy, annual or biennial herbs, sometimes suffrutescent, natives, for the most part, of the mountains of tropical Asia and Africa, rare in Europe, North America, North Asia, and South Africa. Flowers purple, yellow, pink, or white, often showy; pe- duncles axillary; petals four, cruciate; two outer ones alternating with the sepals, upper one arched and emar- ginate, lower one drawn out into a spur at the base; branches many-flowered. Leaves alternate, very rarely opposite. Comparatively few of the species are now in cultivation. The hardy annual kinds may be readily raised from seed, in spring, and they succeed in any ordinary light soil. The stove and greenhouse species may be pro- Impatiens — continued. in a moist stove until beginning to flower, when a cooler and drier position will be more suitable. Towards November, the leaves will drop, and the stems become swollen, thus indicating their ripening off. The plants should then be removed, and suspended near the glass in a house where there is a temperature of about 55deg., and a rather dry atmosphere maintained. Here they should be allowed to remain quite dormant, until starting time in April, the following year. I. amphorata (pitcher-like).* fl. pale purple, suffused and speckled with rose-red, liin. long; sepals greenish, broadly orbicular-cordate, acute ; standard orbicular, notched at top, spurred behind; lip cylindri-saccate, tip rounded with a short red incurved spur §in. long ; lateral lobe rounded, terminal, pendulous, obtuse ; racemes 2m. to 5in. long, many-flowered August and September. L bright green, often with pink edges FlG. 284. IMANTOPHYLLUM pagated from cuttings ; or from seeds, when these are to be obtained. Cuttings generally root freely in a close frame. I. Sultani is one of the most beautiful and easily grown plants in cultivation. It succeeds well in a green- house throughout the summer, but requires an inter- mediate or warm structure in winter. If cuttings are taken from strong, healthy shoots, they root quickly in a propagating frame, at almost any season. They are best inserted singly in small pots, and afterwards kept somewhat restricted at the root, by only allowing very moderate shifts. Useful decorative plants may be grown in Sin. or 6in. pots, and they usually succeed better in these than in larger sizes. A rich, open soil should be used. This species is comparatively new, and has been recommended for summer bedding outside ; but it has hitherto been tried without much success. I. flaccida alba is very useful ; it succeeds under the same treatment as I. Sultani. I. Jerdonice is a dwarf species, and requires special treatment. It should be placed in a basket, about April, in a compost of peat and loam, and be suspended and midrib, Sin. to 6in. long, petioled, elliptic-ovate or lanceolate, acuminate, finely crenate-serrate. Stem succulent, branched up- wards, h. 3ft. to 6ft. Western Himalayas. A handsome hardy annual. (B. M. 6550.) I. BfliMTinlTin. (Balsam).* Common Balsam, fl. red; pedi- cels aggregate. Summer. I. lanceolate, serrated; lower ones opposite, h. 1ft. to 2ft. Tropical Asia, 1596. A well-known annual. SYN. Balsamina hortensis. See Fig. 286. For general cultivation, see Balsam. I. B. coccinea (scarlet), fl. red ; spur incurved, as long as the flower. June to September. I. alternate, oblong-oval, serrated ; leafstalks with many glands. A. 2ft. East Indies, 1808. Stove annual. (B. M. 1256.) I. bicolor (two-coloured). /., lateral sepals green, small ; vexil- lum white, green at back, very convex ; labeUum purple, ample, with a long, curved, obtuse tail ; mouth pure white ; pedicels slender, glabrous, about 2in. long, generally aggregate. December. I. alternate, glabrous, Sin. to Sin. or more long, elliptic-ovate, acuminate, attenuated towards the base, coarsely serrated. Stem purplish-green, woody at base, herbaceous above. Fer- nando Po, 1862. Stove perennial. (B. M. 5366.) L Candida (white), fl. white, slightly speckled with crimson, large, showy. Autumn. 1. narrow-lanceolate, acuminate, with crimson serration, in whorls of three, h. 6ft. Himalayas, 1839. Hardy annual. (B. E. 1841, 20.) 180 THE DICTIONARY OF GARDENING, Impatiens — continued. I. chinensis (Chinese). fl. red ; peduncles axillary, solitary or twin ; spur long, filiform. July and August. I. opposite, sessile, lanceolate, setaceously serrated, h. 2ft. India, 1840. Greenhouse annual. SYN. /. setacea. (B. M. 4631, under name of I. fascicu- lata.) I. oorulgera (horn-bearing). A synonym of /. glandulifera. I. flaccida (flaccid).* /. rich purple, flat, about 2in. long. Summer. I. dark shining green, about 4in. long. Mountains of Malabar, Ceylon, &c., 1861. h. 6in. to 18in. Greenhouse annual (B. M. 5276.) A pale purple-flowered form of this is figured in B. M. 5625, under name of /. lati folia. I. f. alba (white) differs from the typical species only in having pure white flowers. Greenhouse annual. This form is frequently met with in gardens under the names of 1. Sultani alba and 1. platypetala alba. I. fulva (tawny), fl. orange-colour, thickly spotted with reddish- brown, loosely panicled at the ends of the branches, hanging gracefully on their slender nodding stalks, the open mouth of the horn-shaped sepal upward; sac longer than broad, acutely conical, tapering into a strongly-inflexed spur. June to Sep- tember. I. ovate or oval, coarsely toothed, petioled. h. 2ft. to 4ft. North America, but naturalised within the last half century in Britain, and spreading rapidly. Hardy annual. (Sy . En. B. 314.) FIG. 286. FLOWERING SHOOT OF IMPATIENS BALSAMINA FLORE-PLENO. I. glandulifera (gland-bearing), fl. rose, axillary, fascicled and shortly pedicelled ; spur short, minute. August. I. whorled, lanceolate, glandularly serrate ; stipules glandular. Ceylon, 1839. Greenhouse annual. (B. M. 4623, under name of /. comigera.) I. Hookerlana (Hooker's).* fl. white, streaked with crimson, large; petals broad. Winter. I. large, pale green, h. 2ift. Ceylon, 1852. Stove perennial. (B. M. 4704.) I. Jerdonise (Mrs. Jerdon's).* fl. large, axillary, six to eight in a cluster ; sepals green, side ones bright yellow ; pouch bright red. Summer. I. oval, disposed on the upper part of the gouty stems. h. 9in. East Indies, 1852. A rare but distinct and ornamental stove annual. (B. M. 4739.) I. maeropbylla (large Jeaved). fl. yellow, red; peduncles one-flowered, aggregated ; spur short. July and August. I. large, alternate, ovate-acuminate, mucronate, serrate, h. 3ft. Mountains of Ceylon, 1838. Stove perennial. (B. M. 4662.) I. noU-me-tangere. Touch-me-not, fl. yellow, spotted internally with red, large ; peduncles three or four-flowered. July. I. ovate, coarsely toothed, h. 1ft. to lift. Europe (Britain), Siberia, and West Asia. Hardy annual. (Sy. En. B. 313.) I. pallida (pale). /. pale yellow, sparingly dotted with brownish- red ; sac dilated, and very obtuse, broader than long, tipped with a short incurved spur. July to September. I. ovate or oval, coarsely toothed, petioled. North America. Hardy annual. I. platypetala (broad-petaled). /. rose ; petals transversely obcor- date; peduncles one-flowered, shorter than the leaves; spur Impatiens — continued. filiform, falcate. Summer. 1. whorled, oblong - lanceolate, argutely serrated, h. lift. Java, 1844. Stove annual. (B. R. xxxii. 68.) I. p. alba (white). A garden name for /. flaccida alba. I. pulcherrima (fairest), fl. red; peduncles two or three, ; spur fili glaucous Greenhouse annual. (B. M. 4615.) , axillary, one-flowered ; spur filiform. July. I. alternate, ovate, setaceously serrated, glaucous beneath, h. 6ft. Bombay, 1848. I. repens (creeping). A. bright yellow, large. Summer. I. small, very dark green, h. lift. Ceylon, 1848. A compact-grow- ing stove biennial, making an excellent basket plant. (B. M. 4404.) FIG. 287. IMPATIENS ROYLEI, showing Top of Flowering Branch, detached Flower, and Young Seed Vessel. I. Roylei (Boyle's).* fl. purple, many-umbellecl or short-racemed ; standard two-lobed ; wings broad ; lip succate, very obtuse ; spur short ; peduncles sub-terminal. August. I. usually opposite and whorled, lanceolate or ovate-lanceolate, sharply serrate, h. 10ft. India, 1839. Hardy annual. See Fig. 287. (B. M. 4020. and B. B. xxvi. 22, under name of /. glandulifera.) I. R. macrocbila (large-lipped), fl. rose, terminal, umbellate. July and August. I., upper ones alternate, ovate-lanceolate, serrate ; petioles glandular, h. 8ft. North India, 1838. Plant erect. Hardy annual (B. B. 1840, 8.) I. R. moscbata (musky). I. alternate and whorled, coarsely serrate, less glandular. I. scabrida (scabrid). ft. yellow, with minute purple dots ; peduncles two to six-flowered. July. I. lanceolate, cuspidately serrated, acuminated, pubescent. Stem purplish, slightly angular. h. 2ft. to 3ft. Himalaya, 1827. Hardy annual. SYN. /. tricornis. (B. M. 4051 ; B. B. 1840, 9.) I. setacea (bristly). A synonym of I. chinensis. I. Sultani (Sultan of Zanzibar's).* fl. scarlet ; petals quite flat ; dorsal (or standard) obovate-orbicular, retuse, rather smaller than the others ; lateral petals cleft to the base into obovate-cuneate equal flat lobes ; lip drawn out into a long, slender, curved spur. I. ovate-lanceolate, acuminate. Zanzibar. A glabrous, erect- branched, rather succulent, stove perennial herb, and an almost continuous flowerer. (B. M. 6643.) I. S. alba (white). A garden name for /. flaccida alba. I. tricornis (three-horned). A synonym of /. scabrida. I. Walker! (Walker's).* fl. scarlet (except two green outer sepals), IJin. to liin. long ; anterior sepal somewhat pitcher-shaped, elongated, contracted below the mouth, attenuated at the other extremity into a conical, subulate, incurved spur ; peduncles erect ; pedicels long, slender. Winter. I. deep green, penni- nerved, Sin. to 4in. long, petioled, scattered, ovate or ovate- lanceolate, acuminate, tapering at base ; margins serrated, and tipped with soft bristles. Stem deep purple, erect, h. 1ft. to lift. Ceylon. Stove perennial. (B. M. 5237.) IMPLEXOUS. Entangled; interlaced. IMPREGNATION. The fertilisation of the ovule by the pollen-tubes. See also Hybridising. INARCHING. See Grafting. INARTICULATED. Without joints. INCARVILLEA (named after P. Incarville, a Chinese Jesuit, and a botanical correspondent of Bernard de Jussieu, in the year 1743). ORD. BignoniacecB. A AN ENCYCLOPEDIA OF HORTICULTURE. 181 Incarvillea— continued. genus, as now understood, containing three or four species of erect, greenhouse or hardy glabrous perennials, with racemose, bilabiate, tubular flowers. A mixture of loam, peat, and sand, or any light rich soil, will suit them. Propagated by divisions of the roots, or by seeds. L compacta (compact), fl. bright rose-pink, disposed in clusters ; corolla about 2iin. in length, funnel-shaped. Summer. I. unequally pinnate, with" short, ovate-acute segments, fleshy, tufted or ultimately scattered. North-west China, 1881. Hardy. (R. G. 1068.) L Koopmannii (Koopmann's). A synonym of 1. Oljce. Fio. 288. LNCARVILLEA OLG&, showing Flowering Shoot and detached Single Flower. I. Olgaa (Olga's).* fl. bright rose, produced in the upper axils, on very short stalks ; corolla campanulate-infundibuliform, with short, rounded, spreading lobes. Summer. I, opposite, pinnate ; segments narrow-oblong, pinnatifid. h. 3ft. to 4ift. Turkestan, 1880. A very handsome hardy perennial. SYN. 1. Koopmannii. See Fig. 288. (B. M. 6593 ; R. G. 1001.) X. sinensis (Chinese), fl. nearly sessile, in loose terminal racemes ; corolla scarlet, large. I. alternate, bi- or tripinnate ; segments narrow, h. 1ft. to 2ft. China. Greenhouse. INCISED. Regularly divided by deep incisions. INCLINING. Bending forwards. INCLUDED. Inclosed in anything. INCOMPLETE. One of the divisions into which — for the requirements of systematic botany — the great class of Dicotyledons is divided. The corolla, and often calyx, is quite absent, and "suppression" is carried to its greatest extent. Some of the more important of the orders belonging to the division Incomplete are : Coniferai, Cupuliferce, Salicinece, and Urticacece. INCURVED. Curved inwards. INDEFINITE. In great number; stamens are said to be indefinite when they are too numerous to count. INDEHISCENT. Not opening in a definite manner when ripe. INDIAN BLUE. See Nympliaea stellata cyanea. INDIAN CORN. See Zea. INDIAN CRESS. See Tropaeohim majns. INDIAN FIG. See Opuntia. INDIAN GARLAND FLOWER. See Hedy- INDIAN HAWTHORN. See Raphiolepis. INDIAN MULBERRY. See Morinda. INDIAN FINK. See Dianthus cMnensis. INDIAN SHOT. See Canna. INDIARUBBER FLANT. See Ficus elastica. INDIGOFERA (from indigo, a blue dye, and fero, to bear ; on account of some of the species yielding the well- known dye). Indigo. ORD. Leguminosas. A genus com- prising 220 species of stove, greenhouse, or half-hardy herbs, shrubs, or sub-shrubs, the greater number of which belong to the African continent, but abound also in America and Asia, and a few extend to Australia. Flowers usually pink or purple, in axillary racemes or spikes; keel of corolla furnished with a subulate spur on both sides, at length usually bending back elastic- ally. Leaves impari-pinnate or pinnate, rarely digitate or simple. Very few species of this large genus are in cultivation. They are propagated by seeds; or by firm cuttings of young shoots, inserted in sandy or peaty soil, under a hand glass, in a slight heat, in summer. 7. decora is a very desirable greenhouse shrub of moderate growth, which flowers profusely in summer, and is one of the species most generally cultivated. The plants should be cut in, about February or March, and started in a little warmth, when any repotting should also be attended to. They may be hardened, to grow in a cold frame after- wards, and watered freely throughout the growing and flowering period. The wood should be thoroughly ripened by exposure, in autumn, and a season of rest allowed in winter. I. Gerardiana forms a compact bush in the open shrubbery, and is also well adapted for covering walls, where it makes better growths, and flowers more freely. It is one of the hardiest species. Indigoferas succeed in a somewhat rough compost of turfy loam and leaf soil. To insure an abundance of flowers, the wood must be well ripened. I. angnlata (angular). A synonym of /. austral/a. I. Anil. Anil. fl. pinkish ; racemes axillary, shorter than the leaves. Summer. I. pinnate, with three to seven pairs of oval or oblong leaflets, hardly pubescent beneath. Stems shrubby, erect, h. 2ft. to «t. West Indies and tropical America, previous to 1731. Stove. (B. M. 6506.) I. atro-purpurea (dark purple). /. dark purple, crimson ; racemes axillary, slender. August. I. pinnate, witn five to seven or ten pairs of oval, retuse, mucronulate leaflets, rather undulated OH margins, h. 5ft. Nepaul, 1816. Half -hardy shrub. (B. M. 3065 ; B. R. 1744.) I. australis (Southern).* fl. rose-coloured ; racemes rather shorter than the leaves. March to June. I. pinnate, having five to seven pairs of elliptic-obtuse, glabrous leaflets. Stem shrubby, h. 3ft. to 4ft. Australia, 1790. A handsome greenhouse species, with a neat habit; it is an excellent pot plant SYNS. /. angulata (B. R. 991), /. sylvatica (B. M. 3000). (B. R, 386 ; L. B. C. 149.) I. decora (comely), fl. reddish, disposed in dense racemes. Spring and summer. /. pinnate ; leaflets two to six pairs, ovate, obtuse, mucronate, and with a few peltate hairs beneath. h. 3ft. China, 1844. Greenhouse evergreen shrub. (B. M. 5063 ; B. R. 1846, 22.) X. d. alba (white).* An elegant variety, with long racemes of white flowers ; it thrives well, and proves almost hardy, when planted against a wall. X. Dosua (Dosi-swa). fl. bright red ; racemes axillary, shorter than the leaves. Summer. I. pinnate, having ten to fifteen pairs of oval, retuse, mucronulate leaflets, which, as well as the branches, are clothed with rufescent hairs on both surfaces. h. l^ft. India. Greenhouse. I. floribunda (profuse-flowering). A garden name of /. Gerard- iana. I. Gerardiana (Gerard's).* fl. pale red, in distinctly-stalked, twelve to twenty-flowered racemes. July. I. shortly stalked, pale grey-green, glaucous and hoary below. India. A low, much- branched shrub, perhaps the hardiest species. SYN. /. flori- bunda, of gardens. (B. R. 1842, 57, under name of /. Dosua.) I. sylvatica (sylvan). A synonym of /. aiistralig. L tinctoria (dyer's).* fl. with a pale vexillum, and red keel and wings; racemes axillary, shorter than the leaves. July. /. pinnate, with four to seven pairs of obovate leaflets, which are pubescent beneath. Stem suffruticose, erect, h. 4ft. to 6ft. East Indies, 1731. Stove. This is the most universally cultivated of all the species. I. violacea (violet), fl. purple, red ; racemes axillary, longer than the leaves. Summer. 1. pinnate, with five pairs of obovate- elliptic, flat, slightly pubescent leaflets, h. 5ft. East Indies, 1819. Half-hardy. (B. M. 3348.) INDUMENTUM. The hairy covering of plants, of whatever kind. 182 THE DICTIONARY OF GARDENING, INDUFIiICATE. Having the margins bent abruptly inwards, and the external face of these edges applied to each other without any twisting. INDUSIUM. The membranous cover which overlies or underlies the sporangia of ferns. The name is also applied to the annnlns of some fungals. INERMIS. Unarmed; destitute of any kind of spines or prickles. INFERIOR. Growing below some other organ. The ovary, or fruit, is said to be Inferior when it is crowned by the calyx, petals, and stamens. INFLORESCENCE. The disposition of the flowers. INFRACTOUS. Curved inwards. INFUNDIBULIFORM. Funnel-shaped. INGA (the South American name of one of the species). OED. Leguminosce. A genus comprising 140 species of stove unarmed shrubs or trees, natives of the warmer parts of South America, principally of Guiana and Brazil. Flowers usually white or yellowish, produced in spikes or nearly globular heads, from the axils of the leaves. Leaves abruptly pinnate, composed of from two to five or six pairs of rather large leaflets. The species, with the exception, perhaps, of I. pulcherrima, are very rarely seen in cultivation. They thrive in a compost of peat and loam, and plenty of moisture will be needed during the summer months, but scarcely any in winter. In- creased by cuttings, made of the young shoots, in spring and summer, and inserted in sandy peat, under a bell glass, in heat. I. macrophylla (large-leaved), JL yellow. I. bipinnate, of two pairs ; leaflets ovate, acute, smooth, shining above, a gland between each pair; petiole winged, h. 20ft. Cumana, 1815. (B. M. 5075.) Z. pulchenima (fairest), fl. scarlet, disposed in solitary, pedun- culate, pendulous heads. Summer. I. with four or five pairs of pinnae ; each pinna bearing from twenty to twenty-six pairs of small, linear, obtuse, closely imbricated, adpressedly-ciliated leaflets. Branches slender, spreading. A. 10ft Mexico, 1846. (P. M. B. v. 147.) INKBERRY. An American name for Hex glabra< INOCARPUS (from is, inos, a fibre, and karpos, a fruit; in reference to the fibrous envelopes). OED. Leguminosce. A genus comprising three species of stove evergreen trees, natives of the Pacific islands and the Indian Archipelago. Flowers yellow, in axillary spikes ; calyx tubular; petals five. Leaves simple (one-foliolate), coriaceous, penninerved ; petioles very short. The species require a compost of loam and peat. Cuttings of the half- ripened shoots will root in sand, in heat. I. edulis (edible), fl. white ; petals five, united to form a short tube. Summer, fr. a one-seeded fibrous pod. I. alternate. A. 20ft South Sea Islands, 1793. INSECTICIDES. The prompt destruction of in- jurious insects, immediately any are detected, is an important and essential operation to be performed in connection with all cultivated trees and plants. Insects of the most minute description increase with such rapidity, if left alone, that irreparable damage is soon caused to any subject they infest. An Insecticide is any composition prepared from ingredients destructive to insect life. Some Insecticides, too, are useful in checking or destroying low forms of parasitic plant life, such as Mildew, &c. To be effective and avail- able for use on plants, it must be fatal to insects without in any way injuring the host. Plants which are leafless, and in a dormant state, will bear being washed with an Insecticide nearly or quite double the strength they could withstand when in full leaf; hence the importance of thoroughly cleaning plants, and also the house, during winter, when insects increase less rapidly than at other seasons, and are more con- centrated on those parts of deciduous plants which remain. Tobacco, in one form or another, is, perhaps, the most useful substance entering into the composi- tion of Insecticides. It may be soaked in water, for Insecticides — continued. dipping plants, and the preparation made to any strength desired; used as a dry, ground powder, for dusting over the leaves or points of shoots; or burnt in houses, for the destruction of insects by the smoke. Soft Soap is a cheap and excellent Insecticide, used in many gardens to the exclusion of all other preparations. It may be readily dissolved in water at any time, and to any required strength, according as various plants may be able to withstand it. An ounce, or even less, to a gallon of water, will generally be sufficiently strong to use for sponging the leaves, or for dipping plants in. Nicotine Soap has some of the properties of tobacco; it is a good Insecticide, and may, when purchased, be readily prepared for use. Gishnrst Compound, an old and well-known composition, in frequent use, and Fir-tree Oil, are soluble and useful Insecticides for general purposes. Directions for preparing them accompany each box or bottle sold ; and it is rather important that they be followed, as far as possible, especially in the use of soft water. Petro- leum— erroneously called paraffin, a different article — is very destructive, especially to Mealy Bug; but, unfor- tunately, it is insoluble in water, and requires very careful application. A small wineglassful to three gal- lons of water, is not too much in many instances; but it must be thoroughly mixed with the water by constant agitation, preferably with a syringe. Hellebore Powder is sometimes employed as an Insecticide, more particu- larly for the destruction of the Gooseberry Caterpillar; but, being a deadly poison, it must be carefully handled, and be afterwards washed off with clean water. Flowers of Sulphur, used either dry or mixed with water, is one of the best things for destroying or preventing the spread of Mildew. There are various other Insecticides sold, but those already noticed are mostly in general use, and answer their purpose, when properly applied, so far as can be expected of preparations. Their use and effect with, and on, different plants can only be treated of individually and after experience gained from ex- periments made according to the directions usually accompanying the respective preparations. It is much preferable to avoid, as far as possible, the use of Insecticides, especially those applied in a liquid state, as it is frequently a difficult matter, even with careful precautions, to kill insects entirely, without, at the same time, causing injury to the plants infested by them. If due care and attention be paid to watering, syringing, and ventilation, as well as proper repotting, &c., insects will not give much trouble. When the use of an Insecti- cide becomes requisite, it should be promptly applied, choosing an evening or a dull day for the operation, and afterwards removing all traces by clear water. Insect Powder — of which the basis is composed of the dried and powdered leaves and flowers of Pyrethrum roseum and P. cinerarifolium — is effective when dusted on infested plants. INSECTS. No other class of the animal kingdom is of so much interest and importance to those engaged in gardening, or in farming, as are Insects, which, in in their countless forms and modes of life, force them- selves upon the notice of even the least observant. The destruction they cause to field and garden pro- duce is great, and at times excessive ; and these attacks can be met successfully only when means are used that are based on a knowledge of the habits of the injurious species. But while Insects are more conspicuous because of the injuries they inflict on our fields and gardens, we must not forget that many kinds are beneficial to plants, either by the services they render in conveying pollen from flower to flower, and thereby securing the produc- tion of healthy offspring to the plants ; or by feeding on, and thus destroying, the injurious kinds of Insects. Were it not for the aid rendered to us by the parasitic species, we must often be helpless to check the ravages AN ENCYCLOPAEDIA OF HORTICULTURE. 183 Insects — continued. of the others, which, despite this aid, are often but too wide-spread and serious. Space will not here permit of more than a very brief sketch of some of the leading points in the structure and life-history of the class and of its leading orders, with a mere indication, in the most general terms, of the more conspicuous damage done by them, and of the means of remedy generally applicable; but fuller infor- mation will be found plentifully scattered through this work under the various headings referred to below. The word " Insect " literally means any animal which has the body so divided as to seem cut into successive parts, usually resembling rings of hard substance, con- nected by soft skin. The name has been used to include all the animals with bodies resembling a row of joints, even Worms having been at one time included among Insects, along with Spiders, Mites, Crabs, Woodlice, and Centipedes. At the present time, the name is confined to a considerably smaller group of animals — the true Insects — though some authorities still include with these the other groups named above, except Worms. In this restricted sense, the class of Insects is composed of animals that possess a jointed body made up of a num- ber (twenty or twenty-one) of rings of horny substance (chitine), connected by skin, so united as to form three great divisions in the body, viz., the head, the thorax, and the abdomen; that have antennae, or feelers, on the head, and three pairs of horny jointed legs, and usually two pairs of wings, on the thorax; that breathe by tubes (tracheae) all through the body and limbs, which tubes open on the surface of the body by small holes (spiracles); and that, in course of growth, pass through a succession of changes (metamorphoses), beginning with the egg, and going on through the stages of larva and pupa (chrysalis), before assuming the per- fect condition (imago), in which alone they present all the characters enumerated above. This series of changes may be of two kinds. In one, the larva, on emerging from the egg, resembles the mature Insect in form, and differs from it only in size, and in the entire absence of wings ; while the pupa differs from the mature Insect only in the wings, though indicated, being small and rudimentary. Both larva (see Fig. 314 ) and pupa are also sexually immature. This kind of metamorphosis is said to be incomplete. Complete metamorphosis differs FIG. 289. LARVA OF SMALL CABBAGE BUTTERFLY. Insects — continued. scarcely showing even a trace of a head. Such larvaa are familiar to everyone under the name of maggots or grubs, e.g. those of Bees, Flies, &c. (see Fig. 311). The pupae of Insects that undergo a complete metamorphosis are not able to move about or to feed, but remain helpless for a longer or shorter period, while changes are going on within, which result in the development of the perfect insect (imago), showing all the distinctive characters already set forth. These quiescent pup® differ much from the larvae (see Fig. 309), as they show the FIG. 290. LARVA OF LEOPARD MOTH. from this in the larva (see Figs. 289, 290, and 291) being quite unlike the mature Insect. Very generally, it re- sembles a worm in its form. It may have a distinct head, and the rings of the body, though like one another, may differ in the three immediately behind the head each bearing a pair of horny jointed legs, while those of the hinder part of the body may bear skinny suckers (prolegs) — the number varies considerably, and they may be quite absent. Larvae of this type (see Fig. 291) are called Caterpillars, and are met with among the Butterflies, Moths, and Sawflies. Another group of In- sects, in the larval state, are footless creatures, frequently FIG. 291. LARV.B OF ROSE-LEAF SAWFLY. future limbs (antennae, legs, and wings) of the imago, though these parts are still useless, and of very small size. The Butterflies and Moths, while pupae, have the whole body enveloped in a hard crust, which binds down all the parts immovably to the body, leaving only a slight power of movement in the hinder rings. When the pupa is helpless, its safety is generally provided for by the larva forming a cell or cocoon of silk, earth, or other material, compacted with a cement from its mouth, in which the pupa lies concealed till the imago breaks out from it, and crawls to the outer air, with wings at first crumpled and useless, but soon ex- panding and becoming firm to carry it in flight through Jfche air. Whatever the degree or kind of metamorphosis undergone by it, the Insect, in its progress from the egg to maturity, grows frequently with enormous rapidity. The outer coat of the body is too rigid to allow of the corresponding extension in it; but the difficulty is met by the larva several times (four times or oftener) throw- ing off its skin. The old skin separates from the body of the larva, it splits along the back in front, and the larva wriggles its way out, frequently with a skin of a very different colour from that in which it had previously shown itself. In like manner, the skin of the pupa bursts to set free the imago. The sudden and mysterious appearance of certain kinds of Insects at one time led to the belief that they must be produced by spontaneous generation from dead and decaying substances; but the progress of accurate researches into their life-histories has proved conclu- sively that they always originate from parents, though at times, in the case of certain Insects, e.g., several of the true Gall-flies of the Oak-tree, the parents and the immediate offspring may differ considerably in appear- ance. The females produce eggs, except in a few groups, such as the Aphides, in which the young Insects may be brought forth, not sexually by eggs, but by a process of budding. In the case of a few other Insects, the eggs are hatched while still within the body of the mother, which thus gives birth to living young or larvae. The fact that Insects are always produced from parents, renders it of the utmost importance, when dealing with the injurious species, to become familiar with the habits of the females as well as of the larvae, which latter are usually the destructive agents, and are therefore the more 184 THE DICTIONARY OF GARDENING, Insects — continued. generally observed by gardeners and agriculturists. Such a knowledge frequently enables us to devise means of warding off the damage that would otherwise be un- avoidable, and of assailing the destroyers in the most effective way. The following details of structure have reference only to mature Insects: Mouth. In its essential structure, the mouth consists of certain parts, six in number, though some of them bear appendages. These parts may undergo great modi- fication, and may be adapted to very different uses, so as to be hardly recognisable when compared with the mouth of one of the more typical forms. The chief modifications will be treated of under the various groups of Insects ; it is here only necessary to describe the parts of the mouth of a Beetle, selecting this as a type because of all the parts of a fully-developed mouth being well seen in Beetles. In them, the mouth is formed by an upper lip (labrum), two pairs of jaws working horizontally like the blades of scissors (called mandibles and maxillae, or upper and lower jaws respectively), and a lower lip (labium). The mandibles are specially adapted for cutting the food to be taken into the mouth. The maxillae are not so strong, and often bear tufts of hair to serve as brushes. Each also bears a jointed body (palpus), which seems to serve as a sense-organ. The lower lip bears a pair of similar jointed bodies (labial palpi). Limbs. The middle division of the body (thorax) bears the limbs, viz., three pairs of jointed legs on the lower surface or breast, and two pairs of wings, attached to the upper surface of the two hinder of the three rings of which, closely consolidated, the thorax is made up. The legs are generally present, though, in some Insects, one or more pairs may be ill-developed, or even entirely absent. They vary in relative size, and in the number of parts of which they are made up ; but they are of less importance in giving characters for the orders than are the wings. The latter organs, in their typical condition, e.g., in Hymeno- ptera or in Lepidoptera, are two pairs of broad membranes, supported upon nervures traversed by breathing-tubes (tracheae). The upper or front pair almost always exceed the lower or hind wings in size and in complexity of neuration, but resemble them as regards texture and general appearance. In several groups, however, this typical structure is departed from, as will be more fully stated below. Not a few Insects either have the wings small and utterly inefficient (as the female Winter Moth, see Fig. 294), or altogether absent (as Fleas and many other parasitic Insects). Periods of Destructive 'Activity. As a general rule, the larvae, during their rapid growth, are far more hurtful to vegetation than are the perfect Insects ; in fact, certain of the groups of Insects are unable, in the perfect state, to feed upon plants, save by sucking up the nectar or honey contained in the flowers, e.g., the whole group of Lepidoptera. Yet these same Insects, in the larval stage, were once provided with strong jaws, well fitted to out their food, and then probably fed vora- ciously upon their food-plants. But among the groups provided with a mouth suited for chewing (e.g., Beetles and Orthoptera), or for puncturing the tissues of plants and sucking the juices (Hemiptera, particularly Aphides), the perfect Insects may be almost as destructive as the larvae ; indeed, some kinds are not injurious to man ex- cept in the mature condition. General methods of prevention and of remedy against damage from Insects, may be treated of here ; but details as to these practices must be sought under the special headings. The methods employed to pre- vent attacks must depend on the habits and modes of life of the Insects to be dreaded. Of course, the destruction of the creatures, either as larvae, pupae, or mature Insects, before they have laid their eggs, is the Insects — continued. most certain means. This may be effected either by direct efforts, such as hand-picking, or applications of poisonous solutions or gases to them; or else — and pro- bably with greater, if less apparent, success — by making use of the natural means of checking their undue in- crease. Among the most efficient of these natural means are birds and parasitic Insects, both of which destroy vast multitudes of the more hurtful kinds in all their stages. Much has been written, and earnest have been the disputes that have been waged, regarding the relation of birds to agriculture and to gardening. While some writers have represented them as frequently most de- structive to the crops and to fruit-trees, others have as strenuously upheld their great value as natural guardians of these crops and fruit-trees from the ravages of swarms of Insect foes. In these, as in so many other disputes, the truth probably lies between the extremes : but, while admitting, as we must admit, that birds are, at certain times of the year, more hurtful than beneficial to farmers and gardeners, yet the danger from them at these times may be comparatively easily guarded against ; while the benefits conferred by them, during the rest of the year, are so great as far to outweigh any damage done by them. It must be remembered, moreover, that injury is done only by those birds that feed on fruits or seeds, such as blackbirds, sparrows, and many finches ; or on roots or tubers, such as rooks ; and that even these birds almost all feed largely on Insects also. On the other hand, many species of slender-billed birds may be said to live exclusively on Insects throughout the year, or such part of it as they spend with us. Some birds, like the bullfinch, are in the habit of pulling off the young buds of the fruit-bearing bushes and trees ; but this seems to be done in the search for larvae hidden in the buds, and which, if left in them, would destroy them in any case. In like manner, the apparent injury done to trees by woodpeckers boring into the trunks, is not really such, as the holes are bored by the bird to reach and to extract the larvae of Insects hidden away in tunnels in the wood, or between the wood and the bark, and which, if left there, would have done no less injury ; while, if they had reached maturity, they would have re- produced their kind, to the further detriment of the Even more efficient than the birds, in reducing the numbers of the injurious kinds of Insects, are the parasitic species of Insects ; though, from their small size and unob- trusive habits, they are readily overlooked, and the work done by them undervalued. Among these, some devour the Insects or suck out their juices as food. As examples of these may be noted the Ground Beetles, and the larvaa of FIG. 292. LARVA OP LADYBIRD. the Ladybird Beetles (see" Fig. 292) and of the Lacewing Flies, which devour the Green Flies, or Aphides, in myriads. Other insects (e.g., some Solitary Wasps) carry off small Caterpillars, &c., to serve as food for their offspring. But far more important than even these are the parasites that deposit their eggs upon or in the body of some Insect, generally a larva, there to disclose the grubs. The latter live in the interior of their host, eating the fat, but leaving untouched the vital organs, till at last, when growth has been completed by the parasites, they either form cocoons inside its body, or else burrow out through the skin, to become pupae in some concealment, where, though helpless, they may remain safe. True parasites of this latter sort belong, with rare exceptions, to the Diptera or AN ENCYCLOPAEDIA OF HORTICULTURE. 185 Insects — continued. Two-winged Flies (Tachina and allied genera), or to certain divisions of the Hymenoptera. In this latter order, some groups, with very numerous kinds in each, are entirely, or FIG. 293. ICHNEUMON FLY. almost entirely, confined to parasitism (Ichneumons — see Fig. 293 — and Chalcididce), and many species in the other groups of the order are also parasites. In fact, it may almost be said that there are few Insects which are not preyed on by one or more (and frequently by many) of these minute parasites. It is hardly in our power to do anything directly to increase the numbers of these allies ; but it is well to be able to recognise their general appearance, and to refrain from killing them. In many cases, however, we must not trust to the efforts of birds and Insects to limit the numbers of our Insect foes. When their attacks are severe, it is necessary to remove or to destroy them more rapidly than can be done by natural agencies ; and, though the methods employed must be varied to suit the special circumstances that call for them, yet the same methods are largely ap- plicable for the destruction of many kinds of Insects. A few of the more generally useful may be mentioned here. Tobacco smoke is very fatal to many of the hurtful Insects, where these attack plants under cover, e.g., in greenhouses. It is especially efficacious against Aphides. Either strong coarse tobacco, or the paper in which it has been wrapped, is burned in the place to be freed from the foe ; the doors are all kept closed during the operation, and for some time afterwards. Infusions of tobacco, of Hellebore, or of other insecticides, are some- times prepared, and are scattered over the plants by means of a watering pot or syringe. These applica- tions are usually very fatal to larvae feeding on such parts of plants as allow of the solution being properly applied to them, and they do not injure the host. Scale, and other Insects that lie closely adherent to leaves or branches, are seldom much affected by tobacco smoke, and they are best removed by washing the parts with water, or with solutions of soft soap or of poisonous sub- stances ; and the efficacy of the applications is increased by using a brush to put them on with. Several kinds of injurious larvae are in the habit of living in groups, in or under webs. These are easily cleared away with the webs ; and the whole should be destroyed, by burning or otherwise. Larvae living in the interior of branches, or in galls, cannot be reached without remov- ing the injured structures ; and this is also usually the case with root-feeders. When a plant is withering without any apparent cause, the removal of the earth from its root will, at times, disclose the hidden larva that has been feeding there. Sometimes, also, larvae feed at night on the leaves, and during the day hide themselves in the earth. Hence, the depredators can be detected only at night, by the use of a lantern. Many Insect larvae roll up a leaf, or spin together two or three leaves, so as to form a protection for themselves against all means of destruction save hand - picking ; but, fortu- nately, such larvae are seldom fatal in their attacks ; though, frequently, the plants become very unsightly under them. Trees and shrubs are attacked in this way more often than are herbaceous plants. A severe shaking will often cause a large number of the larvse to drop from their tubes, and to hang suspended in the air by silken threads till the danger is past, when they remount by their threads. If a sheet is spread below Vol. 11. Insects — continued. the tree, they may be shaken on to it, and then readily gathered to be destroyed. The mere shaking of the plant is not enough. Many larvae (e.g., those of Gooseberry Sawflies, of Winter Moth, &c., fall to the ground when full fed, there to burrow in order to form cocoons, and to become pupae, within a very little distance of the surface of the ground. Soot, gas-lime, and other nauseous materials are often spread on the soil around the stems of trees and shrubs, to prevent the larvae from burrow- ing in the immediate vicinity of the plants, and to de- stroy them by the poisonous properties of the substances. The pupae may be greatly lessened in number by paring off and burning an inch or two of the surface soil in the autumn or winter. Opening the soil with a hoe or a rake is also useful, as it destroys some pupae at once, and ex- poses others to the chance of being eaten by birds, and to unfavourable conditions during the winter. The females of some of the more hurtful Insects are wing- less, or have wings so small as to be of little or FIG. 294. MALE, FEMALE, AND CATERPILLAR OP WINTER MOTH. use (as the Winter Moth, see Fig. 294) ; they must, therefore, crawl up the plants on which they lay their eggs; and their path may be barred by placing a ring of any sticky substance on the soil around the base of the stem, or around the stem itself. Tar, or mixtures of tar with materials to prevent its drying quickly, have been used with success to form such barriers. Other methods of treatment, suitable to particular cases, will be found referred to under the names of the various in- sects. See also Insecticides. The class Insecta has been divided into certain great groups, called " orders," by means of characters taken mostly from the structure of the mouth and of the wings, and from the kind of metamorphosis they pass through in their growth. These orders are well distinguished from one another, and there is usually not much difficulty in determining the group to which any Insect belongs. Some orders are of far greater importance to gardeners than are others; and to them the following remarks are confined. These orders are as follows; Coleoptera, or Beetles. These have the mouth formed 2B 186 THE DICTIONARY OF GARDENING, Insects — continued. for biting, with all the parts well developed ; the body is usually incased in a hard crust; the front wings are modified to form hard coverings (elytra) extending over the hinder part of the body, and serving to protect the hind FIG. 295. ROSE-CHAFER, with Hind Wings extended. wings, which remain membranous for flight (see Fig. 295). The metamorphosis is complete, i.e., the larva is very FIG. 297. COLORADO BEETLE. unlike the adult Insect (see Figs. 296 and 297), and the pupa is helpless. At times, the larvae of Beetles are hurtful (e.g., those of the Click Beetle and of the Colorado Beetle); but the mature Insects are more often to be dreaded. See also Cockchafers, Ladybirds, and Turnip Ply. Several kinds of Beetles are useful to gardeners, since they feed on hurtful Insects, either as larvse, or in the perfect state. Of these useful forms we may mention FIG. 298. COMMON GROUND BEETLE. the following: The Ground Beetles (see Fig. 298) feed mostly on Insects, though some of them are partly vege- tarians, and Harpalus ruficornis has been found eating Strawberries in large numbers. The Tiger Beetles, and the Devil's Coach Horses or Rove Beetles (see Fig. 299), feed largely upon decaying matter; but many kinds are of much assistance by destroying noxious insects. The Glow-worm (Lampyris noctiluca), in the larval state, Insects— continued. feeds on snails, mostly of the genus Helix, following them into their shells to devour them. It removes the slime encountered in this mode of life, by means of a kind of brush specially suited to its needs. The larvae FIG. 299. DEVIL'S COACH HORSE. of the Ladybirds are very useful because of the number of Green Flies eaten by them. The modes in which Beetles inflict injury on garden and field produce, are very various. Frequently, the roots are attacked, and much injured, or entirely destroyed, usually by larva, Fio. 300. GRUB OP COCKCHAFER. e.g., of the Cockchafer (see Fig. 300). The stems are injured, chiefly by those kinds (Bark Beetles) that bore between the bark and the wood, separating the bark, which soon dies. A few make galls, on roots or stems, e.g., Cabbage Weevil, or in seed vessels. Others attack the leaves, either while larvae (Lily Beetle), or as Beetles (Turnip Fly) ; while others live as larvae in the . seed vessels, eating out the contents of the seeds, and thus rendering the crops a failure while in the soil, or after they have been harvested, e.g., Bean Beetle. Orthoptera. In this order are included Insects with months fitted for biting, wings net- veined, front wings like parchment in thickness, long and narrow, serving to pro- tect the large membranous hind wings ; metamorphosis incomplete, the larvae resembling the parents except in FIG. 301. HOUSE CRICKET. size, and in having no trace of wings. This order in- cludes Locusts, Crickets (see Fig. 301), Grasshoppers (see FIG. 302, QUEEN GKASSUOVPER, AN ENCYCLOPAEDIA OF HORTICULTURE. 187 Insects — continued. Fig. 302), Cockroaches (see Fig. 303), and Earwigs; though some place the last-named Insects in a separate FIG. 303. FEMALE COCKROACH. order, called Euplexoptera, because of the very neat folding of the hind wings below the front ones. The Orthoptera are destructive during every stage after leaving the egg, and in warm countries they do exces- sive damage at times. In Britain, they cannot be re- garded as of great consequence ; though Cockroaches may gnaw the greenhouse plants, and Earwigs are rather hurtful to florists' flowers, and require to be kept in check (see Cockroaches, Crickets, and Earwig). With the Orthoptera may also be classed the genus FIG. 304. THRIPS (magnified). Thrips (see Fig. 304) — a genus of very small Insects, which live in flowers, and gnaw the surface of the petals (see Thrips). Neuroptera are at once far less numerous in species and in individuals, and practically less important than are the orders already discussed. None of the Insects in it can be said to be hurtful to plants. On the other hand, they are frequently of much service, since several of them feed on Insects, and destroy large numbers of injurious kinds. The order is characterised by the possession of four wings, all alike membranous, and supported on a complex network of nervures ; a month fitted for biting. Certain of the sub-orders undergo only an incomplete metamorphosis, while in others the metamorphosis is complete. The larvae are provided with six jointed legs. Neuroptera are mostly carnivorous, alike in the larval state and when mature. Among the better-known forms may be noted Dragon Flies, Heme- robius, and Lacewing Flies. Hymenoptera have the wings all membranous and naked, and supported on branching nervures, the hind wings being the smaller ; the wings bear no scales. The month has jaws for biting ; but in some of the sub-divisions of the order, certain parts of the mouth are modified to serve for licking up honey from flowers (in Bees, Wasps, Ac.). They all pass through a complete metamorphosis. The larvae vary much in form, often being like maggots (Bees, &c.), while the Sawflies have larvas not unlike the caterpillars of Moths. Sawflies are very injurious to plants, many of them being hurtful to garden and field produce (Turnip Sawfly, Gooseberry Sawflies, &c.). Some of the Sawflies make true galls on Willows ; and many of the Cynipidce, or Gall-flies (see Figs. 305 and 306), make galls on Oak, Maple, Roses, &c. Most of the Hymenoptera Insects — continued. are of much use in limiting the number of injurious Insects; and among these useful species the Ichneumons hold the first place. In the mature state, none of the FIG. 305. GALLS AND INSECTS OF RHODITES Ros*:, showing (1) Entire Bedeguar Gall ; (2) Bedeguar, cut open ; (3) Grub, natural size ; (4) Head of Grub, magnified ; (5) Pupa, magni- fied ; (6) Insect, magnified. Hymenoptera can be said to be really injurious to plants ; while many are of great value in conveying pollen from flower to flower. However, Humble Bees are found at times to injure the flowers, by boring through the tube Fio. 306. OAK GALL-FLY (magnified). The figure below, and to the right, represents the hinder rings of the Abdomen, and the Ovipositor, which serves to pierce the plant tissues, still more magnified. of the corolla to gain readier access to the honey con- tained therein. See also Ants, Galls, Honey, Bee, Humble Bee, Ichneumon Flies, and Sawflies. Lepidoptera have the wings usually large (see Figs. 307 and 308), membranous, and covered all over with small scales ; the mouth is of no use for biting but has the lower jaws (maxillae) prolonged, so as, when placed together, to form a tube, adapted for sucking honey from flowers. The metamorphosis is complete. The larvae (see Figs. 309 and 310) are of the form known as Caterpillars; and, apart from points of minor im- portance, vary chiefly in the number of sucker feet on 188 THE DICTIONARY OF GARDENING, Insects — continued. FIG. 307. LARGE WHITE CABBAGE BUTTERFLY. the hinder rings of the body. This order includes the Butterflies and Moths. They are not injurious in their FIG. 308. FEMALE GIPSY MOTH. lature condition; but all the larvae feed on plants, and lany of them are very hurtful in gardens. See also FIG. 309. CATERPILLAR OF LARGE CABBAGE BUTTERFLY. Hybcrnia, Tortrix, Turnip Moth, Winter Moth, and others referred to above. Insects — continued. very small stalked knobs (halteres or poisers). The mouth varies, being in some suited for sucking, in others for biting ; in many, the jaws are fitted to pierce the skin of animals, and thereafter to form suckers for draw- ing out the blood. The metamorphosis is complete. The FIG. 311. ONION FLY, LARVA, AND CHRYSALIS, magnified. (The lines alongside indicate the natural sizes.) larvae are maggots or footless grubs (see Fig. 311). They vary exceedingly in mode of life, many of them living in the interior of roots, stems, or leaves of plants ; others form galls on plants ; others feed on decaying matters ; while yet others live as parasites in the bodies of animals, especially in Insects. Others (Syrpliidce), as larvae, feed on the Aphides, and aid in reducing their numbers. The FIG. 312. CRANE FLY. larvae of the Crane Flies (see Fig. 312) are but too well known to farmers under the names of Grubs and Leather Jackets. The Gnats live in water during their larval con- dition ; the pupae are very generally oval brown bodies. The Diptera are seldom of large size. See also Crane Fly, Onion Fly, and Syrphus. FIG. 310. CODLIN MOTH AND GRUR Diptera, or Two-winged Flies, have only one pair of wings, which are membranous and naked, with compara- tively few nervures. The hind wings are replaced by o | b ^ Fio. 313. BEAN APHIS. a, Female (magnified) ; b, Male (natural size and magnified). Hemiptera have the month in the form of a beak, turned down so as to lie against the breast when not in use, but capable of being driven into their food when desired. This beak usually consists of a sheath, in which lie four bristle-like pieces, the whole serving for a sucker to draw in the juices on which they feed. The meta- morphosis is incomplete, except in the male Scale insects. The wings are different in the two great sub-orders, and a great many of the Insects have no trace of wings. The sub-orders are : Ileteroptera, or Plant Bugs. The hind wings of these are AN ENCYCLOPEDIA OF HORTICULTURE. 189 Insects — continued. membranous, and hidden tinder the front ones. The latter have the half nearer the body leathery, that farther from the body membranous, giving the appearance of the wings being in halves, whence the name Hemiptera, or half- winged insects. The name Heteroptera refers to the dissimilar appearance of the two halves. In this sub- order, many of the species are more or less parasitic; Fro. 314. FROG HOPPER, showing Larva, Frothy Secretion, and perfect Insect. while among those that feed on plants, there are few that can be said to be conspicuously hurtful. Homoptera have the wings all membranous and naked, with few supporting nervures, and often resemble small Hymenoptera in general aspect (see Fig. 313). A great many species are wingless, or, at least, have wing- Inula— continued. herbaceous plants, natives of Europe, Asia, and Afrie few being found between the tropics. Flower-heads yellow ; rays rarely white; involucre hemispherical, imbricated, with the scales spreading at the points; ray-florets Fio. 315. GRAPE OR VINE LOUSE, showing (A) Infested Vine Root ; (B) Portion of Leaf, with Galls ; (c) Subterranean Form of Female (magnified). less individuals as well as winged (see Figs. 313 and 315). The name Homoptera refers to the front wings being alike throughout (see Figs. 313 and 314). The insects are mostly very small, but include many injurious forms. See also Aphides, Frog Hopper, Grape Louse, and Scale Insects. INSECTS, FERTILISATION BY. See Fer- tilisation by Insects. INTEGERRIMUS. Entire; perfectly free from division of the margin or other part. INTER/NODES. The intervening space between two nodes. INTERFETIOLAR. Between the petioles. INTERRUPTED. Not continuous. INTRORSE. Turned towards the axis to which it appertains ; e.g., an anther when its valves face the centre of a flower. INT7LA (the old Latin name used by Horace, &c., said to be another form of Helenion). ORD. Composite. A genus comprising about fifty-six species of hardy FIG. 316. INULA GLANDULOSA. numerous, ligulate, linear; disk-florets very numerous, perfect, tubular ; receptacle flat, or nearly so, areolate or honeycombed. Leaves radical or alternate, entire or FIG. 317. INULA HELENIUM. serrate. Only a few species of this genus are worth growing. They are of very easy culture in common garden soil. Some of the more vigorous are suitable for 190 THE DICTIONARY OF GARDENING, Inula — continued. naturalising in the wild garden. Increased readily by divisions, or by seeds. X. glandulosa (glandular).* fl.-heads yellow ; scales of involucre lanceolate, villous. July and August. I. sessile, oblong, ob- soletely serrated; the serratures glandular. Stem hairy, one- headed, h. 2ft. Caucasus, 1804. See Fig. 316. (B. M. 1907 ; B. R. 334.) I. Helenimn (Helenium). Elecampane, fl. -heads bright yellow, large, solitary, terminal. Summer. I. ovate, serrate, rugose, stem-clasping, downy beneath ; root ones stalked. Stem furrowed, branched and downy above, h. 3ft. to 4ft Europe (Britain), Siberia. A strong-growing perennial. Formerly used as an aromatic and tonic ; the rootstock is still used in a candied state. See Fig. 317. (B. M. PL 150.) I. Hooker! (Hooker's).* fl.-heads faintly sweet-scented, 2Jin. to SJin. in diameter, shortly peduncled, terminating leafy branches ; involucre broad, shaggy ; ray-florets numerous, with slender pale yellow lignles, which are lin. or more long, obtusely three-toothed at apex ; disk-florets numerous ; recep- tacle convex, papillose ; pappus hairs dirty -white. September. 1. bright green, 3m. to 4in. long, sessile, or narrowed into short petioles, oblong-lanceolate, acuminate, minutely toothed, hairy above, tomentose beneath. Stems sparingly branched, h. 1ft. to 2ft. Sikkim Himalayas, 1849. (B. M. Mil.) Z. Oculus Christ! (Christ's eye). fl.-heads bright golden- yellow, about 3Jin. across ; involucre very downy. Summer. 1 broadly lanceolate, obtuse, almost entire, or slightly toothed, rather downy, h. lift, to 2ft Eastern Europe, &c., 1759. A very ornamental perennial, with a neat habit (J. F. A. 223.) INVOLUCEL. A small involucre. IKVOLUCBABIA. Now included under Tricho- santh.es (which see). INVOLTJCRATE. Having an involucre. INVOLUCRE, INVOLTJCRUM. A ring or rings of bracts which surround several flowers. The term is also used as synonymous with the Indusium of ferns. INVOLUTE. Rolled inwards. IOCHROMA (from ton, violet, and chroma, colour; colour of flowers). STN. Chcenesthea. OBD. Solanacece. A genus containing abont fifteen species of greenhouse trees or shrubs, inhabiting Western tropical America. Flowers violet, blue, white, yellowish, or scarlet; calyx tubular, somewhat distended; corolla tubular, much longer than the calyx, and concealing the stamens. Leaves entire, often ample, membranous. For culture, see Cestrnm. I. fuchsioides (Fuchsia-like).* fl. drooping, large, handsome ; corolla orange-scarlet, thrice as long as the calyx ; tube elongated, nearly straight ; peduncles shorter than the leaves, single- flowered. Summer. I. often fascicled, obovate, inclining to oval or oblong, very obtuse, entire, tapering at base into a short foot- stalk, h. 5ft. Quitinian Andes, 1843. A glabrous unarmed shrub. (B. M. 4149, under name of Lyciumfvcksioides.) I. grandiflorum (large-flowered), fl. rich purple, large ; cymes simple, pedunculate, terminal, many-flowered, pendulous ; corolla funnel-shaped ; tube long, pubescent ; throat sub-campanulate ; limb large, flve-lobed ; lobes triangular, recurved. November. I. broadly-ovate, acuminate, pubescent above, very pale and sub- tomentose beneath. Branches terete, pubescent. Ecuador and Peru, previous to 1860. A very handsome shrub. (B. M. 5301.) I. lanceolate (lanceolate).* /. drooping, in supra-axillary ter- minal umbels ; calyx unequally five-toothed ; corolla rich deep purplish-blue, 2in. long, cylindrical, glabrous, dilated at the mouth into a short, five-toothed, spreading limb ; pedicels fili- form, pendent ; stamens and style scarcely exserted. Summer. I. alternate, rather large, oval or elliptic-lanceolate, membranous, acute, entire, tapering below into a long jpetiole, glabrous with age. A. 4ft to 5ft Andes of Chili, 1847. A beautiful shrub. (B. M. 4338, under name of Chcenestes lanceolata.) X. tubnlosa (tubular-flowered), fl., corolla blue, showy, tubular, with five short teeth. August. I. ovate, three or four times shorter than the corolla, h, 6ft Tropical America, 1843. (B. B. 1845, 20.) IONE (from lone, one of the Nereids). ORD. Orchidece. A genus containing three or four species, now referred to Bulbophyllum (which see for cultivation). I. paleacea (scaly).* fl. lin. long, drooping, in many-flowered, erect spikes ; sepals pale green, red-striped ; petals pale yellow- green, small, rounded, erose ; lip red-brown, trowel-shaped, as long as the sepals, erose ; column short ; scape erect, stitf , slender, longer than the leaf. October. I. dark green, 6in. to Sin. long, lin. broad, linear, obtuse, narrowed into a deeply channelled base, but hardly petioled. Pseudo-bulbs dark green, lin. to lim. long, oyoid, smooth. A. 9in. Upper Assam, 1877. IONIDIUM (from Ion, a Violet, and eidos, re- sembling; in allusion to the Violet-like flowers). STN. Solea. ORD. Violariece. A genus comprising forty species of herbs or sub-shrubs, natives, for the most part, of sub-tropical America. Flowers solitary, having the small unequal sepals running into the peduncle at base; petals unequal, lower ones two or three times longer than the rest, carinately-concave. Leaves alternate, or rarely opposite. The roots of several of the species are of economic value, being used as substitutes for Ipeca- cuanha, lonidiums are rarely seen in cultivation. The species described below require greenhouse treatment, and a peat and loam compost. Cuttings of the shrubby sorts will root in Band, under a bell glass. The herba- ceous species may be increased by divisions, or by seeds. I. capense (Cape). JL white; sepals acute, ciliated. Summer. I. alternate, obovate, obsoletely-toothed, pubescent. Stems shrubby, erect h. 6in. to 12in. Cape of Good Hope, 1824. I. Ipecacuanha (Ipecacuanha), fl. white ; peduncles axillary, solitary, drooping; lower lip very large, emarginate. July. 1. ovate-oblong, h. IJft. South America, 1822. The roots of this species furnish what is termed White Ipecacuanha. I. polygalsefolium (Polygala-leaved). fl. greenish-yellow or white ; sepals ovate-oblong, acute, pubescent. Summer. I. oppo- site, lanceolate, rather entire. Stems shrubby, branched, diffuse, procumbent, h. 1ft. South America, 1797. IONOPSIDIUM (from Ion, a Violet, andopsis, appear- ance ; alluding to the resemblance to some of the tufted dwarf-growing Violets). OBD. Cruciferce. A genus com- prising two species of small hardy annual herbs, one from Portugal, and the other a native of Sicily and Algeria. Flowers violet, white, or flesh-coloured, small,' on long peduncles ; sepals spreading, equal at the base ; pouch broadly oblong, laterally compressed. Leaves sessile or petiolate, spathulate or orbiculate, entire or three-lobed. I. acaule, the species introduced to cultivation, has an extremely neat habit, and rarely exceeds 2in. in height. It thrives on rockwork, and makes an extremely pretty pot plant for window gardening. Seeds may be sown in the open — preferably in pots — any time during spring and summer. This plant should have at all times a shady situation. It often reproduces itself year after year, by self-sowing. I. acaule (stemless).* fl. lilac, or white tinged with violet. Summer and winter, h. 2in. to Sin. Portugal, 1845. (B. B. 1846, 51.) IONOPSIS (from Ion, a Violet, and opsis, like ; flowers resemble a Violet in form). STNS. Cybelion and lantha. OBD. Orchidece. A genus of very pretty little epiphytal stemless Orchids, requiring a stove temperature, natives of the West Indies and tropical America from Mexico to ^Brazil. About ten species have been described, but it is doubtful whether more than two or three are really distinct. Flowers small, panicled; sepals and petals connivent ; lip large, fan-shaped, two-lobed at the apex. Leaves few, lanceolate. Pseudo-bulbs small. The only species much seen in cultivation is I. paniculata. It is a very difficult plant to grow, and is rarely brought to perfection. It succeeds best on a block, with a little live sphagnum around the roots, which require to be kept moist nearly all the year round. Similar treatment will answer for the other species. I. paniculate (panicled). fl. snow-white or delicate rose-colour, scentless ; scape panicled, IJft. high ; petals obtuse ; lip pu- bescent ; lip rotundate, bilobed, much longer than the sepals. 1. linear-lanceolate, keeled. Brazil, 1865. (B. M. 5541.) I. tenera (tender). A synonym of /. utricularioides. X. ntricularloldes (Utricularia-like). /. white, with a pink stain at the base of the lip, racemose ; sepals and petals acute, sub- equal ; lip pubescent ; limb bilobed, much longer than the sepals. 1. rigid, acute, furrowed, keeled at the base. Tropical America. SYN. /. tenera. (B. R. 1904.) IOSTEFHANE (from ton, violet, and etephane, a wreath; in allusion to the violet rays). ORD. Composite. A genus consisting of only two species of scabrous- pubescent herbs, natives of Mexico. I. heterophylla is a very handsome hardy perennial, thriving in any sandy soil. An inverted pot should be placed over the large AN ENCYCLOPEDIA OF HORTICULTURE. 191 lostephane — continued. tuberous root during severe frosts. Propagation may be effected by division; or by seeds, sown in spring. I. heterophylla (various-leaved), fl.-heads nodding; ray -florets lilac, fifteen to twenty, neuter, many-nerved, adpressedly hairy beneath, obtusely tridentate at apex ; disk-florets hermaphrodite, funnel-shaped ; receptacle paleaceous, conical ; peduncles elon- gated, one-flowered, densely pilose, simple at apex. Autumn. L, radical ones numerous, spreading, petiolate, oblong, acute; base acuminate ; margin serrate ; cauline leaves very few, lanceo- late ; superior ones linear-lanceolate, acuminate, entire, sessile. Stems pubescent, clammy, h. IJft. 1829. (S. B. F. G. ser. ii., 32, under name of Echinacea heterophylla.) IPECACUANHA. The root of Cephaelis Ipeca- cuanha, a Brazilian plant, the cultivation of which has been introduced into India. The roots afford the im- portant emetic, and the only known specific for dysentery. IPOMERIA. Now included under Gilia. IPOMCEA (from Ips, Bindweed, and omoioe, similar, because of the close resemblance of this genus to Convol- vulus). Including Batatas, Calonyction, Exogonium, Phar- bitis, and Quamoclit. OED. Convolvulacece. An extensive genus (over 400 species have been described) of stove or hardy, evergreen or deciduous, twining or creeping herbs, rarely shrubs, widely distributed over all warm climates, with a few species extending into North America. Flowers purple, violet, scarlet, pink, blue, or white, rarely yellow, often showy ; corolla salver- shaped, campanulate or tubular ; limb spreading, entire or angular. Leaves alternate, entire, lobed, or divided. Some of the stove species of Ipomcea .are among the prettiest of plants for covering trellises or pillars, particularly over paths, where the beautifully-coloured flowers may be seen to advantage. They are of free growth, and like plenty of root room, such as may be secured by planting in a border inside the house. If this is impracticable, large pots or boxes must be sub- stituted. The hardier kinds succeed in the open air during summer, if forwarded a little in a warm frame, and after- wards planted out in sheltered positions. AH the annual species, whether stove or half-hardy, may be readily raised from seed, which should be sown early in spring, in a warm house. A good plan is to place two or three seeds each in small pots, and afterwards transfer the plants bodily into larger sizes. They should be trained, on small temporary stakes until established or finally planted out. A suitable compost consists of fibry loam, rotten manure, and leaf soil, which should be mixed together and used somewhat lumpy. Evergreen Ipomceas of perennial dura- tion may be propagated by cuttings of short side shoots, placed in peaty soil, and in a brisk bottom heat ; or by layers. The latter method is that best suited for L Horsfallice, one of the most beautiful winter-flowering species that does not succeed well from cuttings. I. Learii is free-growing, and requires plenty of room ; it is one of the best stove species, producing bright blue flowers throughout the autumn. I. Aitoni (Aiton's). fl. pale purple ; corolla campanulate ; tube thickened ; peduncles many-flowered, longer than the petioles. April to October. I. cordate, roundish, three-lobed ; lobes acute. h. 10ft. Stove evergreen twiner. (B. B. 1794.) I. alatipes (wing-footed), fl., corolla salmon-colour, Sin. in diameter ; calyx large, ovate, lin. or more long ; pedicels wing- less but very tortuose, frequently furnished with glands ; peduncles axillary, with a very broad membranaceous wing on each side, two to four-flowered. June. I. 2in. to 3in. long, cor- date, acuminate, with a deep obtuse sinus at the base, and very obtuse rounded lobes, glabroivs. Stems and branches also gla- brous. Panama, 1862. Stove. (B. M. 5330.) X. albivenia (white-veined). /. pure white, large, solitary, ter- minating the branchlets ; inside of the tube deep purple. August and September. I. roundish-cordate, somewhat repand, having the veins elevated, and woolly beneath. Algoa Bay, 1824. Stove evergreen twiner. (B. R. 1116.) X. Batatas (Batatas). This is the correct name of the plant described in this work as Batatas edulis. I. bignonioides (Bignonia-like). This is the correct name of the plant described in this work as Batatas bignonioides. Ipomcea— continued. L Bona-nox (Good-night).» fl. white ; corolla undivided ; tube very long; peduncles one to three-flowered. July and August I. cordate, entire or angular, h. 10ft. Tropical America, 1773 Plant very smooth. Stove annual twiner. (B. M. 752.) X. oatbartica (cathartic), fl. purple ; peduncles one to three- flowered. August and September. I. cordate or cordately three- lobed. h. 10ft. West Indies, 1839. Stove evergreen climber. (B. M. 4289, under name of PharUtis eathartica.) There is a deep rose-coloured variety figured in B. B. 999, under name of Convol- vulus pudibundus. X. chryseides (golden-flowered), fl. yellow, small; peduncles stiff, two to seven-flowered. July to October. I. oblong-cordate, sub-hastate, entire or often angular, also three-lobed. Stem twisted. Tropical Asia, Africa, and Australia, 1817. Stove ever- green twiner. (B. B. 270.) I. crassipes (thick-peduncled). H. purple ; sepals very unequal • peduncles one-flowered, bibracteate, thickened above. August! I. oblong-lanceolate, entire, acute. A. 4ft. South Africa, 1842 Greenhouse. (B. M. 4068.) X. dasysperma (thick-seeded), ft. bright sulphur-yellow, with a purplish tube, rather large, numerous ; peduncles one to three- flowered. August 1. pedate ; lobes five to seven, unequal. India, 1815. Stove annual. (B. R. 86, under name of /. tuberculata.) I. ficifolia (Fig-leaved). /. purple ; peduncles three-flowered ; calyx covered with black hairs. November. I. three-lobed- lateral lobes rounded, middle narrower and longer. Buenos Ayres, 1840. Stove deciduous twiner. (B. B. 1841, 13.) X. filicanlis (slender-stalked).* fl., corolla white or cream-colour, with a bright purple eye in the throat, scarcely Jin. broad peduncle filiform, solitary, mostly bearing two flowers, with slender pedicels, the upper expanding first July. I. alternate, 2m. to 3m. long, less than £in. wide, glabrous, linear-oblong acuminate. Stems much branched, rambling rather than climb' ing. Tropical regions, 1778. Greenhouse annual. (B. M. 5426.) L Oerrardl (Gerrard's). fl. pure white, with a yellow throat. very fragrant, large, numerously produced. I. roundish, cordate Stems ffljt to 15!t. long. Natal, 1867. Stove evergreen twiner. (r>. M. oobl.) I. hederacea (Ivy-like).* fl. light blue; calyx hairy; peduncles one or two-flowered. July to September. I. cordate, three- lobed ; lateral lobes acuminate, intermediate acute. A. 10ft Tropical regions, 1597. Half-hardy annual. SYN. /. Nil. (B M 188, under name of Convolvulus NiL) A resin (called Pharbi- tisin), used in medicine, is obtained from the seeds of this plant. I. h. limbata (white-edged limbed), fl., corolla 2in. long ; tube pale rose-purple ; limb deep violet-purple, edged with white 2Ain in diameter. North Australia, 1868. A beautiful greenhouse annual. SYN. Pharbitis limbata (under which name it ia figured in B. M. 5720). X. Hookerii (Hooker's). Synonymous with /. rubro-cterulea. . . . ce- late, quite entire, with undulated margins. West Indies, 1833. A showy and handsome stove evergreen twiner. (B. M. 3315.) L Jalapa (jalap), fl. red, white, or light pink-purple ; corolla long, tubular ; tube ventricose above ; peduncles two-flowered, longer than the petioles. August. I. membranous, cordate, acuminated entire. South United States, 1733. A greenhouse or half-hardy, tuberous-rooted, evergreen twiner, the root of which sometimes attains a weight of 401b. or 501b., but is hardly purgative. The true Jalap is /. Purga. (B. M. 1572, under name of Con- volvulus Jalapa.) L Learii (Lear's).* fl. intensely bright blue, numerously prod July to October. Ceylon, 1839. A very rapid-growing and uced. hand- (B. M. 3928, under name o£ I. mnrlcata (muricated). fl. red ; sepals muricated on the back ; some stove evergreen twiner. Pharbitis Learii.) . peduncles axillary, one-flowered. June and July. I. glabrous, sessile, many parted. Stems filiform, branched, h. 1ft. South America, 1840. Stove. (B. M. 4301.) L mutabilis (changeable), fl. blue, large, numerous, cymosely aggregate on the tops of the peduncles. May to September. 1. cordate, entire or three-lobed, acuminated, hairy above, tornen- tose beneath. South America, 1812. Stove evergreen twiner. L Nationis (Nation's), fl., calyx £in. long, erect, mucronate- acnminate ; corolla hypocrateriform ; tube cylindrical, whitish, minutely pubescent, 2m. to 24in. long, and as many lines in diameter ; limb rich orange-scarlet, spreading horizontally, 2in. in diameter, five-lobed ; peduncles solitary, axillary, generally three-flowered. Summer. I. membranous, cordate, acuminate, entire, Sin. to 5in. long ; petiole 2in. to 4in. long. Stems long, slender, branched, glabrous. Peru, 1863. Greenhouse perennial (B. M. 5432, under name of Quamoclit Nationis.) L Nil (Nil was the name first used by the Arab physicians for this plant). A synonym of /. hederacea. L pandurata (lyre-shaped).* fl. white, with a purple throat, large ; peduncles many-flowered. June. f. cordate, acuminated, 192 THE DICTIONARY OF GARDENING. Ipomcea — continued. rather downy beneath. United States, Cercis. JUGLANDEJE. An order of trees or shrubs with watery or resinous juice, natives, for the most part, of North America. Male flowers in catkins; perianth VoL II. Jnglandea— continued. two, three, or six-parted, with a scaly bract; female flowers in terminal clusters, or in loose racemes, with dis- tinct or united bracts; perianth adherent, three to five- parted. Fruit a dry drupe, with a strong and often two- valved endocarp; seed exalbtuninous, two to four-lobed at the base. Leaves alternate, pinnate, stipulate. The wood of several of the species of Juglans is much prized by cabinet makers ; and the bark of Juglans cinerea is used as a purgative in America. There are about five genera and thirty species. Illustrative genera are : Carya and Juglana. FIG. 346. CLUSTER OF FRUITS OF JUGLANS AILANTIFOLIA. JUGLANS (the old Latin name used by Pliny, con- tracted from Jo vis Glans, the Nut of Jupiter). Walnut. ORD. Juglandece. A genus of seven or eight species FIG. 347. JUGLANS CINEREA, showing (1) Female Flower, (2) Fruite. 2 u 210 THE DICTIONARY OF GARDENING, Jnglans— continued. of hardy or half-hardy deciduous trees, widely dispersed over the temperate and sub-tropical regions of the Northern hemisphere. Flowers inconspicuous, deciduous ; males in single catkins, and having a calyx of three to six irregular lobes; female flowers solitary, or a few in a group, ter- minal upon a shoot. Fruit having a fleshy, fibrous epi- carp, bursting irregularly ; endocarp two-valved. furrowed. Juglans — continued. in pendulous clusters, woolly. I., leaflets sessile, truncate at the base, thin, soft, shortly toothed, green above, paler beneath Origin uncertain. See Fig. 346. J. cinerea (ashy-grey).* Butter Nut. fl. greenish. Spring, fr. ob- long-ovate, with a tapered tip, downy, covered with viscid matter in small transparent glands, pendulous on a flexible peduncle. I., leaflets fifteen to seventeen, lanceolate, rounded at the base, serrate, tomentose beneath ; lateral ones sessile, h. 30ft. to 60ft. United States, 1656. See Fte. 347. (B. M. PI. 247.) FIG. 348. FRUITINO BRANCH OF JUGLANS REGIA. FIG. 350. FRUIT OP JUGLANS REGIA LONGIROSTRIS. Leaves compound, alternate, exstipulate. The species thrive in almost any kind of fertile soil, provided the sub- soil be dry and the site moderately sheltered. For general culture, &c., see Walnut. J. allantlfolia (Ailantus-leaved). . slender catkins. Spring. Jr. violet fl. greenish, males in long, ;-red when young, numerous, J. nlgra (black).* fl. greenish. Spring, fr. globose, roughish, with minute prominent points, situated upon a short inflexible peduncle. I., leaflets thirteen to seventeen, cordate-acuminate, unequal at the base, serrated, somewhat downy. A. 60ft. United States, 1656. (W. D. B. ii. 158.) J. regia (royal).* Common Walnut-tree, fl. greenish. Spring Jr. with a green busk, oval, situated upon a short inflexible FIG. 349. LEAF AND NUT OF JUGLANS REGIA ELONGATA. AN ENCYCLOPEDIA OF HORTICULTURE. 211 Jnglans — continued. peduncle. I, leaflets five to nine, oval, glabrous, obscurely ser- rated, h. 40ft. to 60ft. Persia, 1562. A well-known and desirable fruit. See Fig. 348. It has several varieties, for enumeration of which, and for culture, see Walnut. J. r. Bartheriana (Barther's). A synonym of J. r. elongata. J. r. elongata (elongated). This variety only differs in its very much elongated fruits. A nut (natural size) is represented at Fig. 349. SYN. J. r. Bartheriana. J. r. longirostris (long-beaked). This is an extraordinary semi- nal variety of the common Walnut, distinguished by its long- beaked fruits. See Fig. 350. JUJUBE. See Zizyphus Jujuba. JULIANA. A synonym of Choisya (which see). JULUS. See Millipedes. JUNCE2E. A natural order, containing about 130 species of perennial, rarely annual, herbs, principally natives of temperate and Arctic regions. Flowers green or brown, in axillary or terminal cymes, regular, herma- phrodite or dioecious, bracteolate ; perianth inferior, Kcarions or coriaceous, the six segments in two series, the inner series sometimes petaloid, sometimes both series large and coloured ; stamens six, rarely three only. Leaves slender, flat or terete, or reduced to sheathing scales. Stems erect, usually simple, sometimes septate within ; pith often thick, continuous or interrupted. There are fourteen genera ; Juncus and Luzula represent the order in the British Flora. The more important of the exotic genera are : Calectasia, Kingia, Xanthorrhcea, and Xerotes. JUNCUS (from jungo, to join ; the leaves and stems of this genus having been employed as cordage). Ensh. OBD. Juncece. A genus of about a hundred species of hardy, annual or perennial herbs, usually with a rigid habit, principally natives of Arctic and temperate regions. Flowers greenish or brownish, small, disposed in heads or panicles. Very few species of this genus are worth cultivating. The perennials thrive in almost any boggy situation, and may easily be increased by divisions of the root. J. effusus spiralis (wide-spread spiral). A curious and desir- able variety, forming spreading tufts of stems, which, instead of growing straight, like those of other kinds, are curiously twisted in a regular corkscrew form. From its very unusual appearance, it is well worthy of cultivation, and may be planted with advan- tage on the margins of pieces of water, near cascades, &c., or in an artificial bog. J. laetevirens (bright-green).* I. bright green, in crowded tufts, somewhat distichously sheathing at the base, and distinctly com- pressed at the sides, h. 3ft. Japan, 1880. A free-growing and exceedingly ornamental hardy plant. This is probably not a Juncus at all. J. zcbrinus. See Scirpus Tabernsemontani zebrinus. JUNE BERRY. An American name for Amelan- chier. JUNIPER. See Junipems. JUNIPER MOTH (Thera juniperata). One of a small genus of slender-bodied moths, of the group called Geometers, because of the peculiar looping movements of their caterpillars. All the species of Thera feed on Conifers ; T. juniperata and T. coniferata on Juniper, T. variata and T. firmata on Scotch Fir. The insects are common in many parts of Britain, where their food- plants occur; but they seldom cause serious damage to either Junipers or Firs. The moths are all between fin. and l|in. in spread of wings, and are very much alike. In all, the wings are rather large in proportion to the slender body, and are grey or greyish-brown, with a broad darker band across the front wings. Both the species that feed on Juniper are about lin., or a little less, across the wings. In T. juniperata, the front wings are pale grey, with a dark grey band, which is bounded on each side by a very zigzag line, and there a dark streak close to the tip of the wing. T. coni- ferata has the front wings greyish-brown, with the lines bounding the cross-band much less zigzag. The insects Juniper Moth— continued. that live on the Fir are slightly larger. T. firmata has the front wings pale grey, with an indistinct ochreous- brown band ; and T. variata has them greyish-brown, with the inner margin of the band not so straight as in T. coniferata. The caterpillars of all four species are green, marked with lemon-yellow or white lines (usually three) down the back and sides. The pupae are usually green, and are inclosed in a silken cocoon, either suspended among the twigs of the food-plant, or among rubbish on the ground. T. juniperata flies in October ; the other species appear from July to September. Should it be desirable to reduce their numbers, this may be done, in some degree, by shaking the branches, and by the removal of dead twigs, as well as of all rubbish from below the bushes. JUNIPERUS (the old Latin name used by Virgil and Pliny). Juniper. OBD. Coniferce. A genus of about twenty-seven species of hardy or nearly hardy evergreen trees or shrubs, natives of the temperate or cold regions of the Northern hemisphere. Flowers dioecious ; males in solitary or crowded catkins. Cones small, globose, baccate, of four to six decussate or whorled, confluent, fleshy scales. Fruit berry-like, ripening the second year. Leaves needle-shaped, linear or lanceolate, rigid or flexible, or scale-like, scattered or imbricated, not clustered. J. communis, the species most commonly grown, thrives in almost any position. On the sides of hills, the trunk grows long ; while on the tops of rocky mountains, or in boggy land, the species becomes merely a tufted shrub. All the members of this genus may be readily propagated by seeds, which retain their vitality, when kept in the berry, for several years. When sown, they lie one year, and often two years, before they come up. Propagation may also be effected by cuttings, planted in sandy soil, in a shady situation, in the autumn, and covered with a hand glass during winter; or by layers. J. bermudiana (Bermuda). Barbados or Bermuda Cedar. I. dimorphous, acicular, and arranged in threes on the young plants, but becoming scale-like and imbricated as the tree becomes aged. h. 40ft. to 50ft. Bermudas, 1683. A somewhat tender species, assuming a densely-branched pyramidal form in its native country. This tree furnishes the wood used in the manufacture of " cedar " pencils England. (G. C. n. s., xix. 657.) It is very rarely seen FIG. 351. FRUITING TWIG OF JUMPERUS CALIFORNICA; also LONGITUDINAL SECTION OF FRUIT, showing (a) Fleshy Portion, (6) Seed, and (c) Embryo. J. californica (Californian). I. ternate, short and thick, mostly acute, fr. reddish, dry and sweetish. Branches stout, spreading, with thick branchlets. Shrub, or sometimes a tree from 20ft. to 35ft. See Fig. 351. 212 THE DICTIONARY OF GARDENING, Juniperns — continued. J. chinensis (Chinese).* I. ternate or opposite, linear, flat, acute, and spreading, or small, scale-like, and closely imbricated. China, 1804. A very handsome shrub or tree, of erect or elongated pyramidal habit, with short branches and dimorphous foliage. The female and male plants are distinct, both in habit and aspect. The male is the more desirable, and is much more generally grown ; it has numerous branches, the higher ones ascending, or nearly erect, and all very much ramified. The female plant has the branches longer, more distant, and more spreading, than those of the male ; the small berries are of a brownish-violet colour. (S. Z. F. J. ii. 126, 127.) The varieties of this species are numerous. J. o. albo-variegata (white-variegated). A pretty form, differ- ing from the male type in having the foliage interspersed with silvery-white among the ordinary green growth, and in having many of the terminal shoots pure white. Japan. J. c. aurea (golden). A very beautiful and distinct form, of garden origin, differing from the type in being suffused with bright gold, which it retains all the year round, and which is heightened by full exposure to the sun. J. C. densata (dense). According to Messrs. R. Smith and Co., this is a female form, and has somewhat the appearance of the species, but the leaves are larger and more plentiful. The main stem grows upright, and all the branchlets, which are very numerous, are more or less pendulous. This variety forms a dense pyramidal growth, and is very ornamental, ft. 10ft. to 20ft. Himalayas. J. c. japonica (Japanese).* I. arranged in threes, close set, at first acicular, but ultimately scale-like, distinctly marked with two silvery glaucous lines above. Stem usually divided, hut sometimes single, ft. 2ft. Japan and North China. A small and compact-growing shrub, very desirable for rockwork. J. O. J. aurea (golden). A very loose-growing form, having the growth of the current season tinged with golden-yellow, which gradually changes to light green. Primary branches few, robust, and comparatively long. FIG. 352. JUNIPERUS COMMUNIS HIBERNICA, showing Habit, Fruiting Branchlet, and Young Female Cone. Two other forms, described by Smith, are : glauca (glaucous), a very distinct form, having the foliage of a glaucous or bluish tint ; and Leeana (Lee's), which has leaves about iin. long, and forms a densely-branched and vigorous-growing shrub. J. communis (common).* Common Juniper. I. subulate, rigid, sharp-pointed, spreading, and opposite, or in threes, usually glau- cous above and green below, ft. 3ft. to 20ft., varying according to the elevation at which it is found. Northern hemisphere (Britain). Well-grown specimens of this species, nicely furnished with brancb.es, are most desirable plants. The wood is finely-veined, of a yellowish-brown colour, and has an aromatic scent. The varieties of it are, for the most part, well worth growing. The following call for special mention : J. o. canadensis (Canadian). A dwarf spreading bush of inelegant habit, seldom exceeding 3ft. in height. Northern United States, Ac., 1820. J. o. compressa (compressed). A very compact-growing variety, having a conical form, and slender, erect branches and branchlets, which grow close together, ft. 1ft. to 3ft. This is one of the smallest of Conifers ; the very diminutive size of the plant render- ing it interesting. It is found on the Pyrenees at a great elevation. J. C. cracovia (Cracow). Polish Juniper. An erect, robust- growing variety, well-clothed with leaves, and sometimes having the terminal branchlets pendulous, ft. 12ft. to 15ft. Poland. J. O. fastigiata (pyramidal). Swedish Juniper. A more erect- growing form than the type, and somewhat resembling the Irish Jtmiperus— continued. Juniper, but more robust in growth, and with foliage more glau- cous, and of a light green. In habit, it is either columnar or angular, and is not usually considered very ornamental. SYN. J. c. suecica. J. O. hemisphaarica (half globe-headed). I. short, rigid, needle- shaped, in threes, glaucous. South Europe. A curious and interesting little shrub, with a dense rounded habit. SYN. J. echintformis. J. O. hibernica (Irish).* Irish Juniper. A well-known and desir- able variety, with a somewhat columnar habit of growth, and a peculiar silvery - glaucous appearance ; the branches are erect, with numerous, rigid, close-set branchlets. It is the handsomest of all the varieties of J. communis, and thrives best on cool clay or peat soils. SYN. J. stricta. See Fig. 352. There is a form with, prettily-variegated leaves. J. O. nana (dwarf). A pretty dwarf procumbent shrub, with short branches and branchlets, covered with shorter, broader, imbri- cated, incurved leaves, glaucous above and green beneath. Alpine parts of Europe, Ac. SYN. J. nana. J. C. Oblonga (oblong - fruited). A procumbent shrub, with slender branches and branchlets, clothed with long, attenuated leaves, which are of a deeper and brighter colour than the type. Caucasus. This variety rarely thrives well in England. It is very distinct as regards the colour of its foliage, and it sometimes takes an erect habit. SYN. J. oUonga. J. C. suecica (Swedish). A synonym of J. c. fastigiata. FIG. 353. FRUITING BRANCHLET OF JUNIPERUS DRUPACEA. J. drnpacea (drupe-fruited).* I. in threes, broader and stouter than those of any other species, very sharp-pointed, and light green. The fruits of this species are remarkable, both in size and colour; they are of deep purple, covered with a glaucous bloom, and are about the size of the common sloe. Branches numerous, short, imparting a columnar or elongated conical form to the tree. Trunk straight, erect, ft. 8ft. to 10ft. Northern Syria, &c., 1854. This is a very handsome and distinct species, and is particularly ornamental as a plant for lawns. See Fig. 353. J. dumosa (brambly). A synonym of J. recurva squamata. J. echiniformis (hedgehog-like). A synonym of J. communis hemisphcerica. J. excelsa (tall).* 1. opposite or (rarely) in threes, thick, decur- rent, loosely imbricated, having a greyish-green hue. Branches short, much ramified, ft. 20ft. to 40ft. Asia Minor, 1806. A compact-growing and very distinct ornamental tree, having a pyramidal shape ; it is somewhat tender, but forms handsome specimens in sheltered situations. The varieties are not nume- rous. J. e. stricta (upright).* This variety differs from the type princi- pally in having a more tapering outline and more glaucous AN ENCYCLOPEDIA OF HORTICULTURE. 213 Juniperus — continued. foliage. It is an extremely pretty species, of garden origin, and well deserves cultivation. J. Fortune! (Fortune's). A synonym of J. sphcerica. J. fragrans (fragrant). A synonym of J. occidentalis. J. macrocarpa (large-fruited). A shrub of more open and spreading habit than the common Juniper ; it has also longer leaves, and, as its name implies, bears larger berries. It is rarely other than an inelegant bush in British gardens. A. 10ft. to 12ft. Mediterranean region. J. nana (dwarf). A synonym of J. communis nana. J. neoboriensis (Naumberg). I. short, rigid, very glaucous. A very distinct species, with a pyramidal or faisligiate habit, and short branches ; probably of garden origin. According to Messrs. Veitch, the Juniper cultivated in British gardens under this name is evidently a variety of J. communis. J. nepalensis (Nepaul). A synonym of J. recurva. J. oblonga (oblong). A synonym of J. communis oblonga. J. occidentalis (Western).* I. in whorls of three ; when young, spreading, sharp-pointed, glaucous ; but when in an adult state, short, blunt, imbricated, and closely appressed to the stern. Berries small, deep purple, covered with a glaucous bloom. h. 10ft. to 50ft. California. A conical, erect-growing species, of a peculiar colour. When bruised, its branches emit a very strong scent. It is a very handsome plant for lawns. SYN. J. fragrans. J. o. Bnrkei (Burke's). A desirable variety, of neat, compact habit, and of a more decided blue-glaucous tint than the type. FIG. 354. JUNIPERUS SABINA, showing Habit and detached Portion of Branch. J. oxycedrus (sharp-Cedar). I. sharp, spreading, needle-like, in whorls of three, h. 10ft. to 12ft. Spain, Portugal, &c., 1739. A large, bushy, much-branched shrub, with slender pendulous branches. This species may be distinguished from the common Juniper by its somewhat broader and shorter leaves, with more prominent white bands on the under side. In Great Britain, owing to climacteric causes, it attains but small proportions, has an inelegant habit, and is quite destitute of any ornamental qualities. SYN. J, rufescens. J. paohyphloea (thick-barked). I. subulate, almost squamiform, closely imbricated, thick and broad at the base, sharp-pointed. A slender, upright tree, with a whitish appearance, a tapering habit, and short, erect branches. New Mexico. A remarkable, but scarcely handsome species. J. phcenicea (Phoenician).* I. small, scale-like, in threes, imbri- cated, scarcely glaucous, h. 15ft. to 18ft. Mediterranean region, 1683. A large pyramidal shrub, with a profusion of slender pen- dulous branches, growing in tufts. It is a handsome plant for growing near water, or on rockwork, in almost any situation. J. p. lycia (Lycian). This form is described as being a creeping shrub. It is interesting, from producing the resinous gum known as Olibanum, which is used as incense in religious ceremonies on the Continent. (A. F. B. iv. 2367.) J. procumbens (procumbent).* A glaucous creeping species, having a spreading habit, and never rising more than a few inches from the ground. It closely resembles J. Sabina in the colour of its foliage, but the young growth is more glaucescent. It is a very Juniperus — continued. ornamental plant for rockwork. Canada and Northern United States. SYNS. J. prostrata and J. repent. J. prostrata (prostrate). A synonym of J. procumbent. J. recurva (recurved). /. loosely imbricated, sharp-pointed, usually in whorls of three, greyish-green. Branchlets recurved, pendulous, feathery, h. 5ft. to 8ft. Nepaul, 1817. A graceful and handsome plant when healthy, but liable to attacks of Red Spider. It should be grown in a cool soil. The male form, usually called densa, is much shorter in foliage, and very much dwarfer in habit, than the female form. SYNS. J. nepalensis and J. repanda. (G. C. n. a., xix. 468.) J. r. squamata (scaly-leaved). I. rigid, sharp -pointed, scaly, usually in threes, glaucescent. Branches with numerous short stiff branchlets. A large creeping shrub, with a much-branching and spreading habit, and rather more peculiar than ornamental. h. 3ft. Nepaul, 1824. SYN. J. dumosa. J. repanda (repand). A synonym of J. recurva. J. repens (creeping). A synonym of J. procumbens. J. xigida (stiff-leaved). I. very distinct, about £in. long, linear, rigid, erect, sharp-pointed, produced in whorls of three, marked with a glaucous furrow on the upper side. Branches drooping ; when young, slender, and of a lively green, slightly tinged with yellow, h. 15ft. Japan, 1861. An ornamental species, with an upright and somewhat irregular habit. (S. Z. F. J. ii. 125.) J. rufescens (reddish-berried). A synonym of J. oxycedrus. J. Sabina.* Common Savin. I. small, scale-like, imbricated, some- what acute, h. 5ft. to 8ft. South Europe, 1548. An ornamental much-branched shrub, having a spreading, irregular habit, and with numerous reclinate or trailing branches. It thrives best in a light soil, and in airy situations. See Fig. 354. J. S. tamariscifolia (Tamarisk-leaved).* A very ornamental low- growing, densely-branched, and trailing species. It has a neater habit than the type, and its foliage is of a brighter green. An ex- cellent plant for rockwork, banks, &c. This variety is sometimes known as the Carpet Juniper. SYN. J. sabinoides. (Enc. T. & S. 2022.) J. S. variegata (variegated). A very distinct and pretty variegated form, having its branchlets creamy-white or pale yellow. It should not be grown in too sunny a position. J. sabinoides (Sabina-like). A synonym of J. Sabina tamarisci- folia,. J. Sheppardi glauca (Sheppard's glaucous). A synonym of J. sphcerica Sheppardi. J. sphserica (globular-fruited). I. scale-like, imbricated. Berries of a globular or spherical form. North China, 1846. This species "combines the upright mode of growth of J. chinensis with the habit of J. phoenicea in its much-divided tufted branches and scale- like leaves ; the colour of the foliage being, on the whole, brighter than the latter, and less glaucescent than the former. It shows the same peculiarity as J. phoenicea, in often departing from the dioecious character of the Juniper, so that particular branches are sometimes found loaded with berries, while the remainder of the plant has none" (Veitch's "Manual of the Coniferae"). SYN. J. Fortunei. J. s. Sheppardi (Sheppard's). I acicular, rigid, not imbricated, sharp-pointed, assuming in autumn, and with the young growth, a very glaucous or almost silvery whiteness. It is a very pretty shrub, and has a rather spreading habit. China. SYN. J. Shep- pardi glauca. J. stricta (upright). A synonym of J. communis hibernica. J. thurifera (incense-bearing).* Frankincense Juniper. I subu- late, imbricated, in opposite pairs, light glaucous green. Branches slender, numerous, much divided, densely clothed with leaves. A. 15ft to 25ft. South-west Europe, 1752. (A. F. B. iv. 2369.) A very ornamental, small, pyramidal tree, with an erect, slender, tapering trunk. J. virginiana (Virginian).* Red Cedar. I. usually subulate and spreading in young plants, and very minute, scale-like, and closely imbricated. Branches at first erect, but ultimately usually de- cumbent, having numerous crowded branchlets. Trunk erect, of varying shades, h. 10ft. to 15ft. ; towards its Western limits, often a large tree, 60ft. to 90ft. high. United States, 1664. A well-known ornamental tree, usually of pyramidal form, and having beautiful bright red heart-wood. Its timber has an aromatic fragrance, and is largely employed in the manufacture of various utensils in its native country. The varieties of this species are somewhat numerous. J. V. alba variegata (white-variegated). A form having a portion of the leaves white, and the remainder of greenish- yellow. J. V. aurea-variegata (golden-variegated). A variable form, sometimes having the terminal branches and branchlets deep yellow, while at others the variegation is but a spot. It should be grown in a shady situation. J. V. Bedfordlana (Bedford's). A handsome form, having the branches longer and more slender than the type ; ultimate branches filiform, pendulous. J. V. dumosa (bushy). A dwarf form, having a roundish, spread- ing, compact head. It resembles J. Sabina tamariscifolia. 214 THE DICTIONARY OF GARDENING, Jnniperus — continued. . v. elegans (elegant). A entire plant being suffused with cream-coloured spots, J. V. elegans (elegant). A handsome free-growing variety, the entire plant being suffused with cream-coloured sots, which it retains throughout the winter and summer. J. V. glanca (silvery). Silver Cedar. A very handsome variety, having a whitish appearance when making growth. It has a pretty cone-shaped habit, and is thickly branched from the ground upwards. J. V. humilis (dwarf). A distinct and attractive variety, having the shoots branching out in a remarkable angular form. J. V. pendula (pendulous). Weeping Red Cedar. According to Gordon (" Pinetum "), " there are three forms of the pendulous Bed Cedar to be found in collections ; one of the male form, another the female, and the third a bright green one. The male kind has shorter and much more numerous branchlets, while the female one has longer, more slender, and much fewer branchlets ; the third variety is of a light glossy green." The female form is superior to the others. J. v. Schotti (Schott's). A distinct variety, of pyramidal habit, and distinguished by its peculiar light green foliage. J. V. tripartite (three-parted). A very pretty dwarf spreading variety, somewhat resembling J. Sabina in habit, but much denser. See Anthyllis Barba- JUPITER'S BEARD. Jovis. JURINEA (derivation not explained). ORD. Com- posite. A genus containing about forty species of hardy herbaceous perennials, natives of South Europe, Western and Central Asia, and distinguished from allied genera in the four-sided, somewhat top-shaped achenes being crowned with a pappus of unequal rough hairs. None of the species introduced are of much horticultural value, although occasionally seen in gardens. They thrive in any ordinary garden soil. Increased by seeds, or by divisions of the roots, in spring. J. depressa (depressed), fl.-heads purple. June. I. stalked, lyrate, pale green above, canescent beneath ; the terminal seg- ment large, rounded ; the lateral ones small, ovate or triangular, entire. A. 6in. Caucasus, 1837. J. spectabilis (showy), fl.-headt purple. June. I. pinnatifid ; lobes oblong, obtuse, angulate, white-tomentose underneath. ft. 1ft. Caucasus, 1837. JUSSIJEA (named in honour of the celebrated family of Jussieu). STN. Jussieua. ORD. Onagrariece. A genus comprising about thirty species of stove or green- house herbs, or rarely shrubs, very rarely small trees, often marsh-loving, and a few aquatic ; they extend over the tropical regions of the globe, but are mostly found in America. Flowers white or yellow, axillary, solitary, very short or long-stalked ; calyx with an elongated tube, and four to six persistent lobes ; petals four to six, spreading. Leaves alternate, very frequently membranaceous and entire, rarely coriaceous and ser- rated. All the species thrive in a loamy soil, the aquatics requiring a basin of water. Propagation may be effected either by seeds or by divisions. J. frutescens (shrubby), fl. yellow, shortly pedicellate ; calyx lobes four, ovate, acute, pubescent outside ; tube cylindrical, eight-furrowed. June. I. sessile, lanceolate-linear, glandulose, slightly crenate. 1824. Stove evergreen shrub. J. ovalifolia (oval-leaved), fl. sessile ; calyx lobes four, ovate, acuminate, three-nerved ; petals orbiculate, nearly equal ; tube elongated, tetragonal. I. sub-sessile, elliptic, acuminate, nerve- veinld. Madagascar. (B. M. 2530.) J. repens grandiflora (creeping, large-flowered). /. yellow, 2in. in diameter, drooping before expansion ; petals twice as long as the five calyx segments. May to August. I. lanceolate, acute. Stem creeping at base, 2ft. to 3ft. long. North America (in marshes), 1812. Greenhouse herb. (B. M. 2122.) JUSSIEUA. A synonym of Jussiaea (which see). JUSTICIA (named after J. Justice, a Scotch horti- culturist). STNS. Adhatoda (in part), Athlianthus, and Tyloglossa. ORD. Acanthacece. A large and much-con- fused genus, comprising about 100 species of herbs and sub-shrubs, occurring in tropical and sub-tropical regions, chiefly in India and Southern Africa. Flowers white, violet, pink, or rarely red. Leaves entire. Justicias are mostly of easy culture, and thrive in a compost of about equal parts of loam and leaf soil. Propagated by cut- Justicia— continued. tings, inserted preferably in single pots, in spring, and placed in a close, warm frame. Young plants should be pinched, to encourage a bushy growth. They may be cultivated in frames all the summer, but require a stove or warm greenhouse temperature in winter. J. callitricha. See Schaueria flavicoma. J. calycotricha. See Schaueria flavicoma. J. calytricha. See Schaueria calycotricha. J. flavicoma. See Schaueria flavicoma. J. Gendarussa (Gendarussa). A. lilac, whorled; spikes ter- minal, leafy. June and July. I. elongated. A. 3ft. India, 1800- (B. R. 635.) J. Lindcni. See Jacobinia Lindeni. J. marmorata (marbled).* I. light shining green, blotched and marbled with white, about lOin. long and 4in. broad. A distinct and useful decorative plant. J. pcdunculosa. See Dianthera americana. J. peruviana (Peruvian).* fl. pale violet, large, in clusters in the axils ; lower lip veined white. Autumn. I. opposite, on foot- stalks, ovate-lanceolate, veiny, smooth beneath, hairy above. Stem 2Jft, high, pubescent, branched. Peru. (B. M. 430.) J. secunda. See Dianthera sccunda. J. spcciosa. See Peristrophe spcciosa. J. ventricosa (swollen).* fl. pink ; spikes terminal ; corolla tube a little swollen upwards. June and July. I. oblong-ovate, entire, glabrous, h. 3ft. India and China, 1826. (B. M. 2766.) XADSUR-A (its Japanese name). STN. Sarcocarpon. ORD. Magnoliacece. A genus comprising about seven species of half-hardy climbing shrubs, natives of the mountains of Eastern tropical Asia. Flowers whitish or reddish, axillary or solitary. Leaves coriaceous, rarely membranaceous. Only one species is in general cultiva- tion ; it thrives in almost any soil, if grown against a wall. Cuttings of nearly ripened shoots will root in sand, under a bell glass. K. japonica (Japanese), fl. white ; peduncles opposite the leaves, one-flowered, usually solitary, longer than the petioles. June to September. 1. oval or oblong-oval, acute at both ends, serrated, smooth, thick. Japan, 1846. Half-hardy shrub. (S. Z. F. J. 17.) There is a very pretty variegated form of this species. !RIA (named after E. Ksempfer, 1651-1716, a German naturalist). Including Cienkowskia and Mono- lophus. ORD. Scitaminece. A genus comprising about eighteen species of ornamental stove herbaceous peren- nials, natives of tropical Africa and Asia. Flower-spikes on leafy stems, or on radical, scaly, terminal scapes ; corolla tube elongated, exserted ; lobes lanceolate, acute, equal, spreading or reflexed. Leaves small, or rather large, generally elliptic or ovate-lanceolate, acuminate. Ksempferias thrive in well-drained fibry loam and peat. During the growing season, they require an abundant supply of water ; but when the leaves turn yellow, this should be almost entirely withheld, and the pots stowed away under staging, where no drip can reach them. When growth recommences, the plants should be shaken out and repotted. K. Galanga (Galangale). fl. white, purple ; external laciniae of corolla lanceolate-linear ; lower inner lacinia divided into two obovate segments. August. 1. ovate, sessile. A. 1ft. Cochin China, 1728. (B. M. 850.) K. Gilbertii (Gilbert's).* I. tufted, oblong-lanceolate, deep green ; margin slightly undulated, and bordered by a broad and very con- spicuous band of white. Moulmein, 1882. A very attractive and desirable variegated plant. See Fig. 355, for which we are in- debted to Mr. Wm. Bull. (G. C. n. s., xvii. 713.) X. ornata (adorned).* fl. yellow ; disk orange. Summer. I. long- stalked, acute-lanceolate, shining deep green above with a broad silvery central band, purple beneath. Borneo, 1883. A handsome foliage plant. (I. H. 1884, 159.) K. Parish!! (Parish's), fl. white, bright violet-purple. July. 1. lanceolate, erect, pale green. A. 1ft. Moulmein, 1867. (B. M. 5763.) K. Roscoeana (Roscoe's). fl. white, few, fascicled, erect, sessile ; segments obovate-obtuse. October. I. sub-orbiculate, acute, variegated above, h. 6in. Burmah, 1827. Plant stemless. (B. M. 5600.) K. rotunda (round), fl. white, reddish-violet, large, fragrant. July to August. 1. oblong, coloured beneath. A. 1ft. India, 1764. (B. M. 920. 6054.) AN ENCYCLOPEDIA OF HORTICULTURE. 215 KAGENECKIA (named after Frederick de Kageneck, an ambassador from Holland to Spain). ORD. Rosacece. A genus of three or four species of half-hardy evergreen trees,* natives of Chili and Peru. Flowers unisexual, terminal, racemose or corymbose, solitary. Leaves scat- Kag-eneckia — continued. K. orataagoides (Hawthorn-like). /I. white, in axillary racemes. June. I. oval-lanceolate, smooth, glaucous, h. 10ft. Chili, 1830. (B. R. 1836.) K. oblonga (oblong), fl. white, solitary. August to December. 1. oblong, obtuse, coriaceous, serrulated, h. 30ft. Chili, 1830. tered, petiolate, serrated, thick, coriaceous ; stipules small. The species thrive in a compost of loam, peat, and sand. Ripened cuttings will root, in sand, under a bell KALANCHOE (Chinese name of one of the species). STNS. Calanchoe, Vereia. ORD. Crassulaceae. A genus of about a score species of erect, robust, stove or greenhouse herbs or shrubs, natives of tropical Asia, tropical and 216 THE DICTIONARY OF GARDENING, Kalanchoe — continued. Southern Africa, and one from Brazil. Flowers yellow, purple, or scarlet, rather large, numerously disposed in paniculate cymes; corolla salver-shaped; tube urceolate; limb four partite, spreading. Leaves fleshy, opposite, sessile or petiolate, toothed, serrated, or entire. For culture, &c., see Crassula. K. orenata (crenate-leaved). fl. yellow, in very long loose spikes. Autumn. 1. oblong-lanceolate, broadly toothed, crenated ; crena- tures usually double, h. 1ft to 2ft. Sierra Leone, 1793. Stove shrub. (B. M. 1436, under name of Cotyledon erenata.) K. farinacea (floury), fl. scarlet, in compact umbel-like heads. Summer. 1. round-spathulate, entire, sessile, h. 6in. to 12in. Socotra, 1882. A handsome stove succulent decorative plant. (R. G. 1143.) K. grandiflora (large-flowered), fl. rather large ; corolla bright yellow, hypocrateriform ; tube elongated, bottle-shaped ; limb of four reflexed sepals ; cyme terminal, sub-sessile, many-flowered. May. I. succulent, glaucous, 2in. to Sin. long, opposite, sessile, ovate or sub-rhomboidal, becoming gradually smaller up the stem ; margins coarsely sinuato-crenate. Stem succulent, h. 2ft India, 1863. Greenhouse. (B. M. 5460.) KALE. Borecole. KALMIA (named in honour of Peter Kalm, 1715-1799, a pupil of Linnaeus, who travelled in Canada and the Northern States, and became Professor at Abo). American Laurel. ORD. Ericaceae. A genus comprising six species of ornamental hardy evergreen shrubs, of which one is from Cuba, and the rest from North America, extending from Florida to California and the Arctic regions. Flowers rose-coloured, purple, or white, showy, clustered or rarely scattered; bracts ovate to subulate, coriaceous, or firm and persistent ; corolla broadly campanulate or sub-hypo- crateriform. Leaves entire. Kalmias thrive under treat- ment similar to Ehododendrons and such-like plants, in a peaty soil, where the roots are provided with ample moisture. The best-known and most-grown species is K. latifolia. It is well adapted for forcing, in spring, for greenhouse or conservatory decoration. For this pur- pose, the plants should be potted up during winter, after the blossoms have well set. Propagated by cuttings of young shoots, inserted in sandy peat, and placed in a shady situation, under a hand glass ; or by seeds, sown in shallow pans of sandy peat, and kept in a cold frame until the seedlings are large enough to handle, when they may be gradually hardened off, and transferred to the open air. K. angustifolia (narrow-leaved).* fl. purple or crimson, not half so large as those of K. latifolia, disposed in lateral corymbs. Early summer. I. mostly in pairs or threes, oblong, obtuse, lin. to 2in. long, petioled, light green above, dull or pale beneath. A. 2ft. to 3ft. Canada, 1736. A very pretty species. (B. M. 331.) There are several varieties, differing chiefly in the size of parts, and in the deeper and lighter shade of the corolla. The dwarf one, known as nana, is especially worth mention. K. cuneata (wedge-shape-leaved), fl., corolla white or whitish, $in. in diameter ; inflorescence lateral, nearly glabrous. May and June. 1. oblong, with cuneate base, lin. long, almost sessile, and chiefly alternate, mucronate. h. 2ft. North and South Carolina, 1820. A low, somewhat pubescent shrub. glauoa (glaucous).* fl. lilac-purple, £in. to Jin. in diameter ; ts large ; sepals ovate, scarious-coriaceous, much imbricated. ng. I. opposite, or rarely in threes, almost sessile, oblong or near-oblong, or appearing narrower by the usual strong revo- lution of the edges, lin. or less long, glaucous-white beneath. h. 1ft. to 2ft. 1767. (B. M. 177.) . hirsuta (hairy), fl. scattered and axillary, on pedicels longer than the leaves ; corolla rose-purple, barely iin. in diameter ; sepals ovate-lanceolate, leaflike, as long as the corolla, at length deciduous, leaving the old capsules bare. Summer. I. nearly sessile, plane-oblong or lanceolate, iin. to iin. long. h. 1ft. South-east Virginia to Florida, 1786. A free-branching shrub. (B. M. 138.) . latifolia (broad-leaved).* Calico Bush, fl., inflorescence very viscid-pubescent ; corolla rose-colour to white, Jin. in diameter ; fascicles numerous, crowded in compound terminal corymbs. Summer. I. alternate, or occasionally somewhat in pairs or threes, oblong or elliptical-lanceolate, acutish at both ends, petioled, bright green, h. 3ft. to 10ft. (in the South Alleghanies, sometimes 20ft.) Mountainous districts of Canada, Western Florida, &c., 1734. One of the most useful, elegant, and attractive of dwarf flowering shrubs. It is a slow-growing subject, but is K. gl brac Spri line Xahnia— continued. FIG. 357. KALMIA LATIFOLIA, showing (a) detached Flower ; (6) Section of ditto ; and (c) Stamen. generally of very easy culture. For cutting purposes it is also useful, if a corymb of flowers is taken with a good stem and a few leaves ; but the blossoms can be seen nowhere to more advantage than on the bush. See Figs. 356 and 357. (B. M. 175.) KALOSANTHES. A synonym of Rochea. Some of the plants formerly included under Rochea are now placed under Crassula (which see). KARATAS (derivation of name uncertain). STNS. Nidularium, Regelia (of Lemaire). ORD. Bromeliaceos. A genus comprising about ten species of stove herbaceous perennials, natives of the West Indies, tropical South America, and several from Brazil. Flowers in dense, sessile, terminal heads. Leaves rosnlate, often very long, spinoso-serrate. For culture, see Billbergia. K. cruenta (bloody). /. blue, red ; spike capitate, sub-sessile. February to March. I. strap-shaped, obtuse, mucronate, spinosely dentate, tipped with blood-red ; bracts broad-oval, imbricate, obtuse, concave, h. 1ft. Rio Janeiro, 1824. (B. M. 2892, under name of Billbergia cruenta.) K. hnmilis (dwarf), fl. crimson, in central depressed tufts, sur- rounded by leaves. I. recurved, lanceolate, strongly toothed ; lower ones greyish, mealy, h. 1ft. West Indies, 1789. See Fig. 358. (R. H. 1878, 190.) K. Innocentii (Innocent's), fl. bright orange-red, produced in a nest-like crown. 1. large, lanceolate, dark green on the upper side, deep reddish-purple beneath ; margins serrated. Brazil, 1862. A handsome and compact plant. (I. H. 1862, 329.) K. Laurentii (Laurent's), fl. pale blue, in short heads. I ligu- late, recurved, abruptly acuminate, light green, dotted with dark brown ; inner ones white towards the base. South America, 1867. An elegant plant (R. G. 529.) K. Legrellse (Legrell's). fl. purple, white ; bracts rose. I. 5ft. to 6ft. long, rigid, beset with curved spines, deep green above, sub- glaucous beneath. North Brazil, 1872. A noble species, the in- florescence of which is very handsome. (B. H. 1872, 129.) K. olens (putrid-smelling), fl. purple, almost concealed by the closely-imbricating, broad, greenish- white bracts. L, floral ones rich deep red ; lower leaves full green, glabrous, about 1ft. long, AN ENCYCLOPEDIA OF HORTICULTURE. 217 Karatas— continued. lin. or more wide, spinulose-serrate at margin. 5502, under name of Billbergia olens.) h. 1ft. (B. M. FIG. 358. KARATAS HUMILIS. K. Plnmierl (Planner's), fl. pink, to 300 in number, sessile in a heap or cen ile, aggregate. Jr. oval, eap or central group, surrounded by paleaceous expanded leaves or bracts, and containing a succulent whitish or yellowish flesh under a coria- ceous and yellowish bark. I. 6ft. to 7ft. long, radical, subulate- linear, sharp-pointed, spiny-edged, h. 2ft. West Indies, 1739. SYNS. liromelin Karatas and B. sceptrum. FIG. 359. KARATAS SCHEREMETIEWI. K. Scherometiewi (Scheremetiew's). fl. white, blue. I. green ; floral ones bright red, much shorter than the outer ordinary leaves, h. 6in. to 12in. Probably Brazil. SYNS. Car rata, Nidularium Scheremetiem. See Fig. 359. K. spectabilis (showy), fl. blood-red, white, pale violet-blue, in a crowded, terminal, flat-topped fascicle. 1. about 1ft. long by IJin. to 2in. broad, broadly strap-shaped, from a broad sheathing base, slightly concave ; margin with small, remote, spiny teeth ; upper surface dark green, except the tip, which presents a bright, blood-red patch im. deep on both surfaces ; under surface covered with alternate transverse bands of dull green or pur- plish and dirty white, h. 1ft. Brazil. (B. M. 6024, under name of Nidularium spectabile.) KARELINIA. Now included under Pluchea (which see). KAULFTTSSIA (named after Dr. G. P. Kanlfuss, a Professor of Botany at Halle, who died in 1830). ORD. Filices. A curious and very variable stove fern. Sori composed of from ten to fifteen sessile sporangia, arranged in concrete raised circular masses, hollow in the centre. For culture, see Ferns. VoLIL Kanlfussia — continued. K. sesculifolia (Chestnut-leaved), eti. 1ft. to lift, long, auricled at the base, fronds ternate or quinate-digitate ; the central pinna; the largest, oblong-spathulate, 6in to 12in. long, Sin. to 4m. broad, edge sub- entire ; others similar but smaller, sort copious, scattered. Assam, Malay Is- lands,